ARMY, MARINE CORPS, NAVY, AIR FORCE 

CBRN 

DECONTAMINATION 

MULTISERVICE 

TACTICS, 

TECHNIQUES, AND 

PROCEDURES FOR 

CHEMICAL, 

BIOLOGICAL, 

RADIOLOGICAL, AND 

NUCLEAR 

DECONTAMINATION 

FM 3-11.5 

MCWP 3-37.3 

NTTP 3-11.26 

AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 

April 2006 

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: 

Approved for public release; 

distribution is unlimited. 

MULTISERVICE TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES 
FOREWORD 

This publication has been prepared under our direction for use by our respective 

commands and other commands as appropriate. 

STANLEY H. LILLIE

Brigadier General, USA Lieutenant General, USMC 

Commandant Deputy Commandant for 

US Army Chemical School Combat Development 

 J. N. MATTIS 

JOHN M. KELLY BENTLEY B. RAYBURN 

Rear Admiral, USN Major General, USAF

Commander Commander 

Navy Warfare Development Command Headquarters Air Force Doctrine 

Center 

This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online 

<www.us.army.mil> and General Dennis J. Reimer Training and 

Doctrine Digital Library at <http://www.train.army.mil>. 
PREFACE 

1. Scope 

This publication is designed for use at the tactical and operational levels. This 

manual provides multiservice tactics, techniques, and procedures (MTTP) for chemical, 

biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) decontamination. It defines the roles of 

military units and staffs involved in the preparation, planning, and execution of 

decontamination operations. It addresses the requirements for the different techniques 

used in decontamination. This manual focuses on the need for all United States (US) forces 

to be prepared to fight and win in a CBRN environment. It addresses the support the

Department of Defense (DOD) may have to provide to support homeland security (HLS). 

The planning and coordination for CBRN decontamination takes place with the realization 

that the potential CBRN environment could be one in which there is deliberate or 

accidental employment of CBRN weapons, or deliberate or accidental attacks or 

contamination with toxic industrial material (TIM) (see Joint Doctrine for Operations in 

Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical [NBC] Environments). 

2. Purpose 

This publication provides a reference for CBRN decontamination; bridges the gap 

between service and joint doctrine; and contains tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) 

for planning and executing operations in a CBRN environment. This manual addresses 

concepts, principles, and TTP to include planning, operational considerations, and training 

and support functions. It serves as the foundation for the development of multiservice 

manuals and refinement of existing training support packages (TSPs), mission training 

plans (MTPs), training center and unit exercises, and service school curricula. It drives the 

examination of organizations and materiel developments applicable to CBRN 

decontamination. 

3. Application 

The audience for this publication is combatant commands, joint task forces (JTFs), 

functional and service component units, and staffs in foreign and domestic locations that 

could be challenged by operations in a CBRN environment. 

4. Implementation Plan 

Participating service command offices of primary responsibility (OPRs) will review 

this publication; validate the information; reference and incorporate it in service and 

command manuals, regulations, and curricula as follows: 

Army. The United States Army (USA) will incorporate this publication in USA 

training and doctrinal publications as directed by the Commander, United States Army 

Training and Doctrine Command (TRADOC). Distribution is according to the USA 

publication distribution system. 

Marine Corps. The United States Marine Corps (USMC) will incorporate the 

procedures in this publication in USMC training and doctrinal publications as directed by 

the Commanding General (CG), Marine Corps Combat Development Command (MCCDC). 

Distribution is according to the USMC publication distribution system. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 i 
Navy. The United States Navy (USN) will incorporate the procedures in this 

publication in training and doctrinal publications as directed by the Commander, Navy

Warfare Development Command (NWDC). Distribution is according to the DOD 

4000.25-1-M. 

Air Force. The United States Air Force (USAF) will validate and incorporate 

appropriate procedures according to applicable governing directives. It will develop and 

implement this and other NBC MTTP through a series of USAF manuals providing 

service-specific TTP. Distribution is according to the USAF publication distribution 

system. 

Coast Guard. The United States Coast Guard (USCG) will validate and refer to 

appropriate procedures when applicable. No material contained herein should conflict with 

USCG regulations or other directives from higher authority or supersede or replace any 

order or directive issued by higher authority. 

5. User Information 

a. The United States Army Chemical School (USACMLS) developed this publication 

with the participation of the approving service commands. 

b. This publication reflects current service and joint doctrine, command and control 

(C2) organizations, facilities, personnel, responsibilities, and procedures. 

c. Recommended changes are encouraged for improving this publication. Key any

comments to the specific page and paragraph, and provide a rationale for each 

recommendation. Send comments and recommendations directly to— 

ii FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Army 

Commandant 

US Army Chemical School 

ATTN: ATSN-TD 

464 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 2617 

Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473-8926 

COMM (573) 596-0131, extension 3-7364 

Web Site: https://www.us.army.mil/ 

Marine Corps 

Commanding General 

US Marine Corps Combat Development Command 

ATTN: C42 (Director) 

3300 Russell Road 

Quantico, VA 22134-5001 

DSN 278-6234; COMM (703) 784-6234 

Web Site: https://www.doctrine.usmc.mil/ 

Navy 

Commander 

Navy Warfare Development Command 

ATTN: N5 

686 Cushing Road 

Newport, RI 02841-1207 

DSN 948-4201; COMM (401) 841-4201 

Web Site: https://www.nko.navy.mil/ 

Air Force 

Headquarters Air Force Doctrine Center 

ATTN: DJ 

155 North Twining Street 

Maxwell AFB, AL 36112-6112 

DSN 493-7442; COMM (334) 953-7442 

Web Site: https://www.doctrine.af.mil/ 

6. Other 

The following commonly accepted symbols are used throughout this manual to 

represent different chemical and biological agents: Vx, VX, GA, GB, GD, HD, HN, TGD, 

THD, V, and G (see Potential Military Chemical/Biological Agents and Compounds for 

further descriptions of these agents).

Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer 

exclusively to men. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 iii 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 v

*FM 3-11.5 

MCWP 3-37.3 

NTTP 3-11.26 

AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 

FM 3-11.5 US Army Training and Doctrine Command

Fort Monroe, Virginia

MCWP 3-37.3 Marine Corps Combat Development Command

Quantico, Virginia

NTTP 3-11.26 Navy Warfare Development Command

Newport, Rhode Island

AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Headquarters Air Force Doctrine Center

Maxwell Air Force Base, Alabama

4 April 2006

 MULTISERVICE TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES 

FOR 

CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, AND NUCLEAR 

DECONTAMINATION 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 Page 

 

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY............................................................................................... xv 

CHAPTER I DECONTAMINATION: CONCEPTS, PRINCIPLES, AND LEVELS 

 Background.......................................................................................I-1

 Hazard ..............................................................................................I-3

 Concepts—Combat Operations .......................................................I-3 

 Concepts—Homeland Security........................................................I-8 

 Service Capabilities .......................................................................I-10

 Training and Exercises ..................................................................I-10 

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 

*This manual supersedes FM 3-5 and MCWP 3-37.3, 28 July 2000.
CHAPTER II DECONTAMINATION OPERATIONS: PLAN, PREPARE, AND 

EXECUTE 

CHAPTER III IMMEDIATE DECONTAMINATION 

CHAPTER IV OPERATIONAL DECONTAMINATION 

CHAPTER V THOROUGH DECONTAMINATION 

 Background......................................................................................II-1

 Decontamination Planning.............................................................II-1

Wartime Planning Considerations.................................................II-3

Homeland Security Planning Considerations ...............................II-6

Preattack Decontamination Operations ........................................II-7

Execution................................................................................................ II-10

Postdecontamination Operations...................................................... II-11

Background.....................................................................................III-1

Skin Decontamination ...................................................................III-1

Personal Wipe Down......................................................................III-1

Operator Wipe Down .....................................................................III-2 

Spot Decontamination ...................................................................III-3

Background.....................................................................................IV-1

Planning .........................................................................................IV-1

Phases.............................................................................................IV-2

Background......................................................................................V-1

Planning ..........................................................................................V-2

Preparation......................................................................................V-3

Execution.........................................................................................V-3

Predecontamination Staging Area ................................................V-6

Vehicle Crews ..................................................................................V-6

Detailed Equipment Decontamination and Detailed Troop

Decontamination Areas ...............................................................V-7 

Thorough Decontamination Under Unusual Conditions ............V-30

Colocation of Patient Decontamination With Troop 

Decontamination ........................................................................V-30 

CHAPTER VI CLEARANCE DECONTAMINATION 

Background.....................................................................................VI-1

CHAPTER VII FIXED-SITE, PORT, AND AIRFIELD DECONTAMINATION 

Postconflict Intelligence Preparation of the Battlespace .............VI-2

Force Protection .............................................................................VI-3

Decontamination............................................................................VI-3

Containment of Residual Hazards ................................................VI-3

Recovery and Control of Enemy Chemical, Biological, 

Radiological, and Nuclear Capabilities......................................VI-3

Force Health Protection.................................................................VI-4

Coordination With Multinational Forces or Nonmilitary

Entities ........................................................................................VI-4

Contaminated Materials Retrogradation .....................................VI-4

Background....................................................................................VII-1

Assessing Capability.....................................................................VII-2

vi FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Organizing for Decontamination..................................................VII-2

CHAPTER VIII AIRCRAFT AND AIRCREW DECONTAMINATION 

Aircraft Decontamination Levels and Procedures ....................VIII-3

CHAPTER IX SHIPBOARD/MARITIME DECONTAMINATION 

CHAPTER X PATIENT EVACUATION AND DECONTAMINATION 

CHAPTER XI DECONTAMINATION IN SUPPORT OF HOMELAND SECURITY 

CHAPTER XII LOGISTICS

APPENDIX A CONVERSIONS AND MEASUREMENTS 

APPENDIX B TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, 

RADIOLOGICAL, AND NUCLEAR, AND TOXIC INDUSTRIAL 

MATERIAL DECONTAMINATION 

Buildings and Mission-Essential Operating Areas and 

Surfaces ......................................................................................VII-2

Personnel Processing Procedures (Chemical)..............................VII-3

Personnel Processing Procedures (Radiological) .......................VII-12

Background...................................................................................VIII-1

General Planning .........................................................................VIII-1

Civil Reserve Air Fleet and Contract Airlift Operations .........VIII-21

Aircraft Munitions Decontamination........................................VIII-21

Air Cargo Movement Decontamination ....................................VIII-23

Background.....................................................................................IX-1

Shipboard Chemical, Biological, and Radiological 

Decontamination .........................................................................IX-1

Recovery Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear 

Decontamination .........................................................................IX-5

Background......................................................................................X-1

Patient Decontamination................................................................X-3

Army Patient Decontamination Procedures..................................X-5

Marine Corps Patient Decontamination Procedures ....................X-6

Navy Patient Decontamination Procedures ..................................X-7

Air Force Patient Decontamination Procedures............................X-7

Background.....................................................................................XI-1

Federal Assistance .........................................................................XI-1

Response to a Homeland Security Incident—

Decontamination Considerations ...............................................XI-2

Department of Defense Decontamination Capabilities ...............XI-9

Background....................................................................................XII-1

Consumption Rates and Replenishment......................................XII-1

Maintenance Considerations........................................................XII-7

Background..................................................................................... B-1

Nuclear and Radiological Weapons............................................... B-1

Biological Warfare Agents ............................................................. B-3

Chemical Agents ............................................................................ B-7 

Toxic Industrial Material .............................................................. B-9

 Technical Reach-Back.................................................................. B-10

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 vii 
APPENDIX C DECONTAMINANTS 

Background..................................................................................... C-1

APPENDIX D DECONTAMINATION OF SPECIFIC SURFACES AND 

MATERIALS 

APPENDIX E SPECIAL DECONTAMINATION CONSIDERATIONS 

APPENDIX F EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ON DECONTAMINATION 

APPENDIX G DECONTAMINATION UNITS AND ASSETS 

APPENDIX H DECONTAMINATION KITS, APPARATUSES, AND 

EQUIPMENT 

APPENDIX I TERRAIN DECONTAMINATION 

APPENDIX J THOROUGH DECONTAMINATION STATION CHARTS FOR 

SUPERVISORS AND ATTENDANTS 

Types of Decontaminants .............................................................. C-1

Decontamination Solution Preparation ........................................ C-9

Storage and Shelf Life ................................................................. C-10 

Decontaminants ........................................................................... C-10

Background......................................................................................E-1

Vulnerable/Sensitive Equipment ...................................................E-1

Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Munitions 

Disposal .......................................................................................E-4

Sample Transfer, Evacuation, and Processing..............................E-5

Depleted-Uranium Decontamination.............................................E-5

Decontamination of Specific Radioisotopes ...................................E-7 

Contaminated-Remains Decontamination ....................................E-9

Animals..........................................................................................E-10

Background......................................................................................F-1

Cold Weather...................................................................................F-1

Hot Weather (Desert and Jungle) ..................................................F-3

Urban Areas ....................................................................................F-5

Mountains........................................................................................F-5

Background..................................................................................... G-1

Army ............................................................................................... G-1

Marine Corps.................................................................................. G-4

Air Force......................................................................................... G-7

Navy.............................................................................................. G-10

Other Units................................................................................... G-11 

Background..................................................................................... H-1

Decontamination Devices for Personnel ....................................... H-4

Decontamination Devices for Equipment ..................................... H-5

Power-Driven Decontamination Systems ..................................... H-7

Fixed-Site Decontamination System Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures ................................................................................. H-10

Background.......................................................................................I-1

Terrain Decontamination Methods .................................................I-1 

Types of Surfaces..............................................................................I-4

viii FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
APPENDIX K CONTAMINATED-WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL

Background..................................................................................... K-1 

Responsibility ................................................................................. K-1

Contaminated-Waste Holding Area .............................................. K-1 

Unit Waste Accumulation Points .................................................. K-1

Equipment and Material ............................................................... K-2 

Procedures for the Collection of Contaminated Waste................. K-3 

Transportation Procedures ............................................................ K-5 

Waste Collection Point................................................................... K-6 

Disposal Procedures ....................................................................... K-6

Open Storage .................................................................................. K-7 

Burying ........................................................................................... K-7

Open Burning................................................................................. K-7 

Marking Requirements .................................................................. K-9

REFERENCES .........................................................................................References-1 

GLOSSARY .............................................................................................Glossary-1

INDEX ...................................................................................................Index-1

FIGURES 

I-1 How Decontamination Affects Combat 

Effectiveness .................................................................... I-7

IV-4 Wiping From the Head to the Bottom of the 

IV-14 Removing the Garment and Turning it Inside 

IV-15 Removing Your Leg and Foot From the 

IV-17 Tying the Microphone Cord to the Hose of the 

IV-1 Two-Lane Wash Down.....................................................IV-4

IV-2 Dispersed Operational-Decontamination Setup.......IV-5

IV-3 Rolling the Cuff in the Trouser...................................IV-12

Hood................................................................................IV-13

IV-5 Rolling the Hood to the Center of the Head ............IV-14

IV-6 Unsnapping the Trousers from the Jacket ..............IV-15

IV-7 Pulling the Jacket Down and Away...........................IV-15

IV-8 Loosening the Overboots..............................................IV-15 

IV-9 Stepping on the Black Lining of the Jacket ............IV-16

IV-10 Removing the Gloves.....................................................IV-16

IV-11 Putting on the New BDO ..............................................IV-17

IV-12 Putting on M9 Detector Paper ....................................IV-18

IV-13 Securing Individual Gear.............................................IV-18

Out ...................................................................................IV-21 

Garment .........................................................................IV-21

IV-16 Reapplying the M9 Detector Paper............................IV-22

Mask................................................................................IV-24

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 ix 
IV-18 Removing the Outer Garment.....................................IV-26

VI-1 Decontamination Support................................................V-I 

VIII-1 Aircraft Operational Decontamination Site 

V-1 Thorough Decontamination Site ...................................V-5

V-2 DTD Layout.........................................................................V-8 

V-3 Decontaminating Individual Equipment ..................V-10 

V-4 Shuffle Pit Decontamination........................................V-12 

V-5 Removing the Overgarment Jacket ............................V-13

V-6 Station 4 Layout ..............................................................V-14 

V-7 Liquid Contamination Control Line...........................V-15 

V-8 Checking for Contamination........................................V-17

VII-1 Sample Decontamination Site Layout........................VII-7 

VII-2 Example of a Ground Crew CCA Layout ...................VII-9 

VII-3 Example of an Aircrew CCA Layout .........................VII-10 

Layout...........................................................................VIII-10 

VIII-2 Helicopter Operational Decontamination Site 

Layout...........................................................................VIII-10 

VIII-3 Sample Layout for a DAD Station ............................VIII-17 

VIII-4 Sensitive Areas for the UH-60/E60, CH-47, and 

AH-64............................................................................. VIII-18 

VIII-5 Sensitive Areas for the OH-58 and UH-1.................VIII-19

H-1 M291 Skin Decontamination Kit................................... H-5

H-2 M295 IEDK ......................................................................... H-6

H-3 M100 SDS............................................................................ H-7

H-4 M17 LDS.............................................................................. H-8 

H-5 MPDS................................................................................... H-9

H-6 FSDS Placed in a Civilian Vehicle ............................. H-10

H-7 Two FSDS Conducting Terrain

Decontamination ......................................................... H-13 

H-8 FSDS Overlap Operation.............................................. H-14 

H-9 Decontamination Control Point ................................. H-14 

H-10 Resupply COAs (Options 1 and 2)............................... H-15 

H-11 Large-Area Missions ...................................................... H-16 

H-12 Hose Reel Operation (Two-Person)............................ H-17

I-1 Decontamination by Exploding ......................................I-3

J-1 Sample Station 1 Checklist .............................................J-2

J-2 Sample Station 2 (BDO) Checklist ................................J-3

J-3 Sample Station 2 (JSLIST) Checklist ...........................J-4

J-4 Sample Station 3 (BDO) Checklist ................................J-5

J-5 Sample Station 3 (JSLIST) Checklist ...........................J-6

x FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
J-6 Sample Station 4 Checklist .............................................J-7

J-7 Sample Station 5 Checklist .............................................J-8

J-8 Sample Station 6 Checklist .............................................J-9

J-9 Sample Station 7 Checklist ...........................................J-10

J-10 Sample Station 8 Checklist ...........................................J-11

K-1 Glove Decontamination .................................................. K-4

K-2 Markings............................................................................. K-4

TABLES

I-1 Decontamination Levels and Techniques ....................I-5 

1-2 Special Medical Considerations .....................................I-5

II-1 Work/Rest Cycles and Water Replacement 

Guidelines.........................................................................II-5 

II-2 Preattack Decontamination Actions..........................II-10 

IV-1 Advantages and Disadvantages of Operational 

Decontamination Techniques.....................................IV-2

IV-2 Operational Decontamination Phases ........................IV-2

IV-3 Vehicle Wash-Down Process..........................................IV-6

IV-4 Steps for the Buddy Team Method of MOPP Gear 

Exchange With the JSLIST Chemical-Protective 

Ensemble..........................................................................IV-7

IV-5 Steps for the BDO MOPP Gear Exchange ................IV-11

IV-6 Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Buddy Team 

Method) MOPP Gear Exchange................................IV-19

IV-7 Steps for the Triple Buddy Method of MOPP Gear 

Exchange With the M40A1 and M42 ........................IV-23

IV-8 Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Triple Buddy 

Method) MOPP Gear Exchange With the M40A1, 

M42, and M43 (Aviation and Armor) .......................IV-28

IV-9 Steps for the JSLIST, Individual (Emergency 

Method) MOPP Gear Exchange................................IV-32

IV-10 Steps for the Individual (Emergency Method) 

BDO MOPP Gear Exchange.......................................IV-36

IV-11 Steps for the CVCUS and CPU, Individual 

(Emergency Method) MOPP Gear Exchange ........IV-39

V-1 Planning Factors for the Rinse Station .......................V-3

V-2 Thorough Decontamination Support Matrix 

(Land Forces)...................................................................V-4

V-3 DTD Personnel and Equipment Recapitulation........V-8

V-4 Effectiveness of Types of Wash ....................................V-20

V-5 Common Interferences for the CAM...........................V-22

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 xi 
V-6 Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the 

Optimum DED Layout of an M12A1 PDDA- 

 Equipped Unit ...............................................................V-23

V-7 Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the 

Alternate DED Layout of an M12A1 PDDA- 

 Equipped Unit ...............................................................V-25 

V-8 Recommended Work/Rest Cycles for DED ................V-26 

V-9 Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the 

Optimum DED Layout of an M17 LDS-Equipped 

V-10 Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the 

Alternate DED Layout of an M17 LDS-Equipped 

Unit...................................................................................V-27

Unit...................................................................................V-28

VIII-1 Aircraft Spot Decontamination ..................................VIII-4 

VIII-2 Sample Aircraft Sizes and Recommended Pad 

Containment Areas....................................................VIII-11

VIII-3 Personnel Requirements for DAD............................VIII-16

VIII-4 Cargo Movement Mission Criticality Level ...........VIII-23

VIII-5 Cargo Movement Hazard Category..........................VIII-23

VIII-6 Cargo Decontamination Actions (Negligible)........VIII-24

XII-1 Estimated Water Consumption....................................XII-2 

XII-2 Decontamination Resources Available at Each 

Organizational Level (Army) .....................................XII-3 

XII-3 Equipment and Supplies Needed for 

XII-4 Medical Equipment Set Chemical-Agent Patient 

A-1 Measurements and Weights of Decontaminant 

Decontamination Operations (Army).......................XII-4 

Decontamination ............................................................XII-7 

Containers ....................................................................... A-1 

A-2 Table of Commonly Used Prefixes ............................... A-1 

A-3 Conversion Factors.......................................................... A-2 

B-1 Nuclear-Weapon Detonation Downwind 

Radioactive Fallout Hazard Estimate ...................... B-2 

B-2 Survival of Selected Bacterial and Rickettsial 

B-3 Protective Capability of Common Barrier Material 

Agents in Some Environments ................................... B-4 

(in Minutes)..................................................................... B-8 

B-4 Categories of TIM........................................................... B-10 

B-5 Technical Reach-Back POCs ....................................... B-10 

C-1 Guidelines for the Use of Soil as a Decontaminant.. C-4 

C-2 Preparation of Decontamination Solution Using 

HTH (6-Ounce Bottles).................................................. C-5 

xii FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
C-3 Preparation of Decontamination Solution Using 

 HTH (Granular).............................................................. C-5 

C-4 Preparation of 0.5 Percent Available Chlorine 

C-6 Standard Decontaminants Available in the Supply 

D-1 Decontamination Procedures for Specific Surfaces 

F-1 Freezing Points and Melting Points of Selected 

G-2 CE and Medical CBRN Decontamination

G-3 USA Reserve Component Platoon Equipment for 

H-3 Typical Mission Parameters (1,000 gallons of 

Solutions .......................................................................... C-5 

C-5 Operational Limitations of DF 200 ............................ C-9 

System ............................................................................ C-11 

C-7 Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants ..... C-13 

C-8 Natural Decontaminants .............................................. C-21 

 and Materials .................................................................. D-1 

Chemical Agents .............................................................F-2 

G-1 USAF UTCs ........................................................................ G-9 

Capabilities ................................................................... G-10 

Casualty Decontamination ........................................ G-12 

H-1 Decontamination Equipment and Materials ............. H-1 

H-2 Detection Equipment and Materials ........................... H-2 

DF 200)............................................................................ H-11 

K-1 Weather Conditions ......................................................... K-8

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 xiii 
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 

Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures 

for 

Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Decontamination 

Chapter I 

Decontamination: Concepts, Principles, and Levels 

Chapter I addresses the threats, purposes, and principles behind CBRN

decontamination. 

Chapter II 

Decontamination Operations: Plan, Prepare, and Execute 

Chapter II addresses the planning of decontamination operations for wartime and for 

civil support (CS). It also addresses the reconnaissance and preparation of 

decontamination sites. 

Chapter III 

 Immediate Decontamination 

Chapter III addresses the steps used for immediate decontamination. This chapter also

discusses the techniques and procedures for using the most common decontamination kits 

and equipment available in the US inventory. 

Chapter IV 

 Operational Decontamination 

Chapter IV addresses the planning, preparing, executing, and implementing 

techniques for operational decontamination. It covers vehicle wash down and 

mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) gear exchange. 

Chapter V

Thorough Decontamination

Chapter V addresses planning, preparing, and executing the techniques for thorough 

decontamination. It covers predecontamination requirements, decontamination techniques, 

detailed troop decontamination (DTD), detailed equipment decontamination (DED), 

postdecontamination operations, site closure, and resupply. 

Chapter VI 

Clearance Decontamination 

Chapter VI addresses decontamination of equipment and personnel to levels that

allow unrestricted transportation, maintenance, employment, and disposal. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 xv 
Chapter VII 

Fixed-Site, Port, and Airfield Decontamination 

Chapter VII addresses planning, preparing, executing, and implementing the 

techniques for fixed-site, port, and airfield decontamination. 

Chapter VIII 

Aircraft and Aircrew Decontamination 

Chapter VIII addresses aircraft, aircraft cargo, and aircrew decontamination. Detailed 

aircraft decontamination (DAD) procedures are provided in this chapter. 

Chapter IX 

Shipboard/Maritime Decontamination 

Chapter IX addresses the considerations pertaining to shipboard and maritime 

decontamination. 

Chapter X

Patient Evacuation and Decontamination 

Chapter X addresses patient evacuation procedures; the decontamination procedures 

for litter or ambulatory patients for chemical, biological, and radiological (CBR) 

contamination; and decontaminant preparation. 

Chapter XI 

Decontamination in Support of Homeland Security

Chapter XI addresses decontamination support for HLS. 

Chapter XII 

Logistics 

Chapter XII identifies the logistical considerations for the various decontamination 

techniques. 

xvi FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
PROGRAM PARTICIPANTS 

The following commands and agencies participated in the development of this 

publication: 

Joint 

Defense Threat Reduction Agency, 8725 John J. Kingman Road, MCS 6201, Fort Belvoir, 

VA 22060-6201 

Army 

United States Army Chemical School, 464 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 2617, Fort Leonard 

Wood, MO 65473 

United States Army Medical Department Center and School, 1400 E. Grayson Street, Fort 

Sam Houston, TX 78234 

United States Army Edgewood Chemical and Biological Center, Aberdeen Proving Ground, 

MD 21040 

Marine Corps 

United States Marine Corps Combat Development Command, 3300 Russell Road, Suite 

318A, Quantico, VA 22134-5021 

Navy 

United States Navy Warfare Development Command, 686 Cushing Road, Sims Hall,

Newport, RI 02841 

United States Navy Surface Warfare Development Group, 2200 Amphibious Drive, Norfolk, 

VA 23521 

Air Force 

Headquarters Air Force Doctrine Center, ATTN: DJ, 155 North Twining Street, Maxwell 

AFB, AL 36112-6112 

United States Air Force Civil Engineer Support Agency, 139 Barnes Drive, Suite 1, Tyndall 

AFB, FL 32403 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 xvii 
Chapter I 

DECONTAMINATION: CONCEPTS, PRINCIPLES, AND LEVELS 

1. Background 

The hazards associated with CBRN attacks and events often force US forces into 

protective equipment, thereby degrading their ability to perform individual and collective 

tasks and reducing combat power. Such hazards may be created by the deliberate use of 

CBRN weapons or a release from industrial sources. Additionally, they may be created by 

accidental release, natural disasters, or collateral damage release from industrial sources 

(TIM). These hazards may require decontamination of personnel, equipment, facilities, or 

terrain. 

a. Forms of Contamination. CBRN agent contamination is the deposition on or 

absorption of CBRN agents by personnel, materiel, structures, and terrain. US forces may 

encounter CBRN agent contamination through direct attack, movement through

contaminated areas, the unwitting use of contaminated facilities, or the movement of agent 

clouds. Forms of contamination may be— 

(1) Vapor. Vapors can be generated by generators or bursting munitions. 

Vapor in an open or outdoor area will generally disperse rapidly. 

(2) Liquid. CB agents can be disseminated as liquids. Liquid droplets can

range from thick and sticky to the consistency of water. Liquids can also be disseminated 

as an aerosol. 

(3) Aerosol. An aerosol is a liquid or solid composed of finely divided particles 

suspended in a gaseous medium. Examples of common aerosols are mist, fog, and smoke. 

They behave much like vapors. 

(4) Solids. Solid forms of contamination include radioactive particles, 

biological spores, and dusty agents. A dusty agent is a solid agent that can be disseminated 

as an aerosol. 

b. Hazard Transmission. When CBRN contamination cannot be avoided, resources 

may require decontamination. Contaminated hazards can be transmitted as follows: 

(1) Transfer. Anything that contacts a surface covered with liquids or solids 

contamination will tend to pick up that contamination and move it from one surface to 

another. 

(2) Spread. Touching a surface covered with liquid or solid contamination can 

spread contamination on that same surface. 

(3) Desorption. Liquid contamination absorbs into porous material. Once 

absorbed, it begins to desorb or give off low levels of vapor that pass into the air. 

(4) Vapor and Aerosol. Vapors and aerosols can be carried through the air and 

will disperse rapidly. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 I-1 
c. Decontamination. CBRN agent contamination should be avoided when possible. 

When this is not possible, personnel and equipment must be decontaminated to reduce or 

eliminate the risk to personnel and to make equipment serviceable. Decontamination 

procedures will not degrade the performance of personnel or equipment and will not harm 

the environment. The levels of decontamination are immediate, operational, thorough, and 

clearance. 

(1) Immediate Decontamination. Immediate decontamination minimizes 

casualties and limits the spread or transfer of contamination. 

(2) Operational Decontamination. Operational decontamination sustains

operations by reducing the contact hazard, limiting the spread of contamination, and 

eliminating or reducing the duration that MOPP equipment must be used. 

(3) Thorough Decontamination. Thorough decontamination reduces

contamination to the lowest detectable level by the use of tactical-level capabilities. The 

intent of thorough decontamination is to reduce or eliminate the level of MOPP. This is 

accomplished by units (with or without external support) when operations and resources 

permit. 

(4) Clearance Decontamination. Clearance decontamination provides

decontamination to a level that allows unrestricted transportation, maintenance, 

employment, and disposal. 

d. Methods of Decontamination. Decontamination is accomplished by 

neutralization, physical removal, and weathering. 

(1) Neutralization. Neutralization is the most widely used method of 

decontamination, particularly for chemical warfare (CW) agents. Neutralization is the 

reaction of the contaminating agent with other chemicals to render the agent less toxic or 

nontoxic. When mixed with a reactive decontaminant, the agent is converted into other 

substances (i.e., reaction products). The reactive decontaminant may be a commonly 

available material (e.g., household bleach) or a specifically designed decontaminating agent 

(see Appendix A for measurements and weights of containers that could be used). 

(2) Physical Removal. Physical removal is the relocation of the contamination 

from one mission-critical surface to another less important location. Physical removal

generally leaves the contamination in toxic form. It often involves the subsequent

neutralization of the contamination. For example, if soap and water are used to remove the 

agent, the runoff may be drained into a pit containing bleaching powder. However, 

depending on mission requirements, physical removal can be an effective technique without 

subsequent neutralization. 

(3) Weathering. Weathering involves such processes as evaporation and 

irradiation to remove or destroy the contaminant. The contaminated item is exposed to

natural elements (e.g., sun, wind, heat, precipitation) to dilute or destroy the contaminant 

to the point of reduced or negligible hazard. This may be as simple as letting a vehicle sit 

in the hot desert sun to bake off the contaminant. Natural weathering is the simplest and

most often preferred method of decontamination, particularly for terrain and 

non-mission-essential buildings and roads. 

I-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
2. Hazard 

The potential for the increased use of CBRN weapons and the increased risk of TIM 

hazards from commercial, industrial and medical facilities has increased the urgency for 

developing more effective detection, protection, and decontamination procedures and 

equipment (see Appendix B for more information on the technical aspects of CBRN 

decontamination). Opposing forces may acquire or produce CBRN agents or seize TIM from 

commercial facilities. During the conflict in the former Yugoslavia, Muslim forces 

deliberately positioned canisters of chlorine from the Tuzla industrial chemical plant to 

deter Serb artillery attacks. 

a. CW Agents and Delivery Means. Typically classified by their effects on the body, 

CW agents consist of choking, nerve, blood, blister, and incapacitating agents (see Potential 

Military Chemical/Biological Agents and Compounds for more information on CW agents). 

Virtually all weapons systems, from howitzers to aerial bombs and missiles, can be used to 

deliver CW agents over a wide area. Terrorists and insurgents can use spray systems or 

other devices in localized attacks. 

b. Biological Warfare (BW) Agents and Delivery Means. BW is the use of 

pathogens or toxins as weapons. BW agents include anthrax, plague, cholera, smallpox, 

ricin toxin, botulinum toxin, mycotoxin, aflatoxin, and many others. Conventional 

munitions, such as aerial bombs and missile warheads, can be modified to deliver BW 

agents. Other delivery means include spray devices affixed to manned aircraft or aerial 

drones and ground-based aerosol generators. 

c. Radiological Dispersal Devices (RDDs). RDDs scatter radiological material 

without a nuclear explosion. The material is dispersed by a small blast to contaminate and 

deny access to terrain or facilities, which slows military operations. “Dirty bomb” is a

common term for an RDD. 

d. Nuclear Weapons. Nuclear weapons can be delivered by conventional or

unconventional means. Weapons effects can cause significant residual radiation hazards. 

e. TIM. Industry develops and produces TIM for industrial operations or for 

research by industry, government, and academia. These TIM are not manufactured to 

produce human casualties or to contaminate equipment and facilities. Nevertheless, TIM 

can be highly dangerous and lethal. Rapid industrialization in the developing world is 

seldom accompanied by the safety and regulatory regimes found in the United States and 

Western Europe. Hazards from TIM can occur through collateral damage to industrial 

facilities or through the acquisition and use of these chemicals by opposing forces. These 

TIM include hydrogen cyanide, cyanogens chloride, phosgene, and chloropicrin. Many

herbicides and pesticides are TIM that could also present a contamination hazard. 

3. Concepts—Combat Operations 

Decontamination is necessary to allow personnel to remove their protective gear and 

resume normal operations after they become contaminated. Weathering is the most

desirable means of decontamination. However, time and operational needs may not permit 

this option. 

a. Decontamination Purpose and Operational Impact. Decontamination is the 

removal or neutralization of hazardous levels of contamination from personnel, equipment, 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 I-3 
materiel, and terrain. The ultimate purpose of decontamination is to restore full combat 

power in the shortest possible time. 

b. Principles of Decontamination Operations. Decontaminate immediately for an 

agent on the skin. Perform higher levels of decontamination as a result of risk assessment. 

Personnel should consider the following: 

(1) Speed. Personnel should conduct decontamination operations as quickly as 

possible. Direct exposure to some CBRN, toxic industrial chemicals (TIC), or TIM agents 

will create casualties and could be fatal within minutes. The sooner equipment is

decontaminated, the less likely it is to absorb the agent or spread to other surfaces. 

(2) Need. Decontaminate only what is necessary. Personnel have a limited 

amount of resources available and should expend resources only where they are needed. 

(3) Priority. Decontaminate the most essential items first; foremost will be the 

skin if contact occurs. Once wearing protective equipment, personnel should begin 

decontamination operations on clothing, equipment, and vehicles. 

(4) Limited Area. Personnel should perform decontamination near the area 

where the contamination occurs. This limits the spread of contamination to other areas 

and reduces the time spent traveling. 

c. Response—Wartime Operations. When a CBRN incident occurs, the commander 

must decide whether decontamination is required to restore combat power and, if so, what 

level of decontamination is required (see Table I-1 and Table I-2). Immediate and 

operational decontamination are time-critical. These levels of decontamination save lives 

and help to regenerate and maintain combat power. The units and activities affected will 

continue their primary mission. However, the level of effort required for thorough and 

clearance decontamination will remove the unit (for an extended period of time) from the 

primary mission. Decontamination is not a sequential process that requires the conduct (in 

order) of immediate, operational, and thorough decontamination. For example, weathering

may alleviate the requirement to conduct thorough decontamination. See Appendix C for

further information on the decontaminants that can be used for the different levels of 

decontamination. 

(1) Immediate. Immediate decontamination is carried out to save lives and 

reduce penetration of agent into surfaces. This may include decontamination of personnel, 

clothing, and equipment. Immediate decontamination will help prevent casualties and 

permit the use of individual equipment and key systems. 

(a) Skin decontamination is a basic survival skill and should be 

performed within 1 minute of being contaminated. Decontamination of the eyes is an

immediate decontamination action that involves flushing the eyes with water as soon as 

possible following contamination (see Chapter III). 

(b) Personal wipe down should be performed within 15 minutes. This is 

done to remove contamination from individual equipment. Use detector paper or an

improved chemical-agent monitor (ICAM) to locate the agent. Use a radiac set to locate 

radiological contamination; and then brush, wipe, or shake it off. 

I-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table I-1. Decontamination Levels and Techniques 

Levels Techniques1 Purpose Best Start Time Performed By 

Immediate Skin decontamination 

Personal wipe down 

Operator wipe down 

Spot decontamination 

Saves lives 

Stops agent from 

penetrating 

Limits agent spread 

Limits agent spread 

Before 1 minute 

Within 15 minutes 

Within 15 minutes 

Within 15 minutes 

Individual 

Individual or buddy 

Individual or crew 

Individual or crew 

Operational MOPP gear 

exchange2 

Vehicle wash down 

Provides temporary 

relief from MOPP4 

Limits agent spread 

Within 6 hours 

Within 1 hour (CARC) 

or within 6 hours (nonCARC) 

Unit 

Battalion crew or 

decontamination 

platoon 

Thorough DED and DAD 

DTD 

Provides probability 

of long-term MOPP 

reduction 

When mission allows 

reconstitution 

Decontamination 

platoon 

Contaminated unit 

Clearance Unrestricted use of 

resources 

METT-TC depending 

on the type of 

equipment 

contaminated 

When mission permits Supporting strategic 

resources 

1 The techniques become less effective the longer they are delayed. 2

 Performance degradation and risk assessment must be considered when exceeding 6 hours. See 

Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) Protection. 

Table I-2. Special Medical Considerations 

Levels Techniques Purpose Best Start Time Performed By 

Operational 

(Patient) 

Complete 

decontamination of 

contaminated areas of 

patient’s MOPP prior 

to evacuation or return 

to duty, without 

removing MOPP. 

Reduces the spread 

of contamination 

inside ground, water, 

and air ambulances 

Before transport on 

“dirty” evacuation 

vehicle 

Unit 

Buddy 

Thorough 

(Patient) 

Remove patient’s 

clothing and 

decontaminate the 

skin. This may 

involve 

decontaminating only 

the contaminated 

areas of the skin 

(especially if water is 

scarce) or a full-body 

wash. Clean the 

patient and put him in 

patient protective 

wrap if he is to be 

transported through a 

contaminated area. 

Removes 

contamination on 

patients prior to 

admission to a clean 

MTF or USAF 

aeromedical aircraft 

Prior to entry into a 

clean MTF or 

USAF aircraft 

Medical unit with 

augmentees 

(c) Operator wipe down should be done within 15 minutes. Operators use

the M100 Sorbent Decontamination System (SDS) to decontaminate the surfaces they need 

to touch or contact to operate the equipment. Radiological contamination in the form of 

dust particles may be wiped, scraped, or brushed off. 

NOTE: The M100 SDS is not authorized for use on Naval aircraft. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 I-5 
(2) Operational. Operational decontamination is carried out by contaminated 

units (with possible assistance from a decontamination unit). It is restricted to the specific 

parts of contaminated, operationally essential equipment, material and work areas to 

minimize contact and transfer hazards and to sustain operations. This may include

individual decontamination beyond the scope of immediate decontamination, 

decontamination of mission-essential equipment, and limited terrain decontamination. 

Operational decontamination reduces the level of contamination, thus lessening the chance 

of spread and transfer. When combined with weathering, MOPP levels may be reduced 

without further decontamination, depending on the surface or material being 

decontaminated and the agent. See Appendix D for more information on the 

decontamination of specific surfaces. 

(a) A MOPP gear exchange should be performed within 6 hours of being 

contaminated due to the performance degradation that occurs when a unit is in MOPP4. A 

MOPP gear exchange allows a unit to remove the gross contamination from personnel and 

equipment, which provides temporary relief from MOPP4 and a return to an increased 

operating tempo (OPTEMPO) in pursuit of mission accomplishment. 

(b) Vehicle wash down should be performed— 

• Within 1 hour of contamination for equipment that is not painted

with chemical agent-resistant coating (CARC). 

• Within 6 hours of contamination for CARC-painted equipment 

• When the mission does not permit a thorough decontamination. 

(3) Thorough. DED and DAD are conducted as part of a reconstitution effort 

during breaks in combat operations. These operations require immense logistical support 

and are manpower-intensive. Thorough decontamination is carried out to reduce 

contamination on personnel, equipment, materiel, and work areas. This permits the partial 

or total removal of individual protective equipment (IPE) and maintains operations with 

minimum degradation. While conducting thorough decontamination, contaminated units 

will be non-mission-capable. The resulting decrease in MOPP will allow the unit to operate 

with restored effectiveness. 

(a) The DED and DAD restore items so that they can be used without 

protective equipment. As a safety measure, some services require the use of protective 

gloves until clearance decontamination has been completed. These operations require

support from a CBRN decontamination unit or element. 

(b) Representative actions that may follow a thorough decontamination 

include the following: 

• Replacing personnel who may have become injured or ill during 

decontamination operations. 

• Reordering supplies (e.g., detector paper, decontamination solution, 

decontamination kits and apparatuses). 

• Maintaining or repairing vehicles and equipment, including 

recalibration or replacement of detectors and alarms. 

I-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• Marking used decontamination sites and selecting new 

decontamination sites, reporting old and new decontamination sites, and recording and 

reporting previously contaminated personnel and equipment. 

• Documenting resource expenditures. 

• Conducting force health protection (FHP). 

• Preparing after-action reviews. 

(4) Clearance. Clearance decontamination of equipment and personnel allows 

the operation to continue unrestricted. Decontamination at this level will probably be 

conducted at or near a shipyard, advanced base, or other industrial facility. Clearance 

decontamination involves factors such as suspending normal activities, withdrawing 

personnel, and having materials and facilities not normally present. Essentially, resources

from an industrial base (e.g., Army Materiel Command, Air Force Material Command, 

Naval Sea Systems Command, and Marine Corps Systems Command [MARCORSYSCOM]) 

will be required. During clearance decontamination, resource expenditures are 

documented, FHP measures are conducted, and after-action reviews are prepared.

 d. Decontamination Decisions. 

(1) The decision to decontaminate is a risk assessment and is made within the 

context of mission, enemy, terrain and weather, time, troops available and civilian 

(METT-TC) considerations, and the resources available (see Figure I-1, page I-8). 

NOTE: The USMC uses the term mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and 

support available—time available (METT-T) vice the Army’s use of METT-TC. 

Civilian considerations are inherently measured within the context of this 

acronym. 

Figure I-1. How Decontamination Affects Combat Effectiveness 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 I-7 
(a) The individual or crew decision to conduct immediate decontamination 

will minimize casualties and limit the contact hazard. This applies the speed and need 

principles of decontamination. Following decontamination, the unit continues to “fight 

dirty.” The unit’s MOPP provides protection; however, continued wearing of MOPP gear 

causes performance degradation. 

(b) The unit or activity decision to conduct operational decontamination 

will provide temporary relief from MOPP4 and limit the spread of contamination. 

Operational decontamination supports sustained unit operations for prolonged periods and 

is conducted as far forward as possible. 

(c) The command decision to conduct thorough decontamination should 

reduce contamination below the detectable level with tactical-level detection equipment. 

Caution should be exercised. Current tactical detectors are not sensitive enough to ensure 

that the item does not off-gas when the temperature rises. Units can operate at this

temperature without the degradation imposed by higher MOPP levels. The commander 

determines which assets are critical for a subsequent mission and allocates the resources to 

conduct DED and DTD. The commander accepts the trade-off that the contaminated assets 

will not be available for the period of time required to conduct a thorough decontamination. 

(2) The commander applies METT-TC considerations to the risk assessment 

process to determine if and where operational or thorough decontamination is required. 

For example, weathering may reduce contamination below detectable levels. Additionally, 

thorough decontamination may be deferred until the operational situation or resources are 

available to support the process. Furthermore, unique requirements such as 

decontamination of electronic equipment or depleted uranium (DU) contamination may 

have special considerations (see Appendix E for more information). 

(3) Risk assessment is a continuous process. Low-level residual contamination 

may remain following weathering or decontamination. The contamination may also not be

detectable by tactical-level detection devices (see Appendix F for a summary of how the 

environment could impact decontamination operations). Medical surveillance (MEDSURV), 

conducted by preventive medicine (PVNTMED) personnel, is an FHP measure to identify 

medical threats for personnel who may be exposed. 

4. Concepts—Homeland Security 

HLS missions may require that defense decontamination support be furnished for the 

two component parts of HLS—homeland defense (HLD) and CS. Decontamination support

will follow a process that essentially involves preparation, response, recovery, and 

restoration. (Chapter XI provides more detailed information on decontamination support 

for HLS.) CBRN decontamination operations conducted in support of HLS will comply with 

29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910.120, Hazardous Waste Operations and 

Emergency Response, within the United States, its territories, and possessions. 

a. Preparation Phase. Military units tasked to assist local or state responders must 

become intimately familiar with the National Response Plan (NRP) and coordinate and 

train closely with local civilian emergency response agencies so that protocols and 

procedures are coordinated, understood, and practiced before an actual event occurs in the 

community. Whether preparing for HLS or combat operations, US military forces maintain 

the capability to conduct or support decontamination based on unit capabilities. Unit or 

I-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
activity HLS preparatory actions are similar to other contingencies. Representative actions

include— 

• Planning contingency operations. 

• Preparing standard operating procedures (SOPs). 

• Conducting liaison with applicable organizations. 

• Establishing memorandums of agreement (MOAs) with appropriate authorities. 

• Establishing and maintaining required certifications. 

• Conducting training and exercises. 

• Obtaining required equipment (commercial or government) to accomplish 

primary or collateral missions (e.g., patient decontamination). 

b. Response Phase. When a threat or an actual occurrence of a CBRN incident 

requires HLD or CS decontamination support, DOD resources with decontamination 

capabilities may respond. The required missions may include mass and casualty 

decontamination, or technical assistance for decontamination (see Chapter XI for more 

information on these missions). Personnel performing decontamination operations in 

support of HLS must be trained and certified to the first-responder operations level as 

defined in 29 CFR 1910.120, Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response. 

c. Recovery Phase. For CS, recovery, transition, and redeployment operations start 

when civil authorities or other designated agencies relieve the commander of selected 

decontamination-related tasks. The operational duration of the response mission is 

determined by the requirements established by the appropriate authority. The 

requirement for mass and casualty decontamination will likely end following the response 

phase. The requirement for technical decontamination to support first-responder 

operations in a hot zone may continue. Military units with decontamination capabilities 

may redeploy during this phase or be assigned other responsibilities. A transition plan is

implemented and tasks are transferred from the commander to the appropriate civil 

authorities. Nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) and contracted services may augment 

these civil authorities. Upon completion of the required recovery support, the commander 

executes a transition and redeploys. 

d. Restoration Phase. Restoration constitutes those actions necessary to return the 

decontamination section or unit to its full operational capability. Restoration actions will 

generally be done at a unit’s home station. Restoration actions may include the following: 

(1) Replacing personnel who may have become injured/ill during 

decontamination operations. 

(2) Reordering supplies (e.g., detector paper, decontamination solution, 

decontamination kits and apparatuses). 

(3) Maintaining and repairing vehicles and equipment, including recalibration 

or replacement of detectors and alarms. 

(4) Marking used decontamination sites and selecting new decontamination 

sites. 

(5) Documenting personnel and equipment expenditures, event logs, and 

MEDSURV. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 I-9 
(6) Concluding outstanding agreements with civil authorities or CS 

organizations. 

5. Service Capabilities 

All services have varying levels of CBRN decontamination capabilities. All US forces 

at the individual warfighter level must have immediate decontamination capabilities. Most 

US military units at the major subordinate command level (e.g., brigade, regiment, wing, 

shipboard) have operational and thorough decontamination capabilities. Clearance 

decontamination will normally be conducted at the Unified Combatant Command level (i.e., 

Central Command [CENTCOM]) with the assistance of multiple agencies within the 

command. 

6. Training and Exercises 

Individual and joint unit decontamination training across the force ensures the 

readiness to fight and win should an adversary employ CBRN weapons. Training is a

responsibility shared by combatant commands, services, and a number of DOD agencies. 

Training and exercise programs must incorporate the principles for operations in CBRN 

environments and include realistic consideration of CBRN weapons effects on sustained 

combat operations. 

a. Training. Training opportunities exist both internally and externally and should 

include the following: 

• Initial and sustainment training. 

• Individual, collective, and unit training. 

• Intra-agency and interagency training. 

b. Exercises. Exercises provide the opportunity to interact with other units or 

services and federal, state, or local agencies. Exercises developed by non-DOD agencies 

provide an opportunity to improve military capabilities for support of HLS operations with 

minimal resources. These exercises emphasize interoperability requirements and stress 

staff coordination. They also serve to identify shortfalls in communications or other 

capabilities that must be corrected. 

I-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Chapter II 

DECONTAMINATION OPERATIONS: PLAN, PREPARE, AND 

EXECUTE 

1. Background 

Decontamination planning provides recommendations for commanders’ guidance. 

This helps ensure that forces and facilities are prepared to operate in CBRN environments; 

supports the commander’s decision-making requirements; and identifies, assesses, and 

estimates the enemy’s CBRN capabilities, intentions, and most likely courses of action 

(COAs). 

2. Decontamination Planning 

The decontamination planner must consider the hazards that may result from CBRN 

or TIM contamination. Decontamination assessments include mission analysis, COA 

development, and the analysis and comparison of enemy and friendly COAs. 

Decontamination planning is dynamic and continuous from preattack to postattack, 

through recovery operations. 

NOTE: TIC and other hazardous materials [HAZMAT] are considered TIM 

throughout this manual. 

 The unit CBRN defense personnel and staff work together to ensure that 

decontamination planning is fully integrated into deliberate and crisis action planning. 

They accomplish this through wargaming friendly versus enemy COAs and by mutually 

developing products designed to assist the service components, multinational partners, and 

joint force commanders (JFCs) decision-making processes. 

a. Commanders, with input from their staffs, assess their vulnerability to CBRN

attacks. Commanders determine the required protection for their units by assessing the 

capabilities of the enemy. They estimate the likely impact of CBRN attacks and, based on 

the concept of operations (CONOPS), determine the methods to reduce the impact and 

allow for mission accomplishment. This includes MOPP acclimatization training and

decontamination planning to mitigate the affects of a CBRN attack. See Multiservice 

Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Vulnerability 

Assessment for further information on CBRN vulnerability assessment (VA). 

b. The CBRN planner writes a decontamination plan as part of a CBRN defense 

annex of the operation order (OPORD). 

(1) In preparing the decontamination portion of the CBRN defense annex, the 

planner assesses the likelihood that decontamination operations will be required, the 

probable extent of those operations, and the best procedures for execution. 

(2) In preparing the decontamination portion of the CBRN defense annex, the 

planner should consider the following questions: 

• Does the enemy possess CBRN weapons and has he demonstrated the intent 

to use them? 

• Does the unit’s mission bring it into likely contact with TIM hazards? 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 II-1 
• What is the unit’s decontamination capability (see Appendixes G and H for a 

summary of decontamination capabilities for the services)? 

• Does weather and terrain favor enemy use of CBRN weapons? (For terrain 

decontamination, see Appendix I.) 

• What are the unit’s logistics requirements? 

• What is the unit’s level of decontamination training? 

• Is contamination avoidance possible? 

• What decontamination assets are available? 

• What likely decontamination sites are available (through map 

reconnaissance)? 

(3) During the plan preparation, all factors of the METT-TC considerations are 

measured. The METT-TC considerations will impact the representative planning areas 

(e.g., decontamination sites, priorities of effort, decontamination decisions, and 

decontamination triage). 

(a) The preselection of decontamination sites is essentially a map 

reconnaissance that is based on the supported commander’s plan. (Detailed information on

a potential site may be determined from intelligence assets.) Preselected sites should be 

within an avenue of approach, but just off main routes for easy access. Close proximity to

rivers, streams, or other water sources is also important. In conducting a map

reconnaissance, consider the following: 

• Probable level of decontamination that will be conducted. 

• Terrain (soil composition). 

• Mission. 

• Cover and concealment. 

• Water sources. 

• Drainage. 

• Presence or absence of contamination. 

• Road network that facilitates the movement in and out of the site for 

both the contaminated unit and the resupply squad. 

• Adequate area for the dispersal of equipment before, during, and after 

decontamination. 

• Location of downwind friendly personnel. 

(b) The commander will establish priorities of effort that determine which 

contaminated units are decontaminated first. Since decontamination assets are limited, 

the commander must establish a priority of decontamination support. The priority of effort

lists the units in the order they will receive decontamination support. This can change

from phase to phase during an operation. The CBRN staff develops the priority of effort 

based on an understanding of the commander’s intent. 

II-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(c) The commander decides when and where operational and thorough 

decontamination will occur according to METT-TC. Note that the different levels of 

immediate decontamination always occur as battle drills at the prescribed times following a 

CBRN attack. 

(d) Planning to decontaminate what is necessary ensures that units or 

activities understand the decontamination triage (identifying clean and dirty elements). 

Even though a unit has been identified for decontamination, it does not follow that each 

individual, vehicle, or item belonging to that unit is contaminated. Decontamination triage

is the process of identifying those individuals, vehicles, aircraft, ships, ships spaces, or 

items of equipment that require decontamination. Only the identified elements are to be 

processed through the decontamination site. The commander may then employ his 

uncontaminated elements to support the decontamination operation. 

c. Plans for decontamination operations will be included in the CBRN defense 

annex to the operation plan (OPLAN) or OPORD. In preparing the decontamination 

portion of the CBRN defense annexes, the planner must assess the disposition of forces and 

assets available for CBRN reconnaissance and decontamination. It must identify locations 

for preselected decontamination sites and linkup points and the missions for the CBRN 

decontamination assets. It must also identify plans for divert airfields and/or naval vessels 

for recovery operations and identify contingency plans for stations, ports, airfields, forward 

arming and refueling points (FARPs), and facilities to receive contaminated aircraft and 

ships with personnel and cargo aboard. 

3. Wartime Planning Considerations 

Multiple factors must be considered when planning CBRN decontamination during 

wartime. 

a. Joint or Combined Operations. These factors include the following: 

• Intelligence collection, analysis, and production. 

• Situational awareness (SA). 

• Common planning, training, and equipment standards. 

• Health service support (HSS). 

• Protection of the joint rear area (JRA) and theater sustainment capabilities. 

• Priorities. 

• Minimum essential requirements for the decontamination. 

• Human factor effects of the MOPP. 

• Logistics burden of CBRN decontamination. 

• Effect of the CBRN attack on the C2 systems. 

• Capabilities and limitations of US, multinational, and host nation (HN) 

decontamination assets. 

• Consequence management (CM) support outside the continental United States

(OCONUS), its territories, and possessions. 

• Mortuary affairs. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 II-3 
(1) SA. Adequate SA is a central concern for decontamination planning. An 

integrated warning and reporting system provides a significant measure of protection by 

allowing friendly forces to minimize exposure to the hazard. Accurate and timely 

understanding of the hazard and its effect minimizes the possibility of having excessive or 

inadequate force protection (FP). Warning system provisions also address the need to warn 

personnel, based on an alarm, thus causing units to increase their protective posture, and 

can act as a warning order (WARNORD) for dedicated decontamination assets. 

 (2) Common Planning, Training, and Equipment Standards. Common 

standards for CBRN decontamination (especially training, exercises, and equipment 

maintenance) enhance joint force capabilities. 

(3) HSS. Key elements of HSS include casualty estimation, chemoprophylaxis 

and immunizations, MEDSURV, PVNTMED, diagnostics, mass casualty management, 

evacuation, and patient decontamination requirements. HSS planning addresses

decontamination considerations. Unit plans should recognize that CBRN attacks have the 

potential to create mass casualties. The treatment and evacuation of CBRN patients will 

be difficult and hazardous to the patients, medical personnel, and medical treatment 

facilities (MTFs). HSS CBRN defense planning includes appropriate liaison with affected 

and supportive civilian HSS MTFs and an assessment of the capabilities and limitations of 

those MTFs. 

(4) Protection of the JRA and Theater Sustainment Capabilities. The JRA and 

theater sustainment capabilities must be protected. A successful adversary CBRN attack

on a critical logistics facility or a major TIM attack near it may degrade OPTEMPO and 

force generation capabilities. Mitigation and decontamination measures focus on 

maintaining support to combat operations and rapidly restoring the degraded capabilities. 

Alternate sites are designated and exercised in advance to ensure uninterrupted JRA 

operations and theater sustainment capabilities. 

(5) Priorities. In wartime, manpower and time are critical resources that 

cannot be wasted on nonessential tasks. Therefore, the decontamination of areas, facilities, 

and equipment will be prioritized and limited by necessity, to allow resumption of 

operations by protected personnel. Priorities will be directly impacted by the mission with 

the realization that protected personnel can work with contaminated equipment. 

Therefore, decontamination must be aimed at restoring mission capability rather than 

totally minimizing hazards. If decontamination is not possible or needed, 

non-mission-essential areas may be marked and restricted from use. The first priority will

be given to personal decontamination to prevent casualties and reduce manpower losses. 

The second priority will be the decontamination of equipment and material or facilities 

necessary to meet mission requirements as established by the commander. During

wartime, decontamination operations will be expedited as the situation requires. Primary

considerations will be for effective accomplishment of the mission. 

(6) Minimum Essential Requirements. The minimal conditions that should be 

met in planning decontamination operations are as follows: 

• Identification of contamination. 

• Designation and marking of contaminated area. 

• Identification of facilities, equipment, and material that have been 

contaminated. 

II-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• Availability of personnel to fully operate each decontamination station. 

• Number and deployment or utilization of decontamination personnel. 

• Selection of appropriate decontaminant and decontamination equipment. 

• Selection of an effective method of decontamination. 

• Selection of a site for decontamination of equipment, supplies, and 

personnel. 

(7) Human Factor Effects of MOPP. 

(a) Physiological and psychological stress will occur during 

decontamination operations. Body temperature must be maintained within a narrow limit 

for optimum physical and mental performance. MOPP gear restricts the heat loss 

mechanisms because of its high insulation and low permeability to water vapor. In 

addition, physical work requires more effort when personnel wear protective clothing 

because of its added weight and restricted movement. Work intensity, which is managed by

leaders, is also a major contributing factor to heat stress. 

(b) Military personnel wearing MOPP while conducting decontamination 

may experience heat stress. To prevent heat stress from resulting in injuries, they follow a 

prescribed cycle of work and rest periods. See Table II-1 for work/rest cycles and water 

replacement guidelines. The work/rest cycles are based on the environment (temperature, 

humidity, and solar load), the workload of the individual, and the clothing ensemble being 

worn. These work/rest cycles are usually described in terms of minutes of work allowed per 

hour. The remainder of the hour (after completing the work allowed) is used for rest, 

allowing heat to dissipate and allowing the individual to cool down. The local application of 

work/rest cycles is directly influenced by METT-TC. 

Table II-1. Work/Rest Cycles and Water Replacement Guidelines 

Heat 

Category 

WBGT 

Index 

(°F) 1, 2 

Light (Easy) Work Moderate Work Hard (Heavy) Work 

Work/Rest 

(minutes)

 4, 5 

Water 

Intake 

(qt/hr) 3 Work/Rest (minutes)

4, 5 

Water 

Intake 

(qt/hr)3 Work/Rest (minutes) 

Water 

Intake 

(qt/hr) 

1 78–81.9 No limit 1⁄2 No limit 3⁄4 40/20 3⁄4 

2 

(Green) 

82–84.9 No limit 1⁄2 50/10 3⁄4 30/30 1 

3 

(Yellow) 

85–87.9 No limit 3⁄4 40/20 3⁄4 30/30 1 

4 

(Red) 

88–89.9 No limit 3⁄4 30/30 3⁄4 20/40 1 

5 

(Black) 

More than 

90 

50/10 1 20/40 1 10/50 1 

1

Wearing all MOPP overgarments (MOPP4) adds 10°F to the WBGT index. 2

If wearing body armor, add 5°F to WBGT in humid climates. 3

Hourly fluid intake should not exceed 11⁄4 quarts, and daily fluid intake should not exceed 12 liters. 4

Rest means minimal physical activity (sitting or standing), accomplished in the shade if possible. The information 

pertains to acclimated service personnel. 5

The work/rest time and fluid replacement volumes will sustain performance and hydration for at least 4 hours of work 

in the specified heat category. Individual water needs will vary ±1⁄4 qt/hr. 

(c) The incidence of heat casualties can be reduced if personnel are 

allowed to lower their work intensity and take frequent rest breaks. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 II-5 
(8) Logistics Burden of CBRN Attacks. See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques 

and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Protection. 

(9) Effects of CBRN Attacks on C2 Systems. CBRN attacks can degrade C2 

systems. Effective decontamination operations rely on a C2 system that keeps the 

commander informed and communicates the commander’s intent. For example, being

notified of the commander’s priorities for decontamination is critical for ensuring that 

support is synchronized. 

(10) Capabilities and Limitations of US, Multinational, and HN 

Decontamination Assets. In preparation for multinational operations, unit planners assess 

coalition member CBRN capabilities for decontamination and interoperability with US 

forces. The planning process should consider the implications and feasibility of diverting 

US assets and capabilities to support HN and other multinational members in 

accomplishing the required decontamination objectives. 

(11) OCONUS CM Support. OCONUS CM support will generally be 

characterized by crisis action planning. A CBRN or TIM incident may result in US forces 

providing OCONUS decontamination support. The support would probably be for a short 

duration and would require extensive coordination and liaison with the HN. 

b. International Coalition Operations. Decontamination may be conducted within

the context of multinational arrangements. Planning is accomplished through both US and 

multinational channels. Coordinated CBRN defense planning is essential to the unity 

effort (e.g., operations; logistics (including infrastructure); intelligence; deception; 

decontamination; warning, detection, and monitoring; CM; and CBRN interoperability). 

Supporting plans that address coordination and liaison, host nation support (HNS), and the 

provision of mutual support are examples of the essential tasks that must be accomplished. 

4. Homeland Security Planning Considerations 

Decontamination support for HLS and CS present unique planning considerations. 

CBRN decontamination planning ranges from planning to provide technical assistance and 

recommendations to planning for resources for mass decontamination. The following are 

examples of planning considerations that apply for HLS and CS: 

• CBRN specialists and planners understand and can operate within the civilian 

based incident command system (ICS). 

• CBRN specialists and planners understand the terms of reference used to

support first-responder decontamination operations. 

• CBRN specialists conduct planning with civilian counterparts at the federal, 

state, or local level, as applicable. 

• CBRN specialists and planners train and exercise for support of HLS or CS 

operations. 

• CBRN specialists, as required, maintain the required certification to operate in a 

CS mission with civilian first responders. 

• Military issue of the IPE (MOPP ensembles) do not meet Occupational Safety 

and Health Administration (OSHA) Level C requirements. 

II-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
5. Preattack Decontamination Operations 

Preattack decontamination actions are taken to increase readiness. 

a. Preattack Considerations. Preattack considerations extend from the present 

until the first enemy weapon effects occur within the theater of operations. 

(1) Commanders will conduct VA and estimate the need for decontamination 

based on the threat, the resources available for decontamination, and the potential results 

of this operation. Preattack actions also consider the following: 

• Assessing the CBRN threat. 

• Identifying and preparing collective protective shelters (CPSs) and MTFs. 

• Ensuring the proficiency in CBRN decontamination procedures and 

methods. 

• Preparing to conduct decontamination operations (based on the nature and 

extent of contamination and resources available for decontamination). 

• Preparing to conduct response procedures (before and after a CBRN 

attack). Guidance must be based on the concept that there may be no warning before an 

attack and that all attacks in a high-threat area may contain CBRN agents. 

• Providing instructions for a warning unit or the base populace. 

• Notifying key personnel of an attack, of procedures for the activation of 

preselected CPSs, and of the need to don the protective clothing. 

• Decontaminating mission-essential facilities (see Appendix I for 

information on terrain decontamination). 

• Identifying recovery actions that must begin as soon as possible after the 

attack. 

(2) Subordinate units and activities must support and comply with the 

commander’s intent. They develop contingency plans for CBRN defense actions that 

support missions conducted within the theater assigned. Plans must address CBRN 

detection, warning, reporting, and decontaminating procedures and a rapid transition into 

a CBRN defensive posture. 

(3) Specialized CBRN teams will be formed from existing personnel resources 

to detect, identify, and decontaminate CBRN contamination and to operate protective 

shelters. 

(4) Each soldier must be trained to perform decontamination of his own body, 

clothing, personal equipment, individual weapons, and casualties. 

b. Reconnaissance/Site Survey of Decontamination Sites. Decontamination site 

selection is necessary during preattack operational and thorough decontamination 

planning. The following criteria should be considered for decontamination site selection: 

• Wind direction (to include downwind direction from friendly personnel). 

• Water supply. 

• Overhead concealment. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 II-7 
• Maximum use of existing facilities. 

• Drainage. 

• Trafficability. The path or road must be able to withstand large amounts of 

water being placed on it. 

• Accessibility. The site should be accessible to the largest vehicle in the 

contaminated unit. 

• Size. The area must be large enough to handle all stations of the level of 

decontamination being conducted, especially Station 3 of thorough decontamination. 

c. Site and Linkup Point Selection. 

(1) The controlling headquarters (HQ) selects the potential decontamination 

sites as part of mission planning. More than likely, this HQ will only be capable of a map 

reconnaissance. For decontamination sites on the friendly side of the forward line of own 

troops (FLOT), every effort must be made to conduct a ground reconnaissance of the site. 

For thorough decontamination and supported operational decontamination, it is imperative 

that these sites be further reconnaissanced by the supporting decontamination unit. For 

example, when an operational decontamination is executed by an Army battalion, the 

battalion CBRN noncommissioned officer (NCO) should make every attempt to reconnoiter 

these sites. 

(2) As decontamination sites are selected (during the map reconnaissance), one 

or more linkup points are chosen to support each site. Linkup at the designated point 

includes establishing security, positioning the necessary marshalling areas, camouflaging 

the entry and exit points, designating the direction of flow into and out of the site, and 

ensuring that the unit’s supply or prestaged embarked assets have sufficient replacement 

MOPP gear. 

d. Coordination. 

(1) The individual in charge of decontamination must make careful 

coordination with those elements involved to ensure the successful completion of the 

operation. The unit to be decontaminated must be aware of linkup points, times, and its 

own responsibilities for the procedure. 

(2) Much of the coordination will be arranged through the decontamination 

element or the unit’s higher echelon, particularly when involving the following: 

• Power-driven decontamination equipment (PDDE) support. 

• Engineer support for site preparation and closure. 

• Supply and transportation for linkup with bulk water trucks. 

• Air defense and security forces for security when those elements are 

required. 

• HSS. 

• Augmentee support. 

• Support of medical patient decontamination operations (if the MTF is 

colocated adjacent to troop decontamination). 

II-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
e. Communications. Primary communications between the decontamination 

element and the supported unit will be via radio. Therefore, signal operating instructions 

(SOI) should be included in the supported unit’s initial request for decontamination 

support. 

f. Maintaining SA. 

(1) Warnings. Warnings of CBRN contamination are conveyed by alarms and 

signals. Units use easily recognizable and reliable alarm methods to respond quickly and 

reliably to CBRN hazards. Standard alarms, the Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical 

Warning and Reporting System (NBCWRS), and contamination markers help give orderly 

warning that may also require a change of MOPP level. Alarms and signals may include 

the following: 

• Audible alarms. 

• Automatic alarms. 

• Visual signals. 

(2) Markings. Contamination is marked to warn friendly personnel. Units or 

CBRN reconnaissance teams mark the likely entry points into the area and report 

contamination to higher HQ. The only exception is when marking would help the enemy. 

In this event, the hazard is reported to higher HQ as an unmarked contaminated area. 

When a unit enters a previously marked contaminated area, personnel check the extent of 

contamination and adjust plans as necessary. As the hazard area changes, the unit 

relocates the signs. When the hazard passes, the unit removes the signs. The unit reports

all changes to higher HQ. The decontamination site noncommissioned officer in charge 

(NCOIC) ensures that his team properly marks the decontamination site with the standard 

markings and sends the NBC5 (areas of actual contamination) report forward. 

(3) Control Measures. 

(a) Ensure that drivers of contaminated vehicles know when to move into 

position at the wash-down location. 

(b) Ensure that the contaminated unit has provided site security. 

(c) See Appendix J for thorough decontamination station signs used as 

control measures. 

(4) Wide-area data flow (Web site) provides up-to-date status, information, and 

conditions across a broad spectrum. 

g. Maintenance of Decontamination Equipment. A thorough operator level

maintenance should be done on all decontamination equipment. If no mission-capable 

equipment is found, all the shortcomings should be forwarded to higher echelons so that the 

force commander is aware of the full decontamination capability. 

h. Pre-positioning of Logistics. Units will need to pre-position the replacement IPE 

for issue at the end of the DED as part of the thorough decontamination. If replacement 

IPE is needed during operational decontamination, the unit should pre-position the IPE for 

use during MOPP gear exchange. As the CBRN threat rises, IPE and chemical 

decontamination equipment should be pre-positioned forward to ensure timely delivery to 

units for operational and thorough decontamination. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 II-9 
i. Other Preattack Actions. Other key preattack actions are included in Table II-2. 

Table II-2. Preattack Decontamination Actions 

• Know the current and future missions. 

• Outline the capabilities of the unit or activity. 

• Know the external support available from CBRN units. 

• Know the decontamination support available to detached/remote elements. 

• Designate the decontamination sites. 

• Employ avoidance (whenever possible) within the context of the mission. 

• Designate the TFAs. 

• Establish and exercise the CBRN warning and reporting system. 

6. Execution 

Actions necessary to successfully execute decontamination operations include 

establishing a C2 site, establishing clean areas or zones, ensuring security, providing 

proper and detailed reporting, ensuring the availability of resources, and controlling and 

documenting personnel exposure. 

a. Decontamination Site C2. In a thorough decontamination, the supported unit is 

responsible for overall control. The level that an operational decontamination operation is 

being conducted determines C2 for the decontamination site. There are different levels (or

techniques) of control when conducting operational decontamination. 

(1) Decentralized Operational Decontamination. The unit commander 

requests decontamination equipment support, selects the decontamination site, links up 

with the decontamination element, and conducts the decontamination. 

(2) Centralized Operational Decontamination. The CBRN staff controls the 

decontamination. The commander selects the site, and the battalion CBRN staff directs 

site setup and security and provides C2. The CBRN staff officer or NCO travels with the 

decontamination element and communicates via radio. 

b. Establishment of Clean Areas and Zones. A predecontamination staging area is 

established downwind of the decontamination site. In the predecontamination staging 

area, the supported commander segregates vehicles by checking for contamination. Clean 

areas must be provided to avoid recontaminating personnel and equipment as they finish 

the decontamination process. The decontamination element should be set upwind of the 

decontamination site entrance. The MOPP gear exchange should be in place upwind and at 

a 45° angle of vehicle wash down. After processing, the vehicles should marshal in a 

postdecontamination assembly area (AA) upwind of the DTD and DED areas. 

c. Security. Security ensures that the decontamination operation is conducted 

without interference. The supported unit is responsible for site security. Cover and 

concealment must be considered in decontamination site selection. Traffic control is 

another component of security. Linkup points and the entrances to AAs should be 

controlled to ensure that uncontaminated personnel or vehicles do not enter. 

d. Reporting. Proper and detailed reporting is critical to the success of the 

decontamination operation and to the restoration operations that will occur at the end of 

the conflict. At the end of the decontamination operation, several things must be reported. 

II-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
The CBRN unit will be responsible for submitting a complete NBC5 report after the site is 

closed. The supported unit will report the following to its higher HQ: 

• Quantity and types of vehicles decontaminated. 

• Number of personnel decontaminated through the DTD. 

• Number of causalities. 

• Time decontamination site was opened and closed. 

e. Consumption Rates. Decontamination operations expend resources. The 

chemical unit must plan to have enough of the proper supplies on hand to perform its 

mission. For information on consumption rates, see Chapter XII. 

f. Resupply. After a decontamination operation, the CBRN unit must restore itself 

to mission-capable status. While the supported unit has the requirement to keep on-hand 

supplies to conduct a DTD, the supporting CBRN unit may supply the majority of the 

equipment and supplies expended. Likewise, while the supported unit is required to 

provide the chemical unit with replacement supplies and material at the end of a DED, the 

CBRN unit should make its material requirements known to the maneuver forces logistics 

staff. The logistics staff may then arrange for decontamination supplies to be issued, often 

in “push” packages. 

g. Personnel Exposure Control and Documentation. During decontamination 

operations, steps should be taken to limit the exposure of personnel to the contamination. 

Such measures include the decontamination crews wearing toxicological aprons or 

wet-weather gear over MOPP gear and locating post decontamination AAs upwind. The 

accurate documentation of individual exposure to contaminants will be essential for proper 

medical treatment should those personnel become injured. 

7. Postdecontamination Operations 

Postdecontamination operations provide for the restoration of combat power to the 

commander. 

a. Immediately following an attack, recovery operations will be initiated.

Operations related to mission-essential operations may continue in a contaminated 

environment. Those personnel not immediately required to ensure the continuation of 

mission-essential activities will likely remain in their shelters until the hazard dissipates 

or decontamination efforts allow resumption of their normal duties. 

b. Postattack operations involve assessing the degree of mission degradation after 

the attack and reporting postattack readiness. 

c. Commanders will ensure that postattack operations emphasize those actions 

necessary to restore mission and support functions. Representative postattack actions 

include the following: 

• Assessing damage and casualties. 

• Restoring communications for C2. 

• Detecting, identifying, marking, isolating, decontaminating, and reporting 

contaminated areas and equipment. 

• Performing casualty decontamination. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 II-11 
d. After completion of operational or thorough decontamination, units close out the 

sites used for MOPP gear exchange, vehicle wash down, DED, and DTD. In a thorough

decontamination, the DED is closed first. The CBRN unit then processes through the DTD 

and the DTD is closed. Then the CBRN unit marks the area as a contaminated area and 

reports its exact location to the supported unit using an NBC4 report. See Chapters IV and

V for procedures to close a site. 

II-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Chapter III 

IMMEDIATE DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

Once aware of chemical-biological (CB) contamination on the bare skin, initiate 

immediate decontamination techniques, without command, by using the personal 

skin decontamination kit (SDK). Decontaminate the hood, mask, gloves, and 

weapon using the individual equipment decontamination kit (IEDK). To remove 

radiological contamination from equipment and personnel, brush it off and wash the 

area with soap and water. 

NOTE: Throughout this manual, SDK refers to the M291 kit and IEDK 

refers to the M295 kit. 

2. Skin Decontamination 

Start the skin decontamination techniques within 1 minute of becoming contaminated. 

Some toxic chemical agents, especially nerve agents, kill within minutes. 

a. Chemical. 

(1) Use the SDK within 1 minute of contamination of the exposed skin. 

Instructions for its use are listed on the individual packet within the kit. Flushing the eyes

with water is also a critical immediate decontamination action and should occur as soon as 

possible following contamination. 

(2) If an SDK is not available, chemical contamination may be blotted from the 

skin with a cloth and flushed with water from a canteen. Soap (if available) can be used to 

wash the agent from the skin. Washing with soap and water (preferably warm water) is 

the best method for toxic-agent removal if SDKs are not available, but this method is not as

effective as using the decontamination kits. 

b. Biological. Immediately decontaminate using soap and water when there is a 

suspected exposure to a BW agent. Careful washing removes nearly all the agent from the 

skin’s surface. Hypochlorite solution or other disinfectants are reserved for gross 

contamination (e.g., following the spill of a solid or liquid agent from a munition directly 

onto the skin). Grossly contaminated skin surfaces should be washed with a 0.5 percent 

chlorine solution, if available, with a contact time of 10 to 15 minutes. See Appendix C for

details on how to make this solution. 

c. Radiological. To remove radiological dust particles, brush, wash, or wipe them 

off. If MOPP gear is wet, conduct a MOPP gear exchange as soon as possible because 

brushing or shaking will not remove the contamination. Wash the exposed areas of the

skin with soap and water, and pay particular attention to the hair and fingernails. 

3. Personal Wipe Down 

The personal wipe down technique is most effective when done within 15 minutes of 

being contaminated. Using the IEDK, wipe down the mask, hood, gloves, and other 

essential gear. Use the M295 IEDK, an M291 SDK pad, a stick, or any stiff device to 

remove the gross contamination from the protective overgarment. Scrape any clumps off 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 III-1 
the material. Brush off radiological contamination or frozen chemical-agent contamination. 

See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical 

(NBC) Protection for detailed information on overgarment protective qualities. 

a. Chemical. Decontaminate individual equipment using the IEDKs. The ICAMs, 

chemical-agent monitors (CAMs), and M8/M9 detector paper are used to detect 

contamination and monitor the level of contamination on the equipment. 

b. Biological. Wash with soap and water. If water is not available, use IEDKs in 

the same manner as described for chemical-agent decontamination. 

c. Radiological. Locate radiological contamination with monitoring equipment and 

remove by brushing or shaking it off. Avoid breathing the dust particles by wearing the 

protective mask or a piece of cloth over the nose and mouth. Wipe off the equipment with 

soapy water (preferably warm) using rags or damp paper towels. 

4. Operator Wipe Down 

Decontaminate other mission-essential surfaces of the equipment before continuing 

the mission. Operators wipe down is most effective when done within 15 minutes of 

contamination. 

a. Chemical. 

(1) Decontaminate the surfaces that must be touched on the exterior of the 

vehicle or the equipment with the M100 SDS. If the M100 SDS is unavailable, scrub the 

surfaces with super tropical bleach (STB) to decontaminate the equipment. 

NOTE: The M100 has not been authorized for use on USN or USMC aircraft. Use 

hot, soapy water to perform operator’s wipe down on all aircraft. Also, STB 

should not be used to decontaminate aircraft surfaces. 

(2) Scrub STB dry mix or slurry onto the exterior surface with brushes (if 

available). Wait 30 minutes, and then wash it off. If necessary, use the nonstandard 

decontaminants that are discussed in Appendix C. The ICAM, CAM, and M8/M9 detector 

paper are used to determine what surfaces require decontamination. 

b. Biological. For decontamination of equipment, a 0.5 percent chlorine solution 

should be used, if available. A contact time of 30 minutes prior to normal cleaning is 

required. Bleach is corrosive to most metals and fabrics so rinse thoroughly and oil the 

metal surfaces after completion. Other nonstandard biological decontaminants are 

described in Appendix C. 

NOTE: Bleach has not been authorized for use on USN or USMC aircraft. Use hot 

soapy water to perform operators wipe down on all aircraft. 

c. Radiological. If surfaces are contaminated by fallout, rain out, neutron-induced 

contaminations, or any type of radiological agent, use the monitoring equipment to help 

locate it and then decontaminate the surfaces as required. Decontaminate if detection 

equipment is not available and contamination is suspected. Radiological contamination can

usually be removed by brushing or scraping. Water is effective for flushing away 

radiological contamination; however, use drainage ditches that flow into a sump to control 

the runoff. Remember, the contamination has not been destroyed, it has just been moved. 

The runoff will still be hazardous. If time permits, brush or scoop away the top inch of soil 

from the fighting position to lower the effects of radiological contamination. 

III-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
5. Spot Decontamination 

a. Purpose. Aircrews and aircraft ground support crews can use spot 

decontamination as an immediate measure to remove contamination from critical locations. 

Spot decontamination is performed to limit the spread of contamination on aircraft that 

requires servicing between sorties, to support ingress and egress of aircraft by crews and 

passengers, and when performing pre- and postflight inspections. Spot decontamination

reduces the contamination on the areas that must be touched during servicing. 

b. Procedures. 

(1) Ensure that sufficient quantities of soapy water or applicable aircraft 

cleaner and fresh water are available. 

(2) Scrub service areas with soapy water using brushes, rags, or sponges until 

deposited material, dirt, and grime are removed. 

(3) Rinse areas with fresh water from a bucket or hose. 

(4) Ensure that service providers decontaminate gloves (SDK, soapy water, or 

high-test hypochlorite [HTH] solution). 

(5) Perform service on the aircraft. 

(6) Decontaminate runoff by applying a standard or nonstandard 

decontaminant to the deck/ground/airfield. Runoff can be hosed overboard or into collection 

sumps. If runoff is hosed without prior decontamination, it should be treated as 

contaminated. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 III-3 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Chapter IV 

OPERATIONAL DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

Operational decontamination limits the spread and transfer of contamination, allows 

temporary relief from MOPP4, and facilitates additional decontamination requirements. 

By speeding up the weathering process, the need for a thorough decontamination may be 

eliminated. This chapter focuses on land forces operational decontamination TTP. This 

process will likely require about a 120-square-yard area (depending on the number of 

contaminated vehicles) and may not require a nearby water source. An operational

decontamination consists of a vehicle wash down and a MOPP gear exchange. The 

techniques that may be used to conduct an operational decontamination include the 

following: 

• Decentralized control for a company-size unit. 

• Centralized control for a battalion-size unit. 

• Centralized control for a brigade-size unit. 

NOTES: 

1. See Naval Ships Technical Manual (NSTM) 470 and NSTM 070 for operational 

decontamination procedures and Naval Air (NAVAIR) 00-80T-121 for TTP on USN 

and USMC aircrews, aircraft, and support equipment. 

2. See Recovery Operations in a Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear 

(CBRN) Environment for other information on USN and USMC operational 

decontamination procedures. 

3. See Chapters VIII and IX for additional information on aviation and shipboard 

decontamination, respectively. 

4. Aircrew CBRN IPE/advanced logistics support site (ALSS) configurations for 

the operational decontamination technique do not allow MOPP gear exchange. 

See NAVAIR 00-80T-121 for procedures to doff contaminated aircrew CBRN IPE 

and ALSS. 

5. See Air Force Manual (AFMAN) 32-4005, AFMAN 32-4017, AFMAN 10-2602, and 

USAF Technical Order (TO) 11C15-1-3 for TTP on USAF main operating base 

(MOB), colocated operating base (COB), and bare operating base operational 

decontamination. 

6. See Chapter VII for further information on fixed-site, port, and airfield 

decontamination. 

2. Planning 

Operational decontamination requires a well-thought-out plan to be successful. The 

advantages and disadvantages of operational decontamination techniques are listed in 

Table IV-1, page IV-2. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-1 
Table IV-1. Advantages and Disadvantages of Operational Decontamination Techniques 

Decentralized Control 

(Company-Size) 

Centralized Control 

(Battalion-Size) 

Centralized Control 

(Brigade-Size) 

Advantages Flexibility 

Dispersion 

C2 

Flexibility 

Dispersion 

Planning 

Sustained operations 

C2 

Synchronized support 

assets 

Rehearsal 

Time required 

Planning 

Sustained operations 

Disadvantages C2 

Synchronized support 

assets 

Rehearsal 

Time required 

Planning 

Sustained operations 

Synchronized support 

assets 

Rehearsal 

Time required 

Flexibility 

Dispersion 

a. Decentralized control of a company-size element undergoing decontamination is 

provided by the contaminated unit’s commander. The advantages of this method are that it 

is flexible and it conforms to the METT-TC conditions. It also disperses the units over a 

large area, making them less vulnerable to attack by the enemy. The disadvantages are

that C2 is more difficult, it is difficult to synchronize the support assets to one location, it 

may require rehearsal time, it takes more time overall, planning assets are not available at 

that level, and the company cannot sustain operations without additional support from 

higher HQ. 

b. Centralized control of a battalion-size unit is similar to the above except that the 

unit CBRN NCO controls the decontamination. The unit commander and the CBRN NCO 

direct the site setup and provide security and C2 for the selected site. The CBRN NCO 

travels with the decontamination element and communicates via the radio. 

c. Centralized control for a brigade-size unit is done when decontamination assets 

within the brigade have been consolidated. In this technique, the brigade CBRN NCO 

performs those functions described for the battalion CBRN NCO. 

3. Phases 

The three phases for an operational decontamination are preparation, execution, and 

site clearance (see Table IV-2). 

Table IV-2. Operational Decontamination Phases 

Area Actions 

Preparation 

Decontamination 

assessment 

Identify the personnel and equipment to be decontaminated. 

Coordination 

Request decontamination support. The CBRNE section conducts coordination with the 

contaminated unit on the linkup point. Decontamination operations should be done between 1 

and 6 hours after becoming contaminated. 

IV-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-2. Operational Decontamination Phases (Continued) 

Area Actions 

Preparation 

Site selection 

(selected by the 

controlling HQ) 

Ensure that the site is off the main route but has easy access. 

Ensure that the site has a large enough area (120 square yards per site for a squad-size 

element). 

Ensure that the site has good overhead concealment. 

Ensure that the site has food and water sources (plan for 100 gallons of water per vehicle). 

Ensure that the site has good drainage. 

Linkup Ensure that the NCOIC knows where to link up with the contaminated unit and knows the location 

for site setup. Radio communication is essential for the operations. 

Site setup 

Ensure that the decontamination element is positioned properly and ready to dispense hot, soapy 

water. 

Ensure that the contaminated unit sets up and operates the MOPP gear exchange at the same 

time as the vehicle wash down. Consider contamination runoff when positioning the 

decontamination element. 

Execution 

Site control Ensure that the drivers of the contaminated vehicles know when to move into position at the 

wash-down location. 

Ensure that the contaminated unit has provided site security. 

Vehicle spray 

down 

Ensure that the decontamination site NCOIC is processing vehicles at a rate of 2 to 3 minutes per 

vehicle. 

MOPP gear 

exchange 

(buddy team) 

Ensure that personnel are going through the MOPP gear exchange at the rate of 60 minutes per 

squad/crew. 

Site Clearance 

Cleanup Ensure that the MOPP gear exchange area is cleaned up (NCOIC). 

Marking Ensure that the team properly marks the decontamination site (NCOIC). 

Reporting Send the NBC5 report forward (NCOIC). 

a. Preparation. 

(1) The preparation phase starts with the decision to conduct an operational 

decontamination and ends with a site that is set up and ready for operation. The 

ICAM/CAM is used to identify which vehicles need decontaminating, and decontamination 

support is requested. 

(2) Coordination with higher HQ includes identifying the linkup point and the 

unit that will provide the decontamination support. SOI are exchanged, and the technique

(decentralized company-size control, centralized battalion size control, or centralized 

brigade-size control) is selected. The number and type of vehicles and the number of 

personnel for a MOPP gear exchange are provided. 

(3) Site selection is done by the controlling HQ. The site may have been 

designated in the OPORD or selected based on the current METT-TC. 

(4) Linkup at the designated point includes establishing security, positioning 

necessary marshalling areas, camouflaging removal points, designating the direction of flow 

into and out of the site, and ensuring that unit supply has sufficient replacement MOPP 

gear. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-3 
(5) Site setup requires the decontamination crew to position itself upwind from 

the entrance, set up the MOPP gear exchange about 164 feet upwind from the vehicle wash 

down at a 45° angle, and notify the contaminated unit when the site is ready. 

b. Execution. 

(1) The execution phase starts with establishing positive control over the site 

and ends with processing the last contaminated vehicle and person through the site. 

Vehicles move from the predecontamination area to the site upon order or by watching the 

vehicle ahead. The assistant driver leaves the vehicle and proceeds to the MOPP gear 

exchange point. The contaminated unit provides security. Throughout the execution

phase, periodic wind checks should be performed to ensure that the wind has not shifted 

and placed the soldiers conducting the MOPP gear exchange in a CBRN hazard. 

(2) Each vehicle receives a 2- to 4-minute wash down with hot, soapy water 

and moves to a point near the MOPP gear exchange area. Vehicles can be washed with 

cold, soapy water or only cold water when hot, soapy water is not available. Any remaining

personnel requiring a MOPP gear exchange will get one then. When the squad or crew has

finished, personnel remount the vehicles and move into an after-decontamination AA to 

await further instructions or move to their next battle position. 

(3) Vehicle Wash Down. 

(a) A vehicle wash down may be conducted with or without standard 

decontamination equipment in a one- or two-lane configuration. An unsupported wash

down requires the contaminated unit to use its assigned decontamination apparatuses or 

other alternate washing equipment that can produce 60 to 120 pounds per square inch (psi) 

of water pressure. The capacity to heat water and inject soap increases the effectiveness. A 

supported wash down requires decontamination equipment assets that are organic to the 

unit or from a supporting decontamination unit. A two-lane wash down is simply two 

one-lane wash downs parallel to each other (see Figure IV-1). 

Figure IV-1. Two-Lane Wash Down 

IV-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(b) Other configurations are limited only by the constraints of the 

METT-TC. Figure IV-2 illustrates a dispersed operational decontamination setup. Table 

IV-3, page IV-6, describes the vehicle wash-down process. 

Figure IV-2. Dispersed Operational-Decontamination Setup 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-5 
Table IV-3. Vehicle Wash-Down Process 

Steps Equipment Procedures 

1. Marshal the area. The 

unit is tactically 

dispersed. Personnel at 

the control point direct 

movement. 

None Personnel at the control point supervise the 

preparation of vehicles and direct 

movement out of the AA. 

2. Button up. None The crew closes all access doors, hatches, 

windows, and other openings. They remove 

camouflage and cover muzzles. If required, 

they (less drivers) move to the MOPP gear 

exchange area. They move to the wash 

area on order. 

3. Wash down. Delivery system (such as the M12, M17, 

MPDS, 65- or 125-GPM pump, firefighting 

equipment, and so forth) that delivers hot, 

soapy water at 60 to 120 psi. 

Sufficient water, fuel, and detergent for 

vehicles. 

Personnel wash equipment from top to 

bottom. The decontamination crew wears a 

TAP or wet-weather gear over MOPP gear. 

4. Move to AA. None Vehicles move to the MOPP gear 

exchange area (if required) or the next 

battle position. 

(4) MOPP Gear Exchange. A MOPP gear exchange can be done with a buddy team, 

a triple buddy team, or an individual (emergency). For planning purposes, estimate 30 

minutes for a squad or a platoon-size element to complete the exchange. Since individual 

performance is severely degraded after 6 hours at MOPP4, the MOPP gear exchange should 

be scheduled before that time. 

(a) Buddy Team Method. This method uses pairs of warfighters under the 

supervision of their squad leader/team leader (TL) to conduct the buddy team MOPP gear 

exchange. See Table IV-4 for the procedures for the buddy team method MOPP gear 

exchange with the joint-service, lightweight, integrated suit technology (JSLIST). See 

Table IV-5, page IV-11, for BDO MOPP gear exchange steps. See Table IV-6, page IV-19,

for the step-by-step procedures for units equipped with the combat vehicle crewman 

uniform system (CVCUS)/chemical protective undergarment (CPU). 

(b) Triple Buddy Team Method. This method is used by personnel equipped 

with the M40A1, M42, or M43 mask with the quick-doff hood. A third person is needed to 

hold the filter canister and hose to prevent pulling the mask away from the person’s face. 

See Table IV-7, page IV-23, for the step-by-step procedures for this method. For units 

equipped with the CVCUS/CPU, see Table IV-8, page IV-28. 

(c) Individual (Emergency) Method. This method is used only when a person 

does not have a buddy to help him and the risk of MOPP gear failure demands that an 

exchange occur. See Table IV-9, page IV-32, for the step-by-step procedures for this 

method. For units equipped with the CVCUS/CPU, see Table IV-10, page IV-36. For the 

procedures for the individual (emergency) method of MOPP gear exchange with the 

JSLIST, see Table IV-11, page IV-39. 

IV-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
c. Site Clearance. The site clearance phase includes cleanup, marking, and 

reporting. METT-TC will dictate the cleanup requirements. Contaminated waste is 

collected from the operational decontamination. See Appendix K for information on site 

clearance procedures. 

Table IV-4. Steps for the Buddy Team Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the JSLIST 

Chemical-Protective Ensemble 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

1. Decontaminate gear 

(removes gross 

contamination from 

individual gear [weapon, 

helmet, load-bearing 

equipment, and mask 

carrier]). 

All Four long-handled 

brushes 

A large piece of 

plastic (poncho or 

similar material) 

STB (bulk) 

Shovel 

The individual mixes three parts earth to two parts 

STB.

 CB One 30-gallon 

container 

STB dry mix 

One IEDK 

The individual removes and discards the 

chemical-protective helmet cover. He brushes or 

rubs STB onto his individual gear (helmet and mask 

carrier) and the hose of the M42 or M43 mask if 

worn. He gently shakes off any excess STB and 

sets aside his gear on an uncontaminated surface. 

 Radiological Hot, soapy water The individual brushes or wipes radiological 

contamination from his individual gear. He washes 

it with hot, soapy water (if available) and then sets it 

aside to dry on an uncontaminated surface (plastic, 

poncho, or similar material). 

2. Prepare to 

decontaminate (facilitates 

later removal of 

overgarment trousers 

and overboots). 

All Cutting tool Buddy 1 removes the M9 paper from Buddy 2’s 

overgarment. He unties the bow in Buddy 2’s coat 

retention cord if tied. He unfastens the webbingstrip snap at the bottom front of Buddy 2’s coat and 

releases the coat retention-cord loop at the waist. 

Buddy 1 then loosens the bottom of the coat by 

pulling the material away from Buddy 2’s body. 

NOTES: 1. If wearing the M43 protective mask, 

tie the microphone cord to the hose of the 

mask. 2. The M40 voice amplifier (M7) and the 

M42 detachable microphone cannot be 

decontaminated and will be disposed of as 

contaminated waste; however, ensure that 

these items are contaminated before disposing 

of them. Buddy 1 unfastens and loosely refastens 

the hook-and-pile fasteners at Buddy 2’s wrists and 

ankles. He unfastens or cuts the fasteners on 

Buddy 2’s overboots. NOTE: A person can do 

this step by himself or with the help of his 

buddy. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-7 
Table IV-4. Steps for the Buddy Team Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the JSLIST

Chemical-Protective Ensemble (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

3. Decontaminate mask 

and hood (removes 

gross contamination). 

CB Two IEDKs per 

person 

Buddy 1 instructs Buddy 2 to decontaminate his own 

gloves using an IEDK. Buddy 1 instructs Buddy 2 to 

place two fingers (thumb and forefinger) on his own 

voicemitter to ensure the mask-to-face integrity. 

Buddy 1 uses and IEDK to wipe Buddy 2’s eye lens 

outserts from the top, down NOTE: Do not press so 

hard that you break Buddy 2's face mask seal. If 

wearing the JSLIST hood, stop here and move on 

to Step 4. If wearing the one-piece hood or the 

quick-doff hood, Buddy 1 wipes the rest of Buddy 2’s 

hood from the top of the head to the bottom of the 

hood. After he has finished wiping Buddy 2’s mask 

and hood, he must wipe his own gloves in preparation 

for rolling Buddy 2’s hood. He starts from the rear and 

rolls Buddy 2’s hood, using 2-inch tucks, until it 

reaches the center of his head. He rolls the front of 

Buddy 2’s hood tightly under the outlet valve and filter. 

He ensures that the hood is off Buddy 2’s garment. 

 Radiological Three containers 

(about 3-gallon 

capacity) 

Two sponges 

Soapy water 

Rinse water 

Paper towels or 

similar drying 

material 

Buddy 1 wipes Buddy 2’s mask and hood (if wearing 

the one-piece or quick-doff hood) with a sponge 

dipped in hot, soapy water and rinses them with a 

sponge dipped in clean water. He dries Buddy 2’s 

mask and hood with paper towels or rags. Buddy 2 

wipes his own gloves. NOTE: Cool, soapy water is 

not as effective for removing contamination, but it 

can be used if you scrub longer. If the water 

supply is limited, use drinking water from a 

canteen and a wet sponge or cloth. If water is not 

available, brush off the radioactive dust particles. 

4. Remove 

chemical-protective 

coat (limits the spread 

of agents and helps 

prevent agents from 

penetrating through to 

the undergarments or 

the skin). 

All Two discard 

containers (e.g., 

plastic bags) 

Buddy 2 locates the suspender snap couplers on the 

outside of his coat and releases them. If Buddy 2 is 

wearing the JSLIST hood, then Buddy 1 unties Buddy 

2’s draw cord, presses the barrel lock release, and 

unsnaps the barrel lock. NOTE: If Buddy 1 has 

difficulty grasping the barrel lock, he should use 

the draw cord to pull the barrel lock away from the 

mask. This will allow him to grasp and unfasten 

the barrel lock without touching the interior of the 

hood. Buddy 1 unfastens Buddy 2’s front closure flap 

and pulls the slide fastener down from the chin to the 

bottom of the coat. Buddy 1 instructs Buddy 2 to turn 

around. Buddy 1 grasps Buddy 2’s hood, rolls it inside 

out, and pulls it off Buddy 2’s head. Buddy 1 grasps 

Buddy 2’s coat at the shoulders, instructs him to make 

a fist to prevent the chemical-protective gloves from 

coming off, and pulls the coat down and away from 

him, ensuring that the black part of the coat is not 

touched. NOTE: If there is difficulty removing the 

coat in this manner, Buddy 2 should pull one arm 

out at a time. Buddy 1 lays the coat on the ground, 

black side up. NOTE: Buddy 2 will use the coat later 

as an uncontaminated surface to stand on when 

putting on his new overgarment. 

IV-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-4. Steps for the Buddy Team Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the JSLIST

Chemical-Protective Ensemble (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

5. Remove 

chemical-protective 

trousers. 

All Two discard 

containers (from 

step 4) 

Buddy 1 unfastens Buddy 2’s hook-and-pile fastener at 

the waistband, unfastens the two front closure snaps, 

and opens the fly slide fastener on the front of the 

trousers. Buddy 1 grasps Buddy 2’s trousers at the 

hips and pulls them down to his knees. Buddy 1 

instructs Buddy 2 to lift one leg (with the foot pointed 

down and bent slightly at the knee for stability). Buddy 

1 grasps the trouser leg near Buddy 2’s elevated foot 

with a hand on each side and pulls the trouser leg in an 

alternating motion until Buddy 2 can step out of it. 

Repeat the process for the other leg. Buddy 1 discards 

the trousers. 

CAUTION 

Care must be taken to avoid contaminating 

Buddy 2’s clothing or skin. 

6. Remove 

chemical-protective 

overboots. 

All Two discard 

containers (from 

step 4) 

Buddy 1 Instructs Buddy 2 to loosen his overboots by 

alternately stepping on each heel and pulling up on his 

foot. Buddy 1 pulls off Buddy 2’s overboots (one 

overboot at a time), and Buddy 2 steps directly onto the 

coat spread on the ground as each foot is withdrawn 

from the overboot. NOTE: Buddy 2 may put his hand 

on Buddy 1 for balance but must then 

decontaminate his gloves. Buddy 1 discards the 

overboots. 

7. Remove 

chemical-protective 

gloves and liners. 

All Two discard 

containers (from 

step 4) 

Buddy 2 holds the fingertips of his gloves and partially 

slides his hand out. When the fingers of both hands are 

free, he holds his arms away from his body and lets the 

gloves drop off, away from the black side of the coat. 

Buddy 2 removes the glove liners. Buddy 1 discards 

the chemical-protective gloves and liners. NOTE: If 

Buddy 2 has difficulty removing the gloves, then 

Buddy 1 can assist. 

CAUTION 

Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 must take care to avoid 

letting their gloves come in contact with the coat 

spread on the ground. 

8. Put on 

chemical-protective 

trousers. 

All One JSLIST 

chemicalprotective 

ensemble per 

person 

Buddy 1 opens the package containing the new 

trousers without touching the inside of the package. 

Buddy 2 removes the trousers. While standing on an 

uncontaminated surface, Buddy 2 puts on his trousers, 

closes the slide fastener, and fastens the two fly 

opening snaps. He pulls his suspenders over his 

shoulders and fastens the snap couplers. He adjusts 

the length of the suspenders to ensure a comfortable fit. 

He adjusts the hook-and-pile fastener at the waistband 

for a snug fit. 

CAUTION 

Buddy 2 must take care to ensure that the 

trousers touch only the uncontaminated surface. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-9 
Table IV-4. Steps for the Buddy Team Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the JSLIST

Chemical-Protective Ensemble (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

9. Put on 

chemical-protective 

coat. 

All One JSLIST 

chemicalprotective 

ensemble per 

person 

Buddy 1 opens the package containing the new coat 

without touching the inside of the package. Buddy 2 

removes the coat without touching the outside of the 

package. He puts on the coat, pulls the slide fastener 

up as far as his chest, and secures the front closure 

hook-and-pile fastener on the front flap up as far as 

his chest. He pulls the bottom of the coat down over 

his trousers. He grasps the loop on the back of the 

overgarment, pulls the loop away from the coat, and 

brings the loop forward between his legs, pulling on it 

so that the bottom of the coat fits snugly over the 

trousers. He places the loop over the webbing-strip 

snap and fastens it. He adjusts the coat retention cord 

if necessary and ties the excess cord in a bow. 

10. Put on 

chemical-protective 

overboots. 

All One set of 

chemicalprotective 

overboots per 

person 

Buddy 1 opens the package containing the new 

overboots without touching the inside of the package. 

Buddy 2 removes the overboots without touching the 

outside of the package. He puts the overboots on 

over his combat boots and secures the fasteners. He 

pulls his trouser legs over the overboots and secures 

the two hook-and-pile fasteners on each ankle so that 

they fit snugly around the overboots. 

11. Put on 

chemical-protective 

hood. 

All One JSLIST 

chemicalprotective 

ensemble per 

person 

Buddy 2 puts the hood on his head. He completely 

closes the front slide fastener on the coat and secures 

the hook-and-pile fastener on the front flap as far as 

the top of the slide fastener. He places the edge of 

the hood around the edge of the mask and secures 

the hook-and-pile fastener on the hood. 

He pulls the draw cord tight around the edge of the 

mask, snaps the ends of the barrel lock together, 

squeezes both ends of the barrel lock while pulling the 

draw cord, and slides the barrel lock up under his chin 

to keep the cord in place. Without touching Buddy 2, 

Buddy 1 inspects the hood and mask to ensure that 

the hood is positioned properly and the skin is not 

exposed. Buddy 2 adjusts the hood and mask as 

directed. If Buddy 1’s assistance is required for 

proper adjustment, Buddy 2 will decontaminate Buddy 

1’s gloves before he touches the hood or mask. 

WARNING 

The barrel lock release button must face 

away from the rear of the user when 

worn to avoid the barrel lock from 

unfastening and possibly exposing the 

user to contamination. 

IV-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-4. Steps for the Buddy Team Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the JSLIST

Chemical-Protective Ensemble (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

12. Put on 

chemical-protective 

gloves and liners. 

All One set of 

chemicalprotective gloves 

with liners per 

person (correct 

size) 

M9 detector paper 

Buddy 1 opens the package containing the new 

chemical-protective gloves and liners without 

touching the inside of the package. Buddy 2 

removes the gloves and liners without touching 

the outside of the package. He puts on the 

gloves and liners, pulls the cuffs of the coat over 

the chemical-protective gloves, and fastens the 

hook-and-pile fasteners on each sleeve of the 

coat. He puts the M9 detector paper on as 

required by the SOP. 

13. Reverse roles. All One JSLIST 

chemicalprotective 

ensemble per 

person 

One set of 

chemicalprotective gloves 

with liners per 

person (correct 

size) 

Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 reverse roles and repeat 

steps 2 through 13. 

14. Secure gear. All One chemicalprotective helmet 

cover per person 

Buddy 1 places the new chemical-protective 

helmet cover on the PASGT helmet if used. He 

uses the buddy system to check the fit of all 

secured gear. 

Table IV-5. Steps for the BDO MOPP Gear Exchange 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

1. Decontaminate gear 

(removes gross 

contamination from 

individual gear 

[weapons, helmet, 

load-bearing 

equipment, and mask 

carrier]). 

All Four long-handled 

brushes 

A large piece of 

plastic (poncho or 

similar material) 

Shovels 

The individual mixes three parts earth to two 

parts STB. 

CB One 30-gallon 

container 

STB dry mix 

One IEDK 

The individual removes and discards the 

chemical-protective helmet cover if worn. He 

brushes or rubs STB onto his individual gear 

(helmet and mask carrier) and the hose of the 

M42 or M43 mask if worn. He gently shakes off 

any excess STB and sets aside his gear on an 

uncontaminated surface. 

 Radiological Hot, soapy water The individual brushes or wipes radiological 

contamination from his individual gear. He 

washes it with hot, soapy water (if available) 

and then sets it aside to dry on an 

uncontaminated surface (plastic, poncho, or 

similar material). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-11 
Table IV-5 Steps for the BDO MOPP Gear Exchange (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

2. Prepare to 

decontaminate 

(facilitates later 

removal of 

BDO trousers and 

overboots). 

All Cutting tool Buddy 1 unfastens the shoulder straps on 

Buddy 2’s hood, pulls them over his shoulder, 

and reattaches them to the hook-and-pile 

fasteners. He loosens the draw cord on 

Buddy 2’s hood. The M40 voice amplifier 

(M7) and the M42A2 detachable microphone 

cannot be decontaminated and will be 

disposed of as contaminated waste; however, 

ensure that these items are contaminated 

before disposing of them. Buddy 1 removes 

the M9 detector paper from Buddy 2’s 

overgarment. He unties Buddy 2’s draw cords 

on the trouser legs. He unzips Buddy 2’s 

trouser legs and rolls a cuff in each trouser 

leg, ensuring that the cuffs do not come above 

the tops of his overboots (see Figure IV-3). 

He unfastens or cuts the fasteners on Buddy 

2’s overboots. When wearing overboots, he 

unsnaps both quick releases on Buddy 2’s 

overboots. NOTE: An individual can do this 

step by himself or with the help of his 

buddy. 

Figure IV-3. Rolling the Cuff in the Trouser 

IV-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-5. Steps for the BDO MOPP Gear Exchange (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

3. Decontaminate mask 

and hood (removes 

gross contamination). 

CB Two IEDKs per person Buddy 1 uses an IEDK to wipe Buddy 2’s eye 

lens outserts from the top, down. NOTE: Do 

not press so hard that you break Buddy 2’s 

face mask seal. Buddy 1 then wipes the rest of 

Buddy 2’s hood from the top of the head to the 

bottom of the hood (see Figure IV-4). After he 

has finished wiping Buddy 2’s mask, he must 

wipe his own gloves in preparation for rolling 

Buddy 2’s hood. He starts at the rear and rolls 

Buddy 2’s hood, using 2-inch tucks, until it 

reaches the center of his head (see Figure IV-5, 

page IV-14). He rolls the front of Buddy 2’s hood 

tightly under the outlet valve and filter. He 

ensures that the hood is off of Buddy 2’s BDO. 

CAUTION 

Place two fingers on the voicemitter to 

prevent the mask seal from breaking. 

 Radiological Two containers (about 

4-gallon capacity) 

Two sponges 

Soapy water 

Rinse water 

Paper towels or similar 

drying material 

Buddy 1 wipes Buddy 2’s mask and hood with a 

sponge dipped in hot, soapy water and rinses 

them with a sponge dipped in clean water. He 

dries Buddy 2’s mask and hood with paper 

towels or rags. Buddy 2 wipes his own gloves. 

NOTES: 1. Cool, soapy water is not as 

effective for removing contamination, but it 

can be used if you scrub longer. If the water 

supply is limited, use drinking water from a 

canteen and wet a sponge or cloth. If water 

is not available, brush off the radioactive 

dust particles. 2. Do not reverse roles. Only 

Buddy 2’s hood will be decontaminated and 

rolled at this time. 

Figure IV-4. Wiping From the Head to the Bottom of the Hood 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-13 
Figure IV-5. Rolling the Hood to the Center of the Head 

Table IV-5. Steps for the BDO MOPP Gear Exchange (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

4. Remove BDO and 

overboots (limits the 

spread of agents and helps 

prevent agents from 

penetrating through to the 

undergarments or the 

skin). 

All Two discard containers 

(e.g., plastic bags) 

Buddy 1 grasps Buddy 2’s BDO jacket, 

unsnaps the snaps individually (see 

Figure IV-6), and unties the draw cord 

at the bottom of the jacket. He 

unfastens the hook-and-pile fasteners 

at the wrist of Buddy 2’s jacket and 

then refastens them. He unfastens the 

hook-and-pile fastener over the 

zippered front of Buddy 2’s jacket and 

unzips the jacket. He grasps Buddy 

2’s jacket at the shoulders and 

instructs him to make a fist. He then 

pulls Buddy 2’s jacket down and away 

from him, ensuring that the black part 

of the jacket is not touched (see Figure 

IV-7). He lays Buddy 2’s BDO jacket 

on the ground, black side up (it will be 

used to stand on later). He carefully 

unfastens and unzips Buddy 2’s 

trousers. NOTE: Do not loosen 

Buddy 2’s waist tabs. He instructs 

Buddy 2 to loosen his overboots by 

alternately stepping on each heel and 

pulling up on his foot (see Figure IV-8). 

He grasps Buddy 2’s trousers and 

pulls them down to his knees. He 

instructs Buddy 2 to walk out of his 

trousers and overboots simultaneously 

and step onto the black side of the 

jacket (see Figure IV-9, page IV-16). 

Buddy 2 should step onto the jacket 

wearing his mask, BDU, combat boots, 

and gloves. 

IV-14 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure IV-6. Unsnapping the Trousers from the Jacket 

Figure IV-7. Pulling the Jacket Down and Away 

Figure IV-8. Loosening the Overboots 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-15 
Figure IV-9. Stepping on the Black Lining of the Jacket 

Table IV-5. Steps for the BDO MOPP Gear Exchange (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination Type Required Equipment Required Procedures 

5. Remove gloves. All Two discard 

containers (from step 

4) 

The individual holds the fingertips of his 

gloves and partially slides his hand out. 

When the fingers of both hands are free, he 

holds his arms away from his body and lets 

the gloves drop (see Figure IV-10). 

6. Put on BDO. All One set of CPOs per 

person 

Buddy 1 opens the package containing the 

new BDO without touching the inside of the 

package. Buddy 2 pulls out the BDO 

without touching the outside of the package. 

He puts on the BDO and fastens it, leaving 

the trouser legs open (see Figure IV-11). 

NOTE: Do not reverse roles. Only Buddy 

2 will put on the clean overgarment at 

this time. 

Figure IV-10. Removing the Gloves 

IV-16 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure IV-11. Putting on the New BDO 

Table IV-5. Steps for the BDO MOPP Gear Exchange (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

7. Put on overboots and 

gloves. 

All One set of chemicalprotective 

overboots per 

person 

One set of chemicalprotective gloves 

per person (correct 

size) 

M9 detector paper 

Buddy 1 opens the package of clean 

overboots without touching the inside of the 

package. Buddy 2 removes the overboots 

from the package without touching the 

outside of the package, puts them on, and 

fastens his trouser legs. Buddy 1 opens 

the package of clean gloves without 

touching the inside of the package. Buddy 

2 removes the gloves from the package 

without touching the outside of the package 

and puts them on. Buddy 2 puts on the M9 

detector paper (see Figure IV-12, page 

IV-18). NOTE: Do not reverse roles. 

Only Buddy 2 will put on the clean 

overboots and gloves at this time. The 

gloves and overboots will have a light 

powdery coating. This is normal. It is 

not necessary to remove it. It will not 

affect the protective qualities. 

8. Secure hood. All One IEDK Buddy 1 uses an IEDK to wipe Buddy 2’s 

gloves. He unrolls Buddy 2’s hood, 

attaches the straps, and tightens the neck 

cord. Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 reverse roles 

and repeat steps 2 through 8. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-17 
Table IV-5. Steps for the BDO MOPP Gear Exchange (Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

9. Secure gear. All One chemicalprotective helmet 

cover per person 

Each individual secures his individual gear 

and puts it back on. He puts on a new 

chemical-protective helmet cover and 

moves to the area of assembly. He uses 

the Buddy system to check the fit of all 

secured gear. 

Figure IV-12. Putting on M9 Detector Paper 

Table IV-6. Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Buddy Team Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

1. Decontaminate gear 

(removes gross 

contamination from 

individual gear 

[weapons, helmet, loadbearing equipment, and 

mask carrier]). 

All Four long-handled 

brushes 

A large piece of plastic 

(poncho or similar 

material) 

STB (bulk) 

Shovel 

The individual mixes three parts earth to 

two parts STB. 

CB One 30-gallon container 

STB dry mix 

One IEDK 

The individual removes and discards the 

chemical-protective helmet cover. He 

brushes or rubs the STB onto his 

individual gear (helmet and mask carrier) 

and the hose of the M42 or M43 mask if 

worn. He gently shakes off any excess 

STB and sets aside his gear on an 

uncontaminated surface. 

 Radiological Hot, soapy water The individual brushes or wipes 

radiological contamination from his 

individual gear. He washes it with hot, 

soapy water (if available) and then sets it 

aside to dry on an uncontaminated 

surface (plastic, poncho, or similar 

material). 

IV-18 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-6. Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Buddy Team Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

2. Prepare to 

decontaminate 

(facilitates MOPP 

gear removal). 

All Cutting tool Buddy 1 unfastens the shoulder straps on Buddy 

2’s hood, pulls them over his shoulder, and 

reattaches them to the hook-and-pile fastener. He 

loosens the draw cord on Buddy 2’s hood. He 

removes the M9 detector paper from Buddy 2’s 

CVCUS. He unzips the ankles on both legs of 

Buddy 2’s CVCUS. He unfastens or cuts the 

fasteners on Buddy 2’s overboots. NOTE: A 

person can do this step by himself or with the 

help of his buddy. 

3. Decontaminate 

mask and hood 

(removes gross 

contamination). 

CB Two IEDKs per 

person 

Buddy 1 instructs Buddy 2 to decontaminate his 

own gloves using an IEDK. Buddy 1 instructs 

Buddy 2 to place two fingers (thumb and forefinger) 

to his own front voicemitter to secure the mask to 

his face for seal integrity. Buddy 1 uses an IEDK to 

wipe Buddy 2’s eye lens outserts from the top, 

down. NOTE: Do not press so hard that you 

break Buddy 2's face mask seal. He then wipes 

the rest of Buddy 2’s hood from the top of the head 

to the bottom of the hood (see Figure IV-4, page 

IV-13). After he has finished wiping Buddy 2’s 

mask, he must wipe his own gloves in preparation 

for rolling Buddy 2’s hood. He starts from the rear 

and rolls Buddy 2's hood, using 2-inch tucks, until it 

reaches the center of his head (see Figure IV-5, 

page IV-14). He rolls the front of Buddy 2’s hood 

tightly under the outlet valve and filter. He ensures 

that the hood is off of Buddy 2’s garment. 

 Radiological Three containers 

(about 4-gallon 

capacity) 

Two sponges 

Soapy water 

Rinse water 

Paper towels or 

similar drying 

material 

Buddy 1 wipes Buddy 2’s mask and hood with a 

sponge dipped in hot, soapy water and rinses them 

with a sponge dipped in clean water. He dries 

Buddy 2’s mask and hood with paper towels or 

rags. Buddy 2 wipes his own gloves. NOTE: Cool, 

soapy water is not as effective for removing 

contamination, but it can be used if scrubbed 

longer. If the water supply is limited, use 

drinking water from a canteen and wet a sponge 

or cloth. If water is not available, brush off the 

radioactive dust particles. Only Buddy 2’s mask 

and hood will be decontaminated and rolled at this 

time. 

4. Remove CVCUS 

and overboots 

(limits the spread of 

contamination). 

All Two discard 

containers (e.g., 

plastic bags) 

Buddy 1 opens all the zippers on Buddy 2’s 

CVCUS in the following order: wrist, ankles, and 

front. While standing behind Buddy 2, Buddy 1 

grasps the shoulders of Buddy 2’s CVCUS and 

instructs him to make a fist to ensure that his 

gloves do not come off. He then pulls Buddy 2’s 

CVCUS down below his knees, turning it inside out. 

Buddy 1 unzips Buddy 2’s CPU jacket and removes 

it by grasping it at the shoulders, pulling it down, 

and turning it inside out (see Figure IV-13). He 

places it along side Buddy 2 with the clean side up. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-19 
Table IV-6. Steps for the CVCUS/CPU (Buddy Team Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Required Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

5. Remove 

overboots and 

gloves. 

All Two discard 

containers (from 

step 4) 

Buddy 2 partially removes his overboots by 

alternately stepping on each heel and pulling up on 

his foot. Buddy 1 grasps one leg of Buddy 2’s 

CVCUS and his overboot and instructs him to 

remove his leg and foot simultaneously. As Buddy 

2 removes each leg and foot, he steps directly onto 

the clean inside of the CPU jacket (see Figure 

IV-14). Buddy 1 discards the overboots. Buddy 2 

holds the fingertips of his gloves and partially slides 

his hand out. When the fingers of both hands are 

free, he holds his arm away from his body and lets 

the gloves drop. Buddy 2 removes his protective 

glove liners. Buddy 1 discards the chemicalprotective gloves and liners. 

Figure IV-13. Removing the Garment and Turning it Inside Out 

Figure IV-14. Removing Your Leg and Foot From the Garment 

IV-20 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-6. Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Buddy Team Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

6. Remove CPU 

trousers and 

combat boots. 

All Two discard 

containers 

Buddy 2 partially removes his boots by alternately 

stepping on each heel and pulling up on his foot. 

Buddy 2 removes his foot, stepping directly onto 

the clean side of the CPU jacket. Repeat the 

procedure for the other foot. Next, Buddy 1 will 

remove Buddy 2’s CPU trousers by pulling down on 

the sides and turning them inside out. Buddy 2 is 

now stripped to his underwear and mask and is 

ready to put on new clothing. Combat boots should 

remain beside Buddy 2 on the clean area of the 

CPU jacket. Buddy 1 discards the CVCUS and 

CPU trousers. 

CAUTION 

Use extreme caution to ensure that the 

outside of the CPU does not touch the 

skin or underclothing of Buddy 2 or the 

combat boots. 

7. Put on CPU and 

CVCUS. 

All One CPU and 

CVCUS per 

person 

Buddy 1 opens the package containing the new 

CPU without touching the inside of the package. 

Buddy 2 pulls out the CPU without touching the 

outside of the package. He puts on the new 

clothing in the following order: CPU trousers, CPU 

jacket, combat boots, and CVCUS (over the CPU). 

8. Put on overboots 

and gloves. 

All One set of 

chemicalprotective 

overboots per 

person 

One set of 

chemical-protective 

gloves per person 

M9 detector paper 

Buddy 1 opens the package of clean overboots 

without touching the inside of the package. Buddy 

2 removes the overboots without touching the 

outside of the package and puts them on. Buddy 1 

opens the package of clean gloves without 

touching the inside. Buddy 2 removes the gloves 

without touching the outside of the package and 

puts them on. Buddy 2 puts on the M9 detector 

paper (see Figure IV-15). NOTE: The gloves and 

overboots will have a light powdery coating. 

This is normal. It is not necessary to remove it. 

It will not affect the protective qualities. 

Figure IV-15. Reapplying the M9 Detector Paper 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-21 
Table IV-6. Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Buddy Team Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

9. Secure hood. CB One IEDK Buddy 1 wipes his rubber gloves with an IEDK. He 

unrolls Buddy 2’s hood, attaches the straps, and 

tightens the neck cord. Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 

reverse rolls and repeat steps 2 through 9. 

10. Secure gear. All One chemicalprotective helmet 

cover per person 

Each individual secures his individual gear and 

puts it back on. He puts on a new 

chemical-protective helmet cover and moves to the 

area of assembly. He uses the buddy system to 

check the fit of all secured gear. 

Table IV-7. Steps for the Triple Buddy Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the M40A1 and 

M42 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

1. Decontaminate 

gear (removes 

gross contamination 

from individual gear 

[weapons, helmet, 

load-bearing 

equipment, and 

mask carrier]). 

All Four long-handled 

brushes 

A large piece of 

plastic (poncho or 

similar material) 

STB (bulk) 

Shovel 

The individual mixes three parts earth to two parts 

STB.

 CB One 30-gallon 

container 

STB dry mix 

One IEDK 

The individual removes and discards the 

chemical-protective helmet cover if worn. He 

brushes or rubs STB onto his individual gear 

(helmet and mask carrier) and the hose of the M42 

or M43 mask if worn. He gently shakes off any 

excess STB and sets aside his gear on an 

uncontaminated surface. 

 Radiological Hot, soapy water The individual brushes or wipes radiological 

contamination from his individual gear. He washes 

it with hot, soapy water (if available) and then sets 

it aside to dry on an uncontaminated surface 

(plastic, poncho, or similar material). 

IV-22 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-7. Steps for the Triple Buddy Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the M40A1 and 

M42 (Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

2. Prepare to 

decontaminate 

(facilitates later 

removal of 

overgarment 

trousers and 

overboots). 

All Cutting tool Buddy 3 unfastens the shoulder and waist straps of 

the M42 canister carrier from Buddy 2. Once the 

canister and canister carrier are removed, Buddy 3 

holds or tends to the canister throughout the MOPP 

gear exchange. NOTE: The canister is attached 

to the mask by a hose; ensure that the hose 

does not become fully extended, potentially 

causing a break in the seal of Buddy 2’s mask. 

Buddy 1 unfastens the shoulder straps on Buddy 

2’s hood, pulls them over his shoulder, and 

reattaches them to the hook-and-pile fastener. He 

loosens the draw cord on Buddy 2’s hood and ties 

the microphone cord to the hose of his mask (see 

Figure IV-16). He removes the M9 detector paper. 

He unzips Buddy 2’s trouser legs and rolls a cuff in 

each, ensuring that the cuffs do not come above 

the tops of his overboots. He unfastens or cuts the 

fasteners on Buddy 2’s overboots. 

Figure IV-16. Tying the Microphone Cord to the Hose of the Mask 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-23 
Table IV-7. Steps for the Triple Buddy Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the M40A1 and 

M42 (Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

3. Decontaminate 

mask and hood 

(removes gross 

contamination). 

CB Two IEDKs per person Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 uses an IEDK to wipe Buddy 2’s 

eye lens outserts from the top, down. 

NOTE: Do not press so hard that Buddy 

2’s face mask seal is broken. Buddy 3 

continues to hold the canister. Buddy 1 

then wipes the rest of Buddy 2’s hood from 

the top of the head to the bottom of the 

hood (see Figure IV-4, page IV-13). After 

he has finished wiping the mask, he must 

wipe his own gloves in preparation for 

rolling Buddy 2’s hood, using 2-inch tucks, 

until it reaches the center of his head (see 

Figure IV-5, page IV-14). He rolls the front 

of the hood tightly under the outlet valve 

and star knob. He ensures that the hood is 

off of Buddy 2’s garment. 

Radiological Three containers (about 

4-gallon capacity) 

Two sponges 

Soapy water 

Rinse water 

Paper towels or similar 

drying material 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 wipes Buddy 2’s mask and hood 

with a sponge dipped in hot, soapy water 

and rinses them with a sponge dipped in 

clean water. He dries Buddy 2’s mask and 

hood with paper towels or rags. Buddy 2 

wipes his own gloves. NOTE: Cool, soapy 

water is not as effective for removing 

contamination, but it can be used if you 

scrub longer. If the water supply is 

limited, use drinking water from a 

canteen and wet a sponge or cloth. Only 

Buddy 2’s mask and hood will be 

decontaminated and rolled at this time. 

IV-24 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-7. Steps for the Triple Buddy Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the M40A1 and 

M42 (Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

4. Remove 

overgarments and 

overboots (limits the 

spread of agents and 

helps prevent agents 

from penetrating 

through to the 

undergarments or the 

skin). 

All Two discard containers 

(e.g., plastic bags) 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 grasps Buddy 2’s outside 

overgarment jacket, unsnaps the snaps 

individually, and unties the draw cord at 

the bottom of the jacket. He unfastens 

the hook-and-pile fastener at the wrist of 

Buddy 2’s jacket and then refastens it. He 

unfastens the hook-and-pile fastener over 

the zippered front of Buddy 2’s jacket and 

unzips the jacket. Buddy 1 grasps Buddy 

2’s jacket by the shoulders and instructs 

him to make a fist. He then pulls the 

jacket down and away from Buddy 2, 

ensuring that the black part of the jacket is 

not touched (see Figure IV-17). He lays 

Buddy 2’s overgarment jacket on the 

ground (it will be used to stand on later). 

Buddy 1 carefully unfastens and unzips 

Buddy 2’s trousers. NOTE: Do not 

loosen Buddy 2’s waist tabs. Buddy 2 

breaks the seals on his overboots by 

alternately stepping on each heel and 

pulling up on his foot. He grasps his 

trousers and pulls them down to his 

knees. Buddy 1 instructs Buddy 2 to walk 

out of his trousers and overboots, taking 

care not to step on the contaminated side 

of the overgarment. If Buddy 2 is wearing 

overboots, Buddy 1 removes Buddy 2’s 

trousers first and then helps him step out 

of his overboots onto the black side of the 

jacket. Buddy 2 steps onto the jacket 

wearing his mask, BDU, combat boots, 

and gloves. 

Figure IV-17. Removing the Outer Garment 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-25 
Table IV-7. Steps for the Triple Buddy Method of MOPP Gear Exchange With the M40A1 and 

M42 (Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

5. Remove gloves. All Discard containers 

(from step 4) 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 2 holds the fingertips of his gloves 

and partially slides his hand out. When 

the fingers of both hands are free, he 

holds his arms away from his body and 

lets the gloves drop. 

6. Put on the 

overgarment. 

All One set of chemicalprotective 

overgarments per 

person 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 opens the package containing 

the new overgarment without touching the 

inside of the package. Buddy 2 pulls out 

the overgarment without touching the 

outside of the package. He puts on the 

overgarment and fastens it, leaving the 

trouser legs open. NOTE: Do not reverse 

roles. Only Buddy 2 will put on the 

clean overgarments at this time. 

7. Put on overboots and 

gloves. 

All One set of chemicalprotective overboots 

per person 

One set of chemicalprotective gloves per 

person 

M9 detector paper 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 opens the package of clean 

overboots without touching the inside of 

the package. Buddy 2 removes the 

overboots without touching the outside of 

the package, puts them on, and fastens 

his trouser legs. Buddy 1 opens the 

package of clean gloves without touching 

the inside of the package. Buddy 2 

removes the gloves without touching the 

outside of the package and puts them on. 

Buddy 2 puts on the M9 detector paper. 

Do not reverse roles. NOTES: 1. Only 

Buddy 2 will put on clean overboots 

and gloves at this time. 2. The gloves 

and overboots will have a light 

powdery coating. This is normal. It is 

not necessary to remove it. It will not 

affect the protective qualities. 

8. Secure hood. All One IEDK Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 wipes his rubber gloves with an 

IEDK. He unrolls Buddy 2’s hood, 

attaches the straps, and tightens the neck 

cord. He checks the clips and neck cord 

on Buddy 2’s hood. Buddy 3 returns the 

canister to Buddy 2 and assists with 

securing the canister carrier straps. 

Buddy 1, Buddy 2, and Buddy 3 rotate 

roles and repeat steps 2 through 8. They 

rotate roles a third time for the final 

buddy. 

9. Secure gear. All One chemical-protective 

helmet cover per 

person 

Each individual secures his individual 

gear and puts it back on. He puts on a 

new chemical-protective helmet cover and 

moves to the AA. He uses the buddy 

system to check the fit of all secured gear. 

IV-26 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-8. Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Triple Buddy Method) MOPP Gear Exchange With 

the M40A1, M42, and M43 (Aviation and Armor) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

1. Decontaminate 

gear (removes 

gross 

contamination from 

individual gear 

[weapons, helmet, 

load-bearing 

equipment, and 

mask carrier]). 

All Four long-handled brushes 

A large piece of plastic 

(poncho or similar 

material) 

STB (bulk) 

Shovel 

The individual mixes three parts earth to 

two parts STB. 

CB One 30-gallon container 

STB dry mix 

One IEDK 

The individual removes and discards the 

chemical-protective helmet cover if worn. 

He brushes or rubs STB onto his individual 

gear (helmet and mask carrier) and the 

hose of the M43 mask if worn. He gently 

shakes off any excess STB and sets aside 

his gear on an uncontaminated surface. 

 Radiological Hot, soapy water The individual brushes or wipes radiological 

contamination from his individual gear. He 

washes it with hot, soapy water (if 

available) and sets it aside to dry on an 

uncontaminated surface (plastic, poncho, 

or similar material). 

2. Prepare to 

decontaminate 

(facilitates later 

removal of 

overgarment 

trousers and 

overboots). 

All Cutting tool Buddy 3 unfastens the shoulder and waist 

straps of the M42 canister carrier from 

Buddy 2. Once the canister and canister 

carrier are removed, Buddy 3 holds or 

tends the canister throughout the MOPP 

gear exchange. NOTE: The canister is 

attached to the mask by a hose; ensure 

that the hose does not become fully 

extended, potentially causing a break in 

the seal of Buddy 2’s mask. Buddy 1 

unfastens the shoulder straps on Buddy 2’s 

hood, pulls them over his shoulder, and 

reattaches them to the hook-and-pile 

fastener. He loosens the draw cord on 

Buddy 2’s hood and ties the microphone 

cord to the hose of his mask. He removes 

the M9 detector paper from Buddy 2’s 

trouser legs and rolls a cuff in each, 

ensuring that the cuffs do not come above 

the tops of his overboots. He unfastens or 

cuts the fasteners on Buddy 2’s overboots. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-27 
Table IV-8. Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Triple Buddy Method) MOPP Gear Exchange With 

the M40A1, M42, and M43 (Aviation and Armor) (Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

3. Decontaminate 

mask and hood 

(removes gross 

contamination). 

CB Two IEDKs per person Buddy 1 uses an IEDK to wipe Buddy 2’s 

hood, mask, and canister and the hose of 

the M42 or M43 mask. NOTE: Do not 

press so hard that Buddy 2’s face mask 

seal is broken. Buddy 3 continues to hold 

the canister. After Buddy 1 wipes Buddy 

2’s mask and his own gloves, he rolls 

Buddy 2’s hood. He starts from the rear 

and rolls Buddy 2’s hood, using 2-inch 

tucks, until it reaches the center of his head 

(see Figure IV-5, page IV-14). He rolls the 

front of Buddy 2’s hood tightly under the 

outlet valve and star knob. He ensures that 

the hood is off of Buddy 2’s garment. 

Radiological Three containers (about 

4-gallon capacity) 

Two sponges 

Soapy water 

Rinse water 

Paper towels or similar 

drying material 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 wipes Buddy 2's mask and hood 

with a sponge dipped in hot, soapy water 

and rinses them with a sponge dipped in 

clean water. He dries Buddy 2’s mask and 

hood with paper towels or rags. Buddy 2 

wipes his own gloves. NOTES: 1. Cool, 

soapy water is not as effective for 

removing contamination, but it can be 

used if you scrub longer. If the water 

supply is limited, use drinking water 

from a canteen and wet a sponge or 

cloth. If water is not available, brush off 

the radioactive dust particles. Do not 

reverse roles. 2. Only Buddy 2’s hood 

will be decontaminated and rolled at this 

time. 

4. Remove CVCUS 

overboots (limits 

the spread of 

contamination). 

All Two discard containers 

(e.g., plastic bags) 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 opens all the zippers on Buddy 2’s 

CVCUS in the following order: wrist, ankles, 

and front. While standing behind Buddy 2, 

Buddy 1 grasps the shoulders of Buddy 2's 

CVCUS and instructs him to make a fist to 

ensure that his gloves do not come off. He 

then pulls Buddy 2’s CVCUS down below 

his knees, turning it inside out. Buddy 1 

unzips Buddy 2’s CPU jacket and removes 

it by grasping it at the shoulders, pulling it 

down, and turning it inside out. He places it 

beside Buddy 2 with the clean side up. 

IV-28 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-8. Steps for the CVCUS and CPU (Triple Buddy Method) MOPP Gear Exchange With 

the M40A1, M42, and M43 (Aviation and Armor) (Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

5. Remove CPU 

jacket and gloves. 

All Two discard containers 

(from step 4) 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 has Buddy 2 partially remove his 

overboots by alternately stepping on each 

heel and pulling up on his foot. Buddy 1 

grasps one leg of Buddy 2’s CVCUS and 

his overboot and instructs him to remove 

his leg and foot simultaneously. As Buddy 

2 removes each leg and foot, he steps onto 

the clean side of the CPU jacket. Buddy 1 

discards the overboots. Buddy 2 holds the 

fingertips of his gloves and partially slides 

his hand out. When the fingers of both 

hands are free, he holds his arms away 

from his body and lets the gloves drop. 

Buddy 2 removes his protective glove 

liners. 

6. Remove combat 

boots and CPU 

trousers. 

All Two discard containers 

(from step 4) 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 2 partially removes his boots by 

alternately stepping on each heel and 

pulling up on his foot. Buddy 1 grasps one 

of Buddy 2’s boots and instructs him to 

remove his foot. As Buddy 2 removes his 

foot, he steps directly onto the clean side of 

the CPU jacket. He repeats the procedure 

on the other foot. Next, Buddy 1 removes 

Buddy 2’s CPU trousers by pulling down on 

the sides and turning them inside out. 

Buddy 2 is now stripped to his underwear 

and mask and is ready to put on new 

clothing. Combat boots should remain 

beside Buddy 2 on the clean area of the 

CPU jacket. Buddy 1 discards the CVCUS 

and CPU trousers. 

CAUTION 

Use extreme care to ensure that the 

outside of the CPU does not touch 

the skin, underclothing, or combat 

boots of Buddy 2. 

7. Put on CPU and 

CVCUS. 

All One CVCUS and CPU per 

person 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 opens the package containing the 

new CPU without touching the inside of the 

package. Buddy 2 pulls out the CPU 

without touching the outside of the 

package. He puts on the new clothing in 

the following order: CPU trousers, CPU 

jacket, combat boots, and CVCUS (over 

the CPU). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-29 
Table IV-8. Steps for the CVCUS/CPU (Triple Buddy Method) MOPP Gear Exchange With the 

M40A1, M42, and M43 (Aviation and Armor) (Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

8. Put on overboots 

and gloves. 

All One set of chemicalprotective overboots per 

person 

One set of chemicalprotective gloves per 

person 

M9 detector paper 

Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 opens the package of clean 

overboots without touching the inside of the 

package. Buddy 2 removes the overboots 

without touching the outside of the package 

and puts them on. Buddy 1 opens the 

package of clean gloves without touching 

the inside of the package. Buddy 2 

removes the gloves without touching the 

outside of the package and puts them on. 

Buddy 2 puts on the M9 detector paper. 

NOTE: The gloves and overboots will 

have a light powdery coating. This is 

normal. It is not necessary to remove it. 

It will not affect the protective qualities. 

9. Secure hood. CB One IEDK Buddy 3 continues to hold the canister. 

Buddy 1 wipes his rubber gloves with an 

IEDK. He unrolls Buddy 2 hood, attaches 

the straps, and tightens the neck cord. He 

checks the snaps and neck cord on Buddy 

2’s hood to ensure that they are closed. 

Buddy 3 returns the canister to Buddy 2 

and assists with securing the canister 

carrier straps. Buddy 1, Buddy 2, and 

Buddy 3 rotate rolls and repeat steps 2 

through 9. They rotate roles a third time for 

the final buddy. 

10. Secure gear. All One chemical-protective 

helmet cover per person 

Each individual secures his individual gear 

and puts it back on. He puts on a new 

chemical-protective helmet cover and 

moves to the AA. He uses the buddy 

system to check the fit of all secured gear. 

IV-30 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-9. Steps for the JSLIST, Individual (Emergency Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

1. Decontaminate 

gear (removes gross 

contamination from 

individual gear 

[weapons, helmet, 

load-bearing 

equipment, and mask 

carrier]). 

CB One IEDK Use M8 detector paper to determine the areas of 

gross contamination. Use field-expedient 

absorbents (sand, dirt, or rags) to remove gross 

liquid contamination. Take special care to avoid 

touching these areas during overgarment removal. 

Use an IEDK to decontaminate individual gear. 

Radiological Hot, soapy water Remove and discard the chemical-protective 

helmet cover. Brush or wipe radiological 

contamination from the individual gear. Wash it 

with hot, soapy water (if available), and then set it 

aside to dry on an uncontaminated surface (plastic, 

poncho, or similar material). 

2. Prepare to 

decontaminate 

(facilitates later 

removal of 

overgarment trousers 

and overboots). 

All Cutting tool Remove the M9 detector paper from the 

overgarment. Untie the coat retention cord if tied. 

Unfasten the webbing-strip snap at the bottom front 

of your coat and release the coat retention-cord 

loop at your waist. Loosen the bottom of your coat 

by pulling the material away from your body. 

NOTE: If wearing the M43 protective mask, tie 

the microphone cord to the hose of the mask. 

Unfasten and loosely refasten the hook-and-pile 

fasteners at your wrists and ankles. Unfasten or 

cut the fasteners on the overboots. NOTE: The 

M40 voice amplifier (M7) and the M42A2 

detachable microphone cannot be 

decontaminated and will be disposed of as 

contaminated waste; however, ensure that 

these items are contaminated before disposing 

of them. 

3. Decontaminate the 

mask and hood 

(removes gross 

contamination). 

CB Two IEDKS per 

person 

Use an IEDK to decontamination the exposed parts 

of your mask. Start at the eye lens outserts and 

wipe down. Wipe all the exposed parts of the 

mask. Wipe the front edge of the hood, including 

the barrel lock and fasteners under your chin. 

Decontaminate the gloves in preparation to release 

the hood seal. NOTE: Pay particular attention to 

the areas between your fingers when 

decontaminating the gloves.

 Radiological Three containers 

(about 3-gallon 

capacity) 

Two sponges 

Soapy water 

Rinse water 

Paper towels or 

similar drying 

material 

Wipe the mask and hood with a sponge dipped in 

hot, soapy water and rinse them with a sponge 

dipped in clean water. Dry the mask and hood with 

paper towels or rags. Wipe the gloves. NOTE: 

Cool, soapy water is not as effective for 

removing contamination, but it can be used if 

you scrub longer. If the water supply is limited, 

use drinking water from a canteen and wet a 

sponge or cloth. If water is not available, brush 

off the radioactive dust particles. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-31 
Table IV-9. Steps for the JSLIST, Individual (Emergency Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

4. Remove chemicalprotective coat (limits 

the spread of agents 

and helps prevent 

agents from penetrating 

through to the 

undergarments or the 

skin). 

All Two discard 

containers (e.g., 

plastic bags) 

Feel for and locate the suspender snap 

couplers on the outside of your coat and 

releases them. Untie the draw cord if tied, 

press the barrel lock release, and unsnap 

the barrel lock. NOTE: If it is difficult to 

grasp the barrel lock, use the draw cord 

to pull it away from the mask, allowing 

you to grasp and unfasten it without 

touching the interior of the hood. 

Unfasten the front closure flap, and pull the 

slide fastener from your chin to the bottom 

of the coat. Grasp the hood by the outside 

surface near each end of the barrel lock, lift 

it off your head, and reverse-roll the hood 

one time while pulling the hood towards the 

back of your head to remove it. Grasp the 

front side of the coat, and pull it back until it 

is off your shoulders. Put your arms behind 

your back, and work your arms out of the 

sleeves. NOTE: Ensure that the outside 

of the coat does not touch your body. 

Lay the coat on the ground, black side up. 

NOTE: Use the coat later as an 

uncontaminated surface to stand on 

when putting on the new overgarment. 

CAUTION 

Take care to avoid contaminating the 

inside surface of the coat. 

5. Remove chemicalprotective trousers and 

overboots. 

All Two discard 

containers (from step 

4) 

Unfasten the hook-and-pile fasteners at the 

waistband, unfasten the two front closure 

snaps, and open the fly slide fastener on 

the front of the trousers. Loosen the 

overboots by alternately stepping on each 

heel and pulling up the foot. Grasp the 

trousers, and push them down to the 

knees. Walk out of the trousers and 

overboots simultaneously, and step onto 

the black side of the coat. 

CAUTION 

Take care to avoid contaminating the 

clothing and skin. 

IV-32 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-9. Steps for the JSLIST, Individual (Emergency Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

6. Remove chemicalprotective gloves and 

liners. 

All Two discard 

containers (from step 

4) 

Wipe around the edges of the packages 

containing the new items (gloves, 

overgarments, and overboots) with an 

IEDK, and then open them. Hold the 

fingertips of the gloves, and partially slide 

your hands out. When the fingers of both 

hands are free, hold your arms away from 

your body and let the gloves drop. Remove 

the protective glove liners and discard them. 

CAUTION 

Take care to avoid letting the gloves 

come in contact with the coat spread 

on the ground. 

7. Put on chemicalprotective trousers. 

All One JSLIST chemicalprotective ensemble 

per person 

Remove the trousers from the package 

without touching the outside. Put them on, 

close the slide fastener, and fasten the two 

fly opening snaps. Pull the suspenders 

over your shoulders, and fasten the snap 

couplers. Adjust the length of the 

suspenders to ensure a comfortable fit. 

Adjust the hook-and-pile fastener at the 

waistband for a snug fit. 

8. Put on chemicalprotective coat. 

All One JSLIST chemicalprotective ensemble 

per person 

Remove the coat from the package without 

touching the outside. Put on the coat, close 

the slide fastener up as far as the chest, 

and secure the front closure hook-and-pile 

fastener on the front flap up as far as your 

chest. Pull the bottom of the coat down 

over the trousers. Grasp the loop on the 

back of the coat and pull it out and away 

from the back of the coat. Bring the loop 

forward between your legs, pulling on it so 

that the bottom of the coat fits snugly over 

the trousers. Place the loop over the 

webbing-strip snap on the front of the coat, 

and fasten it. Adjust the retention cord, if 

necessary, and tie the excessive cord in a 

bow. 

CAUTION 

Take care to ensure that the body and 

clothing touch only the inner surface of 

the coat. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-33 
Table IV-9. Steps for the JSLIST, Individual (Emergency Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

9. Put on chemicalprotective overboots. 

All One set of chemicalprotective overboots 

per person 

Remove the overboots from the package 

without touching the outside. Put the 

overboots on over the combat boots, adjust 

and secure the fasteners, pull the trouser 

legs over the overboots, and secure the 

two hook-and-pile fasteners on each ankle 

so that they fit snugly around the overboot. 

10. Put on chemicalprotective hood. 

All One JSLIST chemicalprotective ensemble 

per person 

Put the hood on your head, completely 

close the front slide fastener on the coat, 

and secure the hook-and-pile fastener on 

the front flap as far as the top of the slide 

fastener. Place the edge of the hood 

around the edge of the mask, and secure 

the hook-and-pile fastener on the hood. 

Pull the draw cord tight around the edge of 

the mask, snap the ends of the barrel lock 

together, squeeze both ends of the barrel 

lock while pulling the draw cord, slide the 

barrel lock up under the chin to keep the 

cord in place, and tie off the draw cord if 

needed. 

CAUTION 

Take care to ensure that the trousers 

touch only the uncontaminated 

surface. 

WARNING 

The barrel lock release button must 

face away from the user to avoid 

the barrel lock from unfastening 

and possibly exposing the user to 

contamination. 

11. Put on chemicalprotective gloves and 

liners. 

All One set of chemicalprotective gloves 

with liners per 

person (correct size) 

Remove the gloves and liners from the 

package without touching the outside. Put 

on the liners and gloves, pull the cuffs of 

the coat over the gloves, and fasten the 

hook-and-pile fasteners on each sleeve of 

the coat. Put on the M9 detector paper as 

required by the SOP. 

12. Secure gear. All contamination One chemicalprotective helmet 

cover per person 

Place the new chemical-protective helmet 

cover on the PASGT helmet if used. Check 

the fit of all secured gear. 

IV-34 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-10. Steps for the Individual (Emergency Method) BDO MOPP Gear Exchange 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

1. Decontaminate 

gear (removes gross 

contamination from 

individual gear 

[weapon, helmet, 

load-bearing 

equipment, and 

mask carrier]). 

CB One SDK Use M8 detector paper to determine the areas of 

gross contamination. Use field-expedient 

absorbents (sand, dirt, or rags) to remove gross 

liquid contamination. Take special care to avoid 

touching these areas during overgarment removal. 

Use an IEDK to decontaminate individual gear. 

Radiological Hot, soapy water Brush or wipe radiological contamination from the 

individual gear. Wash it with hot, soapy water (if 

available), and then set it aside to dry on an 

uncontaminated surface (plastic, poncho, or similar 

material). 

2. Prepare to 

decontaminate 

(facilitates removal of 

overgarment 

trousers and 

overboots). 

All Cutting tool Unfasten the shoulder straps on the hood, pull them 

over your shoulders, and reattach them. Loosen 

the draw cord on the hood of the protective mask. 

NOTE: If wearing the M43 protective mask, tie 

the microphone cord to the hose of the mask. 

Remove the M9 detector paper from the 

overgarment, and untie or cut the draw cords on the 

trouser legs of the overgarment. Unzip the trouser 

legs, and roll a cuff in each trouser leg, ensuring 

that the cuffs do not come above the top of the 

overboots. Unfasten or cut the fasteners on the 

overboots. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-35 
Table IV-10. Steps for the Individual (Emergency Method) BDO MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

3. Decontaminate 

mask and hood 

(removes gross 

contamination from 

the mask and hood). 

CB One IEDK Wipe the eye lens outserts on the mask from the 

top, down. Wipe the mask and gloves, and roll the 

hood. Grasp the straps of the hood, and lift the 

hood off your shoulders and partially over your head 

until most of the back of the head is exposed. Roll 

the hood, starting at the chin, and work around the 

entire mask until the rolled hood will stay up and off 

of your shoulders. Tuck the straps and neck cord 

into the roll. Roll the hood tightly against the mask 

without pulling the hood off the back of the head. 

Tuck the tail between the upper part of the canister 

and the mask. NOTE: Tie the tail over and under 

the hose for the M42 mask. Remove the 

applicator mitt from the package with your 

nondominant hand. Making a V, wipe down the 

dominant hand, paying particular attention to areas 

between your fingers. Once the dominant hand is 

thoroughly wiped down, insert it into the applicator 

mitt and thoroughly wipe down the nondominant 

hand. Gently pat the voicemitter with black powder 

until it is covered. Start at the top of the hood and 

wipe down and away, patting until the surface of the 

hood is covered by the black powder. Rewipe the 

gloves, starting with the nondominant hand. Lift the 

hood off your shoulders by grasping the shoulder 

straps in one hand and placing the other hand on 

top of your head and pulling the hood over your 

head until the elastic band is over the knuckles and 

most of the back of your head is exposed. Do not 

expose your ears or pull the hood completely over 

your face or mask. Tuck the shoulder straps, 

underarm straps, and rolled portion of the hood 

under the elastic band. When using the M40A1 

mask with the quick-doff hood, remove the 

underarm straps from the front of the hood and 

place them over your shoulders. Refasten them on 

the front of the hood. NOTE: Place two fingers on 

the voicemitter of the mask to prevent 

accidental breakage of the seal. 

Radiological Three containers 

(about 4-gallon 

capacity) 

Two sponges 

Soapy water 

Rinse water 

Paper towels or 

similar drying 

material 

Wipe the mask and hood with a sponge dipped in 

hot, soapy water and rinse them with a sponge 

dipped in clean water. Dry the mask and hood with 

paper towels or rags. NOTE: Cool, soapy water is 

not as effective for removing contamination, but 

it can be used if you scrub longer. If water is not 

available, brush off the radioactive dust 

particles. 

IV-36 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-10. Steps for the Individual (Emergency Method) BDO MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required Equipment Required Procedures 

4. Remove 

overgarment and 

overboots (prevents 

agent from 

penetrating through 

to the undergarments 

or the skin). 

All Two discard containers 

(e.g., plastic bags) 

Chemical-protective suit 

with protective gloves 

and overboots 

Grasp the overgarment jacket, and unsnap 

the snaps individually. Untie the draw cord 

at the bottom of the jacket. Unfasten the 

hook-and-pile fastener at the waist, and 

then refasten it. Unfastens the hook-andpile fastener over the zippered front of the 

jacket, and unzip the jacket. Grasp the front 

of the jacket and pull the jacket back until it 

is off your shoulders. Put your arms behind 

your back, and work your arms out of the 

sleeves. Do not let the outside of the jacket 

touch the body. When the jacket is off, lay it 

on the ground with the black side up. 

Unfasten and unzip the trousers. Do not 

loosen the waist tabs. Loosen the 

overboots by alternately stepping on each 

heel and pulling up on the foot. Grasp the 

trousers, and push them down to the knees. 

Walk out of the trousers and overboots 

simultaneously, and step onto the black side 

of the jacket. Step onto the jacket wearing 

the mask, BDU, combat boots, and gloves. 

5. Remove gloves. All Two discard containers 

(from step 4) 

One IEDK 

Wipe around the edges of the packages 

containing the new items (gloves, 

overgarments, and overboots) with an IEDK. 

Open the new packages. Hold the fingertips 

of the gloves, and partially slide your hands 

out. When the fingers of both hands are 

free, hold your arms away from your body 

and let the gloves drop. 

6. Put on 

overgarment. 

All One set of chemicalprotective 

overgarments per 

person 

One IEDK 

Remove the overgarment from its package 

without touching the outside of the package. 

Put on the overgarment and fasten it, 

leaving the trouser legs open until you put 

on the new overboots. 

7. Put on overboots 

and gloves. 

All One set of chemicalprotective overboots 

per person 

One set of chemicalprotective gloves per 

person 

Remove the overboots (one at a time) from 

their package without touching the outside, 

and put them on. Remove the gloves from 

their package without touching the outside, 

put them on, and fasten the trouser legs. 

NOTE: The gloves and overboots will 

have a light powdery coating. This is 

normal. Do not remove it. It will not affect 

the protective qualities. 

8. Secure hood. All One chemical-protective 

helmet cover per 

person 

Secure individual gear, and put it back on. 

Put on a new chemical-protective helmet 

cover and move to the AA. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-37 
Table IV-11. Steps for the CVCUS and CPU, Individual (Emergency Method) MOPP Gear 

Exchange 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

1. Decontaminate gear 

(removes gross 

contamination from 

individual gear 

[weapon, helmet, loadbearing equipment, 

and mask carrier]). 

CB One SDK Use M8 detector paper to determine the areas of 

gross contamination. Use field-expedient 

absorbents (sand, dirt, or rags) to remove gross 

liquid contamination. Take special care to avoid 

touching these areas during overgarment 

removal. Use an IEDK to decontaminate the 

individual gear.

 Radiological Hot, soapy water Brush or wipe radiological contamination from 

the individual gear. Wash it with hot, soapy 

water (if available), and then set it aside to dry 

on an uncontaminated surface (plastic, poncho, 

or similar material). 

2. Prepare to 

decontaminate 

(facilitates removal of 

overgarment trousers 

and overboots). 

All Cutting tool Unfasten the shoulder straps on the hood, pull 

them over the shoulders, and reattach them to 

the front of the hood. Loosen the draw cord on 

the hood of the protective mask. NOTE: If 

wearing the M43 protective mask, tie the 

microphone cord to the hose of the mask. 

Remove the M9 detector paper from the 

overgarment, and untie or cut the draw cords on 

the trouser legs of the overgarment. Unzip the 

trouser legs, and roll a cuff in each trouser leg, 

ensuring that the cuffs do not come above the 

top of the overboots. Unfasten or cut the 

fasteners on the overboots. 

3. Decontaminate 

mask and hood 

(removes gross 

contamination from the 

mask and hood). 

CB One IEDK Wipe the eye lens outserts on the mask from the 

top, down. Wipe the mask and gloves, and roll 

the hood. Grasp the straps of the hood, and lift 

the hood off your shoulders and partially over 

your head until most of the back of your head is 

exposed. Roll the hood, starting at the chin, and 

work around the entire mask until the rolled hood 

will stay up and off your shoulders. Tuck the 

straps and neck cord into the roll. Roll the hood 

tightly against the mask without pulling the hood 

off the back of your head. Tuck the tail between 

the upper part of the canister and the mask. 

NOTE: Tie the tail over and under the hose 

for the M42 mask. 

IV-38 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table IV-11. Steps for the CVCUS/CPU, Individual (Emergency Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

3. Decontaminate 

mask and hood 

(continued) 

CB Remove the applicator mitt from the package with 

the nondominant hand. Making a V, wipe down the 

dominant hand, paying particular attention to the 

areas between your fingers. Once the dominant 

hand is thoroughly wiped down, insert it into the 

applicator mitt and thoroughly wipe down the other 

hand. Gently pat the voicemitter with black powder 

until it has been covered. Start at the top of the 

hood and wipe down and away, patting until the 

surface of the hood is covered by the black 

powder. Rewipe the gloves, starting with the 

nondominant hand. Lift the hood off your 

shoulders by grasping the shoulder straps in one 

hand and placing the other hand on top of your 

head and pulling the hood over your head until the 

elastic band is over your knuckles and most of the 

back of your head is exposed. Do not expose your 

ears or pull the hood completely over your face or 

mask. Tuck the shoulder straps, underarm straps, 

and rolled portion of the hood under the elastic 

band. When using the M40A1 mask with the quickdoff hood, remove the underarm straps from the 

front of the hood and place them over your 

shoulders. Refasten them on the front of the hood. 

NOTE: Place two fingers on the voicemitter of 

the mask to prevent accidental breakage of the 

seal.

 Radiological Three containers 

(about 4-gallon 

capacity) 

Two sponges 

Soapy water 

Rinse water 

Paper towels or 

similar drying 

material 

Wipe the mask and hood with a sponge dipped in 

hot, soapy water, and rinse them with a sponge 

dipped in clean water. Dry the mask and hood with 

paper towels or rags. NOTE: Cool, soapy water 

is not as effective for removing contamination, 

but it can be used if you scrub longer. If water 

is not available, brush off the radioactive dust 

particles. 

4. Remove CVCUS 

and overboots. 

All Two discard 

containers (e.g., 

plastic bags) 

Open all the zippers on the CVCUS in the following 

order: wrists, ankles, and front. While standing 

adjacent to the clean area, grasp the front of the 

CVCUS and pull it off your shoulders. Make a fist 

to ensure that the gloves do not come off when 

removing the CVCUS. Put your arms behind your 

back, and work your arms out of the sleeves. 

Loosen the overboots by alternately stepping on 

each heel and pulling up on the foot. Pull the 

CVCUS down below the knees, turning it inside 

out. Do not let the outside of the CVCUS touch 

your body. Walk out of the CVCUS and overboots 

simultaneously, and step onto the clean area. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IV-39 
Table IV-11 Steps for the CVCUS/CPU, Individual (Emergency Method) MOPP Gear Exchange 

(Continued) 

Steps Contamination 

Type 

Required 

Equipment 

Required Procedures 

5. Remove jacket 

and gloves. 

All Two discard 

containers (from 

step 4) 

Wipe the gloves and around the edges of the 

packages containing the new items (gloves, 

undergarments, and overboots) with an IEDK. 

Open the new packages. Hold the fingertips of the 

gloves, and partially slide your hands out. When 

the fingers of both hands are free, hold your arms 

away from your body and let the gloves drop. 

Open all hook-and-pile wrist fasteners, and unzip 

the CPU jacket. Remove the CPU jacket by 

grasping it at the shoulders and pulling it down, 

turning it inside out. Place the jacket on a clean 

area with the clean side up. Remove the protective 

glove inserts. 

6. Remove combat 

boots and CPU 

pants. 

All Two discard 

containers (from 

step 4) 

Unlace the combat boots, remove them, and step 

directly onto the CPU jacket. Take off the CPU 

drawers by placing the hands beneath the 

waistband and removing them, turning them inside 

out. If wearing the BDU, stand on the clean area 

(but not on the CPU jacket), and unlace the combat 

boots. Partially remove the boots by alternately 

stepping on each heel and pulling up on your foot. 

Step out of each trouser leg and combat boot 

simultaneously, and step directly onto the clean 

side of the CPU jacket. 

7. Put on CPU. All One set of chemicalprotective 

undergarments per 

person 

Remove the undergarment from the package 

without touching the outside. Put on the 

undergarment in the following order: CPU trousers, 

CPU jacket, combat boots, and CVCUS (over the 

CPU trousers). 

8. Put on overboots 

and gloves. 

CB One set of chemicalprotective 

overboots per 

person 

One set of 

chemicalprotective gloves 

per person 

M9 detector paper 

Remove the overboots from their package without 

touching the outside, and put them on. Remove 

the gloves from their package without touching the 

outside, and put them on. Put on the M9 detector 

paper. NOTE: The gloves and overboots will 

have a light powdery coating. This is normal. It 

is not necessary to remove it. It will not affect 

the protective qualities. 

9. Secure hood. CB One IEDK Wipe the rubber gloves with an IEDK. Unroll the 

hood, attach the straps, and tighten the neck cord. 

10. Secure gear. All One chemicalprotective helmet 

cover per person 

Secure individual gear, and put it back on. Put on a 

new chemical-protective helmet cover, and move to 

the AA. 

IV-40 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Chapter V

THOROUGH DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

a. Thorough decontamination operations reduce and sometimes eliminate 

contamination from equipment and personnel. This allows the MOPP level to be reduced. 

Operators and crew members must perform periodic checks on their equipment since there 

is a risk of residual contamination. Operators make these checks with standard detectors 

(e.g., M8/M9 paper, ICAM/CAM) and the M256A1 kit. This chapter focuses on land force 

decontamination operations as part of ongoing combat operations or reconstitution 

operations. 

b. Combat service support (CSS) elements replenish combat stocks, refit 

equipment, and replace personnel and equipment, as required. The contaminated unit, 

with some assistance from a decontamination unit, performs the DTD. 

NOTE: The USN and the USMC do not have standing CBRN support units to 

perform decontamination. See Appendix G for service CBRN decontamination 

capabilities. 

c. A supporting CBRN unit performs the DED or DAD. The planning

considerations that are required to conduct a thorough decontamination operation and the 

methods that various decontamination units use to conduct DTD/DED are discussed in this 

chapter. The exact layout of a thorough decontamination site is determined by the 

METT-TC. After a thorough decontamination operation, the unit moves out of the 

decontamination site into a tactical AA. The unit, while in this tactical assembly, may 

undergo reconstitution or may prepare for future operations. 

NOTES: 

1. See NSTM 470 and NSTM 070 for thorough decontamination procedures. 

2. See NAVAIR 00-80T-121 for USN and USMC aircrews, aircraft, and support 

equipment. 

3. See Chapters VIII and IX for additional information on aviation and shipboard 

decontamination. 

4. See Recovery Operations in a Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear 

(CBRN) Environment for other information on USN and USMC thorough 

decontamination. 

5. See AFMAN 32-4005, AFMAN 32-4017, AFMAN 10-2602, and AFTO 11C15-1-3 for 

USAF MOB, COB, and BB operating thorough decontamination TTP. 

6. See Chapter VII for further information on fixed-site, port, and airfield 

decontamination TTP. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-1 
2. Planning 

Thorough decontamination is the most effective type of decontamination, but it is the 

most resource-intensive. 

a. Thorough decontamination operations are conducted beyond the range of enemy 

direct-fire systems. If a contaminated unit requires a thorough decontamination as part of 

its reconstitution operations, the decontamination site is established near the 

reconstitution area or the parent unit rear area. Company-size units are usually

reconstituted in the brigade rear area while battalion-level units are reconstituted in the 

division rear area. 

b. All echelons prepare for thorough decontamination operations as part of the 

overall planning process. The CBRN staff can begin to develop the decontamination plan 

from the commander’s general guidance. Coordination with higher HQ is required to 

determine the availability of engineer support for site preparation and closure. Engineers

provide support for sumps and drainage ditches. They also coordinate with the civil affairs 

office for HNS (personnel, equipment, and supplies) and for environmental requirements 

and restrictions. 

c. The CBRN staff selects possible lineup points throughout the unit area of 

operation (AO) based on such factors as the decontamination type, terrain, mission, threat, 

road network, and availability of water. Decontamination site locations that support these 

lineup points are finalized after reconnaissance of the sites by the decontamination platoon. 

After the decontamination sites are selected, linkup points are chosen to support each site. 

A site may have more than one linkup point. 

d. Since decontamination assets are limited, the commander must establish 

priorities of decontamination support and list the units in the order they will be 

decontaminated. This can change from phase to phase during an operation. The CBRN 

staff develops the priority of support based on an understanding of the commander’s intent. 

e. Giving the priority of support to the lead task force during the assault phase may 

not be the best choice since the contaminated elements will not stop for decontamination 

until after the assault is complete. The commander should establish a priority of work that 

specifies the order in which equipment will be decontaminated. (For example, a priority of 

work may be in this order: engineer equipment, artillery pieces, main battle tanks, and 

long-haul vehicles.) Ships with embarked amphibious and aviation units will have to 

prioritize similarly, as will aviation units operating ashore. A limiting factor is the 

availability of water. A typical vehicle requires 500 gallons of water during the DED. The 

actual amount of water required varies by the vehicle and its contamination level. The 

supported unit CBRN staff must develop a water resupply plan for thorough 

decontamination operations. 

f. A water resupply plan can be as simple as selecting a series of linkup points 

along a route where the chemical unit can link up with a bulk water truck. More complex

water resupply plans include caching water throughout the AO, coordinating for the 

movement of water bladders by aircraft, and identifying water sources in the unit AO. The 

use of nonpotable, salt, and brackish waters should be considered. See Table V-1 for the 

planning factors for the rinse station. 

V-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
NOTE: Naval aircraft exposed to salt water require emergency reclamation per 

Aircraft Weapons System Cleaning and Corrosion Control, and Avionics Cleaning 

and Corrosion Prevention/Control. 

Table V-1. Planning Factors for the Rinse Station 

Equipment M12A1 PDDA Rinse M17 LDS Rinse 

Gallons Applied Minutes Applied Gallons Applied Minutes Applied 

M1 Tank 325 12 57 14 

M2 BFV 325 12 57 14 

M113 APC 203 9 38 10 

M109A Paladin 325 12 57 14 

HEMTT 180 8 30 12 

5-Ton Truck 158 7 42 11 

HMMWV 90 4 23 6 

NOTE: The rinse is done with the spray wand for the M17. 

3. Preparation 

Units prepare for thorough decontamination to be successful. 

a. Subordinate units review their higher HQ decontamination plan. If additional 

decontamination sites or assets are required, they request them from the higher HQ. The 

supporting decontamination leader conducts a reconnaissance of the designated 

decontamination sites. Since the decontamination sites are initially selected by map 

reconnaissance, the actual site may not be suitable. If the selected site cannot support 

decontamination operations, the CBRN unit leader attempts to find another site close to 

the original site and notifies the supported unit and higher HQ of the change. 

b. The decontamination unit leader determines the support requirements that are

needed to operate the decontamination site. Engineers are required to dig sumps, improve

access to the site, and dig ditches for runoff. Air defense and military police are required to

provide security. Medical support is also required. Depending on the operational situation 

and the threat, some DED sites may be prepared in advance. Routes must be established 

and published in the OPORD, leading the contaminated unit to the linkup point. 

NOTE: Inform units not to proceed directly to the decontamination site. 

4. Execution 

The actual decontamination operation begins once a contaminated unit requests 

decontamination support. The unit leader must assess the situation and accurately report 

it to the HQ. This situation report (SITREP) should include the type and extent of 

contamination, the current location, the unit’s ability to perform the current mission while 

contaminated, and the time the unit will become ineffective in combat. The contaminated 

unit should perform immediate decontamination techniques to increase its survivability 

and to limit the spread of contamination. An operational decontamination should also be 

considered and performed, as appropriate. The request for decontamination support must 

contain several essential elements of information to assist the CBRN staff and the 

decontamination unit leader in coordinating the decontamination operation. These 

essential elements of information include the following: 

• Designation of the contaminated unit. 

• Location of the contaminated unit. 

• Time the unit became contaminated. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-3 
• Time the unit can move and begin decontamination. 

• Type of contamination. 

• Number and type of vehicles contaminated. 

• Special requirements (e.g., patient decontamination station, recovery assets, unit 

decontamination team). 

• Supported unit’s frequency and call sign to facilitate initial linkup. 

a. The supporting decontamination unit is given a WARNORD to conduct a 

decontamination operation. Subsequent WARNORDs provide more detailed information. 

After requesting decontamination support, the supported unit issues an 

OPORD/fragmentary order (FRAGORD) to the chemical unit. 

b. The supporting decontamination unit must coordinate the movement of the 

contaminated unit to the linkup point. If the contaminated unit is out of the supported unit 

AO, the move must be coordinated with the higher HQ. 

c. Once the chemical unit is set up, the decontamination unit leader moves to the 

linkup point. Other elements may provide assets to support the decontamination 

operations, such as medical, engineer, air defense, and military police. These elements link 

up with the chemical unit before the arrival of the contaminated unit (see Table V-2). 

d. The supported unit is responsible for site security and overall control. The 

decontamination leader is responsible for operating the predecontamination area and for 

processing vehicles. 

e. After linkup is achieved and all support assets are in position, the actual 

decontamination operation begins. The decontamination platoon leader, with help from the 

commander of the contaminated unit or the supported unit C2 cell, supervises the 

decontamination operation. All equipment not necessary for decontamination operations 

should be located in an uncontaminated area to limit the spread of contamination. 

Table V-2. Thorough Decontamination Support Matrix (Land Forces) 

Tasks 

Division CMO 

Division

Brigade 

DISCOM

FSB

Chemical Unit Contaminated

Unit

Battalion 

Preparation Phase 

Request S N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P S 

Coordination S N/A S N/A N/A N/A N/A P 

Site selection N/A S or P N/A N/A P N/A N/A 

Advance-party linkup N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A S P S 

Site setup N/A N/A N/A S S P N/A N/A 

Execution Phase 

Site control/security N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A S P N/A 

Predecontamination actions N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P S N/A 

Processing N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P S N/A 

V-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table V-2. Thorough Decontamination Support Matrix (Land Forces) (Continued) 

Tasks 

Division CMO 

Division

Brigade 

DISCOM

FSB

Chemical Unit Contaminated

Unit

Battalion 

Site Clearance Phase 

Cleanup N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P P N/A 

Marking and reporting N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A P N/A N/A 

Legend: P=primary; S=supporting 

f. A thorough decontamination site consists of the following areas: 

• Predecontamination staging area. 

• DED area. 

• DTD area. 

• Postdecontamination AA. 

g. There should be an alternate route for vehicles that have been decontaminated 

but did not pass the M8 paper or ICAM test. This limits the spread of contamination by not 

exposing clean vehicles with vehicles that might need to be reprocessed back though the 

DED. The chemical unit leader selects these areas based on operational guidance, the road 

network, available cover and concealment, and the water supply. The contaminated unit 

uses the predecontamination staging area to ready itself. The postdecontamination AA is

the location where the vehicles and personnel exiting the DED and DTD areas are linked 

up before moving from the decontamination site (see Figure V-1). 

Figure V-1. Thorough Decontamination Site 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-5 
5. Predecontamination Staging Area 

The contaminated unit moves to the predecontamination staging area about 500 

meters downwind of the thorough decontamination site. The contaminated unit performs

predecontamination actions, to include segregating vehicles by checking for contamination. 

a. For chemical contamination, use the ICAM/CAM and the M8/M9 detector paper.

When monitoring vehicles for contamination, there should be about 15 meters between each 

vehicle to prevent false positive readings with the ICAM. For radiological contamination, 

use the AN/PDR-77, AN/VDR-2, or ADM-300 radiac detector. 

b. If the vehicle only has isolated areas of contamination, use the M100 to 

decontaminate those areas. Recheck for contamination, and consider the vehicle clean if 

contamination is not detected. 

NOTE: Do not use the M100 on sensitive items. 

6. Vehicle Crews 

Vehicle crews play an integral part in the thorough decontamination process. 

a. The vehicle crews, except for the drivers, dismount. As the crews dismount, they

remove all contaminated equipment, including sensitive items (i.e. electro-optical), from the 

top and sides of the vehicles. Once the crews have exited the vehicle, they will not reenter. 

This prevents contamination from being spread into the vehicle interior. 

b. Using the pioneer tools from the contaminated vehicles, the crew removes all 

heavy mud and debris. They concentrate on the undercarriage, which would be the most 

likely place for contamination to collect and the hardest place to decontaminate. Once the 

crew is finished with the pioneer tools, they are placed back on the vehicle. The initial 

removal of the mud and debris makes it more likely that the decontamination wash will 

remove any remaining contamination. 

c. Seat covers (when applicable), canvas items, camouflage netting, wooden rails, 

and any other material that can absorb liquid contamination are removed. These items 

create a potential transfer hazard and are not easily decontaminated. Left untreated, 

absorbed chemical agents will desorb after being decontaminated and will create a vapor 

hazard. The crew removes the items that cannot be decontaminated by the standard 

methods used in the DTD and places them at the collection point. Decontamination unit 

personnel provide advice concerning the decontamination or disposal of these items. 

d. Design vehicle-loading plans to minimize the amount of equipment carried on 

the outside of the vehicle that cannot be readily decontaminated. Whenever possible, 

CBRN covers should be used when a chemical attack is expected (see Multiservice Tactics, 

Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Protection). All CBRN 

covers are removed and disposed of as contaminated waste during the predecontamination 

actions. 

e. Equipment and supplies that are exposed after removal of coverings should be 

checked for contamination. If the items that can be removed are uncontaminated, they 

should be moved via a clean route to the postdecontamination area. Contaminated 

equipment and supplies will be decontaminated or disposed of properly. 

V-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
7. Detailed Equipment Decontamination and Detailed Troop Decontamination 

Areas 

In coordination with the CBRN unit leader operating the decontamination site, the 

contaminated unit begins sending contaminated vehicles by priority for processing. 

Communication is maintained between the predecontamination staging area and the CBRN 

unit leaders. All assistant vehicle drivers are the first individuals sent through the DTD to 

ensure that there is a driver exchange at Station 3. See Appendix J for a series of charts to 

support DED station attendants and supervisors. 

a. Postdecontamination AA. The CBRN unit leader selects the general location for 

the post decontamination AA. It must be big enough to hold the entire unit and to provide 

the proper cover and concealment while undergoing the thorough decontamination. The 

postdecontamination AA is located about 1 kilometer (km) upwind from the DED and DTD 

areas. The unit assembles in the postdecontamination AA after completing the DTD and 

DED operations. The unit occupies the postdecontamination AA until the entire unit has 

gone through decontamination and will then be instructed to move to a reconstitution 

location or a tactical AA to prepare for future operations. 

b. Decontamination Sumps. The construction of decontamination sumps will be

required to control the wastewater runoff from various stations in the DED and for the 

disposal of expendable supplies from the DED or DTD. The sumps should be of an 

appropriate size and volume for the station that requires the sump. To prevent the spread 

of contamination into the ground and to assist in the weathering process, each sump should 

be lined with a sufficient amount of STB. See Appendix K for a discussion on 

contaminated-waste disposal. 

c. DTD. The contaminated unit or its higher HQ is responsible for setting up, 

operating, manning, and closing the DTD area at the thorough-decontamination site. The 

CBRN unit leader determines the general location of the DTD within the decontamination 

site and provides technical advice on setting up, operating, and closing the DTD area. The 

supervisor of the DTD must establish a work/rest cycle. There are eight stations for a DTD.

Spacing between the stations is approximately 5 meters (see Figure V-2, page V-8). A 

summary of personnel and equipment for a DTD is provided in Table V-3, page V-8. 

Whenever possible, personnel should process through the DTD in buddy teams. If a buddy

is not available, the station attendant will provide assistance. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-7 
Figure V-2. DTD Layout 

Table V-3. DTD Personnel and Equipment Recapitulation 

Station Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Station 1—individual-gear 

decontamination 

1 monitor (CAM/ICAM operator) 

2 attendants 

4 30-gallon containers 

2 long-handled brushes 

2 ponchos or plastic sheets 

1 CAM/ICAM 

8 books of M8 detector paper 

4 M256A1 detector kits 

100 plastic trash bags 

Sufficient STB slurry mix 

Rinse water 

*Hot, soapy water 

*AN/VDR-2 

*Sponge 

Station 2—overboots and hood 

decontamination 

1 attendant 1 cutting tool 

1 SDK or IEDK per person 

Large plastic sheet 

Plastic trash bags (as required) 

10 drums of STB 

1 shovel 

Station 3—overgarment removal 1 attendant 2 30-gallon containers 

100 plastic trash bags 

10 boxes of SDKs 

V-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table V-3. DTD Personnel and Equipment Recapitulation (Continued) 

Station Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Station 4—overboots and gloves 

removal 

3 attendants 8 30-gallon containers 

2 long-handled brushes 

M8 detector paper (as required) 

1 immersion heater 

100 plastic trash bags 

1 CAM/ICAM 

Engineer tape 

1 cutting tool 

2 ponchos or large plastic sheets 

5 percent STB/HTH solution 

Hot, soapy water 

Cold rinse water 

Station 5—monitoring 1 attendant (CAM/ICAM operator) 

1 trauma specialist (or combat 

lifesaver) 

1 CAM/ICAM 

First aid supplies 

5 books of M8 detector papers 

1 box of SDKs 

Station 6—mask removal 2 attendants 1 M8A1 or M22 ACAA 

Engineer tape 

Station 7—mask decontamination 

point 

2 attendants 

1 monitor 

1 30-gallon container 

4 3-gallon containers 

1 CAM/ICAM 

2 sponges 

1 case of paper towels 

1 immersion heater 

Mask sanitizing solution 

Hot, soapy water 

Rinse water 

Station 8—reissue point Unit CBRN NCO/supply sergeant Mask PLL 

* Denotes the equipment needed for radiological contamination. 

NOTE: Assume that an operational decontamination was done before the thorough decontamination. 

(1) Station 1—Individual-Gear Decontamination. At this station, 

contamination is removed from individual gear (load-bearing equipment, mask carrier, 

helmet, and weapon). The individual gear is checked with the ICAM or M256 kit to ensure 

the completeness of the decontamination. 

(a) Preparation. At this station, the following equipment and supplies are 

needed: four 30-gallon containers for each two decontamination lanes used; two 

long-handled brushes for each two decontamination lanes used; sufficient STB slurry mix 

for chemical contamination; hot, soapy water and a sponge for radiological contamination; 

rinse water; two ponchos or plastic sheets; and engineer tape. 

• Dig a sump that is 6 feet long, 6 feet wide, and 4 feet deep (minimum).

Place four 30-gallon containers near the sump for easy changing. Fill two containers with 

the STB slurry mix. Fill the other two containers with clean water for rinsing, and place 

them about 3 feet forward of the STB containers. Place two long-handled scrub brushes at

each container of STB slurry. 

• Prepare the slurry. Mix 100 pounds of STB with 20 gallons of hot 

water. (The decontamination unit provides the hot water.) Change the mixture after 20

personnel have decontaminated their gear, and change the rinse water after every 10 

personnel or when it appears dirty. Dump the old rinse water and used STB in the sump. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-9 
• Place a poncho or a plastic sheet on the ground at the checkpoint.

Using engineer tape, divide the poncho or sheet in half (this is the contamination control 

line). Ensure that the checkpoint is a minimum of 10 feet from the other stations in order 

to get a true reading on the detection equipment. Place the following equipment at the 

checkpoint for an average company-size unit: one ICAM, eight books of M8 detector paper, 

four M256A1 detector kits, 100 plastic trash bags, and one AN/VDR-2 for radiological 

contamination. An additional CAM/ICAM may be required in the event of saturation of the 

ion chamber. 

(b) Execution. The contaminated person decontaminates his gear by 

washing and scrubbing it for 6 minutes in the container with hot, soapy water or an STB 

slurry mix (see Figure V-3). If he is wearing the M42 mask, he should use hot, soapy water 

and a sponge or an STB slurry mix to decontaminate the hose and canister. 

Figure V-3. Decontaminating Individual Equipment 

• The contaminated person dips his gear into the clean-water container, 

rinses it for 4 minutes, hands it to the attendant, and then proceeds to the next station. 

The attendant takes the gear to the equipment checkpoint, places the decontaminated gear 

on the “dirty” side of the contamination control line, and returns to the container to pick up 

more gear. The monitor at the checkpoint checks the gear using the appropriate detection 

device and the procedures associated with that device. If residual contamination is 

detected, the attendant recycles the gear and decontaminates it again. If the gear passes

the check, the attendant places it on the clean side of the contamination control line. The 

attendant carries the equipment to the reissue point. 

• The contaminated gear may go through more extensive washing and 

checking procedures if time allows. The longer the gear is washed or left out in the air after 

washing, the lower the contamination level will be. The gear may be put in closed areas or 

V-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
plastic bags and checked for hazardous vapors with the M256A1 detector kit or the CAM. 

The CAM only detects the G- and V-series nerve-agent vapors and the H-series blisteragent vapors. 

(c) Risk. If these procedures are done improperly, contamination may 

remain on the equipment. The resulting vapor hazard could cause casualties to unmasked 

personnel, particularly in closed areas (vehicle interiors) or heavily wooded areas where air 

circulation is poor. 

(2) Station 2—Overboots and Hood Decontamination. At this station, gross

contamination on overboots, trouser legs, mask, and hood is neutralized. If ample hoods

are available at the reissue point, the hood should be cut away. 

(a) Preparation. The following equipment and supplies are needed for the 

mask and the shuffle pit: one cutting tool for each decontamination lane used, one SDK or 

IEDK per person, plastic trash bags (as required), ten drums of STB, and one shovel. One 

person is required to operate this station. The attendant directs and observes the 

contaminated personnel as they decontaminate their overboots and hoods. 

• Prepare a shuffle pit by digging a shallow pit about 3 feet long, 3 feet

wide, and 6 inches deep. 

• Fill the shuffle pit with STB dry mix or STB slurry, depending on the 

availability of water. 

• Prepare the STB dry mix by mixing three parts of earth to two parts of 

STB. 

• Prepare the STB slurry as at Station 1. 

• Add more STB to the mix after ten people have processed through the 

shuffle pit. The CBRN unit will provide ten drums of STB for every company-size unit that 

goes through the station. 

(b) Execution. The contaminated person walks into the shuffle pit,

spreads his legs apart (double shoulder-width), bends at the waist, and uses his hands to 

thoroughly rub the STB dry mix or the STB slurry on his overboots and lower trouser legs 

(see Figure V-4, page V-12). He takes special care to rub the rear of his overboots and also 

removes any excess decontaminant from his gloves. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-11 
Figure V-4. Shuffle Pit Decontamination 

• If a replacement hood is available, remove the hood as follows: Buddy 

1 cuts the shoulder straps and draw cord on Buddy 2’s hood. Buddy 1 pulls Buddy 2’s hood 

inside out over the front of the mask, being careful not to touch the exposed neck or head. 

Buddy 1 gathers Buddy 2’s hood in one hand and, using a cutting tool, cuts away the hood 

as close as possible to the eye lens outsert, voicemitter, and inlet valve covers. Make sure 

that nothing is left dangling below the bottom of the mask. 

• If a replacement hood is not available, Buddy 1 decontaminates and 

rolls Buddy 2’s hood in the same manner as for a MOPP gear exchange (see Chapter III). 

When the task is completed, Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 reverse roles. 

NOTE: Personnel should check their overboots, rubber gloves, and overgarment 

for damage. Any rips, tears, or punctures in these items should be reported to the 

monitor at Station 5. This allows the monitor to check personnel for 

chemical-agent symptoms and check their clothing for possible contamination. 

• Buddy 1 decontaminates his own gloves. He loosens Buddy 2’s 

overgarment hood by unfastening the barrel lock. (NOTE: If there is difficulty 

unfastening the barrel lock, loosen the draw cord.) He then loosens the draw cord 

around the edge of the hood and unfastens the hook-and-pile fastener at the chin. Buddy 1

must take care to avoid touching Buddy 2’s skin and throat. 

• Buddy 1 removes Buddy 2’s overgarment hood by opening the front 

closure flap and pulling the slide fastener from the chin down to the chest. Buddy 1

instructs Buddy 2 to turn around. Buddy 1 grasps the back of Buddy 2’s hood, rolls the 

hood inside out (being careful not to contaminate the inner garment), and pulls the hood off. 

(c) Risk. If these procedures are done improperly, contamination can be 

transferred from the hood to the combat boots, head, and neck. 

(3) Station 3—Overgarment Removal. 

V-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(a) Preparation. At this station, the contaminated overgarments are 

removed before the agent penetrates the overgarment material and touches the 

undergarments or the skin. The following equipment and supplies are needed: two 

30-gallon containers for each two decontamination lanes, 100 plastic trash bags (or about 

one per person), and ten boxes of SDKs. One person is required to operate this station. He 

directs and monitors personnel as they remove their overgarments in the same manner as a 

MOPP gear exchange (see Chapter III). 

(b) Execution. 

NOTE: The attendant avoids touching the person’s skin or inner clothing. If 

contact is made, decontaminate immediately and then proceed with the 

overgarment removal. 

• The attendant assists the contaminated person in removing his

overgarment. The contaminated person locates his trouser suspender snap-couplers by 

feeling for them on the outside of his jacket and releases them. The attendant cuts and 

removes the M9 detector paper from around the person’s wrist. He unfastens the 

hook-and-pile fastener over the jacket zipper, waist cord, and wrist straps on the jacket. 

The attendant unfastens the front-closure flap on the front of the jacket and pulls the slide 

fastener from the top of the chest down to the bottom of the jacket. He unfastens the

webbing-strip snaps at the bottom of the jacket and releases the coat retention cord. He 

unfastens the back snaps and instructs the person to make a fist. Touching only the outside

surface of the jacket, the attendant loosens the bottom of the jacket by pulling the material 

away from the body. He then pulls the jacket down and away from him (see Figure V-5). 

Figure V-5. Removing the Overgarment Jacket 

• The attendant instructs the person to turn around, extend his arms in 

front of him, and make a fist to prevent the removal of his chemical protective gloves. The 

attendant grasps the jacket near the shoulders and removes it by pulling it down and away 

from the body. 

NOTE: If there is difficulty removing the jacket in this manner, pull one arm out 

at a time. 

• The attendant cuts and removes the M9 detector paper from the 

trousers. He unfastens the hook-and-pile fasteners and zippers on the cuffs of the trousers. 

He also unfastens the front waist snaps and unzips the front zipper. He has the person lift 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-13 
one leg and point that foot down and bend slightly at the knees for stability. The attendant 

grasps the cuff of the elevated foot with a hand on each side and pulls the cuff in an 

alternating, jerking motion until the person can step out of the trouser leg. The process is 

repeated on the other leg. 

NOTE: The attendant ensures that the person steps wide enough so that he will 

not rub his clean leg against the contaminated boot and overgarment. 

(4) Station 4—Overboots and Gloves Removal. At this station, contaminated 

overboots and gloves are removed to limit the spread of contamination. The overboots and 

gloves may also be decontaminated for reissue. 

(a) Preparation. At this station, the following equipment and supplies are 

needed for every two lanes used: engineer tape, two cutting tools, and 100 plastic trash bags 

(or about one per person). 

• If the overboots and gloves are not being decontaminated, two 

30-gallon containers are needed. 

• If the overboots and gloves are being decontaminated, the following 

items are needed: eight 30-gallon containers; two long-handled brushes; two ponchos or 

large plastic sheets; one CAM; one AN/VDR-2 (for radiological contamination); four M256A1 

detection kits; one immersion heater; 100 plastic trash bags; M8 detector paper, as 

required; 10 percent STB/HTH solution; hot, soapy water; and cold rinse water. 

• If replacement overboots and gloves are available, establish a liquid 

contamination control line and set two 30-gallon containers 1 foot back from the line (see 

Figure V-6). Personnel should support themselves using the containers and discard their 

overgarments into the containers. An attendant directs and monitors the personnel as they 

remove their overboots and gloves in the same manner as a MOPP gear exchange (see 

Chapter III); however, the person steps over the control line instead of onto a jacket. 

Figure V-6. Station 4 Layout 

V-14 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• If replacement overboots and gloves are not available, fill two 

30-gallon containers with hot, soapy water; two 30-gallon containers with a 10 percent 

STB/HTH solution, placing two scrub brushes near the containers; and then fill two 

30-gallon containers with cold rinse water. One attendant supervises and assists the

personnel wearing the M42 mask. The other two attendants decontaminate the overboots 

and the gloves; one processes the overboots, while the other processes the gloves. 

NOTE: Replace the water in all the containers once 20 items have been processed. 

When available, the decontamination platoon will assist with the water 

requirements. 

• Use engineer tape to mark the liquid-contamination control line on the 

ground. Place the cutting tools, two dirty containers, and plastic bags on the dirty side of 

the liquid contamination control line. The liquid contamination control line separates the 

dirty and clean areas. No liquid agent should be tracked on the ground beyond the liquid 

contamination control line. 

(b) Execution. The attendant unfastens or cuts the elastic closures on the 

overboots. The contaminated person faces the liquid contamination control line and steps 

back about 12 inches. The attendant steps on the back of the overboot and instructs him to 

lift his heel and work his foot out of the overboot and step across the liquid contamination 

control line (see Figure V-7). Repeat the process on the other foot. If this process cannot 

remove the overboot, the attendant cuts it off and discards it in the designated container. 

The person holds the fingertips of his gloves and partially slides his hands out. The 

attendant removes the gloves. If the contaminated person is wearing the M42 protective 

mask, the attendant from Station 6 carries the filter canister until it is removed. The 

overboots and gloves are decontaminated using the following steps: 

Figure V-7. Liquid Contamination Control Line 

NOTES: 

1. Check all items for holes, tears, and punctures; and discard any item with a 

defect. Do not decontaminate any item that is unserviceable. 

2. The attendant at Station 4 performs his duty from the dirty side of the liquid 

contamination control line. 

• Step 1. Submerge the gloves and overboots in their respective 

container of hot, soapy water. (Some of the contamination is removed during this step.) 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-15 
When the overboots and gloves are removed from the container, ensure that no water 

remains inside them. 

• Step 2. Submerge the gloves and overboots in their respective 

containers of STB/HTH solution. Thoroughly scrub the items until no visible 

contamination remains. After scrubbing, submerge each item once more before

transferring it to the rinse container. 

• Step 3. Thoroughly rinse the scrubbed items, making sure that they 

are rinsed inside and out. 

• Step 4. Place the usable items on a poncho or a plastic sheet to air-dry 

and weather. 

• Step 5. Place the usable items in a plastic trash bag along with an 

M256A1 detector kit. If the detector kit shows that contamination remains, the attendants 

can recycle the items or discard them. However, if the kit shows no contamination, the 

items can be reused. 

(c) Risk. If the overboots are improperly removed, the combat boots may 

become contaminated and contamination may be spread to the clean areas. If the gloves

are not properly removed, the undergarments and skin may become contaminated. 

(5) Station 5—Monitoring. At this station, contamination on personnel is 

identified, spot decontamination is provided, and medical aid is provided, as required. 

(a) Preparation. The following equipment and supplies are needed for the 

attendant and health care provider: first aid supplies, one CAM/ICAM, one AN/VDR-2 (for 

radiological contamination), five books of M8 detector paper per 100 people, and one case of 

SDKs. A health care provider should be present to treat any casualties suffering from 

chemical-agent symptoms. If a health care provider is unavailable, a combat lifesaver 

should be present. 

(b) Execution. The attendant checks personnel for agent vapor 

contamination using the CAM/ICAM (see Figure V-8). The attendant uses M8 paper to 

detect liquid agents. Symptoms of agent poisoning are the most obvious indication of skin 

contamination. At this station, the trauma specialist checks each person for symptoms of 

agent poisoning and treats them, as required. Personnel should report damage to their 

MOPP gear that was identified at Stations 2, 3, and 4. The attendant can then 

decontaminate the identified areas with the SDK. Personnel are remonitored after 

decontamination. It is possible that all liquid chemical contamination is absorbed into the 

clothing. If so, M8/M9 detector paper will indicate negative, even though there is a hazard. 

V-16 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure V-8. Checking for Contamination 

(c) Risk. If this station is omitted, the contaminated personnel could 

become a casualty. After this station, the personnel will not be checked for contamination 

or decontaminated again. Commanders can choose to conduct a more extensive 

contamination check here if medical assistance and time are available. This decreases the 

risk of casualties. 

(6) Station 6—Mask Removal. At this station, the mask is removed without 

contaminating the person. The mask is taken to a mask decontamination point, limiting 

agent transfer at the station. 

(a) Preparation. The M8A1 or M22 automatic chemical-agent detector

alarm (ACADA) and engineer tape are needed. Two people are needed to operate this 

station. They remove and carry the masks to Station 7. 

(b) Execution. 

• If the hood is still attached to the mask, the attendant pulls the hood

over the front of the mask, grabs the mask by the voicemitter cover, and pulls the mask off 

the person. The person holds his breath as the mask is removed. If the mask has optical

inserts, the attendant holds the mask open so that the person can remove the inserts 

without touching the outside of the mask. The person walks upwind 5 meters, crosses the 

vapor contamination control line, and then resumes breathing. The attendant brings the

mask to Station 7. 

NOTE: The attendant should show the individual the exit route before he 

removes his mask and closes his eyes. 

• If the wind direction remains constant, no chemical vapor hazard is

expected beyond the vapor contamination control line. Position the M8A1 or the M22 

ACADA upwind of the station to warn of vapor hazards. The person getting

decontaminated moves straight ahead; while his mask, which may still give off vapors, is 

held on the dirty side of the vapor contamination control line and taken to Station 7 where 

it is decontaminated. 

(c) Risk. If the mask is removed improperly, the person can breathe toxic 

vapors. There is a high probability that the vapor hazard is still present on the mask and 

the hood after it is decontaminated. The person must not touch the outside of the mask 

because it could contaminate his bare hands. (The person then proceeds to Station 8.) 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-17 
(7) Station 7—Mask Decontamination Point. At this station, all the 

contamination is removed from the mask. 

NOTE: Once 20 items have been processed in the wash containers, replace the 

water. Once 10 items have been processed in the rinse water, replace it. Place 

the contaminated waste into the sump. 

(a) Preparation. 

• At this station, the following materials and equipment are needed: 

four containers (about a 3-gallon capacity); one CAM (for chemical only); hot, soapy water; 

rinse water; mask-sanitizing solution; one immersion heater; one 30-gallon container; two 

sponges; and one case of paper towels per company. 

• Dig a sump that is 4 feet long, 4 feet wide, and 4 feet deep to discard 

the used filters and canisters. Place the equipment and materials as shown in Figure V-3, 

page V-8. Three people are needed to operate this station. Two people strip, wash, rinse, 

sanitize, and dry the masks. The other person checks the masks and carries them to the 

reissue point. 

(b) Execution. Remove the eye lens outserts and the hood (if the hood 

was not cut off at Station 2). Remove and discard the filters or canisters. Put the items 

into the properly marked containers. Wash the mask, hood, eye lens outserts, and hoses on

the M42 and M43 masks in hot, soapy water. Rinse these items in clean water, dip them 

into the sanitizing solution, agitate them for 5 minutes, and then rinse them again in clean 

water. Ensure that two different buckets of water are used for rinsing. Add one tube of 

mask-sanitizing solution (HTH) for each quart of water. Wipe the masks with rags until 

they are almost dry. Discard each container of mask-sanitizing solution into a sump after 

every ten masks. Check the masks for contamination with a CAM. If the masks are still 

contaminated, recycle them for more decontamination and then decontaminate your rubber 

gloves. If the masks are not contaminated, take the masks to the reissue point. Take care 

not to become contaminated or to contaminate the reissue point. 

(c) Risk. If these procedures are done improperly, personnel may become 

contaminated when the masks are reissued at the reissue point. Even if they are done

correctly, there is still a possible danger when many masks are stacked together. Small 

amounts of residual vapor from each mask can become potentially dangerous. 

NOTE: Runners between Stations 7 and 8 are in MOPP2 and are prepared to go to 

MOPP4. 

(8) Station 8—Reissue Point. At this station, the mask and its components are 

provided to personnel for reassembly and decontaminated individual equipment from 

Station 1 is reissued. 

(a) Preparation. At this station, the protective mask prescribed load list 

parts are needed. The unit CBRN NCO or supply sergeant sets up the reissue point to 

provide personnel with replacement parts for all types of protective masks and to assist in 

mask maintenance. If M42 or M43 masks are used, the unit CBRN NCO must be at this 

station. 

(b) Execution. The mask and its components are reissued to the person 

who assembles it in the AA. The unit CBRN NCO affixes canisters to the cleaned M42 and 

V-18 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
M43 hoses. The person picks up their individual gear and moves to the 

postdecontamination AA. 

(c) Risk. If these procedures are done improperly, personnel may be 

inadequately equipped for future operations. 

NOTE: If time is critical, the CBRN NCO will have replacement chemical suits, 

overboots, and gloves at this station for reissue. If time is available, personnel 

will receive this equipment at the postdecontamination AA. 

d. Resupply Support Responsibilities. The supporting decontamination unit must

supply most of the equipment and supplies that are required to operate the DTD. This does 

not relieve the supported unit of the requirement to maintain adequate supplies to conduct 

DTD procedures. 

(1) A decontamination unit will continue to receive support from its parent 

organization. The supported unit provides the decontamination unit with replacements, 

supplies, and material at the end of the DED. This shortens the time that the 

decontamination unit is not mission-capable following the DED. The supported unit must 

coordinate for supplies and equipment necessary to operate the DTD. Three people are at 

the station for proper operation. 

• One person supervises the decontamination of the individual gear and 

takes the decontaminated equipment to the checkpoint. He also prepares a new slurry

mixture as necessary. 

• One person remains at the checkpoint and checks the gear using the 

detection equipment to ensure that it is decontaminated. 

• One person transports the decontaminated gear to the reissue point. 

(2) Typical nondecontamination units do not have more than two CAMs per 

company-size unit. However, the DTD requires a minimum of three CAMs. The supporting

HQ may need to provide additional CAMs. The division support command (DISCOM) 

sustains the division decontamination units. A decontamination unit attached to a 

maneuver force identifies the resources that are needed to accomplish the mission and 

passes these requirements to the maneuver staff supply officer (S-4)/component logistics 

staff officer (G-4). The S-4 and G-4 then coordinate with the supporting CSS element to fill

the requirement. The supply units that operate the Class II points issue the protective 

masks and overgarments. They normally package protective clothing as complete sets of 

MOPP equipment to support a predetermined number of personnel. Decontamination 

supplies may be issued in preconfigured “push” packages. 

e. DED. Decontamination units are responsible for setting up, operating, and 

closing the DED portion of the thorough decontamination operation. The DED for CB 

contamination is comprised of five stations. For radiological contamination, the DED uses 

all but Station 2. Stations are normally 50 meters apart; however, spacing is METT-TCdependent. Resupply procedures are of critical importance. Resupply vehicles typically

operate independently and need to maintain communications with the platoon HQ in the 

event that the platoon relocates or needs to change linkup locations or the mission 

requirements change. 

CAUTION 

Do not kneel or touch the ground while attempting 

to remove contamination. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-19 
(1) Station 1—Primary Wash. 

(a) At this station, the gross contamination and dirt are removed from the 

vehicle. Spray the vehicle for 2 to 3 minutes with hot, soapy water, and scrub it to help 

remove caked-on dirt. The mechanical action of scrubbing also helps remove thickened 

chemical agents. Although the undersurfaces are difficult to reach, try to remove as much 

dirt as possible. After scrubbing the vehicle, spray it again for 2 to 3 minutes to remove 

loosened dirt and contamination. This station uses about 250 gallons of water per vehicle. 

Larger vehicles with large quantities of dirt use more water. The runoff from this station is 

contaminated and must be treated as hazardous. The contaminated runoff must be 

controlled; if available, engineer support may be used to construct a sump. This station 

requires high water pressure systems (M12A1 power-driven decontamination apparatus 

[PDDA], M17 lightweight decontamination system [LDS], or multipurpose decontamination 

system [MPDS]) rather than low water volume systems (65-gallon-per-minute [GPM] 

pumps). 

NOTE: Use 35 cubic feet of space per 250 gallons of liquid runoff when calculating 

the size for the drainage sump. 

(b) The effectiveness of the wash depends on the type of wash (hot, soapy 

water; hot water; cold water; or steam). The relative effectiveness rankings for selected 

surfaces are listed in Table V-4. Hot, soapy water is heated from about 120°F to 140°F to 

and a detergent is added to reduce surface tension. The detergent removes the agent by

emulsification, which is followed by the mechanical displacement of the suspension. Hot 

water alone is less effective than hot, soapy water. For some chemical agents, cold water 

exhibits better solvent characteristics. Because of the high temperature, some agents are 

best removed by steam through vaporization. See Potential Military Chemical/Biological 

Agents and Compounds, for the chemical and physical properties of CW agents. 

Table V-4. Effectiveness of Types of Wash 

Agents/Surfaces Type of Wash 

TGD on alkyd-painted metal Hot water and/or steam; hot or cold, soapy water 

TGD on CARC-painted metal Hot, soapy water; hot water and/or steam; cold water 

TGD on canvas or webbing Steam; hot water and/or hot, soapy water; cold water 

THD on alkyd-painted metal Hot water and/or steam; hot, soapy water; cold water 

THD on CARC-painted metal Hot, soapy water; hot water and/or steam; cold water 

THD on canvas or webbing Steam; hot, soapy water; cold water; hot water 

HD on alkyd-painted metal Hot, soapy water; hot water and/or steam; cold water 

HD on CARC-painted metal Hot, soapy water and/or steam; cold water; hot water 

HD on canvas or webbing Steam; hot water; hot, soapy water; cold water 

VX on alkyd-painted metal Steam; cold water; hot water and/or hot, soapy water 

VX on canvas or webbing Steam; hot water and/or hot, soapy water; cold water 

GD on canvas or webbing Steam; hot, soapy water and/or hot water; cold water 

NOTE: The types of wash are listed in the order of effectiveness, starting with the most effective to the least 

effective. 

V-20 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(2) Station 2—Decontaminant Application. 

(a) At this station, a decontaminant is applied to the entire vehicle. The 

vehicle is divided into four parts, and a member of the scrubbing team is assigned to each 

part. This limits the workload of each member of the scrubbing team and avoids

duplication of work. STB slurry, STB dry mix (if the temperature is below 0°F), or another 

approved decontaminant is applied starting at the top of the vehicle and working toward 

the undercarriage. Every effort is made to apply the decontaminant to the undercarriage, 

especially if the vehicle has crossed a contaminated area. 

(b) Before starting the decontamination operation, the decontamination 

crew prepares the slurry mix in the M12 PDDA or by mixing 100 pounds of STB with 20

gallons of hot water in 30-gallon containers. Each member of the scrubbing team wears a

toxicological agent-protective (TAP) apron or wet-weather gear to protect him and his 

clothing from being saturated with water, decontaminant, or agent. 

NOTE: Use 35 cubic feet of space per 250 gallons of liquid runoff when calculating 

the size for the drainage sump. 

(c) Ensure that there is a sufficient amount of decontaminant on the item 

being decontaminated for neutralization to occur. 

(3) Station 3—Contact Time/Interior Decontamination. 

(a) At this station, the decontaminant is allowed to completely neutralize 

the chemical agent and the interior of the vehicle is decontaminated. Vehicles are moved to 

a concealed position. The attendant tracks the time each vehicle enters and exits this site 

to ensure that at least 30 minutes has passed. When there is a 30-minute contact time, 

there should be no desorption for most chemical agents. The attendant also tracks whether 

any contamination is found on the inside of the vehicle. This information may be needed 

for redeployment as part of the clearance decontamination. 

(b) While the vehicle is held at this station for the decontaminant to 

completely react, the driver inspects the interior of the vehicle for liquid contamination. 

The driver is given M8 detector paper to check for chemical contamination. If he identifies 

contamination, he is given decontamination supplies to decontaminate the interior of the 

vehicle. The best decontamination solution for use in the interior of vehicles is a 5 percent 

solution of HTH or STB. The driver wipes all reasonably accessible surfaces with a rag or 

sponge soaked in the HTH or STB solution. He should not attempt to decontaminate areas 

where there is little likelihood of contamination (electrical assemblies, the area beneath the 

turret floor, etc.). 

(c) Once the interior decontamination is complete, the driver places 

covers over the seats and floor of the vehicle. (This prevents the assistant driver from 

soaking excess decontaminant into his MOPP gear.) The driver dismounts the vehicle and 

proceeds to the start of the DTD. The assistant driver, having completed the DTD, checks 

with the attendant to ensure that at least 30 minutes have passed, mounts the vehicle, and 

moves it to the next station. All drivers must exercise caution when entering or exiting the 

vehicle. 

(d) For radiological contamination, use an AN/PDR-77 or AN/VDR-2 

radiac detector to determine the extent and location of contamination inside the vehicle. If 

there is contamination, determine the intensity of the contamination. If the contamination 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-21 
is greater than 0.33 centigray (cGy), the interior of the vehicle must be decontaminated. 

Use a wet sponge to wipe the interior of the vehicle. 

(4) Station 4—Rinse. At this station, the decontaminant is removed from the 

vehicle. Spray the vehicle with water from the top to the bottom. Take care to rinse the 

undercarriage. This station uses about 200 gallons of water per vehicle. Failure to remove 

all the decontaminant from the vehicle may cause a false positive reading at Station 5. If 

high water pressure systems (M12A1 PDDA, M17 LDS, or MPDS) are not available, 

large-volume water pumps (65- and 125-GPM) should be used at this station. The driver 

removes plastic or other material (if present) covering the seats and floor and disposes of it 

as hazardous waste. 

(5) Station 5—Check. At this station, the vehicle is checked to see if it has a 

negligible contamination level or if it still has significant contamination remaining. 

Detection procedures will vary depending on the type of contamination. If significant 

contamination is found on the vehicle, the vehicle is recycled to Station 2 for chemical 

contamination or to Station 1 for radiological contamination. (See Figure V-1, page V-5, for

a suggested layout of the recycle route.) Caution must be exercised to prevent the vehicle 

from contaminating clean areas. If the vehicle cannot be recycled, the commander must 

decide what to do with the vehicle; at a minimum it should be segregated from the clean 

troops and vehicles for weathering to occur. Personnel operating the vehicle must remain 

in elevated MOPP. If sufficient resources and time are available, the vehicle should be 

placed back into a through decontamination line. 

(a) Chemical (CAM Interferents). 

• The ICAM/CAM is used to check for the presence of vapor from 

residual liquid contamination. A one-bar or lower reading on the ICAM/CAM indicates a 

negligible contamination level. Once the ICAM/CAM indicates the presence of vapor 

contamination, M8 detector paper is used to verify the presence of liquid contamination. If 

it is suspected that the ICAM/CAM and M8 detector paper are producing false positive 

results, use an M256A1 detector kit near the area to verify the presence of contamination. 

See Table V-5 for a list of common interferents that can cause false positive readings on the 

CAM. If the vehicle has significant contamination remaining, recycle it to Station 2 for 

chemical contamination or to Station 1 for radiological contamination. The commander 

may modify the recycle criteria based on mission requirements. 

V-22 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table V-5. Common Interferents for the CAM 

Interferents G Agent Bar 

Response 

H Agent Bar 

Response 

Insect repellent Low to very high N/A 

Brake fluid High to very high Very high 

General-purpose 

cleaner 

High N/A 

Burning kerosene N/A High 

Breath mints High N/A 

Gasoline vapors Low Low 

Burning grass Low to high Low 

Burning gas Low N/A 

Green smoke Low Low to high 

Break-free oil Low N/A 

Ammonia Very high N/A 

• There will be desorption of chemical agents from the surfaces after

decontamination. The desorption of vapors on surfaces painted with the CARC will stop 

sooner than it will on surfaces painted with alkyd. Consider this when checking 

decontaminated items for overall decontamination effectiveness. 

(b) Radiological. Use the AN/PDR-77, ADM-300, or AN/VDR-2 to 

determine if any contamination remains. If there is contamination remaining, determine 

the intensity of the contamination inside and outside the vehicle. If the contamination is 

greater than 0.33 centigray per hour (cGy/hr), the vehicle is then recycled to Station 1. 

f. Recycle Criteria. The commander, with the CBRN unit leader’s help, establishes 

the recycle criteria before starting the decontamination operations. The recycle criteria

determine which vehicles will return to Station 1 after contamination is detected. If the 

unit has sufficient time and resources, any vehicle having more contamination than the 

acceptable level should be recycled. However, time and resources are usually limited and 

not all vehicles can be recycled. The recycle criteria are based on the weathering effects. 

g. Reconstitution Criteria. The operational and thorough decontamination

operations that are performed on vehicles or major equipment will be recorded on the 

Operator’s Inspection Guide and Trouble Report (General-Purpose Vehicles). This 

information will become a permanent record for these vehicles or major equipment. The 

entries that are required on this form are the type of decontamination performed, 

decontaminant used, date-time group (DTG) completed, location of the decontamination 

site, and type of monitoring equipment used to verify decontamination completeness. This 

information will assist with reconstitution operations once the conflict or war has ended. 

h. DED Layouts. 

(1) Decontamination units establish thorough decontamination sites differently 

because of organization and equipment differences. The optimum layout for each type unit 

is described in the following paragraphs. This layout provides the maximum output for 

units at 100 percent personnel and equipment strength. The equipment and personnel 

requirements for the optimum layout are identified for the decontamination unit and the 

supported unit (augmenter) (see Table V-6, page V-24). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-23 
Table V-6. Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the Optimum DED Layout of an 

M12A1 PDDA-Equipped Unit 

Stations Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Decontamination platoon Augmentees 

Station 1—Primary wash 1 squad leader 

1 PDDE operator 

2 sprayers 

4 scrubbers 1 M12A1 PDDA 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

2 65-/125-GPM pumps 

6 long-handled brushes 

4 TAP aprons 

Liquid detergent 

1 TPU 

2 flashlights 

Station 2—Decontaminant 

application 

1 squad leader 

1 PDDE operator 

2 sprayers 

8 scrubbers 1 M12A1 PDDA 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

18 long-handled brushes 

9 mops with extra mop 

heads 

3 30-gallon containers 

Sufficient STB 

4 TAP aprons 

1 TPU 

2 flashlights 

Station 3—Contact 

time/interior 

decontamination 

1 NCO 2 assistants 2 AN/VDR-2s 

3 TAP aprons 

6 30-gallon containers 

10 books of M8 detector 

paper 

30 sponges 

8 M256A1 detector kits 

50 trash bags 

1 clipboard 

1 pen 

1 stopwatch 

Station 4—Rinse 1 squad leader 

1 PDDE operator 

2 pump operators 

2 sprayers 1 M12A1 PDDA 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

3 65-/125-GPM pumps 

1 TPU 

2 TAP aprons 

2 flashlights 

Station 5—Check 2 NCOs or CAM operators None 2 CAMs 

10 M256A1 detector kits 

20 books of M8 detector 

paper 

2 AN/VDR-2s 

2 M8A1 or M22 ACAAs 

C2 1 PL 

1 PSG 

None 1 HMMWV with a radio 

3 NBC marking kits 

Total Personnel 17 16 N/A 

(2) Since it is unlikely that all units will be at 100 percent strength, alternate 

layouts are discussed. For each alternate layout, decontamination unit equipment 

requirements are identified. However, personnel requirements are not identified by the 

V-24 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
chemical unit and supported unit. The total number of personnel that are needed is 

identified, with a minimum number of decontamination unit personnel. 

i. Alternate-Layout Planning Considerations. CBRN unit leaders use METT-TC to 

determine the best possible DED layout to execute their mission. When determining 

alternate DED layouts, they use the following guidelines: 

(1) The ability to spray hot, soapy water or steam under pressure must be

retained at Station 1. 

(2) The largest number of people is required at Station 2. 

(3) Experienced and qualified ICAM/CAM operators are required at Station 5. 

(4) Water does not have to be hot to rinse off the decontaminant; however, the 

lower the water pressure, the greater the amount of water required for the rinse. 

j. Decontamination Unit (M12A1). 

(1) The optimum DED layout for an M12A1 PDDA-equipped decontamination 

unit requires the use of all authorized equipment and personnel. While this DED layout is 

manpower- and equipment-intensive, it provides for the rapid decontamination of vehicles 

and equipment (eight vehicles processed per hour). This layout uses dual lanes at Stations 

1, 4, and 5 to process two vehicles at a time. Since the most time- and labor-intensive work 

takes place at Station 3, this station is designed to process three vehicles at a time. 

(2) It may not be possible for an M12A1 PDDA-equipped decontamination unit 

to use the optimum DED layout. Limited personnel or equipment will affect the DED 

layout. See Table V-7 for an alternate layout. The processing rate using this layout will be 

affected by work/rest cycles (see Table V-8, page V-26). 

Table V-7. Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the Alternate DED Layout of an 

M12A1 PDDA-Equipped Unit 

Stations Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Station 1—Primary wash 1 NCOIC* 

1 PDDE operator* 

2 sprayers 

2 scrubbers 

1 M12A1 PDDA 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

2 65-/125-GPM pumps 

4 long-handled brushes 

4 TAP aprons 

Liquid detergent 

1 TPU 

2 flashlights 

Station 2—Decontaminant 

application 

1 NCOIC* 

1 PDDE operator* 

2 sprayers 

8 scrubbers 

1 M12A1 PDDA 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

12 long-handled brushes 

4 mops with extra mop heads 

3 30-gallon containers 

Sufficient STB 

1 TPU 

4 TAP aprons 

2 flashlights 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-25 
Table V-7. Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the Alternate DED Layout of an 

M12A1 PDDA-Equipped Unit (Continued) 

Stations Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Station 3—Contact time/interior 

decontamination 

1 NCO* 

2 interior decontamination assistants 

2 AN/VDR-2s 

3 TAP aprons 

6 30-gallon containers 

10 books of M8 detector paper 

30 sponges 

8 M256A1 detector kits 

50 trash bags 

1 clipboard 

1 pen 

1 stopwatch 

Station 4—Rinse 1 NCOIC* 

1 PDDE operator* 

2 sprayers 

1 M12A1 PDDA 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

3 65-/125-GPM pumps 

1 TPU 

2 TAP aprons 

2 flashlights 

Station 5—Check 2 NCOs or CAM operators* 2 CAMs 

10 M256A1 detector kits 

20 books of M8 detector paper 

2 AN/VDR-2s 

2 M8A1 or M22 ACAAs 

C2 1 PL* 

1 PSG* 

1 HMMWV with a radio 

3 NBC marking kits 

Total Personnel 29 N/A 

*Denotes personnel from the decontamination unit. 

Table V-8. Recommended Work/Rest Cycles for DED 

Temperatures 

Stations and Workload 

Station 1 

Primary 

Wash 

Station 2 

Decontaminant 

Application 

Station 3 

Contact 

Time/Interior 

Decontamination 

Station 4 

Rinse 

Station 5 

Check 

Physical Exertion 

Moderate Heavy Moderate Moderate Light 

Cool (less than 

68°F) 

60 work 

15 rest 

30 work 

30 rest 

60 work 

15 rest 

60 work 

15 rest 

60 work 

15 rest 

Warm (68°–74°F) 45 work 

45 rest 

20 work 

20 rest 

45 work 

45 rest 

45 work 

45 rest 

50 work 

50 rest 

Hot (74°–84°F) 30 work 

60 rest 

15 work 

30 rest 

30 work 

60 rest 

30 work 

60 rest 

40 work 

80 rest 

Very hot (greater 

than 84°F) 

20 work 

60 rest 

10 work 

30 rest 

20 work 

60 rest 

20 work 

60 rest 

25 work 

75 rest 

NOTE: When operating in temperatures above 75°F, consider the ability of the personnel to accomplish the 

mission. Once the personnel have reached their maximum workload for heat stress, they cannot recover 

quickly enough to accomplish the decontamination mission. A viable option is to postpone the 

decontamination operation until a cooler part of the day or evening. This will reduce the heat stress load on 

the personnel and increase the probability of mission success. 

V-26 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
k. Decontamination Platoon (M17 LDS or MPDS). 

(1) The decontamination units equipped with the M17 LDS or MPDS will set 

up the DED differently than the decontamination units equipped with the M12A1 PDDA 

(see Table V-9). While the optimum DED layout is manpower- and equipment-intensive, it 

provides for the rapid decontamination of vehicles and equipment (eight vehicles processed 

per hour). The layout uses dual lanes at Stations 1, 4, and 5 to process two vehicles at a 

time. Since the most time- and labor-intensive work takes place at Station 3, this station is 

designed to process three vehicles at a time. The processing rate of this layout will be 

affected by any work/rest cycles. 

Table V-9. Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the Optimum DED Layout of an M17 

LDS-Equipped Unit 

Stations Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Decontamination platoon Augmenter 

Station 1—Primary wash 1 squad leader 

4 sprayers 

2 scrubbers 

2 scrubbers 2 M17 LDSs 

2 3,000-gallon tanks 

2 65-/125-GPM pumps 

6 long-handled brushes 

8 TAP aprons 

Liquid detergent 

2 flashlights 

Station 2—Decontaminant 

application 

1 squad leader 

3 appliers/mixers 

8 appliers 2 65-/125-GPM pumps 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

18 long-handled brushes 

9 mops with extra mop 

heads 

6 30-gallon containers 

Sufficient STB 

2 flashlights 

Station 3—Contact 

time/interior 

decontamination 

1 NCO 

2 assistants 

None 2 AN/VDR-2s 

3 TAP aprons 

6 30-gallon containers 

10 books of M8 detector 

paper 

30 sponges 

8 M256A1 detector kits 

50 trash bags 

1 clipboard 

1 pen 

1 stopwatch 

Station 4—Rinse 1 squad leader 

4 sprayers 

2 sprayers 1 M12A1 PDDA 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

3 65-/125-GPM pumps 

2 TPUs 

2 TAP aprons 

2 flashlights 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-27 
Table V-9. Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the Optimum DED Layout of an M17 

LDS-Equipped Unit (Continued) 

Stations Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Decontamination platoon Augmenter 

Station 5—Check 2 NCOs or CAM operators None 2 CAMs 

10 M256A1 detector kits 

20 books of M8 detector 

paper 

2 AN/VDR-2s 

2 M8A1 or M22 ACAAs 

C2 1 PL 

1 PSG 

None 1 HMMWV with a radio 

3 NBC marking kits 

Total Personnel 23 12 N/A 

(2) It may not be possible for an M17 LDS- or MPDS-equipped

decontamination unit to use the optimum DED layout. Limited personnel or equipment 

will affect the DED layout. See Table V-10 for an alternate layout. 

Table V-10. Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the Alternate DED Layout of an M17 

LDS-Equipped Unit 

Stations Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Station 1—Primary wash 1 NCOIC* 

4 sprayers 

4 scrubbers 

2 M17 LDSs or MPDSs 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

2 65-/125-GPM pumps 

4 long-handled brushes 

8 TAP aprons 

Liquid detergent 

2 flashlights 

Station 2—Decontaminant 

application 

1 NCOIC* 

8 scrubbers/mixers 

2 65-/125-GPM pumps 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

12 long-handled brushes 

8 mops with extra mop heads 

3 30-gallon containers 

Sufficient STB 

2 flashlights 

Station 3—Contact time/interior 

decontamination 

1 NCO* 

2 interior decontamination assistants 

2 AN/VDR-2s 

3 TAP aprons 

6 30-gallon containers 

10 books of M8 detector paper 

30 sponges 

8 M256A1 detector kits 

50 trash bags 

1 clipboard 

1 pen 

1 stopwatch 

Station 4—Rinse 1 NCOIC* 

4 sprayers 

2 M17 LDSs or MPDSs 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

2 65-/125-GPM pumps 

4 TAP aprons 

2 flashlights 

V-28 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table V-10. Personnel and Equipment Requirements for the Alternate DED Layout of an M17 

LDS-Equipped Unit (Continued) 

Stations Personnel Equipment and Supplies 

Station 5—Check 2 NCOs or CAM operators* 2 CAMs 

10 M256A1 detector kits 

20 books of M8 detector paper 

2 AN/VDR-2s 

2 M8A1 or M22 ACAAs 

C2 1 PL* 

1 PSG* 

1 HMMWV with a radio 

3 NBC marking kits 

Total Personnel 30 N/A 

*Denotes personnel from the decontamination unit. 

l. Thorough Decontamination Site Closure. Once all vehicles and personnel from

the contaminated unit have processed through the thorough decontamination site, the site 

can be closed. Coordination with the supported unit is necessary before actually closing the 

site to ensure that all contaminated elements have been processed. The decontamination 

unit closes the DED first. Once the DED is closed, the decontamination unit processes 

through the DTD. After the chemical unit has processed through the DTD, the DTD is 

closed. At this point, the decontamination unit marks the area as a contaminated area and 

reports its exact location to the supported unit using an NBC5 Report. 

(1) Closing the DED Area. The DED is closed in sequence, starting at 

Station 1. All vehicles, equipment, and nonexpendable supplies are inspected for 

contamination. If contamination is found on an item, it is decontaminated. 

(a) Station 1—Primary Wash. Spray all vehicles and equipment with hot, 

soapy water to remove any contamination that could have been transferred during the 

primary wash operations. Drain the water billets or fabric tanks of water. Inspect all

equipment and vehicles for contamination using the appropriate detection equipment. 

(b) Station 2—Decontaminant Application. Throw the mops and brushes

that were used in applying the decontaminant into a sump or bury them. Inspect the

unused decontaminant, and load it on a vehicle. 

(c) Station 3—Contact Time/Interior Decontamination. Inspect any 

unused supplies and equipment for contamination. If no contamination is detected, load 

the equipment and supplies on a vehicle. Throw all contaminated supplies into the nearest 

sump. 

(d) Station 4—Rinse. Spray all vehicles and equipment with hot, soapy 

water to remove any contamination that could have been transferred during the rinse 

operations. Drain the water billets or fabric tanks. Inspect all the equipment and vehicles

for contamination using the appropriate detection equipment. If no contamination is 

detected, load the equipment onto the vehicles. Spread one can of STB dry mix into each of

the sumps and then cover them. Post NBC hazard markers near the covered sumps. 

(e) Station 5—Check. Ensure that all equipment has been checked for 

contamination. If it is not contaminated, load it onto a vehicle. If it is contaminated, 

decontaminate it according to the appropriate technical manual (TM). Throw any 

contaminated supplies into the nearest sump. Move all vehicles upwind of Station 5 and

inspect them again for contamination. If any contamination is detected, use the M100 to 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-29 
decontaminate the identified areas. Once the vehicles are staged, all personnel proceed to 

the DTD. 

(2) Closing the DTD Area. Once all personnel from the DED have processed 

through the DTD, it may be closed. After the last person has exited the DTD— 

(a) Pick up all used supplies from Station 7, and put them in the Station 7 

sump. Remove the contamination control line. If engineer tape was used, dispose of it in 

the Station 7 sump. 

(b) Move all usable supplies and equipment from all stations to Station 1. 

Discard all unusable supplies from Stations 3, 4, and 5 in the Station 1 sump. 

(c) Decontaminate all supplies and equipment collected at Station 1 using 

the decontamination and rinse water at Station 1. Pour the decontamination and rinse 

water from the station into the sump, and decontaminate the containers. 

(d) Mark the entire decontamination area. Remove your overgarment

using the MOPP gear exchange technique, and dispose of it in the sump at Station 1. 

(e) Move any equipment used to fill the sump upwind of the 

decontamination area. Decontaminate rubber gloves, and move all remaining equipment 

and supplies at Station 1 upwind of the decontamination area. Keep this equipment and 

supplies separate from that used to fill the sump. 

NOTE: See Appendix K for detailed procedures on the disposal of contaminated 

waste. 

8. Thorough Decontamination Under Unusual Conditions 

Decontamination operations are not restricted to daylight hours. The enemy may 

employ CBRN weapons at night, since weather conditions are usually more favorable for 

their employment. Consequently, CBRN contamination encountered at night may require 

decontamination before daylight. 

a. Conducting decontamination operations at night is a challenge. “White light”

cannot be used without possibly revealing your location. However, decontamination 

personnel must have illumination to perform essential decontamination tasks such as 

spraying water, applying decontaminants, using detection equipment, and doffing the 

MOPP gear. 

b. Use M8/M9 detector paper to check for chemical contamination and to see how 

well the chemical decontamination was performed. If contamination is present, the paper

color changes to red, which cannot be seen if red-filtered light is used. The CAM and 

M256A1 detector kit can be used to identify and detect chemical agents, but they require a 

light source to obtain a reading. 

c. Several vehicles waiting for or undergoing decontamination present a significant 

infrared signature because of the hot engines. Entering, exiting, and moving within the 

decontamination site is difficult under blackout conditions. 

d. Night-decontamination operations are difficult, but they can be accomplished. 

Conduct thorough decontamination operations in built-up areas, whenever possible. Use a 

building for DTD operations and a warehouse for DED operations, if available. This allows 

the use of white light. Personnel can see what they are decontaminating, see where they 

are going, and read the color changes of the M8/M9 detector paper. 

V-30 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
e. There will be a need for additional people to act as ground guides in the DED 

area. The NCOICs of Stations 1, 2, and 4 will inspect each vehicle with a flashlight or 

chemical light before the vehicle can proceed to the next station. There should be at least 

two flashlights at each station in the DED and DTD areas. 

9. Colocation of Patient Decontamination With Troop Decontamination 

The decontamination of patients for entry into an MTF or while they are awaiting 

evacuation in clean vehicles for transport to an MTF can be established adjacent to a DTD 

area. Close coordination needs to be maintained between medical personnel supervising 

the patient decontamination and personnel supervising the DTD. This offers benefits to 

both units. 

NOTE: See Chapter X and FM 4-02.7 for more information. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 V-31 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Chapter VI 

CLEARANCE DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

a. Clearance decontamination is the final level of decontamination. It is the most 

resource-intensive. It requires command involvement, guidance, and decisions on the 

disposition of possible mission-essential equipment. 

b. Clearance decontamination provides the decontamination of equipment and 

personnel to a level that allows unrestricted transportation, maintenance, employment and 

disposal. Clearance decontamination can be used to prepare organizations or individual 

units for return to their home garrisons, whether within the United States, its territories, 

or possessions. At the end of a conflict or at normal rotation during peacekeeping or nationbuilding operations, a unit may be ordered to return to garrison. US military assets may 

also be required to support clearance decontamination to support HLS/HLD requirements. 

c. Tasks given to CBRN defense personnel or elements supporting clearance 

decontamination may involve the physical status of the unit or activity itself, or they may 

involve the fulfillment of obligations under a treaty or memorandum of understanding 

(MOU) to the HN. These tasks may include the following: 

• Recordkeeping. 

• Postconflict intelligence preparation of the battlespace (IPB). 

• FP. 

• Decontamination. 

• Containment of residual hazards. 

• Recovery and control of enemy CBRN capabilities. 

• FHP. 

• Coordination with multinational forces or nonmilitary entities. 

• Contaminated material retrogradation. 

c. Most of the specified and implied tasks of CBRN defense personnel supporting 

clearance decontamination are simultaneous and interdependent. For example, post

conflict IPB supports FP, containment of residual hazards, and contaminated material 

retrogradation. Clearance decontamination may include supporting recovery and control of 

the enemy CBRN hazards (see Figure VI-1, page VI-2). Recordkeeping supports virtually 

all other tasks. Recovery operations are closely related to conflict termination. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VI-1 
Figure VI-1. Decontamination Support 

e. Clearance decontamination requires a significant level of effort. The resources 

needed to conduct clearance decontamination (i.e., low-level CBRN or TIM monitoring 

capabilities, decontamination units, MEDSURV, supplies, and equipment) require 

coordination from the unit level through the combatant command level. 

2. Postconflict Intelligence Preparation of the Battlespace 

As a conflict ends, there remain significant IPB-related functions that may continue to 

require decontamination support. 

a. Even when the conflict has terminated, the continued presence of threat CBRN 

weapons, contaminated areas, and TIM hazards presents volatile situations. This may be 

particularly true as HN and international relief agencies enter the area. CBRN defense 

assets may be tasked to support intelligence collection on enemy CBRN weapons that are 

assessed to exist but which have not been captured or destroyed. In such cases, intelligence

will attempt to develop a complete picture of the enemy’s residual CBRN assets and 

capabilities—including probable locations and dispositions of weapons and agents, research 

and production facilities, documentation, key enemy military and civilian personnel, and 

possible reaction from residual enemy forces. 

b. The CBRN defense personnel may also be tasked to assess the hazards from 

indigenous TIM facilities that have suffered collateral damage and to be prepared to deal 

with the release of TIM from those facilities. 

VI-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
3. Force Protection 

During conflict termination, FP measures still deter, detect, contain, and mitigate the 

possible effects of CBRN attacks and threats. Unit draw-down may invite strikes by 

residual enemy forces or terrorists to punish and inflict revenge on the United States and 

coalition forces. Planning for decontamination operations, therefore, must continue. 

Decontamination site selection can now be based on internal lines of communication (LOCs)

rather than the axis of advance, which facilitates logistics and transportation. Other site 

selection considerations (such as road network accessibility, water sources and drainage, 

and likely wind direction) still apply. 

4. Decontamination 

Clearance decontamination may be required as part of a supported unit’s restoration 

operations. For example, a unit may now have time to conduct clearance decontamination 

that was deferred during previous operations. Decontamination elements may also be 

tasked to support the decontamination of civilian personnel, equipment, facilities or terrain 

in coordination with HN authorities. See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures 

for NBC Defense of Theater Fixed Sites, Ports, and Airfields for more information on 

clearance decontamination procedures. 

5. Containment of Residual Hazards 

Expect to receive taskings to identify, assess, and mitigate contamination hazards that 

may remain at the end of the conflict. An assessment based on the accurate records of 

known hazards will help determine what actions are necessary (e.g., isolation, weathering, 

decontamination, containerization). Decontamination may be required, and 

decontaminated materials may be transferred to the HN or to follow-on forces. 

6. Recovery and Control of Enemy Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and 

Nuclear Capabilities 

Emphasis will be placed on identifying and securing enemy CBRN capabilities. As 

enemy CBRN weapons, agents, and facilities are discovered, they will likely be disabled, 

destroyed, or isolated. Decontamination elements can expect taskings to support the 

recovery and control of enemy CBRN capabilities. 

a. As in combat operations, prior planning will facilitate decontamination support 

and ensure that the mission is successful. Decontamination elements should maintain 

close coordination with those forces searching for and assessing residual enemy CBRN 

capabilities (particularly the types of agents, locations, and size of facilities). This 

coordination will enable decontamination planners to anticipate logistics, transportation, 

and personnel requirements. 

b. A search and recovery task force (S/RTF), formed to gain timely control over 

enemy CBRN capabilities, may include a decontamination specialist to advise on how 

items, facilities, or hazard areas may be decontaminated or advise on the practicality of 

decontamination. This specialist would provide vital planning information to the 

decontamination element. 

c. The S/RTF would also provide emergency responses to CBRN incidents or 

accidents, resulting in an emergency response from the supporting decontamination 

element. This requires the decontamination element to maintain close coordination with its 

higher HQ and supporting transportation and logistics elements. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VI-3 
7. Force Health Protection 

a. The services use MEDSURV systems to identify outbreaks of illness, which can 

help in the assessment and identification of potential BW casualties. Medical teams can 

identify, treat, and handle CBRN casualties. MTFs have personnel who are trained in

decontamination procedures so that only clean patients will enter and be admitted to 

hospitals. Biologically contagious patients can be treated under isolation conditions. HSS 

systems also conduct health risk assessments for CBRN and TIM exposure and monitor 

individual exposure as part of their recordkeeping. For more information, see FM 4-02.7. 

b. Records kept by decontamination elements also contribute to the surveillance 

process. When coordinated with health service units is maintained, useful information on 

individual exposure and decontamination (such as the type of agent, level of radiation 

exposure, number of exposed individuals, dates and times of exposure events) can be 

provided to assess the patient’s condition and short- and long-term treatment requirements. 

8. Coordination With Multinational Forces or Nonmilitary Entities 

a. As combat operations terminate, multinational forces or HN elements may arrive 

and assume missions from redeploying US units. The activities of these forces and 

organizations may include the decontamination and management of contaminated areas. 

The US decontamination elements may be tasked to take the lead or to assist in these 

activities. Working relationships with these elements should be defined by a treaty or 

MOU. 

b. Incoming personnel must be briefed on multinational or HN procedures, 

equipment, and training. In any case, ensure that the responsibilities of each element and 

the procedures to be used are agreed to and clearly understood by all parties. 

9. Contaminated Materials Retrogradation 

As a part of unit redeployment, some equipment to be redeployed (retrograded) may 

have potential residual or low-level contamination. Suspected equipment may be identified

through the records made during operational and thorough decontamination operations. 

Also, any vehicle or piece of equipment that was present in an attack or a downwind hazard 

area may have residual contamination. 

a. If equipment is to be retrograded under nonemergency conditions, then it is 

assumed that there will be time for thorough and clearance decontamination and 

weathering. Redeployment planning should specify consolidation points in the JRA for 

equipment suspected of residual contamination. Specialized detectors and monitors may be

needed for clearance decontamination to confirm and monitor for contamination. As 

suspected equipment is consolidated for monitoring, decontamination, and weathering, 

security and buffer zones around the site provide an additional contamination control 

measure. Personnel engaged in monitoring, preparation, and clearance decontamination of 

equipment will require stringent personal protection and specialized detectors. This 

process may continue for weeks or months. 

b. Even after thorough decontamination, potential vapor and contact hazards will 

likely remain. The risk increases as contaminated equipment is consolidated and as 

personnel work around the equipment for extended periods. The risk increases again as 

equipment is disassembled for maintenance or containerization (therefore, the need for 

clearance decontamination). However, given the limitations of decontamination technology, 

VI-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
some items of equipment may require extensive weathering before retrogradation, or may 

have to be destroyed. 

c. Once in the continental United States (CONUS), an item of equipment with a 

contamination history will require precautionary measures throughout its remaining life 

cycle. Guidance on the eventual disposition of previously contaminated equipment should 

be provided from the strategic level. 

d. Accurate record keeping is crucial to a successful clearance decontamination 

operation. Messages sent or received via the NBCWRS; records of personnel and 

equipment undergoing operational, thorough, and clearance decontamination; and 

photographic or video records will be referred to again in assessing a unit’s requirements 

during clearance decontamination operations and in evaluating the (former) battlespace for 

residual CBRN and TIM hazards. Especially important are NBC 4, 5, and 6 reports, which 

may also be used to report TIM hazards. There may be a requirement to share information 

on contaminated areas (contained in NBC 4, 5, and 6 reports) with the HN. (The security

that surrounded an NBC5 report during operations may no longer be required when 

hostilities have ceased.) These reports may also form the basis for new CBRN 

reconnaissance and monitoring missions at the end of hostilities. 

(1) Records pertaining to personnel and equipment that have undergone 

operational and thorough decontamination are also necessary for assessing the unit 

undergoing clearance decontamination. These records are made at the predecontamination 

triage (they identify elements that required decontamination and identify uncontaminated 

elements that were sent ahead to the postdecontamination AA) and should contain vehicle 

and equipment identification numbers. While the contaminated unit is responsible for 

maintaining an accurate decontamination record, it is useful for the supporting 

decontamination element to keep a duplicate record. For example, such records can be used 

to justify the expenditure of decontamination materials and the reordering of supplies. In 

the context of clearance decontamination operations, the decontamination element may be 

required to account for decontaminated personnel and equipment, even those that belong to 

a supported unit. 

(2) Prepare follow-up reports as the conflict nears an end. Prepare summaries

that outline when, where, and how CBRN attacks or TIM incidents occurred. These records 

will facilitate many of the tasks associated with clearance decontamination operations, 

particularly postconflict IPB and the containment of residual hazards. Site incident reports

involving personnel will be useful in evaluating long-term health issues that could be 

operationally related and will contribute to overall FHP. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VI-5 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Chapter VII 

FIXED-SITE, PORT, AND AIRFIELD DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

a. This chapter addresses fixed-site decontamination, capabilities, and 

organization. It also discusses the procedures for processing personnel on a fixed site for 

chemical and radiological decontamination. See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Defense of Fixed Sites, Ports, 

and Airfields for more detailed information on CBRN decontamination operations for fixed 

sites. Decontamination is necessary when protective items cannot be worn to perform the 

mission, or when long-term occupancy is anticipated. Examples of fixed sites include the 

following: 

• Command, control, communications, and intelligence facilities. 

• Ports and airfields. 

• Temporary key structures for reserve and large troop concentration. 

• Supply installations, and depots. 

• Pre-positioning of material configured to unit sets (POMCUS) storage locations, 

airfields, water terminals, and rail terminals. 

• MTFs. 

• Ammunition supply points and petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL) points. 

• Maintenance sites. 

b. Decontaminate as soon as possible. Remove any contamination that forces 

personnel into a higher MOPP level. The first steps in recovering mission effectiveness are 

personnel decontaminating themselves, their personal equipment, and critical, missionessential equipment. 

c. Decontaminate only what is necessary. For fixed sites, decontamination is more 

of a manpower resource constraint rather than a time constraint. Decontaminate only

mission-essential equipment, and mark contamination appropriately. An example of this

principle is the loading and unloading of supplies on a boxcar at a site with railheads. 

Since fixed-site personnel do not have the capability to decontaminate the entire boxcar, 

only those parts that are touched, such as the door, are decontaminated. 

d. Decontaminate by priority. The commander must establish a set of priorities. 

These priorities may be broken down by functional area if the site performs missions such 

as maintenance (light and heavy), ammunition repair and supply, and general supply. 

Items such as wheeled vehicles, forklifts, and railcars, which are critical to the overall 

mission, should be decontaminated first. 

e. Limit the spread of contamination. Units should conduct decontamination

(operational and thorough) outside the contaminated area but near where the

contamination occurred. This reduces the risk of spreading contamination to other areas 

and reduces travel time. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VII-1 
2. Assessing Capability 

Fixed-site decontamination capabilities must be adapted for each fixed site. Mobile 

decontamination equipment capabilities may be available at a fixed site to decontaminate 

equipment, roads, and buildings. Loading docks, entries and exits, and building exteriors 

can be decontaminated with more conventional methods such as using STB and soap and 

water. Equipment such as fire trucks could also be used. Commanders should identify all

systems that are capable of contributing to the decontamination effort (e.g., fire trucks, 

steam cleaners, water pumps). Decontamination equipment can be retrofitted to 

accommodate the throughput of each work area. For instance, rest-and-relief shelters need 

rapid personnel decontamination systems, and supply operations need a decontamination 

system that can handle moderate-size pieces of equipment at a high volume. 

3. Organizing for Decontamination 

The commander should designate and train teams that can perform decontamination 

for fixed-site operations. The following are fixed-site decontamination techniques that the 

teams could apply: 

a. Decontamination can be conducted at contaminated entry and exit points to 

sustain the mission. This concept is more practical and efficient when employing limited 

decontaminated assets. The STB application could be conducted 3 meters on each side of 

the entry and exit points. Transfer hazard will remain a problem until all parts of the area 

have weathered. Buildings entries and exits must be decontaminated accordingly. 

b. To decontaminate helipads and similar sites, spray STB on entry and exit 

approaches or on paths in an event that chemical contamination occurs. Airborne STB 

particles can damage sensitive aircraft components so the area should be washed with 

water prior to landing helicopters. 

c. In POMCUS sites, decontaminate entry and exit approaches to limit 

contamination. Exposed vehicles in motor parks will get contaminated, but most likely 

there will not be enough personnel to drive the vehicles to a decontamination station. 

Decontaminate parked equipment by spraying them with STB or hot, soapy water. Driving

other vehicles around the parked vehicles and equipment will get the outside air flowing 

and will accelerate the weathering process of the chemical agents. 

d. Establish a patient transfer zone for medical assets where designated dirty 

ambulances coming from the contaminated area can transfer patients to clean ambulances 

for patient movement to the MTF. 

4. Buildings and Mission-Essential Operating Areas and Surfaces 

The decontamination of buildings and mission-essential surfaces and equipment 

requires a well-thought-out process. 

a. Buildings. The decontamination of a building consists of two parts—interior and 

exterior. 

(1) Interior. When conducting decontamination of the interior of a building, 

the following activities must occur: 

• Secure the facility. 

• Sample to confirm and determine the extent of the contamination. 

VII-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• Evaluate the sampling results. 

• Isolate the areas to prevent the spread of the contamination. 

• Remove critical objects for special decontamination procedures. Take care 

to ensure that contamination is not spread or transferred during movement. 

• Decontaminate localized areas of the contamination. 

• Continue monitoring and protecting against low-level exposure risks. 

• Document and record the decontamination operations. 

(2) Exterior. When decontaminating the exterior of a building, see Appendix D 

to determine how to decontaminate specific building surfaces (e.g., roofing material and 

wood). Many materials may absorb contamination and may not be completely 

decontaminated. The removal or sealing (painting) of these surfaces may be required to 

reduce the hazard. Continue monitoring the decontaminated surfaces until the detector 

indicates there is no more off-gassing. As temperatures rise, off-gassing of previously 

contaminated surfaces may occur at detectable levels. A point detection device (e.g., 

ICAM/CAM) should be used to monitor contaminated surfaces. 

b. Mission-Essential Operating Surfaces and Equipment. 

(1) On- and Off-Loading Ramps and Piers. Use Appendix D to determine how

to decontaminate the surfaces of on- and off-loading ramps and piers. 

(2) Helipads. Use Appendix D to determine how to decontaminate helipad 

surfaces. 

(3) Lines of Communications. See Appendix I for information on terrain

decontamination. 

(4) Staging Areas. Staging areas pose a unique opportunity for the enemy to 

contaminate large amounts of personnel and equipment. Commanders and their CBRN 

staffs must ensure that they can effectively identify contaminated personnel and

equipment. Decontaminating only those personnel and equipment that have been 

contaminated saves resources and time. The decontamination of staging areas can be 

critical to operations. In addition to the personnel and equipment contaminated, 

contaminated routes in and out of staging areas must be decontaminated to reduce the 

likelihood of the spread of the contamination. See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Reconnaissance for methods to determine the 

location and extent of contamination. 

(5) Terrain. Terrain decontamination is covered in Appendix I of this manual. 

5. Personnel Processing Procedures (Chemical) 

A comprehensive CBRN VA can help determine a suitable location for the fixed-site 

contamination control area (CCA) and the toxic-free area (TFA) complexes. The next 

consideration is determining how large an area will be needed. The CCA and TFA may be 

off or on the installation. The location of the CCA and TFA will depend on feedback from 

the CBRN VA. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VII-3 
a. Off Site. The decision to site CCA and TFA complexes off the installation 

(probably at preselected sites located at least 10 km from the installation) should work if 

the following parameters are present: 

(1) The sites are located at least 15 km away from populated areas, and the 

proposed routes to the CCA and TFA complexes are not intersected by potential civilian 

evacuation routes. 

(2) Locations provide adequate space, multiple access routes, sufficient water

and utility support, communications (primarily back to the main installation C2 and 

warning and notification networks), and a degree of personnel protection (from elements 

and hostile attack). 

(3) Civilian populations are not located downwind within 15 km of the CCA 

complex, to include the aeration area and contaminated-waste disposal area. 

(4) There is an exceptionally limited or nonexistent ground threat, to include 

activities from terrorists. 

(5) The installation possesses sufficient resources to execute the plan. 

b. On Site. Finding and utilizing clean areas for CCA and TFA operations within 

the installation perimeter is preferable when— 

(1) The installation is near heavily populated civilian areas or near a potential 

civilian evacuation route (there may be resulting traffic jams that would probably result in 

making off-base CCA and TFA complexes unreachable). 

(2) A ground threat exists. 

(3) The population is resource-constrained in regards to transportation. 

Communications limitations are also a factor. 

(4) The installation is large enough to possess areas outside the target-rich 

environment associated with the industrial and main housing areas. 

(5) The installation possesses a reliable detection network. The potential risk 

to personnel as a result of changing weather conditions and certain terrain features is 

increased if the installation cannot field an effective detection system. For example,

because agents tend to follow the low-lying areas of the ground, an installation may 

establish CCAs and TFAs on uncontaminated hilltops, ridges, or multistoried buildings. It 

is possible that the concentrations of an agent at these levels (verified through the use of 

detectors) are such that rest and relief may be obtained by “going up.” 

c. Combined Approach. A combined approach of site selection may be the best 

methodology. The prioritization for site selection should be— 

(1) On site with a ground level arrangement. 

(2) On site with a vertical arrangement (space permitting). 

(3) Off site. 

d. Space Requirement. The requirement for space is a factor associated with 

selecting the site for CCA and TFA complexes. The minimum size for CCA and TFA sites is 

500 square meters. Once a processing line is established and people are moving through it 

(i.e., as one person leaves a station, another person steps up), a relatively smooth flow will 

VII-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
begin to take place. Each of the CCA and TFA complex subcomponents has accompanying 

space requirements, and there are several variables. 

(1) CCA Entrance. A single entrance area can be used for multiple processing 

lines. However, the size needed for the entrance area depends on the number of personnel 

the installation is expecting to process at any given time. This number will also drive the 

sizes of the transportation point, CCA, and holding area where personnel can rest while 

waiting for their turn to process. 

(2) CCA Processing Lines. The CCA processing lines will take a large amount 

of space in order to optimize processing and FP ideals. Spread out the distance between

processing stations as far as reasonably possible. If space permits, stations should be 

spaced approximately 18 meters apart and areas within each station should be 9 meters 

apart. Establish the lines in an angular, staggered fashion as opposed to a straight line. 

The line angle should be 20°. When using this method, the concentration of trailing vapor 

hazards washing over people downwind of each processing station is significantly reduced. 

(3) Mask Refurbishment Area. Lay the out-processing lines with plenty of 

space for the mask refurbishment area located in the contact hazard area (CHA). The mask 

refurbishment area requires sufficient space for working; a disposal area for detection kits, 

decontamination kits, hoods, and eye lens outserts; a stock of spare parts; and a holding 

area for masks waiting to be checked. 

(4) Ground Chemical Ensemble (GCE) Aeration and the Contaminated-Waste 

Disposal Area. The aeration and disposal areas have the potential to be as large or larger 

than the processing lines. Therefore, an area of approximately 200 square meters is 

recommended. This area should be separate from the CCA lines and the TFA by 

approximately 50 meters. 

(5) Buffer or Transition Area. Once monitored, personnel remove their masks 

and proceed to the TFA. At least 25 meters is recommended from the end of the vapor

hazard area (VHA) to the TFA. 

(6) TFA. The size of the TFA is the largest variable of all. An area of 500 

square meters is recommended. The main housing portion of the TFA should be separated 

from the CCA processing lines by the maximum distance available. A separation of at least

100 meters is recommended. A chemical-vapor detection network should exist between the 

TFA and the CCA. See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, 

Biological, and Chemical Reconnaissance for guidance on setting up a chemical detection 

network. 

e. Other CCA and TFA Consideration Factors. The selection process involves 

numerous factors, to include the availability of areas that are upwind and a safe distance 

from contamination, areas accessible by ground transportation, and areas offering as much 

privacy and concealment as possible. Selecting locations that are out in the open may 

invite secondary attacks and the unwanted curiosity of others. Additional considerations 

include areas where localized weather conditions and wind patterns remain consistent, 

areas away from valley and ridgelines, areas offering the most inherent necessities, and 

areas within walking distance of the personnel shelter portion of the TFA. It will do no 

good to decontaminate crew members if they cannot get to a clean area to rest and debrief. 

If the shelter is not in the immediate area, arrange transportation. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VII-5 
(1) The locations must also offer the best possible options for disposing of or 

removing contaminated waste. Always coordinate the disposal of hazardous waste with 

CBRN specialists. 

(2) For an airbase (AB), choosing a site near the ground personnel processing 

line will facilitate resupply and provide better security. However, a potential secondary 

hazard exists with this technique since ground crew personnel are more likely to encounter 

contamination. However, the aircrew ensemble, by design, does not provide protection from 

liquid contamination. They should not process through the ground crew CCA. 

(3) Multiple site locations should be chosen to ensure the coverage of threat 

contingencies. 

(4) Other considerations during the site selection process are site security, 

communications, the slope of the terrain, and the presence of other natural features. The 

protection of equipment from temperature extremes, rain, and pilferage is also required. 

(5) For an AB, the decontamination site must be capable of accommodating the 

appropriate aircraft type in the required numbers. It should be relatively secure but close

enough to refueling and rearming points to permit a reasonably quick turnaround if 

required. The site should have sufficient terrain flight routes within 2 to 3 km to facilitate 

entry and exit. A slight slope to the terrain is desirable but must remain within aircraft 

limits. It is preferable to sequence groups of aircraft through the decontamination site to 

prevent arriving or departing aircraft from interfering with decontamination operations. 

Depending on the personnel and resources available, it may be possible to clean several 

aircraft simultaneously. 

f. CCA and TFA Patient Decontamination Sites. Optimal requirements for a 

decontamination site include the following: 

(1) Colocation with the supported MTF (not closer than 75 meters downwind or 

crosswind and situated so that arriving vehicles and casualties can reach it without 

approaching the MTF). 

(2) Access to water (free of CBRN contaminants but not necessarily potable). 

(3) Hookup to electricity or an electric generator for water pump operation and 

lighting. 

(4) Approximately a 60-meter controlled perimeter and ground or floor 

gradient sufficient to facilitate the drainage of contaminated water away from the 

decontamination facility and MTF. 

NOTE: For detailed instructions on patient decontamination, see Chapter X and 

FM 4-02.7. Patient spot decontamination can be performed at the CHA with 

transport to an MTF that has a patient decontamination station (PDS). 

g. Decontamination Site Layout. The CCA and TFA complexes are composed of 

subelements; each is connected in some way and can only be successfully accomplished 

through cohesive, integrated operations. See Figure VII-1 for an example of a 

decontamination site layout. 

VII-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure VII-1. Sample Decontamination Site Layout 

(1) The transportation drop-off point should be located on the downwind side of 

the CCA (approximately 30 meters). Establish a wind device (i.e., windsock) to monitor the 

wind direction. It is in this area that the first active efforts are taken by individuals to 

reduce contact and vapor hazards. As personnel leave the transportation drop-off point, 

they should be directed (by a sign or by an attendant) to the CCA. 

(2) The entrance to the CCA includes the following areas: arrival and initial 

decontamination, weapons clearing, wash and holding, and external equipment removal. 

Use this CCA entrance for the following: 

(a) To perform the initial decontamination of each person and his buddy 

prior to entering the CHA. 

(b) To inform personnel of the sequence of events and emergency response 

procedures. 

(c) To provide a covered area for rest and relief while waiting to process. 

(d) To allow for the turn-in of weapons and the removal of external

personal equipment other than the overgarment (i.e., helmet, vest [aircrew], web gear, 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VII-7 
mask carrier, flak vest, and cold/wet weather gear). Most of this equipment cannot be

decontaminated to safe levels. 

(3) The CHA is where individuals remove their overgarments. The goals of the 

CHA are contamination reduction in regards to processing personnel and the containment 

of all contact hazards (i.e., agents in liquid or solid form) within the CCA. See Figure VII-2

and VII-3 (pages VII-9 and VII-10) for examples of a CCA layout for ground crew and 

aircrew operations. 

(4) The overgarment removal area may not be necessary if the chemical threat 

is low, the unit is sufficiently stocked with suits, and the resupply line is functioning. In 

this case, previously used suits could be sent directly to the contaminated-waste disposal 

area. However, if the threat of multiple CBRN attacks is probable, suits are in short 

supply, or there is not a realistic resupply capability, then the removal area is critical to 

mission sustainment. Units must perform a risk assessment before establishing an

overgarment aeration area. Personnel should consider the following when selecting a site: 

(a) Locate the removal area as close to the CHA as possible. However, 

ensure that the aeration area is downwind from the CHA and VHA transition point. Also, 

ensure that the aeration area is far enough from the TFA and mask removal point that it 

does not present a threat to unprotected personnel. The vapor hazard must be constantly 

monitored because the collection of contaminated suits in a single area will create an 

artificial hot spot. 

(b) Ensure access to the suits for egress. 

(c) Optimize the effects of weathering. Expose the suits to high 

temperatures, sunlight, and high winds; and also provide overhead cover to prevent 

inadvertent recontamination. 

(d) Secure the area using available resources. 

(5) It is probable that at least two contaminated-waste areas will be 

required—one within the MOB area and one in conjunction with the CCA function. Site 

selection should be based on prevailing winds for the season, and the site should be located 

downwind of all personnel housing and rest-and-relief locations. If sufficient equipment 

exists, place automatic vapor alarms around or downwind of the area. CBRN 

reconnaissance personnel should periodically monitor outside the area with a handheld 

vapor detection device, such as the ICAM or the M256. 

(6) The VHA provides the last chance for the CCA staff to verify that 

processing personnel are free of contamination before transitioning to the TFA. In the case 

of open-air processing, there should be at least a 15-meter buffer zone between the end of 

the CHA and the monitoring station. At the end of the VHA, attendants should verify that 

the chemical vapor concentrations are at safe levels before they let personnel remove their 

mask. A decision to remove the mask will be based on the recommended safe levels 

provided. Consequently, the two-stage approach of clothing removal and monitoring is 

executed throughout this area. 

VII-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure VII-2. Example of a Ground Crew CCA Layout 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VII-9 
Figure V-3. Example of an Aircrew CCA Layout 

VII-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
 (a) Personnel must remove clothing that could be “off-gassing” in the 

VHA prior to entering the TFA. Personnel should not be allowed to automatically 

transition into the TFA wearing their underwear if they were not using the battle dress 

uniform (BDU) option since that layer of protection would be missing. Consequently, each

installation must develop a workable CONOPS for clothing replacement. 

(b) If the threat dictates, personnel should be monitored with the ICAM 

for “dusty” contamination within the VHA. The attendants’ sight and the use of M8/M9 

paper are not effective, especially in the case of dusty mustard. In order to provide the

highest degree of protection for personnel, VHA attendants must routinely monitor the air 

at the mask removal point. 

(7) The purpose of the mission-critical equipment (MCE) refurbishment area is 

to decontaminate MCE and return it to the warfighter as quickly as possible. This area 

includes refurbishment of the ground crew, firefighters, and explosive ordnance disposal 

(EOD) equipment. To prevent bottlenecks during this process, this function should have 

dedicated personnel when the CCA is fully operational. Regardless of whether it is a single

activity or several line-by-line activities, the personnel will require large supplies of plastic 

bags, M8 paper, M291/M295 decontamination kits, sponges, and bleach. The refurbishment 

area should be located outside the CCA processing lines. The refurbishment duties are 

split between the CHA and the VHA. Ensure that adequate space, dedicated personnel, 

and supplies are available for this tasking. 

(a) Personnel in the TFA will remain vulnerable to a new CBRN attack 

and radical wind shift until their masks are returned. 

(b) Untrained personnel may inadvertently be the cause of casualties. 

Extreme attention to detail is required regarding contamination identification, mask 

decontamination (if appropriate), mask cleansing, and filter replacement. The eyes are the

most vulnerable part of the body, and the slightest mistake on the part of the mask

refurbishment team may result in vision problems and the immediate loss of productivity. 

(8) The transition buffer zone between the CCA and the TFA is the area where 

personnel remove their masks prior to entering the TFA. 

(9) The TFA includes accountability and logistics resupply points. 

(a) In open-air processing, the rest-and-relief area of the TFA is located at 

least 200 yards outside the CCA boundary. Shifting wind directions or the accumulation of 

contaminated materials (potential hazard effects from off-gassing or agent resuspension) 

necessitate the need to establish the TFA far from the CCA in an open-air environment. 

When overpressure systems are used, the entire structure beyond the point of the air lock is 

the TFA. 

(b) There is a requirement for the installation to operate egress 

processing lines. Adequate space must be provided for sufficient egress lines to allow 

personnel to process out of the TFA while keeping with shift change requirements. CCAs 

should accommodate simultaneous ingress and egress lines and inhibit cross contamination 

of egressing personnel. In a worst-case scenario, many lines may be necessary because 

personnel would have to utilize previously used overgarments, combat boots, and clothing. 

In this scenario, space would also have to exist to store these items along the egress 

processing lines. There is also a space requirement for the storage of individual equipment 

(i.e., web belts, canteens, first aid kits, helmets, M9 paper). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VII-11 
(c) The size of the supply transition point depends on the wings CCA 

implementation philosophy and the degree of contamination control utilized prior to the 

attack. 

(d) The size of the TFA is the largest variable of all. An area of 200 

square meters is recommended. The main housing portion of the TFA should be separated 

from the CCA processing lines by the maximum distance available. A separation of at least

100 meters is recommended. A chemical-vapor detection network should exist between the 

TFA and the CCA. 

(10) Other considerations during the site selection process are site security, 

communications, terrain slope, and the presence of other natural features. 

(11) Optimal requirements for the CCA and TFA patient decontamination sites 

include the following: 

(a) Colocation with the supported MTF (not closer than 75 meters 

downwind or crosswind and situated so that arriving vehicles and casualties can reach it 

without approaching the MTF). 

(b) Access to water (free of CBRN contaminants but not necessarily 

potable). 

(c) Hookup to an electricity source for water pump operation and lighting. 

(d) Approximately a 60-meter controlled perimeter and ground or floor 

gradient sufficient to facilitate the drainage of contaminated water away from the 

decontamination facility and MTF. 

(e) Protection of the equipment from temperature extremes, rain, and

pilferage is required. 

6. Personnel Processing Procedures (Radiological) 

Prossessing personnel prior to actually sending them to decontamination can, in some 

cases, help alleviate the need for decontamination altogether. 

a. Site Selection of the Contamination Control Station (CCS). The following

considerations apply for CCS site selection: 

• Locate the CCS downwind of the entry control point and operating areas, no 

closer than 300 feet to the nearest hazard. 

• Select an area that is free of weeds, brush, and rocks. A paved area is preferred. 

• Ensure that the CCS team members monitor a 25-square-foot area around the 

selected site. 

CAUTION 

The runoff of removed material should be carefully 

contained since it will remain a radiological hazard. 

b. CCS Setup. 

(1) Setup procedures will begin after the area is monitored and deemed clear of 

contamination. 

VII-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(2) Individuals setting up the CCS will don protective equipment and will 

tape-up, ensuring that no skin is exposed, and determine and record background readings. 

(3) Administrative personnel will log all personnel in and out of the area and 

inspect all personnel entering the area to ensure that they are properly dressed. 

(4) The team chief will inspect all CCS members and personnel processing into 

the CCS for holes and tape. 

c. CCS Activation. 

(1) As soon as it is determined that there is contamination and that personnel 

are returning to the CCS, personnel in the CCS will don their masks and tape-up, ensure 

that the area is cleared of unnecessary personnel and material, contact the rear line, and 

report the area “hot.” The CCS is now ready for processing. 

(2) The team chief will ensure that personnel are processed by priority (e.g., 

injured, TLs), move throughout the area, and monitor all actions in the CCS. 

d. Personnel Processing. 

(1) Personnel will be processed on a priority basis. 

(2) Injured personnel will be processed as follows: 

• If by ambulance, the vehicle will be allowed to leave and the route taken 

will be closed, monitored, and cleaned if it is found to be contaminated. 

• If by litter, the person will be wrapped in a blanket and the litter will be

passed over the hot line and put into an ambulance on the clean side. 

(3) All equipment and documents will be dropped on the hot side of the 

equipment drop table. Any contaminated item that needs to leave the area will be bagged. 

The person requiring the item will pick it up after it has processed through the CCS. All 

tape (except tape around wrists) will be removed and placed in the tape barrel (use the 

buddy system). 

(a) Station 1. 

NOTE: The person being processed is seated. 

• Remove the bootie nearest the hot line, and place the bootie in the 

barrel. 

• Ensure that the foot is held in the air to be monitored for radiological 

contamination. 

• Place the boot down on the clean side of the hot line if the boot is 

clean. 

• Remove and remonitor the boot if it is contaminated. 

• Repeat procedures for the other foot. 

• Instruct the person not to leave the mat until directed. 

• Stand up on the clean side of the hot line, and proceed to the next 

station. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VII-13 
(b) Station 2. 

NOTE: The person being processed will stand spread-eagle. 

• Conduct whole-body monitoring for alpha, beta, and gamma rays. 

• Monitor one side of the body for alpha rays and the other side for beta 

and gamma rays. 

• Instruct the person to turn around 180° and repeat the monitoring. 

• Start monitoring at the inlet valve or filter inlet on the mask. 

• Monitor the rest of the head and shoulders. 

• Monitor the body trunk with a large X formation. 

• Instruct the individual to proceed to the medical station for processing 

if no contamination is found. 

• Instruct the individual to proceed to Station 3 if contamination is 

found. 

(c) Station 3. 

• Remove the hood from the head. If the hood unfastens from the suit, 

take it off and put it in the barrel. 

• Remove the protective clothing. 

• Place the clothing in the barrel. 

• Proceed to Station 4. 

(d) Station 4. 

• Use the same procedures as Station 2. 

• Have the person remove his outer clothing and place it in the barrel at 

Station 3 if contamination is found. 

• Have the person return to Station 4 for remonitoring if contamination 

is found. 

• Have the person remove his mask and proceed to the medical station 

if no contamination is found. 

• Have the person put on clean protective clothing, and transport him to 

the supporting MTF for decontamination if contamination is still found. 

• Ensure that all personnel exit through the medical station. 

e. Area Expansion. Establish another personnel processing line or a new area if 

the existing area becomes too congested. 

f. CCS Shutdown. Use the following procedures for shutdown: 

• Monitor, clean, and discard (as required) all area equipment and material. 

• Monitor the area for remaining contamination. 

• Request assistance from specialized teams if the area is still contaminated. 

VII-14 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Chapter VIII 

AIRCRAFT AND AIRCREW DECONTAMINATION

1. Background 

This chapter addresses aircraft and aircraft cargo decontamination (i.e., general 

planning, aircraft decontamination planning, aircraft decontamination levels and 

procedures, civil air fleet and contract airlift decontamination, aircraft munitions 

decontamination, and air cargo decontamination). For more detailed TTP for air and naval 

forces aircraft and aircrew decontamination, see AFMAN 10-2602. 

2. General Planning 

The protection of aircraft and aircrews is of utmost importance during a CBRN threat. 

The ultimate goal is to minimize sortie generation degradation (by limiting the number of 

personnel that are exposed, the amount of equipment exposed to the contamination, and 

the time spent in IPE). The following factors should be considered during decontamination 

planning: 

a. Combatant commanders have the responsibility to designate a decontamination 

location and coordinate approval with the HNs. AB, airfield, and FARP commanders and 

officers in charge must organize the capabilities and personnel of permanent, tenant, and 

transient organizations to support decontamination operations. 

(1) Infrastructure factors that should be considered during the site selection 

process include the adequacy of the aircraft ramp area, access to water (free of 

contaminants but not necessarily potable), prevailing winds, the slope of the terrain, 

security, and hookup to electricity or an electric generator (for water pump operation, 

lighting, billeting, communications, etc.). 

(2) The goal is to eliminate or reduce the contamination and restore the 

mission-critical resources to a condition that permits unrestricted use, handling, and 

operation. 

(3) Thorough decontamination operations will be conducted after hostile 

actions have terminated, when the commander determines it is in the unit’s best interest, 

or when directed by higher authority. 

b. Operational units shall coordinate locations for parking the contaminated and 

uncontaminated aircraft, the location of aircraft and aircrew decontamination sites, 

maintenance personnel decontamination sites, and the retrogradation or disposal of 

contaminated equipment and consumables with host commands. 

c. Aircraft are most vulnerable while they are on the ground and not protected by 

overhead cover. For this reason, taxi time should be minimized and every effort made to 

take advantage of available cover. 

d. Units and activities place special emphasis on securing the aircraft points of 

ingress and egress by closing or covering cockpits, doors, and ramps when the aircraft is not

in use and prior to decontamination. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-1 
e. The priority of the decontamination should support sortie generation. 

Maintenance procedures shall address the decontamination considerations (such as covered 

areas for parking, inspections, servicing, munitions/pod/tank loading and unloading, 

arming and dearming, and washing) prior to maintenance. The predecontamination

procedures focus on the following areas: 

(1) Protecting critical assets, using detection devices, marking and segregating 

contaminated equipment, and removing and replacing contaminated coverings. 

Commanders should use the contaminated equipment for contaminated operations. 

(2) Receiving and providing disposition of contaminated equipment or products 

(e.g., support equipment, munitions, fuel, and spare parts). Actions may include moving

equipment and aircraft through a decontamination line or outside of the maintenance areas 

for weathering. 

f. Aircraft returning from missions may present little or no threat of contamination 

to the airfield or facility. Contaminated aircraft will be directed to an alternate 

(contaminated) airfield before landing (if possible). The following actions are applicable in a

CBRN environment: 

(1) Use monitoring equipment to detect contamination on the aircraft and 

aircrew, and report the results. 

(2) Remain in IPE until decontaminated. 

(3) Complete the immediate decontamination efforts as quickly as possible 

once contamination is detected. Decontamination activities must be completed before the 

agent absorbs into the surface (typically within minutes from the time of agent contact). 

(a) Be aware of the locations of nonporous surfaces where the liquid may 

stay. Though these surfaces are the most receptive to decontamination, they also represent 

the most dangerous areas for liquid transfer and vapor hazard. 

(b) Avoid exposing personnel to porous surfaces (e.g., painted metal or 

rubber) that will sorb chemical agents. Although sorption minimizes the liquid transfer 

hazard, the vapor hazard remains. 

(4) Perform the required servicing on the aircraft. 

g. Special Considerations. 

(1) Operational and thorough decontamination procedures are similar to 

aircraft maintenance corrosion control. 

(2) Key leadership and installation personnel must realize that there are 

limitations associated with decontamination efforts and form realistic expectations for an 

effective decontamination. 

(3) CBRN agents can infiltrate the aircraft interior through the aircraft 

environmental control system and contaminate the cockpit area and avionics bay. The 

principal chemical-agent challenge to avionics components is vapor, regardless of the type 

of agent. 

(4) The sensitivity of electrical equipment to chlorine or other water-based 

solutions severely limits its feasibility for decontamination. 

VIII-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(5) Units conduct operational and thorough decontamination planning by 

identifying C2 relationships, team requirements, equipment requirements, 

decontamination assets, and contaminated-waste collection points. Team checklists guide

the decontamination team activities. These plans and checklists are focused on the unit 

tasks (such as critical cargo movement and postconflict decontamination operations). 

Requirements that exceed the unit or activity resources are included in the resource 

requests. 

(6) No effective chemical compound is available for thorough aircraft 

decontamination. STB corrodes the metal components and the aircraft skin. Immediate 

decontamination may be performed using the service-authorized decontamination kits or 

solutions. 

3. Aircraft Decontamination Levels and Procedures 

The levels of decontamination for aircraft are the same as those described in Chapter I 

(immediate, operational, thorough, and clearance). However, this section will address only

the first three levels. Aircrew decontamination procedures are outlined in Chapters III, IV, 

and VII. 

a. Immediate Decontamination. There are three components of immediate 

decontamination. They are skin decontamination, personal wipe down, and spot 

decontamination. Skin decontamination and personal wipe down are described in Chapter 

III. 

b. Spot Decontamination. Spot decontamination is an immediate decontamination 

technique that will normally be performed on aircraft that have been recovered and will be 

quickly turned around for continued flight operations. Spot decontamination reduces the

contamination on areas that must be touched during an operation and while servicing the 

aircraft. Conducting spot decontamination will reduce contamination and limit its spread. 

The following steps should be used for conducting spot decontamination ashore or afloat: 

(1) Spot Decontamination of Fixed-Wing Ejection Seat Aircraft and 

Helicopters. 

(a) Determine a location for the decontamination. The location to conduct 

spot decontamination depends on the operating cycle, the space available (ship or facility), 

and the size of the aircraft being decontaminated. 

(b) Spot decontamination should be performed by the crew, division, 

team, or work section responsible for the service being performed. All personnel involved in 

spot decontamination shall wear appropriate nonaircrew MOPP gear. Wet-weather 

clothing may be worn over MOPP gear to prevent the saturation of the nonaircrew 

protective ensemble. Table VIII-1 (page VIII-4) and the following list, provide a baseline for 

the areas that should be decontaminated prior to servicing the aircraft: 

• Refueling access. 

• Ordnance, armament, and equipment. 

• Ingress and egress (ladders, handholds, footholds, steps, etc.). 

• Preflight and postflight check areas. 

• Inspection areas. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-3 
• Canopies, windscreens, windows, and optical sensors. 

• Support equipment (seats, controls, chocks, chains, etc.). 

• Aircraft tie-down and tow points. 

Table VIII-1. Aircraft Spot Decontamination 

Action and Areas to Personnel Decontaminants Procedures Remarks 

Location Decontaminate Responsible 

Refueling at 

the refueling 

point 

Fuel ports, 

hatches, and all 

areas that 

FARP 

personnel touch 

POL handler Diesel fuel; JP8; 

or hot, soapy 

water 

Wipe the fuel 

ports and 

hatches with a 

sponge dipped 

in the 

decontaminant. 

Do not allow the 

decontaminant 

to enter the fuel 

system. Control 

the runoff 

because the 

agent will not be 

neutralized. 

This method 

simply flushes 

the 

contamination 

from the 

surface. 

Refueling 

personnel should 

conduct an 

operational 

decontamination 

after servicing 

contaminated 

aircraft. 

Arming at the 

rearming 

point 

Armament 

system 

Ammunition 

handler 

JP8 or hot, soapy 

water 

Wipe the 

armament 

system with a 

sponge dipped 

in the 

decontaminant. 

Control the 

runoff because 

the agent will 

not be 

neutralized. 

This method 

simply flushes 

the 

contamination 

from the 

surface. 

Check the 

armament system 

TM for more 

information. 

CAUTION 

Take care to 

prevent certain 

areas of the 

armament 

system from 

being exposed 

to the 

decontaminant. 

VIII-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table VIII-1. Aircraft Spot Decontamination (Continued) 

Action and 

Location 

Areas to 

Decontaminate 

Personnel 

Responsible 

Decontaminants Procedures Remarks 

Entering and 

exiting the 

aircraft 

anywhere 

Door handles, 

steps, ladders, 

handholds, and 

all areas that 

may be touched 

by aircrews 

Crew members, 

POL handlers, 

and rearming 

personnel 

JP8 or hot, soapy 

water 

Apply the 

decontaminant. 

Prevent the 

spread of liquid 

contamination 

from the outside 

of the aircraft to 

the inside. 

Control the 

runoff because 

the agent will 

not be 

neutralized. 

This method 

simply flushes 

the 

contamination 

from the 

surface. 

Procedures should 

be developed for 

each type of 

aircraft. Before 

entering the 

aircraft, use an 

IEDK on boots and 

gloves. 

Preflight and 

postflight 

checks 

anywhere 

Maintenance 

inpections at 

aviation 

intermediate 

maintenance 

facilities 

Areas that must 

be touched as 

part of the 

inspection 

Aircrew Diesel fuel; JP8; 

or hot, soapy 

water on exterior 

surfaces 

Hot air for 

interiors or areas 

that are not 

compatible with 

decontaminants 

or liquids 

Wipe the areas 

that are 

required to be 

touched for the 

preflight and 

postflight 

checks with a 

sponge dipped 

in the 

decontaminant. 

Wash gloves in 

the 

decontaminant 

before touching 

uncontaminated 

surfaces. 

Decontaminate 

gloves with an 

IEDK after the 

inspection is 

complete. 

Control runoff 

because the 

agent will not be 

neutralized. 

This method 

simply flushes 

contamination 

from the 

surface. 

Overheated air 

should not be used 

directly on 

instrumentation. 

The crew may want 

to wear wetweather gear to 

prevent the 

contamination of 

overgarments. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-5 
Table VIII-1. Aircraft Spot Decontamination (Continued) 

Action and 

Location 

Areas to 

Decontaminate 

Personnel 

Responsible 

Decontaminants Procedures Remarks 

Repair and 

recovery 

anywhere 

The parts or 

areas that need 

to be 

decontaminated 

depending on 

the situation 

Maintenance 

personnel 

(someone who 

knows what 

assembly or 

parts are 

needed) 

Diesel fuel; 5% 

chlorine solution; 

or hot, soapy 

water on exterior 

parts or surfaces 

Hot air on interior 

parts that are not 

compatible with 

liquids or 

corrosive 

decontaminants. 

Decontaminate 

only those 

parts or 

assemblies that 

need to be 

touched during 

cannibalization. 

Caustic 

decontaminants 

should be used 

only on those 

areas that have 

been removed 

from the aircraft. 

Assemblies must 

be rinsed 

thoroughly before 

replacing. 

Overhaul at 

maintenance 

facilities 

All areas and 

equipment 

required to be 

worked on 

during the 

overhaul 

Maintenance 

personnel or a 

decontamination 

unit 

Diesel fuel; 5% 

chlorine solution; 

or hot, soapy 

water 

Hot air for 

surfaces that are 

easily destroyed 

by liquid or 

corrosion 

Wash with 

diesel fuel; 

wash with hot, 

soapy water; 

and then rinse. 

Check for 

contamination 

with M8 

detector paper 

or the 

ICAM/CAM. If 

time permits, 

allow the 

equipment to 

weather. 

Caustic 

decontaminants 

should only be 

used on the 

assemblies that 

have been 

removed from the 

aircraft. The 

assemblies must 

be rinsed 

thoroughly before 

replacing. This will 

have the same 

result as a 

thorough 

decontamination. 

(c) The procedures for spot decontamination are as follows: 

• Make available sufficient quantities of soapy water or applicable

aircraft cleaner and fresh water. 

• Scrub the service areas using brushes, rags, or sponges with soapy 

water until deposited CB material, dirt, and grime are removed. 

• Rinse with fresh water from a bucket or hose. 

• Decontaminate gloves. 

• Perform service. 

• Decontaminate runoff cleaner by applying standard or nonstandard 

decontaminant to the deck, ground, and airfield; and then hose overboard or into collection 

sumps. If runoff is hosed without prior decontamination, it should be treated as 

contaminated. 

(2) Spot Decontamination of Large-Frame, Fixed-Wing, Nonejection Aircraft. 

If mission requirements do not allow ample time for operational decontamination or 

weathering, provide spot decontamination of large-frame aircraft. Large-frame aircraft 

(i.e., C-5, C-17, C130, and C141) will normally operate from an open ramp without cover 

while on the ground for a short period of time. Their vulnerability to CBRN contamination 

on the ground will result from being outside and unprotected at the time of a chemical 

attack. Additionally, the size of the aircraft makes spot decontamination a much larger 

VIII-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
task. Contamination can also transfer from contaminated personnel or cargo allowed on 

the aircraft. 

NOTE: These procedures are written in generic form to cover all large-frame 

aircraft and require the user’s knowledge of the applicable aircraft. For example, 

the C-5 user would understand that decontamination of the cargo ramp area 

would include both forward and aft ramps while the C-17, C-130, and C-141 users 

would only be concerned with single aft ramps. 

CAUTION 

Ensure that all decontaminants used in these 

procedures are authorized in appropriate aircraft and 

maintenance manuals before execution. Failure to do 

so may violate maintenance instructions and damage 

the aircraft. 

(a) A TL directs the efforts of two-person teams as they decontaminate 

the aircraft. The TL can be any maintenance specialty code, military occupational specialty 

(MOS), or Navy enlisted classification (NEC); but it is recommended that a qualified 

aircraft crew chief be used. The mechanics performing as members of the two-person teams 

can be any maintenance specialty code, MOS, or NEC provided they are familiar with the 

ground handling and flight line safety procedures for the applicable aircraft and can work 

in full MOPP gear. 

(b) Three two-person teams designated as Teams A, B, and C are 

recommended. The number of personnel can be adjusted based on the availability and 

workload, provided the two-person team concept is not violated. Tasks are designated by

the letter (A, B, or C) of the team doing the work, but these team designations are optional 

if more or less personnel are used. 

(c) The TL assembles the full team at the nose of the aircraft for a 

situation and safety briefing. He uses the applicable aircraft ground handling TM or TO to 

make the aircraft safe for maintenance. He briefs personnel on the absolute necessity of 

operating in two-person teams and the use of the “buddy system” to enhance personal 

decontamination and safety throughout the operation. The TL also performs the following 

duties: 

• Ensures that the required supplies are available (such as M295 kits, 

M9 tape, shuffle box, logbook, bags, heavy-duty plastic). 

• Ensures that the required equipment is available (such as handheld 

radios and ICAMs/CAMs). 

• Uses M295 kits to spot-decontaminate ground fire extinguisher(s) to 

ensure that they are available in an emergency. 

• Assigns two-person inspection teams to inspect and 

spot-decontaminate portions of the aircraft interior and exterior. 

(d) Team A performs the following duties: 

• Inspects (using the appropriate detection device) and 

spot-decontaminates the crew entry area. Pays particular attention to the crew entry 

doors, ladder, and handrail. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-7 
• Places the shuffle box with absorbent at the foot of the ladder. 

• Cleans feet in the shuffle box prior to entering the aircraft, checks 

each other for contamination (decontaminate if necessary), and proceeds up the ladder into 

the aircraft. 

• Inspects and decontaminates any contamination present onboard in

the crew entry area, to include the galley and closest floorboards. 

• Exits the aircraft and reports the findings to the TL for entry into the 

log. 

• Disposes of the waste in the garbage bag. 

• Inspects (using ICAMs/CAMs or the appropriate detection device) and 

spot-decontaminates the ground interphone connection/door. Pays particular attention to 

the cable connection area and door latches. 

• Reports the findings to the TL for entry into the log. 

• Disposes of the waste in the garbage bag. 

• Inspect (using ICAMs/CAMs or the appropriate detection device) the 

main landing gear (MLG) wheel wells. 

• Enters the MLG wheel wells. Records the detector reading in the 

front and rear of each MLG wheel well. 

• Spot-decontaminates (as needed) any safety down-lock pins and wheel 

chocks. 

• Reports the findings to the TL for entry into the log. 

(e) Team B performs the following duties: 

• Inspects (using ICAMs/CAMs or the appropriate detection device) and 

spot-decontaminates the ground power unit (GPU) and aircraft ground power receptacle. 

Pays particular attention to the electrical plug area, the pintle hook area, and all knobs and 

switches. Reports the findings to the TL for entry into the log. Disposes of the waste in the

garbage bag. 

• Inspects (using ICAMs/CAMs or the appropriate detection device) and 

spot-decontaminates any ground servicing points that will be accessed prior to launch (i.e., 

oxygen, hydraulic, and latrine servicing ports). Pays particular attention to the connection 

areas, doors and latches, and all knobs and switches. Reports the findings to the TL for

entry into the log. Disposes of the waste in the garbage bag. 

• Inspects (using ICAMs/CAMs or the appropriate detection device) the 

nose landing gear (NLG) wheel well. Enters the NLG wheel well and records the detector 

reading in the front and rear of the wheel well. Decontaminates (as needed) any safety 

down-lock pins and wheel chocks. Reports the findings to the TL for entry into the log. 

(f) Team C performs the following tasks: 

• Inspects (using ICAMs/CAMs or the appropriate detection device) and 

spot-decontaminates the fuel truck and hoses, and the aircraft fuel servicing ports (filler 

caps if used) and fuel servicing panels. Pays particular attention to the hose connections, 

VIII-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
all knobs and switches, and the driver’s-side door area. Reports the findings to the TL for

entry into the log. Disposes of the waste in the garbage bag. 

• Inspects (using ICAMs/CAMs or the appropriate detection device) and 

spot-decontaminates the aircraft ramp areas. Cleans feet in the shuffle box prior to 

entering the aircraft, checks each other for contamination (decontaminates if necessary), 

and enters the aircraft through the crew entry door after using the shuffle box. Pays close

attention to the ramp control panel and the ramp hinge areas. Decontaminates all knobs, 

switches, and handles as appropriate. Reports the findings to the TL for entry into the log. 

Disposes of the waste in the garbage bag. 

(g) The TL reviews the aircraft forms and directs the teams to 

spot-decontaminate any areas of the aircraft requiring access for maintenance (engine 

nacelle latches, access panels, tires). The TL reports any abnormal findings or actions to 

the maintenance and operations sections. He also accounts for all team members. 

c. Operational Decontamination. The goal of operational decontamination is to 

limit the spread of contamination and to minimize the hazards to personnel, while allowing 

operations to continue. The following procedures apply to ejection seat aircraft, large-frame 

aircraft, and helicopters. Detailed aspects of specific operational personnel and equipment 

procedures for air and naval forces are addressed in AFMAN 10-2602. 

(1) Responsibilities. Aerial ports of embarkation (APOEs) and APODs will 

concentrate the decontamination efforts on operational decontamination during hostilities. 

Thorough and clearance decontamination are generally conducted following the end of 

hostilities. The magnitude of this effort will depend upon the type and concentration of 

contamination, mission requirements, and available resources. Commanders conduct 

operational decontamination to minimize contact hazards, accelerate the weathering 

process, and limit cross contamination of mission-critical resources. Performing aircraft 

wash down within 1 to 6 hours of contamination will speed the weathering process and may 

allow the aircraft to be operated and maintained in reduced aircrew IPE or MOPP levels. 

Aircraft operational decontamination is accomplished by decontaminating surfaces (exterior 

and interior) that must be touched during aircraft servicing and operations. 

(2) Preparation. 

(a) Areas. Multiple areas will need to be set up, marked, and maintained 

within zones to effectively control or eliminate the potential for cross contamination. The 

locations depend on the operating cycle, the space available (facility or ship), and the type of 

aircraft being decontaminated. Figures VIII-1 and VIII-2 (page VIII-10) depict examples of

stationary aircraft decontamination areas. 

(b) Water. The site must have sufficient fresh water to wet the entire 

exterior of the aircraft. For planning purposes, the following recommendations are 

provided: CH46E, 250 gallons; CH53E, 350 gallons; F/A18, 300 gallons; and C130, 800 

gallons. 

NOTE: Water requirements are approximations. The water requirements for 

specific aircraft should be based on the surface area compared to the 

recommended water volumes provided above. 

(c) Equipment. Washing equipment that can produce 60 to 120 psi of 

water pressure is preferred. The capacity to heat water and inject soap increases the 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-9 
effectiveness. The lack of pressurized washing equipment decreases the effectiveness of the 

wash down and may require scrubbing to achieve the desired effect. The M17 lightweight

decontamination systems (USMC), M12 PDDA, standard water pumps, and pressure 

washers, and firefighting equipment are examples of standard and field-expedient 

equipment. 

Figure VIII-1. Aircraft Operational Decontamination Site Layout 

Figure VIII-2 Helicopter Operational Decontamination Site Layout 

VIII-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(d) Decontamination Area or Pad. A suitable remote site that is at least 

500 feet away from all other flight line activities must be selected to conduct aircraft 

decontamination. The decontamination pad must have enough space so that all of the 

drainage and wastewater runoff is collected and contained. The establishment and 

enforcement of an entry control point is required to control and monitor access to the 

decontamination pad. 

(e) Containment Area. An aircraft decontamination containment area 

should be large enough to completely cover the ground under the entire aircraft and catch 

all the contaminated runoff water. The construction of the pad should be of a waterproof

material (vinyl, plastic, or tarp) with suitable sides (berm) to control and contain the water 

or decontaminant runoff. Operational decontamination sites established at wash racks will 

require a containment feature (such as sandbags, sand-filled fire hoses, or commercially 

available containment berms or pools) that is large enough to accommodate the aircraft 

being washed and to prevent runoff from spreading contamination. The pad size will vary

based on the type of aircraft requiring decontamination and must be built to accommodate 

the largest known contaminated aircraft. Sample aircraft sizes and recommended pad 

containment areas are given in Table VIII-2. 

Table VIII-2. Sample Aircraft Sizes and Recommended Pad Containment Areas 

Aircraft Length Wingspan Recommended Pad 

C-5 247' 10" 222' 9" 270' x 250' 

C-17 173' 11" 170' 9" 200' x 200' 

C-141 168' 4" 160' 180' x 180' 

KC-135E 136' 3" 130' 10" 160' x 160' 

C-130 97' 9" 132' 7" 125' x 160'

 (f) Overspray or Splatter Hazard Area. Another factor to consider is the 

potential for an overspray or splatter hazard during decontamination operations. The 

liquid containment system associated with a ground barrier is designed to allow the 

wastewater to be collected in an appropriate container, pending further analysis and proper 

disposal. If possible, establish the decontamination area at a 20° angle to the prevailing 

winds. Using this method, the concentration of trailing vapor hazards will be significantly 

reduced. 

(g) Site. Sewer drains must be plugged, and a system for containing 

discarded wastewater must be established using a temporary berm. Ensure that the 

ground slope allows the runoff to flow to the downwind side of the washing operation but 

still be retained in the area so that it will not cross contaminate other areas. All 

wastewater used in the decontamination process will need to be collected and tested. 

(h) Wastewater Storage. Wastewater storage tanks should be available to 

store runoff. In areas where sufficient natural drainage exists to carry wastewater away 

from the operation, wastewater lagoons could be constructed to provide a holding area for 

the wastewater, pending proper disposal. If lagoons are utilized, they must be established 

downwind of the decontamination area, properly marked, and fenced. Because of the large

construction requirements, lagoons should only be used as a last resort. 

(i.) Collection System. The design of the collection system largely 

depends on the specific site conditions such as the slope of the land, soil composition, and 

wind direction. Planners must also consider piping and sump pumps to move contaminated 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-11 
water into storage tanks or a holding lagoon. The quantity and selection of piping and 

pumps depend on the slope and distance from the decontamination pad to the holding 

tanks. 

(3) Procedures. Aircraft wash-down techniques are employed to reduce the 

levels of contamination on the aircraft between sorties (when time allows). An aircraft 

wash down should be performed as a minimum contamination reduction measure when 

time does not permit a more extensive decontamination. 

(a) All personnel involved in the aircraft wash down shall wear the 

appropriate MOPP gear prior to the aircraft entering the decontamination site. 

Wet-weather clothing or TAP aprons worn over MOPP gear is recommended to prevent the

saturation of the nonaircrew protective ensemble. 

(b) Personnel place the appropriate barrier and contamination hazard 

markings prior to commencing the wash down. They erect barriers to isolate the 

decontamination site. Appropriate (CB) North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) 

contamination markers should be attached to the rope barrier to warn personnel of a 

contamination hazard. 

(c) Aircraft stands or ladders should be available to the spray areas 

inaccessible from the ground or deck. As a last resort, decontamination personnel can climb 

on the aircraft. 

(d) The aircraft is towed or taxied into position. 

(e) The aircrew egress. If contaminated, the aircrew must remain with 

the aircraft in IPE or may be directed to a personnel decontamination site (shore-based) or 

CCA (ship) for the removal of contaminated IPE and flight gear. 

(f) The crew closes all of the hatches, doors, and windows on the aircraft. 

(g) Warm, soapy water is applied to the aircraft. Spray should be applied 

to the aircraft working upwind to downwind and top to bottom. Do not neglect the landing 

gear and the belly of the aircraft. Angle the spray streams from 15° to 30° in order to avoid 

water being introduced behind the hatch and cover seams that house the sensitive aircraft 

components. Control the overspray to avoid transferring the contaminated runoff to 

personnel or to areas outside the decontamination barrier. 

CAUTION 

Consult the appropriate aircraft maintenance publications for 

areas that could be damaged by the application of water spray. 

Prepare these areas for aircraft wash down as specified in TMs 

for normal washing. The spray streams should be angled from 

15° to 30° in order to avoid water being introduced behind the 

hatch and cover seams that house the sensitive aircraft 

components. Ensure that only approved aircraft cleaners are 

used. The overspray should be controlled to avoid transferring 

contaminated runoff to personnel or to areas outside of the 

decontamination barrier. 

(h) Rinse. Perform this optional step for corrosion control purposes if 

time allows. 

VIII-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(i) Check the interior for liquid or solid contamination. If contamination 

is discovered, spot-decontaminate by wiping with rags dipped in warm, soapy water or 

another approved aircraft cleaner. 

(j) Move the aircraft to an area where it can weather. 

(k) Repeat steps 3 (a) through (j) as required. 

(4) Site Close-Out. At the end of the decontamination procedures, the 

decontamination pad must be cleaned with a standard or nonstandard decontamination 

solution to ensure that all traces of contamination have been neutralized. Additionally, the

planners should consider that all joint- or crack-sealing material will need to be removed 

and replaced. 

d. Thorough Decontamination. The goal of a thorough decontamination is to reduce 

contamination to negligible levels or to eliminate it so that aircraft can be operated and 

maintained safely for extended periods of time without aircrew IPE or nonaircrew IPE. 

Thorough decontamination consists of personnel and equipment decontamination. Detailed 

aspects of specific thorough personnel and equipment decontamination for air and naval 

forces are addressed in AFMAN 10-2602. This section primarily addresses thorough 

aircraft decontamination procedures for forces operating ashore. Thorough personnel

decontamination is outlined in Chapter V. 

(1) The DAD restores items so that they can be used without aircrew IPE or 

nonaircrew IPE. Normally, the DED and the DAD are conducted as part of a reconstitution 

or during breaks in combat operations. 

(2) The thorough decontamination of aircraft is costly in terms of time and 

resources. A critical limitation to aircraft thorough decontamination is decontamination of 

the interior. Electronics, electrical systems, and other sensitive components of cockpits, 

flight decks, and cargo areas can become damaged if subjected to the volume of water that 

would have to be introduced in order to effectively remove contamination from these areas. 

As discussed, there are currently no available decontamination technologies, other than 

using standard aircraft soaps and cleaners to displace contamination from an aircraft. 

Therefore, in considering thorough decontamination of an aircraft, commanders must first 

determine the extent of the contamination to the interior spaces of the aircraft. If these 

spaces are heavily contaminated, it may make more sense to operationally decontaminate 

the exterior of the aircraft, spot-decontaminate the interior of the aircraft, and allow the 

aircraft to weather to an acceptable level instead of spending the resources to conduct a 

thorough decontamination of the exterior, knowing that spot decontamination of the 

interior is the best that can be achieved with the current decontamination technology. 

(3) The procedures for DAD are similar to those for operational

decontamination. The principal difference between the two techniques is the amount of 

time that is required. There is a stationary, single-station method and a five-station 

method for conducting DAD. In either method, DAD will take longer because of the 

requirement to scrub the aircraft. Scrubbing the aircraft with soap will assist with the 

contaminant removal process and increase the effectiveness of decontamination. All 

personnel involved in the DAD may wear the appropriate rain gear. Rain gear is

recommended to prevent the saturation of the nonaircrew protective ensemble. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-13 
(a) Determine the Location for the Decontamination. The location to 

conduct aircraft decontamination is dependent on the operating cycle, space available at the 

facility, and the type of aircraft being decontaminated. 

(b) Conduct Site Preparation. Considerations for selecting a thorough 

decontamination site and the preparation of that site are similar to those discussed in 

operational decontamination (paragraph 3c). Thorough decontamination will require more 

logistics support. For planning purposes, the following recommendations are provided: CH46E, 500 gallons; CH-53E, 700 gallons; and C130, 1600 gallons. Containment at the DAD 

will have to be increased to hold the additional runoff. 

NOTE: Water requirements are approximations. The water requirements for 

specific aircraft should be based on the surface area compared to the 

recommended water volumes provided above. 

(c) Perform Single-Station Procedures. 

• Tow or taxi the aircraft into position; and close all of the hatches, 

doors, and windows on the aircraft. Prepare the aircraft the same as for a normal washing, 

and then initiate the decontamination process. 

• Apply warm, soapy water to the outside of the aircraft. Spray should 

be applied to the aircraft, working from upwind to downwind and top to bottom. 

CAUTION 

Consult appropriate aircraft maintenance publications for areas 

that could be damaged by the application of water spray. 

Prepare these areas for aircraft wash down as specified in TMs 

for normal washing. Spray streams should be angled from 15° 

to 30° in order to avoid water being introduced behind the hatch 

and cover seams that house sensitive aircraft components. 

Ensure that only approved aircraft cleaners are used. The 

overspray should be controlled to avoid transferring 

contaminated runoff to other personnel or to areas outside of 

the decontamination barrier. 

• Apply appropriate aircraft cleaner or soap to the exterior of the 

aircraft using long-handled brushes or nonabrasive scrub pads. Scrub the soap into the 

exterior surfaces of the aircraft, working from upwind to downwind and top to bottom. Pay

particular attention to the areas where contamination tends to accumulate, such as landing 

gear, landing gear bays, tires, and areas with POL. 

• Check the interior spaces with a CAM/ICAM or M8 paper. If 

contamination is discovered or suspected, spot-decontaminate these areas with rags or 

sponges dipped in warm, soapy water or with another approved aircraft cleaner. Wring-out

the excess water to avoid contaminated runoff. Porous material such as cargo straps, seats, 

and seat belts cannot be effectively spot-decontaminated. These items and other porous 

items should be removed and weathered or discarded. Personnel performing the interior 

decontamination must ensure that they are not transferring contamination inside of the 

aircraft. If necessary, decontaminate the footgear and gloves before entering the aircraft. 

VIII-14 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• Apply rinse water to the outside of the aircraft. Spray should be 

applied to the aircraft, working from upwind to downwind and top to bottom. Heated water 

will aid in contamination removal. 

WARNING 

Overspray should be controlled to avoid 

transferring the contaminated runoff to personnel 

or to areas outside of the decontamination barrier. 

CAUTION 

Consult the appropriate aircraft maintenance 

publications for areas that could be damaged by the 

application of water spray. Spray streams should be 

angled from 15° to 30° to avoid water being introduced 

behind the hatch and cover seams that house the 

sensitive aircraft components. 

• Check for contamination. Use the CAM/ICAM, M8A1, M22 ACADA, 

MK26 Ship ACADA, M256/M256A1, or biological handheld assay (HHA) (as required) to 

check the exterior for contamination. If contamination is found, recycle the aircraft 

according to the command guidance or segregate the aircraft from personnel and other 

aircraft for the weathering process to lower contamination levels. 

(d) Perform Five-Station Procedures. 

• CBRN units may set up, operate, and close the DAD portion of the

thorough decontamination operation. Table VIII-3 (page VIII-16) shows the personnel and 

equipment requirements for the five-station DAD. The site setup is the same for CBR. The 

DAD area is composed of primary wash, decontaminant solution application, contact time 

and interior decontamination, rinse, and check stations (see Figure VIII-3, page VIII-17). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-15 
Table VIII-3. Personnel Requirements for DAD 

Stations Personnel Equipment/Supplies Decontamination Unit Augmentees 

Station 1—Primary wash 1 TL 

1 PDDE operator 

1 sprayer 

2 scrubbers 1 PDDE 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

2 65-GPM pumps 

6 long-handled brushes 

5 TAP aprons 

Liquid detergent 

Station 2—Decontaminant 

application 

1 TL 

2 appliers 

2 sprayers 

1 PDDE operator 

4 appliers 1 PDDE 

18 long-handled brushes 

9 mops with extra heads 

5 TAP aprons 

Liquid detergent 

Station 3—Interior 

decontamination/wait 

1 NCO (ICAM/CAM 

operator) 

2 assistants 2 AN/VDR-2s or 

AN/PDR-77s 

2 TAP aprons 

6 30-gallon containers 

10 books of M8 paper 

30 sponges 

8 M256A1 detector kits 

50 plastic trash bags 

1 clipboard with pen 

1 stopwatch 

1 ICAM/CAM 

Station 4—Rinse 1 TL 

1 PDDE operator 

2 sprayers 

None 1 PDDE 

1 3,000-gallon tank 

3 65-GPM pumps 

1 TPU 

2 TAP aprons 

Station 5—Check 1 TL 

2 CAM/ICAM operators 

None 1 CAM/ICAM 

10 M256A1 detector kits 

20 books of M8 paper 

2 AN/VDR-2s or 

AN/PDR-77s 

1 M8A1 or M22 ACADA 

C2 1 TL 

1 assistant 

None 1 HMMWV 

3 marking kits 

Aircraft moving team None 6 drivers 

18 ground guides 

None 

Total Personnel 19 32 N/A 

VIII-16 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure VIII-3. Sample Layout for a DAD Station 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-17 
• The representative actions that are taken at each station are as 

follows: 

o Station 1: Primary Wash. At this station, gross contamination is 

removed from the aircraft. The aircraft is sprayed for 2 to 3 minutes with hot, soapy water. 

WARNING 

To prevent damage, avoid hitting the aircraft’s skin 

at a 90° angle. Also avoid the sensitive areas 

shown in Figures VIII-4 and VIII-5. 

Figure VIII-4. Sensitive Areas for the UH-60/E60, CH-47, and AH-64 

VIII-18 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure VIII-5. Sensitive Areas for the OH-58 and UH-1 

o Station 2: Decontaminant Application. At this station, a 

decontamination solution is applied using a decontamination apparatus such as the M12A1 

PDDE or the M17 LDS (in the siphon injector mode). After the solution is applied, a

member of the scrubbing team scrubs the aircraft skin. This allows the chemical agent to 

mix with the decontamination solution (especially when thickened chemical agents are 

present). STB and HTH should not be used because of their corrosive nature. 

o Station 3: Contact Time and Interior Decontamination. At this 

station, the decontamination solution is allowed to completely neutralize the chemical 

agent; also, the interior of the aircraft is decontaminated (if necessary). The aircraft will 

remain in Station 3 at least 30 minutes. The decontamination solution reacts with most 

chemical agents within 5 minutes. However, allowing the decontamination solution to 

remain on the contaminated surface for 30 minutes should ensure a complete

neutralization. 

• Inspect the interior of the aircraft for liquid contamination 

using the CAM/ICAM and M8 detector paper. If a liquid-chemical contamination is 

identified, decontaminate the interior of the aircraft. 

WARNING 

Personnel should not be in the aircraft during 

this operation. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-19 
• Decontaminate the aircraft’s interior with hot, soapy water 

as long as maintenance personnel approve the use of it on certain pieces of equipment. Use 

IEDKs or damp, soapy washcloths to decontaminate optical and electrical equipment and 

instruments. 

NOTE: The IEDK leaves a charcoal residue on surfaces. 

• Use a radiac meter for radiological contamination to

determine the extent and location of the contamination inside the aircraft. If there is 

contamination, determine the intensity of the contamination. If the contamination has an 

intensity greater than 0.33 cGy, decontaminate the interior of the aircraft. Use hot, soapy 

water to wash the contaminated areas and a sponge to mop up the water and the 

contamination. 

o Station 4: Rinse. Removed the decontamination solution is from 

the aircraft. Spray the aircraft with water from top to bottom. Take care not to damage the 

aircraft skin. This station will use about 250 gallons of water. 

CAUTION 

Failure to remove all of the decontamination 

solution from the aircraft skin may cause corrosion. 

o Station 5: Check. At this station, the completeness of the 

decontamination is checked. Detection procedures vary depending on the type of 

contamination. If significant contamination is found on the aircraft, recycle it to Station 2 

for chemical contamination or to Station 1 for radiological contamination. 

• Use the ICAM to check for the presence of vapors. If the 

ICAM indicates the presence of vapors, use the M8 detector paper to check for liquid 

contamination. If it is suspected that these are producing a false positive, use an M256A1 

detector kit to confirm or deny the presence of contamination. If the aircraft has significant 

contamination remaining, recycle it. Desorption of chemical agents may occur after the 

decontamination. On CARC-painted surfaces, the desorption of vapors will stop sooner 

than on alkyd-painted surfaces. 

• Use the radiac meter to determine if any contamination

remains. If so, determine the intensity of the contamination. 

• The commander establishes the recycle criteria before starting a 

decontamination operation. If contamination is detected at Station 5, the recycle criteria 

are used to determine which aircraft are returned to Station 2 or, if radiologically

contaminated, to Station 1. If the unit has sufficient time and resources available, the 

aircraft still having detectable levels of contamination should be recycled. However, time 

and resources are usually limited and not all aircraft can be recycled. 

e. Operational and Thorough Decontamination. Operational and thorough

decontamination sites for aircraft must be selected with care. The decontamination area 

must be large enough for the required number of aircraft, have an available water source, 

VIII-20 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
and allow for adequate drainage. The sites should be relatively secure; however, they 

should be close enough to the AOs to allow for a reasonably quick turnaround of the 

aircraft. The sites should not have less than a 5 percent slope. Decontamination sites 

should be integrated into the tactical plan. 

4. Civil Reserve Air Fleet and Contract Airlift Operations 

The Civil Reserve Air Fleet (CRAF) and contract airlift crews are provided ground 

crew CW defense ensembles for emergency use. Crews receive just-in-time training in

order to quickly and properly don the suit and proceed to a protective shelter. Civil crews 

are not expected to sustain operations in a CB environment. Therefore, they have no

decontamination capability. 

a. Civil aircraft are not usually modified for operations in a CBRN environment. 

b. Civil aircrews are not obligated or trained to fly into a contaminated

environment. The CRAF will not intentionally operate in a known contaminated 

environment. 

c. If an aircraft becomes contaminated while on the ground, the crew will be 

evacuated by the first available means and the aircraft will be grounded until it is 

decontaminated. 

5. Aircraft Munitions Decontamination 

This paragraph addresses aircraft munitions; specifically, contaminated munitions 

assets, the decontamination of munitions assets, and the handling of contaminated waste. 

a. Munitions personnel must possess an immediate decontamination capability for 

themselves (M291 and M295 decontamination kits, and glove and boot decontamination 

troughs with 5 percent chlorine solutions) and an operational decontamination capability 

for munitions, assets, and vehicles. For the decontamination operations to be beneficial, 

the site personnel must initiate the decontamination shortly after the onset of 

contamination since there will not be sufficient time for off-site personnel to arrive and 

conduct the decontamination operations. 

b. If the aircraft munitions are contaminated while in the storage area, the 

munitions handlers maintain MOPP4 (even if the aircraft parking area and other resources 

are uncontaminated). If dealing with contaminated individually wrapped trailers in the 

flight line weapons storage area, the weapons load crew removes the barrier material and 

disposes of it as contaminated waste before transporting the load to the aircraft parking 

area. However, if positioning the weapons without overhead cover for more than 1 hour at 

(or in the immediate vicinity of) the aircraft parking area, the weapons load crew replaces 

the barrier material before leaving for the site. 

(1) Because of the hazard that is imbedded in contaminated munitions 

equipment and weapons, munitions personnel must conspicuously identify the 

contaminated assets and keep them separated from the uncontaminated resources 

(whenever possible). Contaminated munitions remain hazardous to unprotected personnel 

for extended periods. 

(2) Contaminated munitions should be hung on the contaminated aircraft. If it 

is necessary to use the contaminated munitions on uncontaminated aircraft, ordnance shall 

be decontaminated before applying it to an aircraft. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-21 
(3) If the munitions area is contaminated and the weapons build process did 

not have an overhead cover, the commanders should determine the need for additional 

weapons during this period. If the munitions operation built enough weapons for the next 

24 hours, it may not be necessary to continue building bombs in the first few hours after an 

attack. Munitions work crews should conduct decontamination of the munitions area, 

munitions equipment, and munitions. 

(4) The supervisors and munitions work crews shall ensure that the 

contamination status of munitions and equipment is clearly marked. 

c. For the decontamination operations to be beneficial, the individual vehicle and 

equipment operators must immediately decontaminate the parts of the munitions assets 

that will be touched within 15 minutes of being contaminated. Units may organize and

equip contamination control teams to support sustained operations. They use the team

concept (normally two members) to assist unit personnel in developing and executing the 

immediate decontamination measures, resupplying the unit with decontaminants, and 

collecting and disposing of contaminated waste. 

(1) There is no need for extensive decontamination of each contaminated piece 

of ordnance, vehicle, or equipment (trailer, bomb loader, etc.) as long as the personnel 

clearly identify the contaminated assets as containing a residual hazard. The operator’s or

work center’s accomplishment of the immediate decontamination using M295 

decontamination kits will suffice to continue the mission operations. The decontamination 

operations will not produce significant results once the agent has sorbed into the paint or 

other absorbent surfaces. Depending on the surface, this sorption takes place in periods 

ranging from less than 1 minute up to 1 hour. Regardless of the decontamination technique

used, it will be relatively easy to remove agents from the smooth panels before they absorb 

into the surface. However, the CBRN agents will tend to remain at low levels in crevices, 

rivet heads, and joints. 

(2) The majority of munitions assets on installations use paint with

polyurethane compounds. Chemical agents readily sorb into this type of paint. Thus, the 

decontamination operations will not have a significant effect unless they take place within 

minutes after the time of contamination. Timely decontamination will reduce the residual 

contact hazard. Impermeable surfaces (arming wires and other unpainted metal 

components) do not allow the agent to penetrate. Therefore, these locations represent the 

most dangerous areas on the contaminated assets. 

(3) Plastic and rubber components are porous materials, and the agents easily 

soak into these components. While the use of the M295 decontamination kit or a 5 percent 

chlorine solution will effectively reduce or eliminate the operational contact hazard, the 

agent will remain imbedded in the material and an off-gassing hazard will remain. 

(4) There are no effective, operationally feasible methods for completely 

decontaminating canvas storage covers, webbing, and other textile materials contaminated 

with liquid chemical agents. These items will have to be weathered or removed and treated 

as contaminated waste. 

VIII-22 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
6. Air Cargo Movement Decontamination 

Contamination can significantly disrupt the air and ground cargo movements if the 

cargo handlers do not plan and execute preattack and postattack actions. The commanders 

must identify and coordinate the task priorities, obtaining additional support when needed. 

a. Cargo handlers must effectively employ preattack and postattack measures to 

minimize mission degradation and enable sustained operations. This includes the 

coordinated use of a system that balances the mission criticality level (importance) of the 

cargo with the hazard category (residual danger) associated with the materials to 

determine the appropriate action. The cargo handlers will require assistance from their 

unit CBRN reconnaissance team and CBRN specialists to determine the degree of 

contamination that is present on the cargo, cargo storage areas, and cargo movement areas. 

Personnel controlling the cargo movement will use Table VIII-4 to identify the mission 

criticality of the material and will conspicuously mark the relative code on the cargo. 

Table VIII-4. Cargo Movement Mission Criticality Level 

Mission Criticality 

Level 

Definition 

C—Critical The cargo is sufficiently important that it must be transported within 4 hours, 

regardless of the existence of contamination. 

P—Priority The cargo is sufficiently important that it must be transported within 12 hours, 

regardless of the existence of contamination. 

A—Accelerated The cargo is sufficiently important that it must be transported within 24 hours, 

regardless of the existence of contamination. 

R—Routine The mission can be delayed until contamination levels, such as MOPP4 are not 

required, regardless of how long it takes the contamination to dissipate. 

N—Negligible The mission can be delayed until there is no measurable contamination. This 

type of cargo should not be accepted inside the cargo movement area. Room 

must be saved for higher priority cargo. 

b. Table VIII-5 may be used to determine the hazard category associated with the 

cargo. 

Table VIII-5. Cargo Movement Hazard Category 

Hazard 

Category 

Definition 

1 Actual or suspected surface disposition of biological pathogens 

2 HD, L, or GB vapor present without contact hazard 

3 VL or L contact hazard present without measurable vapor hazard 

4 HD or GB contact hazard combined with a medium level of danger associated with vapor 

concentrations (4 to 5 CAM/ICAM bars with HD and up to 6 CAM/ICAM bars with GB) 

5 HD, L, GB, or VX contact hazard combined with a high level of danger associated with vapor 

concentrations (6 or more ICAM/CAM bars with HD, positive M256A1 tab for L, 7 or more 

ICAM/CAM bars with GB, or 6 or more CAM/ICAM bars with VX) 

NOTE: In the case of GB, high vapor hazard alone can drive this category designation. 

c. In addition to the required CBRN reconnaissance, self-aid, and buddy care 

activities, cargo handlers accomplish the following actions. The timing of the postattack

reconnaissance and self-aid buddy care activities depend on the situation, the direction 

from the installation, and the unit chain of command. Unless otherwise directed, do not 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-23 
accomplish the following actions until after the liquid deposition phase of the attack has 

ended. 

(1) Determine the contamination status of each individual cargo pallet.

Annotate and report the results to the commander. 

(2) Remove and replace the covering within 6 hours (the sooner the better) if a 

single sheet of plastic is protecting the contaminated assets. Carefully remove the outer

layer and replace it as time permits if a double or triple sheet of plastic or canvas is 

protecting the contaminated assets,. Carefully roll the material so that the contaminated 

side is rolled to the inside, and discard the material as contaminated waste. 

(3) Mark the item as contaminated according to the unit marking procedures 

(NBC marking kit, signs on all sides) if barrier material is not protecting the contaminated 

cargo. Attach each type of signs to the cargo if it is contaminated with more than one type 

of agent (e.g., CB). 

(4) Annotate the front of the appropriate NBC marking kit sign with the 

mission criticality and hazard category designator for prioritizing the cargo movement. The 

code for the mission criticality designator will be the first letter of the appropriate word 

(i.e., “C” represents critical and “N” represents negligible). The code for the hazard category

is the number designator itself (i.e., “3” represents a contact hazard without a measurable 

vapor hazard). 

(5) Annotate the specific agent, date, time of marking, and temperature (F or 

Celsius [C]) at the time of the marking operation on the rear of the marking sign. If using

the DOD sampling kits (biological-agent samplers), annotate on the rear of the sign 

whether the HHA tests are positive or negative. 

(6) Report the contamination status of each pallet to the unit operations center. 

(7) Use Table VIII-6 to determine what decontamination actions, if any, are 

necessary based on the mission criticality level and hazard category of the contaminated 

cargo. 

Table VIII-6. Cargo Decontamination Actions (Negligible) 

Mission 

Criticality 

Level 

Hazard 

Category 

Recommended Action 

Critical 1 Spray the cargo with water if it will not damage the contents. Triple-wrap 

and mark “C1.” 

Critical 2 Aerate for 30 minutes if the surrounding environment is clean. Triple-wrap 

and mark “C2.” 

Critical 3 Decontaminate with an IEDK. Triple-wrap and mark “C3.” 

Critical 4 Decontaminate with an IEDK. Aerate for 30 minutes if GB is the agent and 

the surrounding area is clean. Triple-wrap and mark “C4.” 

Critical 5 Decontaminate with an IEDK. Aerate for 30 minutes if GB is the agent and 

the surrounding area is clean. Triple-wrap and mark “C5.” 

VIII-24 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table VIII-6. Cargo Decontamination Actions (Negligible) (Continued) 

Mission 

Criticality 

Level 

Hazard 

Category 

Recommended Action 

Priority 1 Same as “Critical 1.” In addition, wipe down the cargo with a dust remover, 

reset the cargo with HHA, triple-wrap, and mark “P1.” 

Priority 2 Aerate for 6 hours if the surrounding area is clean. Triple-wrap and mark 

“P2.” 

Priority 3 Decontaminate with an IEDK, recheck with the M8 paper, and use an IEDK 

again if necessary. Triple-wrap and mark “P3.” 

Priority 4 Aerate for 6 hours if the surrounding area is clean, decontaminate with an 

IEDK, triple-wrap, and mark “P4.” 

Priority 5 Aerate for 6 hours if the surrounding area is clean, decontaminate with an 

IEDK, triple-wrap, and mark “P5.” 

Accelerated 1 Same as “Priority 1.” In addition, expose the cargo to sunlight for 4 hours, 

attempt a wash down, and conduct the wipe-down procedures again if the 

second HHA test was positive. Triple-wrap and mark “A1.” 

Accelerated 2 Aerate for 12 hours if the surrounding environment is clean, triple-wrap, and 

mark as “A2.” 

Accelerated 3 Same as “Priority 3.” In addition, aerate for 12 hours before the 

decontamination process, recheck with the M8 paper, and decontaminate 

with an IEDK as often as necessary or until time no longer permits. 

Triple-wrap and mark “A3.” 

Accelerated 4 Same as “Priority 4.” In addition, aeration time should be extended to 12 

hours. Recheck with the M8 paper following the initial IEDK decontamination 

action. Repeat the IEDK operation if the contact hazard still exists. 

Triple-wrap and mark “A4.” 

Accelerated 5 Same as “Priority 4.” In addition, aeration time should be extended to 12 

hours. Recheck with the M8 paper following the initial IEDK 

decontamination action. Repeat the IEDK operation if the contact hazard 

still exists. Triple-wrap and mark “A5.” 

Routine 1 Same as “Accelerated 1.” In addition, continue the weathering and washdown or wipe-down process until the HHA tests are negative. Triple-wrap 

and mark “R1” 

Routine 2 Same as “Accelerated 2.” Triple-wrap and mark “R2.” 

Routine 3 Same as “Accelerated 3.” In addition, aerate for 24 hours before starting the 

decontamination process. Triple-wrap and mark “R3.” 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-25 
Table VIII-6. Cargo Decontamination Actions (Negligible) (Continued) 

Mission 

Criticality 

Level 

Hazard 

Category 

Recommended Action 

Routine 4 Same as “Accelerated 4.” In addition, the cargo should not be loaded until 

the contact hazard has completely dissipated. Triple-wrap and mark “R4.” 

Routine 5 Same as “Accelerated 5.” In addition, the cargo should not be loaded until 

the contact hazard has completely dissipated. Triple-wrap and mark “R5.” 

Negligible 1 Same as “Routine 1.” Triple-wrap and mark “N1.” 

Negligible 2 Do not process unless the contamination dissipates or the mission criticality 

level is upgraded. Triple-wrap and mark “N2.” 

Negligible 3 Do not process unless the contamination dissipates or the mission criticality 

level is upgraded. Triple-wrap and mark “N3.” 

Negligible 4 Do not process unless the contamination dissipates or the mission criticality 

level is upgraded. Triple-wrap and mark “N4.” 

Negligible 5 Do not process unless the contamination dissipates or the mission criticality 

level is upgraded. Triple-wrap and mark “N5.” 

d. Use the following detection guidelines when loading and transporting 

contaminated cargo: 

(1) Determine the contamination status of the material handling equipment 

and the transport vehicles. Determine if the items have measurable amounts of 

contamination. Attempt to locate the pockets of contamination. This may entail the use of 

a CAM/ICAM to pinpoint the pockets of dirt and grease that may house the agents in liquid 

or dusty forms, which the M8 paper does not readily identify. 

(2) Take the following precautions if the transport vehicle is uncontaminated to 

keep it clean during the cargo movement process: 

(a) Conduct immediate decontamination on the portions of the material 

handling equipment exposed to the cargo pallet or the transport vehicle. Use the M295 

decontamination kit or 5 percent chlorine bleach solution to decontaminate. 

(b) Place plastic or another barrier material in the bed of the transport 

vehicle over the area where the cargo pallets will sit. 

(c) Replace the outer layer of barrier material on the cargo pallets (if 

necessary). 

(d) Ensure that the transport vehicle operator is the only person in the 

transport vehicle and that he wears the appropriate level of IPE. 

(e) Ensure that the local cargo handlers perform the actual cargo loading.

The cargo handlers should not touch, stand on, or go inside the vehicle unless absolutely 

necessary. If it is necessary, they should use the decontamination troughs containing 5 

percent chlorine solutions to decontaminate their gloves and boots before making contact. 

(f) Check the clean the transport vehicle for evidence of cross

contamination, and if contaminated, conduct an immediate decontamination. 

VIII-26 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(g) Seal the vehicle chocks or other transport vehicle accessories that may 

have come in contact with contaminated surfaces inside a plastic bag prior to loading. 

(h) Mark the vehicle and the cargo to clearly identify the hazard 

associated with the contaminated cargo. 

(3) Use the following guidelines when loading and transporting clean cargo 

after attacks with CB agents: 

(a) Determine the contamination status of the material handling 

equipment and the transport vehicles. 

(b) Take the following precautions if the material handling equipment or 

transport vehicle is contaminated to prevent them from cross-contaminating the cargo 

pallet during the cargo movement process: 

• Conduct immediate decontamination on the portions of the material 

handling equipment that will come in contact with the cargo pallet. 

• Place at least two sheets of plastic or another layer of barrier material

in the bed of the transport vehicle over the area that the cargo pallets will sit on. 

• Ensure that the pallets have at least a double wrap of barrier 

material. The transport vehicle operator should be the only person in the transport vehicle, 

and he must wear the appropriate level of IPE. 

• Ensure that the local cargo handlers perform the actual cargo loading.

The cargo handlers should not touch, stand on, or go inside the vehicle or vehicles unless 

absolutely necessary. If necessary, they should use the decontamination troughs containing 

5 percent chlorine solutions to decontaminate their gloves and boots after making contact. 

• Check the pallets for evidence of cross-contamination, and if 

contamination is present, immediately decontaminate. 

• Appropriately mark the vehicle to clearly identify the associated 

hazard. 

(4) The cargo movement personnel should accomplish the following actions 

when receiving contaminated cargo from another location: 

(a) Acquire the available information concerning the cargo. This includes 

the following: 

• A description of the cargo. 

• A description of the suspected contamination on the cargo. 

• The physical condition of the cargo. 

• The time of the estimated cargo contamination in relation to the 

anticipated reception time at the installation. 

• The status of the vehicle operators. 

• Contact information for the CBRN specialists and the unit expecting 

delivery. 

(b) If the cargo does not have a high mission priority (as stated by the 

receiving unit), assess the ability of the unit or cargo handlers to isolate the cargo upon 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 VIII-27 
reception. If choosing the isolation option, clearly cordon off the area surrounding the 

pallets. Use a cordon radius of 25 feet (or as directed by CBRN personnel). 

(c) If the personnel must expediently use the contaminated cargo to 

facilitate the mission operations, the receiving unit or cargo handlers should take the 

following actions: 

• Ensure that the reception personnel are in the appropriate MOPP 

(normally MOPP4). 

• Remove the layers of the barrier material (if present), cargo nets, or

pallet banding; and dispose of these items as contaminated waste. 

• Verify the type and level of the contamination (for example, VX in 

liquid form on metal boxes with no measurable vapor hazard). 

• Remove the specific cargo from its packaging configuration (if 

feasible), and dispose of the packing material as contaminated waste. 

• Accomplish the appropriate decontamination activities based on the 

extent of the contamination, agent present, cargo surface, and time available. 

• Mark the contaminated cargo appropriately so that work center 

personnel will immediately recognize the potential residual hazard. 

e. Use the following decontamination guidelines for aircraft pallets: 

(1) Determine, report, and annotate the contamination status of each pallet. If 

a single sheet of barrier material protected the contaminated assets, remove and replace 

the covering. Accomplish this within 6 hours (the sooner the better). Carefully roll the

material so that the contaminated side rolls to the inside, and then dispose of the material 

as contaminated waste. If a double or triple sheet of plastic or canvas protected the 

contaminated assets, remove the outer layer and replace it as time permits. 

(2) Dispose of the barrier material as contaminated waste in the appropriate 

predetermined location. If a barrier material did not protect the contaminated property, 

identify the item as contaminated. 

(3) Pay special attention to pallet netting. If the netting was contaminated, it

will most likely be impossible to decontaminate over time. Ensure that the contaminated 

wrapping materials are disposed of in a temporary waste disposal area. Routinely transfer

the contaminated waste to the installation contaminated waste disposal site. 

VIII-28 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Chapter IX 

SHIPBOARD/MARITIME DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

This chapter addresses shipboard CBR decontamination and the decontamination 

aspects of CBRN recovery operations. Recovery operations involve those operations in 

which military or civilian personnel, equipment, and supplies move from sites off of naval 

ships (e.g., ashore or on another vessel into amphibious shipping) 

2. Shipboard Chemical, Biological, and Radiological Decontamination 

Shipboard CBR decontamination requires a well-thought-out plan and organization. 

a. Shipboard Organization and Manning. The primary advisor to the commanding

officer for CBR decontamination actions is the damage control assistant (DCA). The 

damage control organization includes the personnel assigned to damage control repair 

stations, standoff detector operators, countermeasure washdown system operators, 

ventilation control personnel, on-station monitors, survey teams, decontamination teams, 

and personnel decontamination station operators coordinated through the damage control 

center (DCC). Medical personnel are integrated into the shipboard chemical, biological, and 

radiological defense (CBRD) organization. Shipboard personnel may be required to conduct 

CBRD actions with a variety of routinely embarked units, including USN staffs, USN 

aviation squadrons and detachments, USMC units, USN special warfare units, EOD 

personnel, elements of Naval beach groups (NBGs) assault craft units, USCG law 

enforcement detachments, and USA units. Minimum damage control repair station

manning requirements are outlined in NWP 3-20.31. The number of personnel may be 

modified by the type of ship. See the commander’s repair party manual (Commander Naval 

Surface Forces Instruction [COMNAVSURFORINST] 3541.1) for a particular ship class. 

b. Shipboard Decontamination Techniques and Procedures. Detailed CBR 

decontamination actions are outlined in NWP 3-20.31, NSTM 470, and NSTM 070. 

Shipboard CBRD decontamination and contamination control capabilities are focused on 

the survivability of the unit and are conducted primarily by the shipboard damage control 

organization. 

c. Shipboard Safety Precautions. 

(1) Countermeasure Wash Down System (CMWDS). For decontamination with 

detergents, in the absence of an oxidizer, the contaminants are not chemically neutralized 

and remain toxic. The possibility exists that the agent-contaminated water may drain or 

flow in such a way that contamination remains on the ship. Decontamination operations

should be planned and conducted so that most of the runoff flows into the sea and that 

areas of heavy traffic and sensitive areas are not recontaminated. Care should be taken to 

minimize spraying or splashing of the contaminated liquid. 

WARNING 

Aircraft subjected to CMWDS will become deadlined 

due to corrosion control requirements until 

emergency reclamation maintenance is performed. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-1 
(2) Protective Clothing. Full chemical protective clothing shall be worn, and 

those personnel who might be exposed to contaminated spray should wear wet-weather 

gear over the JSLIST. However, wearing wet-weather clothing will dramatically increase 

heat stress. This factor shall be taken into consideration when planning the 

decontamination efforts. 

(3) Surfaces. No decontaminated surface should be assumed to be completely 

free of CBR hazards until suitable tests are negative. Traces of an agent will often remain

trapped in crevices or absorbed into paint even after treatment with an oxidizer. 

Weathering will reduce contamination over time. 

(4) Sensitive-Equipment Decontamination. Most shipboard surfaces can be 

safely treated with the standard hypochlorite and detergent solution. The solution shall 

not, however, be used on aircraft, ordnance material, or electronic instruments because of 

the risk of corrosion damage. 

(5) Use of Hypochlorite. Pure, undiluted calcium hypochlorite burns upon 

contact with many organic compounds (including petroleum products and some chemical 

agents). Calcium hypochlorite powder shall be added to the water before being used in ship 

decontamination. The powder shall not be scattered onto shipboard surfaces. See NTRP 

3-20.31.470 (NSTM 470) for mixing instructions and NTRP 3-20.31.670 (NSTM 670) for 

stowage instructions. 

d. Decontamination Priorities. Faced with the presence of contamination, the 

commander must decide to what degree decontamination is required. The best means of 

contamination prevention or control is achieved through the proper use of the CMWDS. 

However, aircraft that is exposed to the saltwater spray of the CMWDS will be deadlined 

until emergency reclamation maintenance is performed. Pockets of contaminants may

require an operational or thorough decontamination through the use of fire hoses or other 

means. Thorough decontamination is extremely labor-intensive. Clearance 

decontamination is not technically feasible with onboard assets. Effective preparations for

CBR decontamination operations must include the designation of those areas for which 

decontamination is absolutely essential to ensure the mission’s sustainability. The 

decontamination of other areas will be deferred, and the crew will “fight dirty” as required. 

When the mission permits, the ship should be repositioned to an uncontaminated location. 

The need for additional decontamination measures should then be evaluated (natural 

weathering may eliminate much of the hazard). All clear should be sounded as soon as 

possible to allow a reduction in the MOPP level. 

e. Decontamination Levels. Decontamination is the primary countermeasure 

process supporting sustained operations in CBRN environments. Risk management (RM) 

requires that the decisions regarding the level of decontamination be implemented and the 

optimum time for such implementation be allowed. 

f. Decontamination Materials. Decontamination materials consist of installed 

systems and shipboard expedients. The installed systems include CMWDS, a fire main 

system, decontamination stations, and ventilation control systems. Expedients consist of 

readily available shipboard items such as brushes, buckets, bags, swabs, soap, calcium 

hypochlorite, and rags (see NSTM 470). 

g. CBR Decontamination Actions after Attack. 

IX-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(1) Chemical. Ship and personnel decontamination procedures will commence 

as soon as possible. In practice, decontamination is any process that eliminates or

substantially reduces the hazards of contaminated surfaces or objects. It includes the 

physical removal of an agent by wash down, the chemical destruction or neutralization of 

an agent, or weathering. 

(a) Operational Recovery. The restoration of shipboard operations after a 

chemical attack will be very labor-intensive. Mission intensity is the primary factor in 

determining personnel availability. Specific priorities must be established based on 

operational need. As intensity subsides, the priority can shift to more general 

decontamination activities. 

(b) Survey. Once the CW attack has ended and the ship or force is 

believed to be clear of the agent cloud, survey or monitoring teams will conduct a survey of 

the entire ship. Vital areas such as ventilation intakes must be free of liquid contamination 

before commencing purge ship procedures. The contaminated areas must be identified and 

isolated. 

(c) Personnel Protection. Personnel protection will gradually be reduced 

as practical, consistent with shipboard CW hazards and the probability of a subsequent 

attack. The protective mask is not removed for showering, but is worn until verification 

that no vapor hazards exist aboard ship and all clear is announced ship-wide. Personnel 

protective measures during decontamination operations are straightforward. Personnel 

directly involved in the operations must be masked, wearing CBR IPE and foul-weather 

clothing with all closures fully sealed. Personnel downwind of the operation must remain 

masked and continue wearing chemical protective clothing. 

(d) Personnel Decontamination. Personnel CCAs used aboard the ship

are installed or expedient. Installed stations are spaces that by functional design, location, 

and installed equipment are designated for personnel decontamination. Expedient stations

are designated spaces in which the use of improvised procedures and equipment is

necessary to meet the practical demands of the situation. It may be necessary to operate

several decontamination stations simultaneously if risk to personnel is deemed greater 

than the current operational requirements. It is desirable to have personnel

decontamination facilities capable of processing at least half of the exposed topside 

personnel at any given time. Refer to NSTM 470 for a detailed description of the 

decontamination area setup and procedures. Refer to NAVAIR 00-80T-121 for the 

modifications to standard shipboard contaminated doffing procedures that apply to 

aircrews. 

(e) Surface and Equipment Decontamination. Using the CMWDS and 

fire hoses are the countermeasures available for general, overall decontamination of the 

ship’s exterior surfaces. Agent depositions remaining after wash down and fire hosing 

include absorbed and surface depositions. CW agents absorbed into the paint, deck 

coatings, etc., can usually be left to evaporation and the weathering effects of the 

environment. Decontamination may still be required after wash down with fire hoses, and 

splash or spray of contaminant-bearing water can be a hazard to the decontamination 

personnel or to anyone downwind of the hosing operation. 

(f) Interior Decontamination. In the event that interior decontamination 

is required, the standard decontaminant available on USN ships is calcium hypochlorite 

mixed with detergent in an aqueous solution. Steaming is an effective alternative means of 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-3 
decontaminating a ship’s interior; however, it is recommended that this procedure be 

conducted at a shipyard. Steaming, which displaces all air from the contaminated 

compartment, allows the compartment surfaces to be heated to a maximum temperature of 

approximately 212°F. Agent vapor may discharge from a steamed compartment 

unchanged, but mixed with the exhaust steam. This could result in a hazard to personnel. 

Interior decontamination must include ventilation blowers. Blower vanes and the 

surrounding housing can be expected to be heavily contaminated and must be 

decontaminated to avoid reevaporation or blow-off hazard to the compartments served. 

(g) Final Recovery. Personnel must take precautions to prevent skin 

contact with decontaminated surfaces, because of the possibility of CW agents desorbing 

from paint and other coverings. Personnel engaged in decontamination must continue to 

maintain the maximum levels of protection. Personnel in well-ventilated spaces do not 

require protection after gross decontamination and purging of the residual vapors has 

removed vapor hazards. Personnel should exercise caution when working in poorly 

ventilated spaces. 

(2) Biological. The decontamination of vital spaces should be accomplished as 

soon as possible. It is important to identify the personnel who may have been exposed to 

the threat. The available shipboard decontaminants should include calcium hypochlorite, 

topical disinfectants, soap and water, and laundry bleach. The objective following an attack 

is to ensure that the ship can continue its mission without an excessive risk to the 

personnel following an attack. Damage control personnel may need to assist with the 

following: 

(a) Ship Decontamination. Follow the standard decontamination 

procedures using an approved method such as steaming, using decontamination solution, 

swabbing, and spraying. The DCA must establish a priority list prior to beginning the ship 

decontamination and concentrate on vital stations and crew living spaces. Industrial 

facilities may be required for the final decontamination process, depending upon the type 

and concentration of the agent. After the decontamination is complete and the ship has 

exited the affected area, the greatest threat of infection will be from contact with exposed 

individuals. Once infected individuals have been identified (a process that could take

several days), they should be isolated from the rest of the crew. 

(b) Detection. The decontamination of BW agents is complicated by the 

fact that portable monitoring equipment is extremely limited. The decontamination may

consist of a general scrub-down, concentrating initially on vital or known areas of 

contamination. Areas of known contamination are identified by the observation of BW 

agent clouds or the detonation of munitions containing BW agents. 

(3) Radiological. Radiological hazards can last a long time and can range in 

severity from instantaneous casualties to a health hazard that is long-term but of no 

immediate operational significance. Radiological countermeasures cannot be applied in the

same sequence in all situations. Command consideration of the tactical situation and the 

degree of radiological involvement will influence decisions regarding the countermeasures 

to be used (when they are used and how long they will remain in effect). When a ship is

under attack, the commander must first defend the ship from the attack. If the attack is 

intense, all radiological countermeasures must wait until the requirements for the essential 

defense of the ship have subsided. 

IX-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(a) Operational Recovery. The operational recovery phase of a major 

radiological involvement starts when emergency actions are discontinued. Maintaining the 

level of operational capability required to satisfy the existing tactical situation must be the 

primary objective of this phase. It also needs to include reducing the radiation hazards and 

repairing the damage. This phase extends over the period of time of decreasing shipboard 

radiation when vital stations can be operated for limited periods of time without producing 

casualties. Ship maneuvering, personnel shelter, crew rotation and reduction, and early 

ship decontamination are applicable countermeasures. In this phase, the command may 

have to accept some casualties to maintain the required offensive or defensive capability of 

the ship. Setting the appropriate material condition to secure the ship is essential. When 

ordered, the closure of fittings will never be given priority over the movement of personnel 

to sheltered locations. Ventilation ducts, boilers, and air passages should also be checked 

for the accumulation of contaminants. The contamination of saltwater systems does not 

present an immediate hazard. 

(b) Personnel Decontamination. The adequate decontamination of 

personnel can be accomplished using decontamination stations, designated washrooms, or 

showers. Personnel decontamination stations should be located within the ship to afford 

personnel the best shielding from radiation. The detection of contaminated personnel with

a radiac meter is difficult when the intensity of penetrating radiation from other sources is 

high. 

(c) Ship Decontamination. The DCA shall develop a decontamination 

prioritization list for the vital watch stations. Hosing and manual scrubbing are the most

effective decontamination measures suitable for use at sea. Saltwater is the basic material 

for decontamination of a ship at sea. The institution of decontamination procedures will 

commence after fallout has ceased and when the tactical and radiological situations permit. 

A monitoring team shall make a rapid survey of selected topside locations and report the 

results to aid in the decision to order decontamination. 

(d) Final Recovery. The final recovery phase of a major radiological 

involvement starts after the intensity of radiation has dropped to a level that no longer 

presents a radiological threat. Minimizing the long-term hazard to the health of the crew is 

the objective of this phase. Shipboard decontamination and contamination control are 

applicable measures. The time of cessation can be determined from the plot of intensity 

versus the time readings plotted by the DCC. When the readings continue to decrease at a 

steady rate, the assumption can be made that fallout has ceased. When the topside 

radiation levels are below 5 rads/hour, the period of operationally significant radiological 

involvement is concluded. 

3. Recovery Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Decontamination 

Recovery operations are principally intended for the expeditionary strike group (ESG) 

commanders, amphibious squadron commanders, landing force commanders, embarked 

units, and staffs performing the recovery operations. When tailored, these principles can 

also be applied by any size Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF) (e.g., a single-ship 

MAGTF or an expeditionary strike force or amphibious task force) or by ships responding to 

a CBRN attack. See Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Recovery Operations in a 

Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Environment for detailed 

information on CBRN recovery operations. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-5 
Recovery operations encompass those operations in which military forces and civilian 

personnel (to include casualties), equipment, and supplies move from naval ships (e.g., 

ashore or on another vessel) onto amphibious shipping. These operations may include— 

• Preplanned amphibious withdrawal of forces subsequent to operations ashore. 

• Noncombatant or other evacuations. 

• Recovery of personnel and equipment. 

• Movement of forces and equipment from shore-to-sea as part of ongoing tactical,

humanitarian, or logistical operations. 

• Operations undertaken to investigate the nature of materials being transported 

on a vessel at sea using a ship’s boarding party or specialized landing force team. 

This section addresses the decontamination procedures required to support 

retrograding forces, to include their equipment, DOD essential civilians and contractors, 

and civilians under the protection of an expeditionary force. Paramount to the discussions 

of recovery operations in a CBRN environment is an understanding that these operations 

will place extreme demands on a ship’s freshwater system to support the effort. 

Accordingly, commanders at all levels shall institute procedures to conserve water and 

order that excess water be stored in advance of known or suspected CBRN operations. In 

completing the requirements for decontaminating personnel and equipment, commanders 

are not authorized to alter a ship’s basic design to reconfigure a space or create accesses; 

conversely, they may modify the use of a space (e.g., establish an isolation ward). 

a. Procedures. 

(1) Decontamination Procedures. 

(a) Decontamination procedures are generally personnel- and 

labor-intensive operations. They are largely dependent upon the use of chemical solutions 

to rid surfaces of contaminants and upon time to complete weathering or decay in order to 

achieve a state of cleanliness that enables the personnel to perform their assigned duties 

without the added burden of wearing IPE. The amount of space available to complete the 

procedures will generally be determined by the class of ship. Commanders of cruisers, 

destroyers, frigates, and smaller-sized ships should anticipate using their flight deck or 

fantail areas to support decontamination procedures. 

(b) A solution of calcium hypochlorite, detergent, or other soap is used in 

scrubbing and swabbing. Normally, a 9 percent solution in seawater is used, but a 3 or 5 

percent solution can be mixed if calcium hypochlorite is in short supply. Directions for 

mixing solutions of various strengths are provided in Table 470-7-2 of NSTM 470. If 

calcium hypochlorite is unavailable, laundry bleach can be used as a substitute. The 

pattern of swabbing is top to bottom, front to back. The minimum amount of 

decontamination solution that will adequately cleanse the area should be used. Brisk 

rubbing and scrubbing should be used to mix the agent thoroughly with the oxidizer so that 

chemical neutralization can proceed more quickly. After an area is scrubbed and swabbed 

with the calcium hypochlorite solution or a detergent solution, the area shall be rinsed with 

seawater or freshwater while continuing to scrub and swab as necessary to remove any 

residue. 

IX-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
CAUTION 

Attention must be given when mixing the solution. The 

tendency is to make a 10 percent solution. Above 9 

percent, the solution becomes caustic and it can 

degrade or destroy equipment and materials. Calcium 

hypochlorite is not recommended for use on aircraft. 

(c) If calcium hypochlorite is not available and detergent must be used 

alone, scrubbing and swabbing will only result in the physical removal of the agent, not 

detoxification. The detergent assists in bringing the agent into solution. The resulting

solution contains toxic agents and shall be washed overboard by fire hosing. In areas where 

fire hosing is not possible, rinse the area with buckets of clean freshwater or seawater and 

scrub and swab as necessary to remove the toxic solutions. 

(d) Harsh detergents and oxidizers cannot be used to decontaminate 

electronic systems and aircraft without risking damage to the equipment. Instead, only the

materials normally used in maintenance and corrosion control on such systems and aircraft 

shall be used. Care shall be exercised to avoid contact with the runoff or other residue as 

the toxic properties of the agent are not changed by physical removal methods. The residue 

or runoff is still toxic. 

(2) Decontamination Coordination. 

(a) Forces who are retrograding to a ship or directing the movement of 

contaminated personnel and equipment to a ship shall attempt to reduce the extent of 

contamination to the lowest possible amount (consistent with the threat and nature of the 

operation) before embarking the ship. They shall also make every effort to inform and 

update the receiving platform of the nature of any known or suspected contamination and 

the degree of decontamination procedures performed. 

(b) Commanding officers support and assist in the decontamination of 

ground forces by ensuring that suitable locations, equipment, and properly trained 

decontamination teams are on station. Furthermore, they are ultimately responsible for 

ensuring that recovered personnel have completed the required decontamination 

procedures before allowing them access to interior spaces. They have the authority to

decide what equipment shall be discarded; however, they will coordinate with the 

commander of troops and the commanders of carrier air wings (CAW), MAGTF, and 

MAGTF air combat elements (ACEs) to determine the final disposition of recovered landing 

force vehicles, aircraft, supplies, and equipment. 

(c) If the ship is basically clear of contaminants, only the flight deck or 

well deck are contaminated, and operations must continue, the commanders will work front 

to back in clearing the hazard and establish a pool of decontaminated craft to assume 

transport duties for the unaffected personnel and equipment. In some instances, it may be

advisable to transfer the unaffected or decontaminated craft to a clean ship to maintain the 

ability to move both unaffected and contaminated personnel and equipment. In order to 

minimize the need to repeat decontamination procedures, as long as a need exists to move 

contaminated personnel, then contaminated or previously contaminated craft will be used 

to move these individuals and their equipment. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-7 
(3) CCA. The establishment of CCAs is critical to the effectiveness of any 

decontamination effort. The CCA serves as the focal and initial entry point for any effort to 

bring personnel into the interior of the ship. In well decks, the CCA should be set up as far 

back as possible, to include on the stern gate if sea states permit and the effort is to support 

personnel returning in combat rubber raiding craft (CRRCs) or like craft. Similarly, CCAs

that are established in hangar bays should be positioned as near an elevator as possible. 

Containment pits should be set out to capture contaminated water, which will help reduce 

decontamination efforts that will be required for the deck. The collected water is drained 

through fire hoses rigged to discharge overboard. 

NOTE: Since the hoses will become contaminated and require disposal, ships 

should maintain a pool of old fire hoses that can be expended under such 

circumstances. 

(4) Decontamination Showers. Aside from the obvious advantage showers 

afford for removing contaminants from personnel, showers provide two added benefits. 

They give cooling to individuals suffering from the effects of heat stress and they offer a 

psychological boost from the feeling of removing the contamination. After showering, 

personnel should be advised to keep previously exposed portions of their body uncovered as 

long as possible since clothing will block or reduce the weathering effect. Additionally, 

wearing clothing on previously exposed skin can drive any residue further into the skin. 

Ships have the following five basic options for providing showers for personnel: 

(a) Established Decontamination Showers. Showers offer the best facility

to complete personal decontamination. The ship’s decontamination teams can monitor 

personnel through view ports, and contaminated personnel can be guided in completing the 

required procedures. However, their location within the ship is not always conducive to 

providing returning forces an area close to their entry point onto the ship or the CCA, 

which can lead to increased chances for spreading contaminants or offer challenges for 

providing safety. 

(b) Locally Manufactured Showers. Locally manufactured showers offer 

the flexibility to meet the design variations within classes of ships, assist in overcoming 

shortfalls in decontamination station locations and quantities, and complement locally 

developed plans to process individuals with varying needs. They are dependent upon an

undefined quantity of stock material that may or may not be available on the ship to 

complete such a structure (e.g., spare shower heads, various sized piping and fittings, 

flexible hose, and fabric to cover the structure to create some semblance of privacy and 

control the contaminated water residue/spray). Accordingly, locally manufactured showers 

should be planned in advance. Efforts should be made prior to deploying or entering a 

CBRN-contaminated area to procure the needed supplies so that multiple units are 

manufactured and contingency operations are properly supported. 

(c) Portable Shower Tents. Portable shower tents offer flexibility for 

decontaminating a large force or group of civilians. Easy to erect, these portable and selfcontained units include all the piping and wastewater containment capability required to 

complement a CCA. Ships would need to rig a source of freshwater or saltwater and a 

drainage hose over the side. Consider if the water should be heated and how to heat it if no 

access to hot, freshwater exists. 

(d) Field Showers from Embarked Units. Field showers, designed and 

utilized by forces ashore, offer yet another option to meet the challenge of decontaminating 

IX-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
a large number of personnel. This equipment would most likely be sent to the field in 

support of the landing force or naval support elements and would be an essential part of the 

effort to complete their decontamination prior to retrograding to the ship. The ship’s use of

such equipment would require that an MOU be established in advance of such operations. 

(e) Fire Hoses. Rigging fire hoses to create a makeshift shower could 

serve as a minimal resource for providing a shower to retrograding personnel. Like the 

field and portable showers, some consideration would have to be made for heating the 

water. Likewise, personnel manning such stations could be jeopardized by experiencing 

hypothermia or increased incidences of dehydration and heat stress from wearing 

wet-weather gear to protect their CBRN suits. 

(5) Wash and Gear-Removal Stations. Ships may rig any number of CCAs to 

enable personnel to ready themselves for being certified safe for entering the interior of the 

ship. Stations will range from areas where individuals can initially attempt to 

decontaminate their personal gear and small arms, or to areas that serve as a collection 

point for these items, to ultimately providing sites where they can doff their IPE before 

proceeding to the shower. If a ship establishes a CCA in the well deck or the hangar bay 

and does not have a portable decontamination shower or a locally manufactured shower in 

close proximity, a process shall be adopted for moving personnel from the CCA to the 

shower wherein the personnel are afforded some measure of privacy (e.g., ships can rig 

screening curtains along the route or provide individuals with disposable garments). The 

principal decontamination solution for personal gear and equipment will be calcium 

hypochlorite. Calcium hypochlorite solutions and the synonymous HTH solution are 

prepared in accordance with NSTM 470 by personnel wearing facial shielding, aprons, 

rubber gloves, and CBR protective gear. Additional guidance for the construction of shuffle 

pits (boot wash), mask lens wash, scissors wash, etc. is provided within Recovery Operations 

in a Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Environment. 

CAUTION 

Do not use saltwater for the mask lens wash 

because it may scratch the mask lens. 

(6) Shipboard Decontamination of Personnel. The decontamination of 

retrograding personnel shall follow the established procedures for decontaminating 

shipboard personnel. Personnel shall be routed to a CCA where the initial decontamination 

procedures are conducted. Upon completion of the tasks directed at the CCA, personnel 

shall be routed to a decontamination shower facility. Contaminated personnel should be 

given step-by-step procedures, read aloud to them where possible, by members of the ship’s 

decontamination station teams. For situations in which escort ships within an ESG or 

carrier strike group (CSG) are tasked to receive contaminated personnel, ships shall follow 

the established procedures (see NTSM 470) consistent with decontaminating scrubber or 

survey teams. However, in order to support the embarkation, it is necessary to establish a 

CCA in the vicinity of the fantail, for personnel retrograding by small craft; or in the 

vicinity of the flight deck, if the movement is by helicopter. Personnel will not retrograde to

a submarine. 

(7) Casualty Treatment/Patient Decontamination. As with shore forces, 

casualty decontamination should be performed separately from noncasualty 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-9 
decontamination. A medical staging area or mass casualty area should be placed near the 

decontamination area, but far enough away so that personnel will not be affected by any 

contaminant. Refer to NTTP 3-20.31, NSTM 470 and FM 4-02.7. 

(8) Decontamination of Other Forces/Special Decontamination Personnel. 

Some modifications to the shipboard personnel decontamination process may be necessary 

to accommodate the differences between shipboard protective clothing and equipment and 

the corresponding items used by other organizations. Shipboard decontamination station

personnel need to be aware of the differences. Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Protection describes Army protective 

clothing and equipment that may also be worn by USMC and USN beachmasters and 

construction personnel. The following items differ from the shipboard counterparts as 

indicated: 

• The BDO is a two-piece ensemble with slide fastener closures used by 

ground forces. It cannot be decontaminated. The newer JSLIST suit is similar. 

• The USA M-40 series masks are worn by ground forces with a hood that 

extends downward over the shoulders. The hood is not part of the overgarment. 

• Green or black vinyl overshoes are used with the BDO. They are worn over

combat boots for chemical protection and can be decontaminated and recovered. 

• The USA has a suit, contamination avoidance, liquid protection (SCALP) 

that may be worn over the BDO for up to 1 hour for protection from gross liquid 

decontamination. The SCALP is a lightweight, disposable suit consisting of a jacket, 

trousers, and footwear covers. 

• USA aircrew members may wear the aircrew uniform integrated for the 

battlefield, a two-piece uniform with hook-and-pile closures. In addition to providing CBRN

protection, it also provides flame protection; it replaces the standard flight suit and the 

BDO. 

• The chemical protective gloves used by these personnel are similar to the 

shipboard item. 

The features that differentiate the protective equipment and ALSS used by USN and 

USMC aircrews are specifically detailed in NAVAIR 00-80T-121 and include the following: 

• The A/P22-14 (V) 1-4 aircrew respirators are designed to be compatible with 

the standard aircrew helmet. 

• Blown, filtered air is provided to the mask by a battery-powered pusher fan 

that is affixed to a C2/C2A1 canister. The pusher fan/canister assembly resides in a pocket 

attached to the crewman’s survival vest or CBR overvest. CBR respirators used by 

fixed-wing aviators have a second filter canister that connects to the aircraft oxygen 

systems. 

• The aircrew CPU consists of an undershirt and trousers. The fabric is 

composed of a nonwoven material with encapsulated carbon in a stretchable matrix. It is 

worn under the flight suit. The set can be washed once and reused if it is not contaminated. 

This undergarment cannot be decontaminated. 

• A disposable plastic cape can be worn over the flight suit for protection 

from liquid agents. 

IX-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• Chemical protective socks are worn under standard aircrew flight boots; 

disposable plastic overboots may be worn over the flight boots. 

• The chemical protective gloves worn by aircrew personnel are of three 

varieties, two of which are similar to the shipboard item. The third is made of a gore-type 

material. NomexTM flyers gloves are worn over the chemical protective gloves. 

WARNING 

Operational decontamination procedures for 

contaminated ground force personnel are not 

adequate to allow them entry into the ship. 

Personnel must complete the thorough 

decontamination procedures before being 

permitted to enter the interior spaces. 

b. Flight Deck Operations. Aviation operations in a contaminated environment 

create challenges for a ship’s aviation department. The aviation department head and

commanding officer of an embarking aviation unit shall establish MOUs during

predeployment to set policies for such contingencies. They must also arrange for frequent 

training to attain mission-essential task list standards will be necessary. Plans must be 

developed for conducting extended flight operations, thus necessitating a possible 

requirement for additional personnel trained to support flight deck operations. General 

statements such as “personnel are not transported after dark” will be negated by 

operational and tactical requirements, and such approval can be granted by the MAGTF 

commander. One option to meeting these challenges may be to reduce the number of 

aircraft operated, with a corresponding reduction in the number of flight deck spots used. 

Still, supervisors will need to anticipate a requirement for additional flight deck colored 

shirts, additional vests, an increase in the amount of IPE, and foul-weather gear. Some 

items may be capable of being laundered, but personnel may be required to don 

contaminated equipment over their IPE in the interest of following recognized safety 

procedures and to limit the contamination of clean equipment. Recovery operations will

require considerable space to support the collection, separation, weathering, and off-gassing 

of equipment, weapons, flight deck jerseys, float coats, ordnance, etc. Likewise, depending

upon environmental conditions, added restrictions may be enacted that limit work periods 

to correspond with the heat stress work restrictions. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-11 
WARNING 

Commands shall not attempt to minimize contamination to aircraft by 

stationing personnel with energized fire hoses on the flight deck and 

directing the aircraft to hover or pass through a “wall of water,” even if it is 

only freshwater that is streamed toward the aircraft. The combination of 

rotor wash and the potential for aircraft ingesting water into the air intakes 

or damage by too strong a stream of water striking the aircraft present too 

great a risk for personal injury or damage to the aircraft. 

Because flight operations are normally conducted when winds are off the bow, commanding 

officers should endeavor to maintain a wind off the starboard bow to reduce the area 

potentially contaminated by a CBRN hazard. Ships should anticipate using their

high-reach equipment and cranes as part of the plan to detect and clean contaminated 

areas. The use of the mechanical deck scrubber is not recommended because of its ability to 

be decontaminated is highly suspect. 

(1) Moving Aircrews. Because decontaminating the interior of aircraft is 

difficult, care must be exercised when moving pilots and aircrew from the interior of the 

ship to their aircraft to avoid contaminating the exterior of their individual protective suits 

or boots. This can be accomplished through the use of temporary boot covers and the 

assistance of the flight deck support personnel. Personnel must remain mindful that 

contaminants can be kicked up by jet exhaust and helicopter rotor wash. Flight crews

disembarking from their aircraft will be processed in a manner that is consistent with the 

procedures used for troops moving from the aircraft. 

(2) Moving Troops. 

(a) Members of the combat cargo division or flight deck crew will guide 

retrograding forces from helicopters to the appropriate CCA. If possible, personnel will 

remain in the helicopter until the rotor blades have ceased turning. Once the blades have 

stopped turning, personnel will be led in a single file to the designated CCA. If rotor blades 

must remain engaged, personnel will be directed to move as expeditiously as possible to 

clear the helicopter while being led to the appropriate CCA (maintaining a single file). The 

use of lights or other markers should be used to identify the path personnel should attempt 

to remain within. 

(b) For personnel departing the ship on a clean helicopter in a 

contaminated environment, there is a similar concern as for the aircrew. The outside of the 

helicopter may be contaminated upon landing on the ship. These personnel would 

generally have to be encapsulated in their IPE before they could move from the ship’s 

interior to embark their assigned helicopter. Ideally, it would be helpful if these troops 

could cross the contaminated flight deck and board their externally contaminated helicopter 

without contaminating their boots or suits. This would in turn require the use of temporary 

coverings for their boots as they crossed the contaminated deck. The use of large numbers 

of temporary boot coverings raises concerns about foreign object damage (FOD) to the 

engines. For this reason, loading might also need to be done prior to the engine startup, 

giving time to recover stray boot covers. Alternatively, troops could walk across the deck 

contaminating their boots and then don temporary boot covers as they enter the transport 

IX-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
helicopters. This would leave the boots of the vertical assault troops contaminated, which 

is less than ideal, but would use the temporary covers to protect the floor of the helicopter. 

(c) It would be best to protect the troops and the transport helicopter 

from becoming contaminated. This may require that a pathway be decontaminated on the 

deck from catwalks to helicopter spotting areas if the temporary boot covers are not used. 

Still another option to consider is the use of a plastic covering to line the floor of the 

helicopter. Again, completing such an action will require regard for FOD and a review of 

all requirements. 

(3) Loading and Unloading Aviation Ordnance on Aircraft. Aviation ordnance 

and ammunition is treated similar to personnel with cargo with regard for minimizing the 

spread of contaminants. Returned munitions should not be stored in ship’s magazines until 

certified as decontaminated. 

(4) Aircraft Decontamination. 

(a) If air and ground crews are careful when operating in a contaminated

environment, cross contamination from the exterior to the interior can be minimized. 

In-flight airflow over the aircraft’s smooth skin at typical flight speeds facilitates a higher 

rate of evaporation. Still, some agents will migrate into crevices, rivet heads, and joints 

and continue to be a hazard. A common area of contamination will also be on the aircraft’s 

tires. Thickened agents evaporate slowly and may remain a hazard even after prolonged 

flights. 

(b) If the interior is determined to be contaminated, flying the aircraft 

with the doors open can help reduce the hazard. Procedures for decontamination of naval 

aircraft, aircrews and aviation support personnel are provided in NAVAIR 00-80T-121. 

Information on emergency reclamation requirements can be found in Aircraft Weapons 

Systems Cleaning and Corrosion Control and Organizational/Unit Intermediate 

Maintenance for Avionics Cleaning and Corrosion Prevention/Control. 

CAUTION 

Ships are cautioned that improperly sealed flight 

deck lighting can contribute to contaminants 

seeping into the interior spaces of the ship. 

(c) If time is available and flight operations are secured, aircraft should 

be moved forward to a wash-down spot consisting of a containment pit and a 

decontamination team. 

NOTE: Ships should try to maintain at least one landing spot of separation 

between the recovery landing spots and the wash-down sites. 

CAUTION 

Do not use steam to decontaminate an aircraft. 

Damage to the composite materials used in the 

construction of aircraft may result. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-13 
 (d) An aircraft wash down (i.e., operational decontamination) should be 

conducted within 6 hours of becoming contaminated, but it is most effective when conducted 

within 1 hour. Some amount of chemical contamination may remain after the aircraft wash 

down. The aircrew shall continue to wear their protective masks and rubber gloves for 

protection until a thorough decontamination is conducted or until the aircraft has 

weathered and the contamination is below detectable levels. 

CAUTION 

Most of the field-expedient decontaminants 

are corrosive and could cause damage to 

aircraft materials. 

(e) While it is possible to perform a thorough decontamination of 

individual aircraft, this can be a tedious and time-consuming activity that will require a 

considerable amount of manpower to accomplish. 

c. Well Deck Operations. The requirements for well deck and small boat operations 

in a CBRN environment are similar in nature to those of flight deck crews. The ship’s first

lieutenant and DCA, working in conjunction with the ships combat cargo officer, coordinate 

policies for manning requirements and decontamination procedures with the embarked 

element commanders. Once such operations are directed to occur, the DCA and the ship’s 

first lieutenant brief the assigned personnel on the plan of action for the survey and 

decontamination procedures, recovery of equipment and personnel, and any offload 

requirements. All well deck personnel will require IPE consistent with the threat and their 

duties. Once cleared to disembark their craft, personnel will be led to a CCA to initiate 

decontamination procedures. Craftmasters shall be advised to maintain loads that were 

wet during transit to the ship if contamination is known or suspected to exist. It is the 

responsibility of the craftmasters, coxswains and drivers to keep the CBRN defense cell and

well deck control officer advised of the craft’s contamination condition. Depending on a

variety of factors (e.g., tactical situation, sea state, and craft capabilities) craftmasters, 

coxswains, and drivers will attempt to decontaminate any known hot spots prior to 

recovery. They shall also attempt to complete a survey to verify that the decontamination 

is complete. If the craft is unable to be given a wash down, personnel may be brought into 

the ship and soaked using the ship’s firefighting sprinklers with the aqueous film-forming 

foam (AFFF) secured. Similarly, the craft can be positioned in close proximity to the ship’s 

quarter and sprayed by personnel with saltwater fire hoses. Once this is completed, a

report to the ship shall be made citing that the craft is ready to enter the well. If the 

environmental conditions permit, and if the procedures exist and can be authorized, a stern 

gate or sill marriage is preferred. If the sea state conditions do not permit or if a final 

recovery of the craft is expected, the craft should be brought in using the steepest possible 

wedge and then be grounded out. All crafts and loads will be rinsed from top to bottom, 

front to back. Following the decontamination operations and when the landing craft can be

directed to exit the well, the ship will flood the well deck to further eliminate any hazards. 

For the amphibious transport dock (LPD-4) class of ships, energizing the water curtain can 

be used to isolate the vehicle storage area from the landing craft air cushion (LCAC) to 

spray and rinse the loads. The recovery and decontamination procedures described in the 

following paragraphs will be completed for the craft (as applicable). 

IX-14 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006
 (1) LCAC. 

(a) The craftmasters shall maneuver their craft to maximize the exposure 

to sea spray. Propeller reversal, with the craft proceeding downwind and across the wind, 

is recommended as a minimum. If the craftmaster’s survey confirms that the craft is clean, 

direct the craft to proceed into the well. Conversely, if the craft is still contaminated and 

the tactical situation and sea state permit, direct the LCAC to go off-cushion astern or 

alongside the ship. Have the ship’s well deck crew hose down the craft with saltwater from 

the stern or catwalks; avoid hitting the LCAC propellers with a solid stream of water. 

WARNING 

Spraying water into the moving propellers could produce 

catastrophic blade failures presenting hazards to 

personnel. Spraying solid streams of water at stopped 

propeller blades could result in damage to the propellers 

and should be avoided. 

(b) If the LCAC is still contaminated and the operational situation 

permits, bring the LCAC in using the emergency recovery rig and spot it as far behind as 

possible to reduce the likelihood of spreading the contamination within the well deck. With 

the crew and troops remaining within the craft, well deck teams will survey the LCAC and 

decontaminate the hot spots. If the LCAC went over land to recover or deliver its load, 

contaminants will have been absorbed into permeable material, presenting a long-lasting 

contact and vapor hazard. At-risk material includes nonskid coverings and the rubber 

skirt; a thorough decontamination will likely result in their removal and replacement. It is 

possible that the emergency recovery line might become contaminated through contact with 

the craft. Following the last evolution, discard the line over the side, ensuring that it does 

not create a hazard to navigation. If a replacement line is not available, cut off the affected 

portions and reconstruct the line’s features as necessary. 

(c) When bringing a contaminated LCAC into the well deck, every effort 

should be taken to clear the well deck and wing walls of all porous materials (e.g., lines, fire 

hoses). Porous materials exposed to the contamination should be jettisoned. Personnel who 

are exposed to LCAC-generated wind and spray shall don their JSLIST and wet-weather 

gear. All well deck and vehicle storage supply ventilation shall be turned on high speed, all 

exhaust ventilation shall be secured, and all vent exhaust intake covers shall be covered to 

ensure that air is forced toward the rear part of the ship and exits through the stern gate 

opening. When sea state and weather permit, it may be necessary to deviate from the 

ship’s normal recovery ballast condition in order to minimize the spraying action of the 

contamination throughout the well deck and wing walls. In such cases, it will then be 

necessary to complete an emergency recovery of the LCAC using the towing rig with the 

propellers secured. Ballast the ship to the steepest wedge possible, with the water level at 

the sill to a minimum of 5 feet. Recover and shut down the LCAC engines. Activate the 

well deck sprinkler system with the AFFF in the recirculating mode, and operate the 

system for 2 minutes to wash down any contaminated spray from the craft. Fire hose main 

pressure should be at the maximum, and all nozzles should be operational to ensure the 

complete designed coverage. The survey and decontamination teams will then conduct 

established checks and cleaning procedures that are consistent with the ship’s CBRN 

defense bill. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-15 
(2) Landing Craft, Utility (LCU). The LCU initiates active decontamination 

during transit to the ship, including activation of its CMWDS. Upon nearing the ship, the 

LCU should be directed to take and maintain its station alongside the ship at the slowest 

and safest possible speed. Once alongside, the ship’s force uses additional fire hoses from 

the catwalks to concentrate on those areas not fully covered by the LCU system. The LCU 

crew is then directed to survey their exterior and report results to the ship; any hot spots 

will be further decontaminated. If agents have been left on the craft for over an hour, the 

epoxy-based paint may have absorbed them and a thorough decontamination may be 

required. The ship’s force and LCU crews should pay particular attention to the crew cabin 

ventilation, air conditioning systems, and the large filter units for the engine air intake 

system. The crew cabin ventilation system can create a serious vapor hazard by blowing 

the agent vapor into an otherwise sealed compartment. When retrieving an LCU, a stern 

gate or sill marriage is preferred to minimize the contamination of the ship. Alternatively,

bring the LCU in and ground it out without fully deballasting. With the ramp down, the

ship’s survey team checks the craft for any residual agents and, working with the craft 

crew, completes the decontamination. Direct disembarking personnel to proceed to the 

CCA to commence personal decontamination and to receive medical attention (if required). 

Complete the decontamination of the craft while the well is deballasted, flushing out the 

well deck in the process. 

NOTE: There is a possibility that the steadying lines will be contaminated. 

Following the last evolution, discard the lines over the side, ensuring that they do 

not become a hazard to navigation. If replacement lines are not available, cut off 

the section which came in contact with the craft and resplice the line’s eye. 

(3) Amphibious assault vehicles (AAVs) essentially complete an external 

decontamination as a function of their transit to the ship. To further decontaminate the 

craft, position the personnel in the vicinity of the stern and direct them to hose down the 

AAV with saltwater prior to signaling it to enter the well. Once in the well, keep the

hatches closed, with the crew and troops still inside, stop the AAV in the center of the well, 

and hose it down again with saltwater from fire hoses on both wing walls. Turn the AAV 

180 degrees, and hose it again before backing it into a parked position. Keep the planking

wet before and during recovery to avoid or reduce the likelihood of the agent saturating the 

wood. The AAV platoon commander will initiate the internal decontamination procedures. 

After a survey and the additional decontamination, permit the crew and troops to exit the 

vehicle, directing them to the CCA to complete their decontamination and medical 

assistance before allowing them into the interior of the ship. Setting “Circle William“ 

hinders the ship’s ability to ventilate the heavy AAV fumes from some well decks and could 

contribute to a buildup of fumes in the well deck and contribute to reduced visibility. 

(4) Landing Craft, Mechanized (LCM). The procedures are the same as for an 

LCU, except the craft has no CMWDS and does not use a stern gate or sill marriage. 

(5) CRRC. Contaminated CRRCs should be recovered one at a time. When 

environmental conditions permit, the CRRCs and their crews should remain in the rear 

section of the well deck during their survey and decontamination. The decontamination 

team uses portable showers for the crews. Once an initial rinsing has been completed, the 

personnel are directed to proceed to the CCA for decontamination and medical attention (if 

required). 

IX-16 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(6) Other Small Craft. For davit-hoisted small craft (e.g., motor whaleboats, 

rigid hull inflatable boats), call the craft alongside for the initial decontamination by the 

shipboard fire hose teams; take care not to injure the personnel or swamp the boat. Once 

the craft is at the rail, the personnel disembark, are surveyed, and are directed to the CCA 

for decontamination and first aid (if required). The craft receives a thorough survey and 

decontamination prior to being hoisted aboard and secured. If a determination cannot be 

made that the craft is decontaminated, and if weather permits, it may be left at the rail 

until further decontamination can be accomplished. The eyes on all of the steadying lines 

and the sea painter will be dipped into an HTH solution and then cut off and disposed of 

over the side; new eyes on the lines will be made. 

d. Vehicle and Equipment Decontamination Procedures. 

(1) Ships generally lack sufficient equipment to conduct a thorough 

decontamination of vehicles; specifically, they do not carry wash racks to facilitate easy 

access to the undercarriage of the vehicles. Any effort to embark the contaminated vehicles 

and cargo into previously uncontaminated amphibious shipping requires a thorough review 

of all the options available to complete the assigned mission (to include a review of the 

follow-on mission responsibilities). If the ESG has the option to consolidate the clean cargo 

and vehicles before loading the contaminated items, such a course of action shall be 

pursued. If wash ramps are not available, ships with a “false beach” offer the best option 

for receiving the contaminated vehicles (e.g., LPDs, amphibious assault ships [general 

purpose and multipurpose, and cargo variant landing ship docks [LSDs]). 

(2) In order to accomplish the cleaning, ships should ballast, create a steep 

wedge, and avoid submerging the false beach. When sea state and wave action in the well 

deck permit, create a 3- to 5-foot basin of water in the well deck, attach fording gear to the 

vehicles, and slowly drive them for 5 to 10 minutes in the saltwater. Spray with fire hoses, 

and use scrubbing teams (as necessary) to decontaminate the unsubmerged areas. Once 

the vehicle is determined to be free of contaminants, it will be directed to move further up 

on the false beach and receive a freshwater wash down to minimize corrosion potential. 

Finally, maintenance personnel should perform the post-saltwater emersion maintenance 

tasks. 

(3) Steam cleaning may be considered as an option for decontaminating 

vehicles and cargo, but such evolutions are likely to be extremely dangerous and difficult to 

accomplish. Steam lancing can produce injuries similar to surgical incisions and the risks 

may far outweigh the potential gains that might be made over attempting to complete the 

decontamination procedure by creating a pool of water as described above. 

e. Force Reconstitution. 

(1) Reconstitution is generally beyond the capabilities of an ESG. However, 

reconstituting and expeditiously returning the force to a full mission readiness standard is 

the ultimate goal of any decontamination effort. In some instances this will not be possible 

until a considerable period of time has elapsed (e.g., following a nuclear warfare attack). 

Should the force be unable to restore itself to a full operational-readiness standard, 

assistance from outside commands or agencies will be sought, to include replacing 

contaminated personnel and equipment with assets obtained from the rear area commands. 

Similarly, in situations where the forces are being maneuvered (i.e., transported) from one 

landing force objective to another, forces may only be capable of accomplishing a limited 

operational decontamination. If the forces are unable to complete a thorough 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 IX-17 
decontamination, the commanders will make every effort to ensure that personnel are 

afforded the maximum level of support in assuring their comfort. For example, landing

forces may be required to remain in the well deck or sequestered on the flight deck, but 

every effort will be made to afford them with adequate shelter and meals. Commanders 

may likewise find it more practical to take advantage of consolidating the forces along the 

lines of their levels of contamination and have one or more of the ships serve as 

contaminated ships and the remainder as clean ships, thus modifying the landing plan to 

align with the modified force disposition. 

(2) The commanders may reduce the protective postures and allow the

unprotected military personnel, DOD essential civilians, and contractors to operate in the 

proximity of the formerly contaminated material or equipment. This reduction can be made 

after using the currently fielded and available technologies to validate that the 

decontamination procedures or weathering have reduced the hazards from material and 

equipment to nondetectable levels. The commanders will ensure that the equipment and 

personnel are periodically monitored to determine if signs of a return of the contamination 

are detected. Should a hazard be identified, commanders will direct that appropriate action 

be taken to safeguard affected personnel. 

WARNING 

Risks to personnel safety increase as residually 

contaminated equipment is consolidated and 

personnel work around this equipment for 

prolonged periods, particularly in areas with 

limited air circulation. 

(3) Before initiating the action to recover potentially contaminated equipment 

to the CONUS for repair, the commanders should coordinate with the JRA coordinator to 

determine if an emergency condition exists and warrants the risks associated with such an 

action. Generally, the equipment will not be returned to CONUS until it has been

determined to be clear of contamination, even if such an action results in the requirement 

for an extended period of time for weathering. If the equipment cannot be decontaminated,

destruction may be required. 

CAUTION 

Civil aircraft will not normally be used to transport the 

contaminated equipment due to the safety and legal 

concerns. 

IX-18 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Chapter X 

PATIENT EVACUATION AND DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

a. The evacuation of patients under CBRN conditions forces the unit commander to 

consider how he will commit evacuation assets to enter the contaminated area. Generally,

if a supported force is operating in a contaminated area, most or all of the medical 

evacuation assets will operate there also. Efforts should be made to keep some ambulances 

and aircraft free of contamination. See FM 4-02-7 and FM 8-10.6 for additional 

information. 

b. On the modern battlefield, land forces have three basic modes of evacuating 

patients (personnel, ground vehicles, and aircraft). Watercrafts may also be used to 

conduct patient evacuation for waterborne forces (see MCRP 4-11.1E). 

c. Cumbersome MOPP gear, climate, increased workloads, and fatigue will greatly 

reduce the effectiveness of the unit personnel. Using the personnel to physically carry 

patients incurs a great deal of inherent stress. 

d. The evacuation of patients must continue even under CBRN conditions. The 

medical leader must recognize the constraints that CBRN contamination places on him and 

then plan and train to overcome them. These constraints include the need for the allocation 

of dirty evacuation vehicles, patient transfer processes from dirty to clean vehicles, the 

allocation of personnel and supply resources for PDS operations, and the restricted working 

conditions of medical personnel wearing MOPP in ambulances with patients who have not 

been thoroughly decontaminated. 

e. When evacuating patients in a CBRN contaminated environment, evacuation 

considerations should include the following: 

(1) Evacuation assets could become contaminated in the course of battle. 

Optimize the use of contaminated medical and nonmedical resources before employing 

uncontaminated resources. 

(2) Once a vehicle enters a contaminated area, it is highly unlikely that it can 

be spared long enough to undergo decontamination. This will depend upon the 

contaminant, the tempo of the battle, and the resources available for patient evacuation. 

Normally, the contaminated vehicles (air, water, and ground) will be confined to 

contaminated environments. However, immediate decontamination may be accomplished 

to reduce the amount of contamination in the patient transport area. 

(3) Ground ambulances or other assets that are easy to decontaminate and 

readily replace should be used versus using air ambulances. However, this does not 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 X-1 
preclude the use of aircraft in a contaminated environment or the evacuation of 

contaminated patients. 

(4) If evacuation personnel are sent into radiologically contaminated areas, 

adhere to the operational exposure guide (OEG). Radiation exposure records must be 

maintained by the supported unit and made available to the commander, staff, and medical 

leader. Based on the OEG, the commander (with the assistance of his medical staff), will 

decide which evacuation elements are sent into the contaminated environment. 

(5) The relative positions of the contaminated area, FLOT, threat air defense 

systems, and the patient’s medical condition will determine if and where air ambulances 

may be used in the evacuation process with minimal air crew exposure. One or more air 

ambulances may be restricted to the contaminated areas. When possible, use ground

vehicles to cross the line separating the contaminated and clean areas. 

(6) Patients should receive immediate and patient decontamination at the 

operational level and first aid and buddy care prior to being placed on evacuation vehicles. 

To reduce the spread of contamination on ground ambulance wheels for vehicles that have 

been in the contaminated area, a contamination control line can be established at the edge 

of the contaminated area where patients can be transferred from the dirty ambulances to 

clean ambulances that do not contain contamination on their wheels. The clean medical 

evacuation vehicles would then proceed to a PDS at an MTF. The patients have not been

given patient decontamination at the thorough level at this point. The inside of these clean 

vehicles may become contaminated if patients are not provided with immediate 

decontamination of their MOPP uniforms to remove most of the contamination. This 

necessitates that all ambulance crew members wear MOPP while in the field vehicles to 

protect them from possible cross contamination or vapor hazards from agent on patient 

MOPP. Another alternative is to determine the specific routes that will be used by dirty 

medical evacuation vehicles to get to the PDS at an MTF. The routes used by the dirty

ground vehicles to cross between contaminated and clean areas are considered dirty routes 

and are not crossed by clean vehicles. See FM 4-02.7 for the setup of a PDS at an MTF. 

(7) When employing ground ambulances, watercraft, or aircraft in a medical 

evacuation, place plastic sheeting under the litters to prevent transferring contaminants 

from the patients or litters to the inside of the vehicle. The plastic sheeting can be removed 

with the patients, thus removing most of the contamination with it. When plastic sheeting

is not available, placing a blanket under the litter will reduce the amount of agent that 

makes contact with the inside of the vehicle. 

(8) The rotor wash of the helicopter or turbulence (e.g., prop blast) from wing 

aircraft must always be kept in mind when evacuating patients, especially in a 

contaminated environment. The intense winds may disturb contaminants, increasing 

vapor hazards at the contaminated landing site. The effects of downwash may be reduced 

by allowing the helicopter to land and reduce to flat pitch before patients are brought near 

it. Additionally, a helicopter must not land too close to a PDS that is open to the air as it 

can disturb dust and contaminants that may be in the area. If the PDS operation is in an 

uncontaminated area and contains contaminated runoff (such as in a bladder to hold 

contaminated waste), downwash should not be an issue at the PDS. 

X-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(9) Casualty protection during an evacuation is critical. Casualties who have 

been thoroughly decontaminated at a forward MTF and have had their MOPP ensemble 

removed must be placed in a patient protective wrap (PPW) or have their MOPP ensemble 

replaced if they are to be transported on a dirty aircraft, watercraft, or ground vehicle or 

when they are moved across a contaminated area. 

(10) Medical evacuation by a fixed-wing aircraft will be severely limited as these 

assets are few compared with rotor wing and ground ambulance, and they require 

significant time to decontaminate. Some nations may not allow casualties from 

contaminated areas to travel through or over their territory. Every effort should be made 

to thoroughly decontaminate the casualty by removing the contaminated clothing and 

thoroughly washing the patient at an MTF PDS prior to the casualty reaching the staging 

area. The patient must undergo a thorough decontamination before entering a fixed-wing 

aircraft that is designated as clean. 

f. Operational decontamination of medical evacuation assets should be 

accomplished to minimize crew exposure if the mission permits. The unit SOP should 

include equipment decontamination procedures. 

2. Patient Decontamination 

a. Contaminated patients potentially create increased hazards to casualty 

extraction teams, HSS personnel, MTFs, and materiel. Detailed information on patient

decontamination is found in FM 4-02.7. This section provides an overview of patient 

decontamination for the individual services. 

b. Personnel who have undergone a CBRN attack may suffer from the effects of a 

CBRN agent, TIM exposure, a conventional wound, psychological stress reactions, or a 

combination of these. In addition, some personnel may suffer from heat injuries induced by 

extended time spent in MOPP4. 

c. Patient decontamination supports the decontamination process at the 

immediate, operational, and thorough levels. 

d. The process of patient decontamination begins at the incident site. The 

contaminated service member performs immediate personal decontamination. If the 

service member is unable to decontaminate himself due to injury or incapacitation, a buddy 

performs this function. The contaminated areas on the MOPP ensemble and the exposed 

skin are decontaminated. For liquid chemical contamination, the M291 SDK is useful. If 

the M291 SDK is not available, use soap and water or a field-expedient absorbent material 

(such as clean, dry earth), ensuring that the skin is not abraded during its use. For vapor

and aerosol contamination, use soap and water. Immediate decontamination is critical to 

limit the injury to the contaminated individual. For biological contamination, soap and 

water will remove these agents, but may not kill all of them. Radioactive contamination 

can also be removed (but not neutralized) with water or soap and water, by simply brushing 

dust and debris from the clothing and hair, or vacuuming with a vacuum that is fitted with 

a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 X-3 
e. Every attempt must be made to limit the spread of contaminants onto the 

medical evacuation vehicles. As much contamination as possible must be removed from the 

patient’s MOPP prior to loading him on the evacuation assets to reduce the contamination 

of these assets and the cross contamination of the other patients and crew. Individuals who 

are transported to the MTF for care may or may not be contaminated. If feasible, 

uncontaminated patients should be protected from cross contamination. Ways to reduce

cross contamination include the following: 

• Designating areas for the contaminated patients on the ambulance. 

• Placing the contaminated patients on plastic sheets in the vehicle. 

• Identifying separate assets for dirty and clean patients who are transported from

the battlefield in MOPP. 

• Decontaminating the MOPP of all patients who come from the dirty evacuation 

assets (ensuring that the MOPP gear is adequately decontaminated reduces cross 

contamination inside the dirty vehicle). 

f. The key in patient decontamination at the thorough level is that the proper 

decontamination procedures must be followed to limit the spread of contamination so that 

MTFs and other patients are not compromised through the incapacitation of medical staff 

who are wearing CBRN protective equipment. 

g. Each service follows slightly different procedures for thorough patient 

decontamination (based on the service’s mission and equipment). All services follow similar 

principles, which include the following: 

(1) Medical personnel supervise the patient decontamination operations. 

Augmentees from the supported units are usually required to assist in the decontamination 

process and perform patient lifting and washing. 

(2) In the triage area outside the PDS, further decontamination of MOPP is 

performed to limit the spread of contamination (while necessary medical care is provided to 

stabilize the patient). 

(3) Medical triage officers sort patients, considering the priorities for 

treatment, decontamination, and evacuation, based on the patient’s need for care and his 

ability to benefit from what is available at that MTF. 

(4) Those who do not require lifesaving procedures at a smaller MTF may 

remain in their MOPP4 ensemble on the dirty side of the hot line. There, the patient will 

be given patient operational decontamination and medical stabilization and returned to 

duty or evacuated to a larger in-theater MTF (where there is adequate staff to provide 

patient thorough decontamination to larger numbers of patients). 

(5) Patient decontamination at the thorough level is a comprehensive cleaning 

process that must be carried out prior to a patient being allowed inside any MTF. It 

involves removing all of the patient’s MOPP and any underclothing that is suspected of 

X-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
being contaminated. Typically, all of the patient’s clothing is removed. The patient’s skin

is then decontaminated. When water resources are limited, only the patient’s mask and 

those areas of suspected skin contamination are decontaminated (pay particular attention 

to areas where there were breaks in the protective clothing and around wounds). The M291 

and soap and water are used for chemical contamination. However, a 0.5 percent 

hypochlorite solution is useful if water is limited and the M291 kits are not available. Soap

and water are best for biological and radiological contamination. For all agents, a complete

body wash, using soap and water, can be performed (if adequate resources are available). 

(6) Medical care and triage are provided before, during, and after patient 

decontamination to ensure that the patient remains stable enough to survive the procedure. 

(7) Open wounds are irrigated with clean water or saline. 

(8) The least desired alternative for skin decontamination is hypochlorite 

solution. If used, only a 0.5 percent hypochlorite solution is used for patient 

decontamination. Higher concentrations will irritate and burn the skin and allow some 

nerve agents to enter the skin more rapidly. During patient decontamination at the 

thorough level, the only place where 5 percent hypochlorite (full strength liquid bleach) 

solution is used is to decontaminate plastic mesh litters that are designed to be 

decontaminated. The litters are rinsed before reuse. The litter washing process is 

performed away from the patient decontamination area. 

(9) All patients who arrive at the PDS wearing protective masks will remain in 

their masks during the decontamination process and until they are out of the PDS vapor 

hazard area. Medical personnel may remove the patient’s protective mask to intubate the 

patient. The resuscitation device, individual, chemical (RDIC) is used if there is a vapor 

hazard in the area of treatment. 

(10) Patients who are treated outside the MTF should not have their MOPP 

removed as long as they do not enter the MTF or a clean area or do not require skin 

decontamination. 

(11) Contaminated bandages and splints are only removed by trained medical 

personnel. The bandages are removed; the skin is decontaminated and only replaced if 

bleeding continues. Splints are not removed during the decontamination process; cravat 

and other strapping material may be removed one item at a time, the skin decontaminated 

and a new cravat placed on the splint. Repeat this process until the entire splint has been 

decontaminated. 

3. Army Patient Decontamination Procedures 

a. The Army is a land-based mobile force, which uses patient decontamination 

procedures that meet the mission demands. Decontamination equipment is simple, is easy

to relocate and set up, can be used in a limited water environment, and takes up relatively 

little storage space. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 X-5 
b. Each MTF, from Level I to larger, has a patient decontamination medical 

equipment set. Larger facilities, such as Levels III and IV, have more equipment and staff 

to handle larger numbers of patients evacuated to them from smaller, forward MTFs. 

c. Smaller, battalion level MTFs are not staffed to perform patient thorough 

decontamination and medical treatment. Therefore, patient thorough decontamination 

must be performed by nonmedical personnel from the supported units or units located 

within the base cluster or in vicinity of the MTF. These individuals are supervised by the

medical personnel. The minimum number of personnel required for basic PDS operation is 

16. Larger MTFs will require greater numbers of personnel as they will need to process 

greater numbers of patients. Also, additional personnel should be considered to allow for a 

work-rest rotation of workers. Personnel are split into two categories. The two categories 

are: 

• Nonmedically trained augmentees to assist with ambulatory decontamination 

and litter decontamination. 

• Medically trained personnel serve as medics at the triage area, dirty side 

emergency medical treatment (EMT) areas, litter and ambulatory decontamination areas,

clean side of the hot line, and clean treatment area. 

d. If the MTFs are located near the troop decontamination units, coordination can 

be made to colocate medical patient decontamination and nonmedical troop 

decontamination side by side to share assets. Brigade is the lowest level that this operation 

can be effectively planned. However, decontamination support for other unique operational 

organizations (e.g., SOF) may require execution at a lower level. The operation requires

close coordination between the brigade chemical officer, brigade S-4, brigade surgeon, and 

medical company commander. 

e. Army patient thorough decontamination involves decontamination procedures 

for litter and ambulatory patients. This encompasses a series of specific steps for patient 

medical stabilization, the removal of clothing, wash down, and mask removal before entry 

into the MTF. Army field decontamination equipment sets provide buckets, sponges, liquid

soap, HTH for a shuffle pit and hypochlorite solution preparation, litters, and litter stands. 

f. Detailed step-by-step instructions for the operation of the Army PDS are found 

in FM 4-02.7. 

4. Marine Corps Patient Decontamination Procedures 

a. The Marine Corps is an amphibious mobile force that can conduct patient 

thorough decontamination operations on a ship, according to the Navy shipboard 

procedures, or on land with procedures similar to those used by the Army. It uses patient

decontamination procedures at the thorough level that meet the mission demands. 

Decontamination equipment is simple, is easy to relocate and set up, can be used in a 

limited water environment, and takes up relatively little storage space. 

b. The Navy MTFs supporting the Marine Corps are not staffed to perform patient 

thorough decontamination and provide medical treatment. Therefore, the patient thorough 

X-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
decontamination must be performed by nonmedical personnel from the supported units or 

units located within the base cluster or in vicinity of the MTF. These individuals are 

supervised by the Navy medical personnel. The minimum number of nonmedical personnel 

required for a Level I battalion aid station for patient thorough decontamination is identical 

to the requirements for the Army. The requirements include personnel to assist with 

ambulatory decontamination, litter decontamination, and hot line management. Navy

medical personal minimal requirements would include medics at the triage area, dirty side 

EMT area, litter and ambulatory decontamination areas, and the hot line. Levels II and 

larger will require greater numbers of personnel as they will need to process greater 

numbers of patients at larger Navy medical facilities supporting Marine Corps units. In 

these cases, additional manpower will be needed to ensure appropriate manpower 

work-rest rotation. 

c. The Marine Corps land-based patient thorough decontamination involves

decontamination procedures for litter and ambulatory patients. This encompasses a series

of specific steps for patient medical stabilization, the removal of clothing, wash down, and 

mask removal before entry into the MTF. The equipment and procedures are almost 

identical to those of the Army, with minor differences in the cutting of clothing procedures 

for patients. 

d. Detailed, step-by-step instructions for the operation of the Marine Corps 

land-based PDS are found in FM 4-02.7. 

5. Navy Patient Decontamination Procedures 

a. The Navy is primarily a sea-based force that can conduct patient thorough 

decontamination operations on a ship (according to Navy shipboard procedures) or on land 

for land-based Navy MTFs. 

b. Ship-based procedures are unique to the Navy due to the architecture and layout 

of the ship. Contaminated litter casualties are typically triaged, stabilized, and 

decontaminated above deck and then brought below deck for treatment after they are 

decontaminated. Some ships may contain decontamination stations built within the ship 

where patients can be processed below deck. 

c. Patient thorough decontamination procedures for land-based Navy MTFs are 

similar to those of the Army, depending on the decontamination equipment available. 

d. Detailed, step-by-step instructions for the operation of the Navy land-based PDS 

are found in FM 4-02.7. 

6. Air Force Patient Decontamination Procedures 

The USAF is deployed as a land-based force that projects air power from a stationary 

site that may become contaminated. USAF patient thorough decontamination procedures 

are for deployed and CONUS forces in two separate configurations. 

a. In deployed environments, the USAF utilizes expeditionary medical 

decontamination teams (EMDTs). These teams, with equipment and procedures, meet the 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 X-7 
mission demands for a stationary land support force that must sustain operations in a 

contaminated environment. Patient thorough decontamination is designed to allow the 

force to continue limited operations in an environment that becomes contaminated. Patient 

decontamination equipment is packaged to be air-transportable, ergonomically designed for 

optimal manning, and rugged for sustained use. USAF patient decontamination assets are 

only deployed with a chemically protected deployable medical system (CPDEMEDS) 25-bed 

medical package or larger. Decontamination equipment includes a Small-Shelter, 

Personnel Decontamination System (SSPDS), which is composed of tentage, a water 

bladder, a litter roller system, water heaters for handheld soap and water sprayers, and a 

runoff wastewater collection system. The SSPDS has lanes for both litter and ambulatory 

patients. Environmental control units regulate the temperature inside the SSPDS and 

maintain positive air pressure through access doors to the outside so that the unit can 

operate with contamination outside. The environmental control units also include air locks 

to the CPDEMEDS MTF. The 19-person manpower detail, which makes up one EMDT, is 

primarily composed of medical personnel who train together and perform all the 

decontamination procedures and medical care involved in the patient decontamination 

process. One EMDT can simultaneously process an average of 15 ambulatory and 15 

nonambulatory casualties per hour. Detailed step-by-step instructions for the operation of 

the EMDT are found in AFI 10-204, with supplemental information found in FM 4-02.7. 

b. Within CONUS, the USAF uses an in-place patient decontamination capability

(IPPDC). This is a nondeployable asset that is designed to provide patient thorough 

decontamination at USAF MTFs. It is designed for patients who self-present or are 

transported for definitive medical care to the MTF and may have bypassed 

decontamination at the incident scene. Equipment includes a decontamination tent that 

can be readily deployed. The entire tent setup includes plumbing, with soap and water 

sprayers, to decontaminate both litter and ambulatory patients and a roller system for 

litter patients. It also has water heaters and a runoff water collection system. The 

plumbing must be connected to a fire hydrant or an outside faucet. The IPPDC 

decontamination team is typically composed of 12 medical personnel who train as a group.

Detailed, step-by-step instructions for the operation of the IPPDC are found in AFI 10-204, 

with supplemental information found in FM 4-02.7. Many CONUS MTFs have similar 

nondeployable patient decontamination layouts. 

X-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Chapter XI 

DECONTAMINATION IN SUPPORT OF HOMELAND SECURITY 

1. Background 

a. During every incident involving a CBRN release, there is a possibility that the 

target could be a military installation, unit, or activity or a civilian site. The targets could

include critical infrastructures or members of the public. The DOD maintains significant 

decontamination resources (personnel, equipment, and supplies) that may be used to 

support a request for federal assistance. Additionally, service decontamination resources 

may likely be used to respond to an incident or accident at a military installation. This 

chapter will briefly address how DOD decontamination capabilities could be provided to 

support HLS. Additionally, this chapter will address decontamination terms, procedures, 

and planning considerations that could be applicable to an incident or accident supporting 

HLS. 

b. To prevent, prepare for, respond to, and recover from terrorist attacks, major 

disasters, and other emergencies, the United States Government (USG) has established a 

comprehensive approach to domestic incident management. The objective of the USG is to

ensure that all levels of the government have the capability to work efficiently and 

effectively together. In order for the government to accomplish this mission it developed 

the Federal Response Plan and later the NRP.

 c. For additional information refer to Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Aspects of Consequence Management. 

2. Federal Assistance 

Providing decontamination assistance to non-DOD government organizations requires 

detailed coordination. 

a. Local and state governments routinely respond to a wide array of domestic 

emergencies without any federal assistance. Some CBRN incidents may not overwhelm 

local response capabilities, but may require technical advice and assistance that is not 

readily available in local or state agencies. However, a large-scale incident may overwhelm 

local and state responders, requiring considerable federal assistance. 

b. Requests for assistance (RFAs) from civil authorities are coordinated through the

processes outlined in the NRP. If local or state authorities submit an RFA, the Federal 

Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) develops a mission assignment and tasks the 

appropriate primary agency. If the tasked primary agency needs additional assistance, it 

may request military support through the on-scene defense coordinating officer or the 

Secretary of Defense (SecDef). The military elements capable of providing the necessary 

response are then sent to the incident area under the operational control of the defense 

coordinating officer (DCO) or JTF (during a CBRN incident) to perform the tasks. 

c. Under DODD 3025-1, imminently serious conditions resulting from a civil 

emergency or attack may require immediate action by military commanders or by 

responsible officials of other DOD agencies to save lives, prevent human suffering, mitigate 

great property damage, or limit the spread of contamination. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XI-1 
3. Response to a Homeland Security Incident—Decontamination 

Considerations 

There are important differences between a HAZMAT incident and a CBRN incident. 

Responders must be aware of these differences and take the proper precautions for selfprotection, protection of other responders, and protection of the public during response 

actions. See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and 

Chemical Aspects of Consequence Management for decontamination considerations that 

apply to consequence management operations.

 a. General Considerations. 

(1) With most CBRN material, responders must complete decontamination 

swiftly in order to save lives and minimize the number of victims. Although a rapid

response is required because of the speed that many of the toxic chemical agents affect the 

body, responders must resist rushing in to assist until the situation is over. 

(2) The number of expected victims is the first major difference between a 

standard HAZMAT situation and a CBRN incident. Responders may be required to control, 

triage, decontaminate, and track a large number of people at the site of a CBRN incident. 

Scene control may involve a large area, a mass victim situation with numerous responders

who want to help, and the press corps seeking information about the incident. A response

of this magnitude will require more personnel and material than may be available; 

therefore, detailed contingency planning, training, and exercising is required in advance. 

(3) A terrorist CBRN incident is a federal crime scene. During the

decontamination process, responders must make every effort to preserve evidence for 

eventual use in apprehending and prosecuting the perpetrators. 

(4) Runoff control is required to reduce the spread of the hazard. Because of its 

potential toxicity, keep decontamination runoff away from sewer drains, groundwater, 

streams, and watershed areas. If runoff cannot be controlled, notify the appropriate 

agencies (e.g., sewer, water, and environmental). 

b. Purposes of Decontamination. The potential for exponentially increasing panic 

and cross contamination after a CBRN release is staggering. Responders who are called

upon to assist in the decontamination process must possess the ability to execute the 

decontamination procedures properly; thus, negating the exponential effects and enhancing 

victim confidence. 

c. Decontamination Levels. 

(1) Emergency decontamination can occur at any point during a 

decontamination operation. Like mass decontamination, it commonly refers to procedures 

taken for the rapid reduction of agent from the skin. However, when an emergency arises 

during the decontamination process (e.g., the responder runs out of air during a technical 

decontamination), quick steps must be taken to alleviate or mitigate the emergency while 

also practicing contamination avoidance. 

(2) Mass decontamination is a commonly used term referring to the rapid 

reduction of agent from the skin of many contaminated victims. Mass decontamination is 

performed as quickly as possible while also practicing contamination avoidance. Other 

XI-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
terms associated with the mass decontamination process are emergency, gross, and 

immediate decontamination. 

(3) Technical decontamination commonly refers to the deliberate

decontamination of responders, equipment, and evidence. Technical decontamination can 

also be performed on a mass contaminated populous if conditions allow. Technical 

decontamination is performed with the emphasis on neutralization of the agent. Speed is

not a factor. Terms that are commonly associated with technical decontamination are 

detailed, thorough, deliberate, definitive, and responder decontamination. 

d. Decontamination Planning Considerations. 

(1) Mass decontamination can take many improvised forms, with the intent 

being the rapid removal of the agent. 

(a) Government agencies (e.g., OSHA) recommend a high-volume,

low-pressure water system as the default standard for mass decontamination. 

(b) High-pressure water systems are discouraged because they may force 

contaminants through the clothing and increase contamination on the victim. 

(c) Field-expedient methods, like the ladder-pipe decontamination system 

method developed by the Howard County Fire Department for the Baltimore Exercise 

(BALTEX) V (an emergency response demonstration in Baltimore, Maryland), proved that a 

multiple-apparatus platform allows responders to create a longer corridor for 

decontamination that will accommodate a large number of victims. 

(d) Commercially available decontamination systems are effective, but 

most of these systems are trailer-mounted and require transportation to the incident site, 

causing delays. However, if these systems are centrally located and rapidly deployable, 

they offer an advantage over other systems because they provide the following: 

• Heated showers. 

• Cover. 

• Systems to control runoff. 

(e) The use of chlorinated swimming pools, elevated master nozzles, fog 

streams, and public-school shower facilities are other improvised methods that meet the 

intent of emergency decontamination. The objective is the rapid and gross removal of most 

of the agent involved in the incident. 

(2) Emergency decontamination does not require the use of a decontamination 

corridor, although the nature of the corridor lends itself to an organized and effective 

decontamination operation. 

(3) Weather conditions and the possible requirement of an indoor 

decontamination site (e.g., school gym with showers, car wash, or community center) are 

things to keep in mind when choosing a location. Techniques for adjusting water pressure 

may also come into play when using hose lines and elevated master streams in the 

decontamination process. 

(4) Appropriate personal coverings are provided for persons undergoing 

decontamination, using items readily available from the local area, such as disposable 

ponchos, coveralls, and salvage covers. Incident logistics coordinators or responders might 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XI-3 
procure blankets, large towels, sheets, and tablecloths from local restaurants, stores, 

hospitals, and hotels. Consider providing overhead cover to afford additional consideration 

for modesty. 

(5) Establishing a triage, treatment, and transport area in a clean and secure 

location that is large enough to accommodate all victims must also be considered. Ensure 

that all responders are aware of the signs and symptoms of CBRN exposure. The use of 

mechanical ventilation and pharmaceuticals may be required to stabilize victims. 

(6) Decontaminated victims and responders must be treated and transported to 

supporting MTFs immediately following the decontamination. Consider mass transit, when 

available, to assist in transporting victims. 

e. Safety of Responders. 

(1) The safety of responders is of the utmost importance. All responders with

the potential to encounter contaminated victims or be exposed to contaminated material 

must wear protective clothing and respiratory protection equal to or one level below the 

level of protection required for the hazard. Responders can assure maximum consideration 

for the safety of themselves and victims by instituting and following safety procedures. The 

following are the levels of protection given in Department of Labor (DOL) Regulation 29 

CFR 1910-120: 

(a) Level A. 

• Positive pressure, full face piece, self-contained breathing apparatus 

(SCBA) or positive pressure-supplied air respirator with escape SCBA approved by the 

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). 

• Totally encapsulating chemical-protective suit. 

• Coveralls (optional). 

• Long underwear (optional). 

• Gloves, outer and inner, chemical-resistant. 

• Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank. 

• Hard hat (under suit) (optional). 

• Disposable protective suit, gloves and boots (depending on suit 

construction, may be worn over totally encapsulating suit). 

(b) Level B. 

• Positive pressure, full face piece SCBA or positive pressure-supplied 

air respirator with escape SCBA (NIOSH-approved). 

• Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls and long-sleeved jacket, 

coveralls, one- or two-piece chemical-splash suit, disposable chemical-resistant overalls). 

• Coveralls (optional). 

• Gloves, outer and inner, chemical-resistant. 

• Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank. 

• Boot covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable) (optional). 

XI-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• Hard hat (optional). 

• Face shield (optional). 

(c) Level C. 

• Full face piece or half mask, air-purifying respirators 

(NIOSH-approved). 

• Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls, two-piece 

chemical-splash suit, disposable chemical-resistant overalls). 

• Coveralls (optional). 

• Gloves, outer and inner, chemical-resistant. 

• Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank (optional). 

• Boot covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable) (optional). 

• Hard hat (optional). 

• Escape mask (optional). 

• Face shield (optional). 

(d) Level D. 

• Coveralls. 

• Gloves (optional). 

• Boots or shoes, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank. 

• Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable) (optional). 

• Safety glasses or chemical-splash goggles. 

• Hard hat (optional). 

• Escape mask (optional). 

• Face shield (optional). 

(2) If the agent is unknown, Level B is the minimum required protection. 

Military issue IPE (MOPP ensemble) does not meet OSHA Level C requirements. If 

wearing MOPP— 

• Minimize contact with the victims. 

• Practice contamination avoidance. 

• Know the agents and the signs and symptoms of their effects. 

• Institute the universal safety precautions to better protect operations level 

responders from blood-borne pathogens. 

NOTE: MOPP gear does not provide adequate protection for many TIM. 

f. Isolation and Organization of Ambulatory Victims. 

(1) Determine the best ways to isolate victims and establish victim control. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XI-5 
(2) Explain to victims that they need help. Provide them with instructions 

pertaining to what steps need to be taken. This can be done with loudspeakers or public 

address systems. 

(3) Evacuate the victims upwind and uphill of the hazard. Separate the

victims who are showing symptoms (symptomatic) from the victims who are not showing 

symptoms (asymptomatic). Separate men and women. Collect personal items (e.g., use a 

plastic bag and a method of identification, voucher personal articles for later return). 

(4) Provide special consideration to families, small children, the elderly, and 

special-needs persons. 

g. Types of Decontaminants. 

(1) While there are numerous types of decontaminants available for use by

responders, they fall into three basic categories: 

(a) Miscellaneous (Commercial). Available stockpiles of these 

decontaminants may be quickly expended and not readily replaceable. Therefore, it is 

important that responders have an understanding of other decontaminants, their sources, 

and their uses. 

(b) Natural. The use of natural decontaminants will reduce the responder 

time and the use of available decontaminants. 

(c) Standard Military. If the military is called in to support the incident, 

military decontaminants may be available. 

(2) Decontaminants should be stocked and stored before any incident. They

must be accessible and clearly marked for content. Test decontamination material 

routinely for viability (strength). Operations level responder training must stress 

decontaminant use, application, and risk (e.g., agent use and contact time for personnel and

equipment). 

(3) When capabilities and resources allow, decontaminants of choice are soap 

and water, water, or household bleach if soap and water are limited. Full strength, 5

percent bleach solution from the bottle should only be applied to equipment (15-minute 

contact times) and never to skin. It will decontaminate most CB agents. A 5 percent bleach

solution followed by a complete flushing is the maximum bleach concentration used for skin 

and clothing (though not exactly matching the recommended percentages, a standard rule 

of thumb is 10:1, or 10 parts water to 1 part bleach). Do not apply bleach to a victim’s face. 

(4) Responders may use commercially available materials (such as absorbents) 

for the control of liquid contamination at an incident scene and the removal of most gross 

chemical contamination from surfaces. Contamination will be transferred to the absorbent 

material, which must be treated as contaminated waste and disposed of accordingly. Since 

there is no preparation time for absorbent material application, utilize the material as soon 

as it arrives at the incident scene. 

(5) Nonaqueous (without water) methods provide a means for contaminant 

removal. 

(a) The use of dry, gelled, or powdered decontaminating materials to 

absorb chemical agents is appropriate (if their use is expedient). Commonly available

absorbents include dirt, flour, baking powder, sawdust, charcoal, ashes, activated carbon, 

XI-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
alumina, silica gels, and clay materials. Although these absorbents may be an expedient

means of decontamination, their effectiveness has not been determined. In general,

absorbents only remove contamination, they do not always neutralize the agent. 

(b) The DOD uses the M291 and M295 SDKs, which employ a 

charcoal-based resin absorbent and are available for commercial purchase. However, while 

these kits are effective in removing spots of liquid chemical-agent contamination, they may 

not be suitable for treating mass casualties. This is due to their potentially limited 

availability and the relatively high labor requirements because of the size of the 

decontamination pad and the time it takes to clean large amounts of contamination from 

the victim. 

(6) The use of natural degradation and ultraviolet (UV) light does not require 

responder preparation or application time. UV light kills most biological agents quickly, 

but does not kill spores. 

h. Decontamination Corridor. 

(1) Responders must be prepared to conduct emergency

decontamination and to set up a decontamination corridor. To do this, select and 

secure a large area upwind and uphill of the hot zone. Provide protection for and be 

able to accommodate the decontamination of large numbers of victims. Base an 

emergency decontamination operation on speed rather than neatness. 

(2) The sooner one begins and completes the decontamination, the 

better, as time will be a critical element. The decontamination process also has the 

potential of creating a hazard. Notify the proper authorities downstream if 

responders cannot confine the runoff to the incident scene. To reduce this hazard, 

responders must do the following: 

(a) Control decontamination runoff as best as possible. Know where it is 

going, and ensure that it will not flow into clean areas. 

(b) Coordinate with local environmental management officials if possible. 

Confinement may be critical if radiological materials are involved. 

(c) Establish measures for the decontamination of fatalities. One method 

is to establish an additional lane within the decontamination corridor. Consider the 

psychological implications of the colocation with living victims and the potential need for 

autopsies for evidence as factors in determining where to establish the decontamination 

facilities for fatalities. 

(3) After establishing the decontamination corridor, responders must 

effectively communicate to the victims what action can be expected as they pass through 

the corridor during the decontamination process. 

(a) During decontamination, have the victims remove their outer clothing, 

down to their undergarments to increase the thoroughness of the decontamination process. 

The removal of clothing removes approximately 50 to 80 percent of the contamination. 

(b) Additionally, consider implementing the following techniques: 

• Use bags (such as trash bags, biohazard bags, or other bags of suitable 

size and strength) to collect and identify the individual clothing removed from the victims. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XI-7 
• Place the bagged clothing into a sealed container (tagged for 

identification) for a more thorough inspection later. 

• Wet the victims down before removing their individual clothing (if the 

hazard is biological or radiological). This will embed the agent on the clothing of the 

victims and reduce the potential for the biological or radiological agent to adhere to the 

bodies of the victims or becoming reaerosolized. 

• Blot the agent off (using a pinching motion) to remove the liquid (if the 

hazard is a suspected liquid mustard [blister] agent). 

i. Nonambulatory Emergency Decontamination of Patients. 

(1) Emergency cutout and decontamination of the nonambulatory victims at a 

WMD terrorist event presents many challenges to the first responders. Responders must

be able to perform cutout procedures efficiently in order to accommodate the numerous 

victims that will need immediate medical attention. Precautions must be taken to prevent

the spread of contamination to the responders, team, victims, and uncontaminated ground. 

(2) Minimize responder and victim exposure during the decontamination 

process by— 

• Selecting PPE at a level that protects the responder against the threat 

(chemical or biological agent). OSHA guidelines state that the PPE level must be at least 

one level below the contaminated responder’s protective level. When the agent is unknown, 

OSHA requires PPE Level B. However, PPE Level A protection is recommended for 

additional safety pending the agent identification. 

• Wearing positive pressure SCBA. 

• Limiting the number of responders that come in physical contact with 

victims. 

(3) Consider the following techniques to provide protection when handling 

victims: 

• Use supports to hold the stretchers and backboards off the ground (e.g., 

milk crates or sawhorses). 

• Keep clothing away from the victim’s face during removal (limits the victim 

breathing the agent). 

• Remove or cut the clothing from head to toe, front to back. 

(4) Do not cut through holes or tears when removing clothing from victims. 

These are clues to the event and may prove to be useful evidence. 

(5) Control and monitor all responder’s activities throughout the incident for 

accountability and treatment in the event they become contaminated. If responders become

contaminated, they may be required to conduct self-decontamination procedures to assure 

their own safety. 

j. Technical Decontamination. 

(1) When setting up the technical decontamination corridor, establish it away 

from the emergency decontamination corridor. During the emergency decontamination 

process, the emphasis is on speed and CBR agent removal since the victims have no 

XI-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
protection against the agent. Technical decontamination concentrates more on 

completeness and neutralization since the responders are in protective clothing. 

(2) The distance between the stations of the corridor is critical in minimizing 

the vapor hazard and cross contamination. The distance is most critical at the last station, 

where personnel remove their respiratory protection and move to the cold zone. The 

incident commander or HAZMAT technician will establish the distances required between 

stations based on the weather conditions, the number of victims, space available, the type of 

agent used, and time restraints. 

4. Department of Defense Decontamination Capabilities 

See Appendix G for a summary of representative DOD decontamination capabilities. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XI-9 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Chapter XII 

LOGISTICS 

1. Background 

Many of the materials that are needed to conduct decontamination operations are 

identified in this chapter. 

2. Consumption Rates and Replenishment 

Serious consideration must be given to consumption rates and the replenishment of 

items in order to sustain decontamination operations and remain prepared. 

a. Skin Decontamination and Personal Wipe Down. Each warfighter carries his 

own SDK. The SDK will be stored in the individual’s mask carrier. The basis of issue per 

individual is two SDKs (12 packets). The unit maintains at least one SDK per assigned 

person for resupply. Personal wipe down is also done with these kits. 

b. Individual Gear Decontamination. The standard decontamination kit for 

individual gear is the IEDK. Each warfighter carries an IEDK according to procedures 

outlined in their unit SOP. The basis of issue per warfighter is one IEDK. Each kit 

contains four individual decontamination packets, enough to decontaminate two complete 

sets of individual gear. 

c. Operator Wipe Down. The unit or activity will use the M100 SDS for operator 

wipe down. The M100 contains two packs of reactive sorbent powder, two wash mitt type 

sorbent applicators, a case, and two straps. It allows two operators to perform simultaneous

decontamination operations. 

d. MOPP Gear Exchange. Each warfighter wears or carries one complete set of 

MOPP gear. The unit or activity will maintain additional sets of MOPP gear as specified in 

the service logistics authorization documents. When a unit or activity undergoes a MOPP

gear exchange, the unit sends a supply vehicle with the replacement MOPP gear and any 

decontaminants to rendezvous with the contaminated element at the operational 

decontamination site. The units or activities will generally maintain a 5 percent overage of 

MOPP gear, based on their personnel strength or authorization (whichever is greater) to 

ensure that a complete range of sizes and replacement gear is available. All MOPP gear,

serviceable and unserviceable, is handled as organizational clothing and equipment (Class 

II supplies). The higher HQ is responsible for resupplying these items. 

e. Vehicle Wash Down. 

(1) Vehicle wash down is done in the unit or activity AO by the unit 

decontamination crew. The crew moves to the operational decontamination site, conducts a 

rendezvous with the contaminated element, and conducts the wash down. The vehicle 

wash-down crew may use a PDDE to spray 100 to 150 gallons of hot, soapy water on each 

vehicle to wash off the gross contamination. For vehicles such as the M1 series armored 

fighting vehicles, 200 gallons of water may be required per vehicle. Each 100 gallons of

water provides a two- to three-minute wash. See Chapter IV for planning, coordinating,

and determining the requirements for a vehicle wash down. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XII-1 
(2) A PDDA, such as the M12A1, injects detergent into the water as it 

operates. It uses 2.5 quarts of detergent for every 1,200 gallons of water (about 1 quart of 

soap per 450 gallons of water). 

f. DTD. Generally, the units or activities conduct the DTD with the support of the 

CSS assets. Materials for this technique must be requested from the supporting CSS 

assets. The reconstitution operations should be closely associated with the 

decontamination operations. An assessment and recovery team ensures that the material 

and equipment are available for the decontamination operation as a part of the

reconstitution effort. 

g. DED. 

(1) A CBRN unit must have access to a large water source (e.g., rivers, ponds, 

or a public water system) to conduct a DED. The CBRN unit leader estimates the amount 

of decontaminants that are needed. A CBRN decontamination unit sets up the DED site, 

supplies the decontaminants, and conducts the DED. The CBRN decontamination unit 

should carry enough decontaminants to service one company or squadron size unit. A 

CBRN decontamination unit that is assigned to conduct a DED for approximately 16 

vehicles should carry a minimum of 4 gallons of liquid detergent and thirty 50-pound drums 

of STB. The CBRN decontamination platoon is usually resupplied through its parent unit. 

Command assignment relationships can change the resupply channels. (See Table XII-1 for 

the estimated water consumption guidelines for operational decontamination, DED, and 

DTD.) 

Table XII-1. Estimated Water Consumption 

Required Equipment Time Water Consumption 

Operational Decontamination1 

M12A1 PDDA 

M17 LDS 

MPDS 

1–3 minutes 100–150 gallons per regular vehicle 

150–200 gallons per armored or larger vehicle 

Example: 

15 (contaminated vehicles) x 150 (gallons of water) = 

2,250 gallons 2 

Detailed Equipment Decontamination3 

M12A1 PDDA 

M17 LDS 

KarcherTM MPDS 

Varies, see Chapter IV Regular vehicles: 

Station 1 - primary wash, 250 gallons 

Station 2 - decontaminant application, 10 gallons per 

vehicle 

Station 4 - rinse, 200 gallons 

Armored or larger vehicles: 

Station 1 - primary wash, 300 gallons 

Station 2 - decontaminant application, 12.5 gallons per 

vehicle 

Station 4 - rinse, 200 gallons 

Example: 

6 vehicles x 460 gallons of water = 2,760 gallons 

4 tanks x 512.5 gallons of water = 2,050 gallons 

Total: 4,810 gallons 

XII-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table XII-1. Estimated Water Consumption (Continued) 

Required Equipment Time Water Consumption 

Detailed Troop Decontamination 

30-gallon container Varies, see Chapter IV The initial setup requires approximately 250 gallons of 

water. The water must be changed after 10 personnel 

have been decontaminated through the DTD to avoid the 

transfer of contamination. 

Station 1 (120 gallons, four 30-gallon containers) 

3-gallon container Station 2 (6 gallons, two 3-gallon containers) 

30-gallon container Station 4 (180 gallons, six 30-gallon containers) 

3-gallon container Station 7 (12 gallons, four 3-gallon containers) 

Example: 

About 150 personnel are to be decontaminated through 

the DTD. Two hundred-fifty gallons of water will be 

needed for every 10 personnel. 

150 (number of personnel) ÷ 10 (required water change) 

= 15 (the amount of times the water will need to be 

changed) 

15 x 250 (gallons of water for every 10 personnel) = 

3,750 gallons of water for 150 personnel 

1 To reduce contamination, conduct operator spray down before the operational decontamination. This process 

requires less water consumption during a thorough decontamination. 2

 Always include a 10% planning factor to the total estimate of the water consumption for the DED and the DTD. 

Example: 2,250 (gallons of water for the DTD) x 10% = 225 (additional gallons of water). A total of 2,250 + 225 = 

2,475 (gallons of water required for the DTD). 3 The planner should consider the vehicle predecontamination action to estimate the water consumption. He should 

consider the vehicles that were processed through the operational decontamination because they will normally 

increase the weatherization process and may reduce the water usage. 

(2) See Table XII-2 for the decontamination resources that should be available 

at each organizational level for the USA unit decontamination requirements. See Table 

XII-3 (page XII-4) for the USA units estimated requirements for the equipment and

supplies that are needed for the decontamination operations. See service logistics and 

authorization documents for their allocation of decontamination resources. See Table XII-4 

(page XII-7) for a listing of the decontamination equipment used at a medical patient 

decontamination site. 

Table XII-2. Decontamination Resources Available at Each Organizational Level (Army) 

Organizational Level Decontamination Resources 

Individual 2 SDKs, 1 IEDK 

Operators and crews 2 SDKs, 2 IEDKs, 1 onboard decontamination apparatus (M100), 

soap and water, two 50-pound drums of STB 

Companies 2 immersion heaters, two or three 30-gallon containers, six 3-gallon 

containers, 6 long-handled brushes, 6 sponges, 300 plastic trash 

bags 

Battalion PDDE crews PDDE (M17 LDS or MPDS), basic load, liquid detergent 

Chemical company 

decontamination squad 

PDDE (M12A1 PDDA/M17 LDS/MPDS), basic load, liquid detergent 

Chemical company 

decontamination platoon 

PDDE (M12A1 PDDA/M17 LDS/MPDS), sufficient materials to set up 

a DTD 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XII-3 
Table XII-3. Equipment and Supplies Needed for Decontamination Operations (Army) 

Minimum Amounts of Equipment and Supplies 

Needed for Decontamination Techniques 

Nomenclature Class 

of 

Supply 

Unit 

of 

Issue 

Basis of Issue 

(See TO&E for 

Actual 

Authorization) SD 3 1

 PW1 OS1 OW1 MGX2 VW2 DTD3 DED3 

N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A M100 SDS II Each 1 per every piece of 

major equipment 

2 1 N/A N/A 1 N/A 35 N/A M291 SDK 

M295 IEDK 

II 

II 

Each 

Each 

1 per mask 

1 per person 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A Filter canister, 

C2 or C2A14 II Each 1 per M40 series 

mask 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A Hood, M40 

mask 

II Each 1 per mask 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A 2 N/A Shears II Each As needed 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Knife II Each As needed 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 N/A N/A 3 Axe, single bit II Each 1 per most vehicles 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 N/A 3 3 Shovel, hand, 

RD, PT, D 

handle 

VII Each 1 per most vehicles 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 NAAK, Mark 1 VII Each 3 per individual 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 N/A Chemical 

agent nerve 

antidote 

VII Each 1 per individual 

5 per combat 

lifesaver 

10 per trauma 

specialist or 10 

per 

company/platoon 

medic 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 3 Paper, 

chemical 

agent, 

detector, M9 

II Roll 1 per squad 

3 per platoon 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 3 Paper, 

chemical 

agent, 

detector, M8 

II Book 6 per company 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 3 Radiac meter, 

AN/PDR-2 

VII Each Per TO&E 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 3 Radiac meter, 

IM-93/UD 

VII Each Per TO&E 

XII-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table XII-3. Equipment and Supplies Needed for Decontamination Operations (Army) 

(Continued) 

Minimum Amounts of Equipment and Supplies 

Needed for Decontamination Techniques 

Nomenclature Class 

of 

Supply 

Unit 

of 

Issue 

Basis of Issue 

(See TO&E for 

Actual 

Authorization) 3 

SD1 PW1 OS1 OW1 MGX2 VW2 DTD3 DED3 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 2 Alarm, chemical 

agent, M8A1 or 

M22 

VII 

VII 

Each 

Each 

Per TO&E 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 4 2 CAM VII Each Per TO&E 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 4 N/A Detector kit, 

chemical agent, 

M256A1 

II Kit 1 per squad 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A Mask sanitizing 

solution 

III Tube 4 per 10 masks 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 1 Decontaminating 

agent, STB 

III Drum 3 per company 

N/A N/A 1 N/A N/A N/A 2 24 Brush, scrub, 

long-handled 

N/A N/A As required 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7 N/A Pail, metal, 14­

quart 

II Each As required 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A 9 4 Garbage can, 

galvanized, 30­

gallon 

II Each 2 per company 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 6 Mop II Each As required 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5 N/A Sponge, 

cellulose 

II Each As required 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 N/A 4 6 Brush, scrub II Each As required 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 N/A 2 N/A Towels, paper II Box As required 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 1 1 1 Detergent, GP, 

liquid 

II Gallon As required 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A 1 1 Bag, plastic II Box 125 bags 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 N/A 10 TAP apron II Each 10 per platoon 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A 1 N/A Suit, clothing, 

protective 

II Each 2 per soldier 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A 1 N/A Glove set, CP II Pair 1 per soldier 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Cover, helmet, 

chemical 

protective 

II Each 1 per soldier 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A 1 N/A Overboots II Pair 1 per soldier 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XII-5 
Table XII-3. Equipment and Supplies Needed for Decontamination Operations (Army) 

(Continued) 

Minimum Amounts of Equipment and Supplies 

Needed for Decontamination Techniques 

Nomenclature Class 

of 

Supply 

Unit 

of 

Issue 

Basis of Issue 

(See TO&E for 

Actual 

Authorization) SD 3 1

 PW1 OS1 OW1 MGX2 VW2 DTD3 DED3 

N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 2 2 2 NBC marking 

kit 

II Kit 1 per squad 

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 N/A Immersion 

heater 

II Each 2 per company 

1

Techniques executed by individual soldiers. 2

Techniques executed by units. 3

Amounts vary depending on the situation. 4

If DF 200 is used, filters must be changed every 12 hours when conducting continuous decontamination operations. 

Table XII-4. Medical Equipment Set Chemical-Agent Patient Decontamination 

Equipment Unit of 

Issue 

Scissors bandage, 7.25” Each 

Bag, special, plastic (poly), 12x15 inches, 500 sheets Package 

Syringe, irrigating, 60-ml, 40 Package 

Support, litter, folding Pair 

Litter, folding, 91.6” Each 

Chest, No. 4, 30x18x12 inches Each 

Chest, med ins sup, No. 6 Each 

Paper, chemical-agent 25 sheets, M8 Book 

Disinfectant, 6-ounce Bottle 

Decontaminating kit Box 

Pail, utility, plastic 3-gallon Each 

Pen, ballpoint, black Dozen 

Form, printed Hundred 

Sponge, cellulose Each 

Bag, plastic Roll 

Plastic sheet (poly) Roll 

Scalp suit ,small Each 

Scalp suit, medium/large Each 

Scalp suit, extra large/extra extra large Each 

Glove set, chemical-protective, small Set 

Glove set, chemical-protective, medium Set 

Glove set, chemical-protective, large Set 

Glove inserts, chemical-protective, cotton, small Pair 

Glove inserts, chemical-protective, cotton, large Pair 

Cutter, seat belt Each 

Soap, castile Bottle 

h. Patient Decontamination. See Chapter X. 

XII-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
i. Aircraft Decontamination. See Chapter VIII. 

j. Shipboard. See Chapter IX. 

k. Mass Casualty. Depending on the type of incident, the resources required could 

be difficult to plan. Chapter X of this manual discusses patient decontamination. 

l. HLS and HLD. The DOD, in conjunction with the local and state responders, 

will determine the resources that will be required based upon the information available, the 

type of incident, and other supporting unit capabilities (see Chapter XI). 

3. Maintenance Considerations 

The disabled equipment or systems located within a contaminated area should not be 

removed for maintenance or returned to the owning organization until after they have been 

decontaminated. Minor on-site maintenance of the contaminated equipment or systems 

may be necessary. All maintenance that is performed on contaminated or potentially 

contaminated equipment and systems must be coordinated with the owning unit 

commander and the maintenance unit. If available, decontamination units may assist by 

providing site and equipment decontamination for the affected area. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 XII-7 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix A 

CONVERSIONS AND MEASUREMENTS 

This appendix contains the measurements and weights of decontaminant containers 

that are the replacements for used containers (see Table A-1). It also contains a table of 

commonly used metric system prefixes (see Table A-2) and a table of conversion factors (see 

Table A-3, page A-2). 

Table A-1. Measurements and Weights of Decontaminant Containers 

Containers Measurements Weights 

Drum, 55-gallon, 16-gauge 

NSN 8110-00-597-2353 

Volume – 12 cubic feet 

Length – 35 inches 

Width – 27.5 inches 

Empty – 70 pounds 

Filled with water – 529 pounds 

Filled with STB (slurry) – 620 pounds 

Drum, 55-gallon, 18-gauge 

NSN 8110-00-292-9783 

Volume – 12 cubic feet 

Length – 35 inches 

Width – 27.5 inches 

Empty – 50 pounds 

Filled with water – 509 pounds 

Filled with STB (slurry) – 600 pounds 

Ash and garbage can, 32-gallon 

NSN 7240-00-160-0440 

Volume – 7 cubic feet 

Length – 26.5 inches 

Width – 20 inches 

Empty – 33 pounds 

Filled with water – 300 pounds 

Filled with STB (slurry) – 353 pounds 

Gasoline can, 5-gallon 

NSN 7240-00-178-8286 

Volume – 1 cubic feet 

Length – 18.5 inches 

Width – 6.75 inches 

Empty – 10.5 pounds 

Filled with water – 52 pounds 

Filled with STB (slurry) – 66 pounds 

Drum, 8-gallon, STB, 16-gauge 

NSN 6850-00-297-6693 

Volume – 1.4 cubic feet 

Length – 14 inches 

Width – 14 inches 

Empty – 11 pounds 

Filled with water – 78 pounds 

Filled with STB (slurry) – 91 pounds 

Table A-2. Table of Commonly Used Prefixes 

Prefix Symbol Factor 

mega M 106 = 1,000,000 

kilo k 103 = 1,000 

hecto h 102 = 100 

deca da 101 = 10 

deci d 10-1 = 0.1 

centi c 10-2 = 0.01 

milli m 10-3 = 0.001 

micro μ 10-6 = 0.000001 

nano n 10-9 = 0.000000001 

pico p 10-12 = 0.000000000001 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 A-1 
Table A-3. Conversion Factors 

To Convert Into Multiply By To Convert Into Multiply By 

Ounces (fluid) Milliliters 29.573500 Inches Millimeters 25.4000000 

Liters 0.029570 Centimeters 2.5400000 

Ounces (weight) Grains 437.500000 Meters 0.0254000 

Drams 16.000000 Kilometers 0.0000254 

 Pounds 0.062500 Feet Miles 5,280.0000000

 Grams 28.3495270 Centimeters 30.4800000 

 Kilograms 0.028300 Meters 0.3048000 

Grains Ounces 0.002286 Kilometers 0.0003048 

Drams Ounces 0.062500 Yards Meters 0.9144000 

Pounds Grams 453.592400 Miles Meters 1,609.0000000

 Kilograms 0.453600 Kilometers 1.6090000 

Quarts Milliliters 946.400000 Centimeters Inches 0.3937000 

Liters 0.946400 Feet 0.0328100 

Milliliters Ounces (fluid) 0.033800 Meters 0.0100000 

Quarts 0.001057 Millimeters Inches 0.0393700 

Liters Ounces (fluid) 33.814000 Meters Inches 39.370000 

Quarts 1.057000 Feet 3.2810000 

 Gallons (US) 0.264200 Yards 1.0940000 

 Cubic Feet 0.035310 Miles 0.0006214 

Grams Ounces (weight) 0.035270 Kilometers 0.0010000 

 Pounds 0.002205 Kilometers Meters 1,000.0000000 

Kilograms Ounces (weight) 35.274000 Feet 3,281.0000000

 Pounds 2.205000 Miles 0.6214000 

Gallon (US) Gallon (UK) 0.832670 Cubic Feet Cubic Meters 0.0283200 

Gallon (UK) Gallon (US) 1.200950 Liters 28.3200000 

Cubic Meters Cubic Feet 35.3100000 

Square Yards Square Meters 0.8360000 

Square Meters Square Yards 1.1960000 

NOTES: 

1. The avoirdupois system of weights is used for pounds, ounces, and drams except when specified. The 

avoirdupois system is the everyday system of weights commonly used in the United States where 16 

ounces = 1 pound and 16 drams = 1 ounce. It is considered more modern and standardized than the 

alternative troy or apothecary system. 

2. The US gallon is a different size than the UK gallon, so no liquid measures of the same name are the 

same size in the US and UK systems. 

A-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Appendix B 

TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, 

RADIOLOGICAL, NUCLEAR, AND TOXIC INDUSTRIAL MATERIAL 

DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

This appendix provides basic information on the technical aspects of CBRN weapon 

effects and characteristics as it relates to decontamination. It also briefly addresses the 

decontamination-related aspects of TIM. Many CBRN and TIM substances are airborne 

hazards and may leave some degree of residual contamination that is hazardous to 

humans. 

2. Nuclear and Radiological Weapons 

Radioactive material will remain radioactive for some time and forces use removal or 

shielding methods to effectively decontaminate. 

a. Nuclear weapons have an enormous potential for physical damage and residual 

contamination. An RDD is a device that causes the dissemination of radioactive material 

across an area without a nuclear detonation. An RDD functions by using conventional 

explosives to blow up and scatter radioactive debris across a targeted area. This type of

weapon may also cause conventional casualties to become contaminated with radioactive 

material and would complicate recovery actions within a contaminated area. Significant

amounts of radioactive material may be deposited on surfaces after the use of a nuclear 

weapon or an RDD. Military operations in these contaminated areas will require an 

evaluation of the potential hazards and may require protective actions and 

decontamination. Operations could result in military personnel receiving radiation 

exposure or contact with particulate contamination, which would warrant medical 

evaluation and remediation. 

b. Nuclear radiation is characterized as initial or residual. The initial radiation is 

produced within 1 minute of the explosion. Residual radiation, also referred to as delayed 

fallout, occurs over a period of time. Fallout is composed of radioactive particles from the 

bomb and material from the surface of the earth that is carried into the air by the 

explosion. The larger particles return to the earth within 24 hours, but the smaller dust 

particles may take several months to fall. Other hazards include the presence of

radioactive material on or in exposed sources, such as food and water. 

(1) Little or no fallout is generated by a high-altitude burst. 

(2) Little or no fallout is generated by an airburst. While the fireball is still 

glowing, a tremendous amount of radioactive energy is released. 

(3) The heaviest amount of fallout from a surface burst occurs within 24 hours 

in the immediate area of ground zero (GZ). Lighter fallout, in the form of a radioactive

cloud, creates a residual radiation hazard (or footprint) that can extend hundreds of 

kilometers downwind. Table B-1, page B-2, provides representative estimates of the 

downwind radiation hazards resulting from different sized nuclear weapon detonations. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 B-1 
These estimates are for planning purposes and are subject to change based upon variables 

such as environmental conditions and the height of the weapon detonation. 

Table B-1. Nuclear-Weapon Detonation Downwind Radioactive Fallout Hazard Estimate 

Weapon Yield 

(in kilotons) 

Wind Speed (in 

kilometers per 

hour) 

Downwind Distance (in kilometers) 

Zone I—Immediate 

Operational Concern 

Zone II—Secondary Hazard 

2 

10 5 10 

25 8 16 

50 12 24 

5 

10 8 16 

25 13 26 

50 19 38 

30 

10 19 38 

25 30 60 

50 42 84 

100 

10 33 66 

25 55 110 

50 80 160 

300 

10 55 110 

25 90 180 

50 130 260 

1,000 

10 100 200 

25 155 310 

50 230 460 

c. The types of ionizing radiation are described below. 

(1) Alpha particles are charged particles that are approximately four times the 

mass of a neutron. Because of their size, alpha particles cannot travel far and are stopped 

by the dead layers of the skin or by a uniform. Alpha particles are a negligible external 

hazard; but when they are emitted from an internalized source, they can cause significant 

cellular damage in the region immediately adjacent to their physical location. 

(2) Beta particles are very light-charged particles that are found primarily in 

the fallout radiation. These particles can travel a short distance in the tissue. If large

quantities are involved, beta particles can damage the skin and produce a “beta burn” that 

can appear similar to a thermal burn. 

(3) Gamma rays, emitted during a nuclear detonation and from the fallout, are 

uncharged radiation similar to X-rays. They are highly energetic and pass easily through 

most material. Because of their high penetration ability, exposure to a gamma radiation 

source can result in a whole-body exposure. 

B-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(4) Neutrons, like gamma rays, are uncharged and are emitted only during a 

nuclear detonation; they do not present a fallout hazard. Compared to gamma rays,

neutrons can cause 20 times more damage to the tissue. 

d. The three principle means to mitigate nuclear weapon effects are time, distance, 

and shielding. 

(1) Time. Minimize the exposure times of the personnel conducting the 

decontamination. Personnel should remain inside unless directed otherwise through the 

chain of command. See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, 

Biological, and Chemical (NBC) Protection for information on radiation exposure guidance. 

(2) Distance. Maximize the distance from the hazards. 

(3) Shielding. Concentrate efforts to prevent physical contact with the fallout. 

As a minimum, wear the appropriate IPE when outside. The standard-issue chemical 

protective masks afford protection from the inhalation and ingestion of radioactive 

material. Remain within the protected areas or shelters until directed otherwise. Perform 

damage assessment, self-aid, and buddy care and report these actions. Decontaminate 

when necessary to remove or reduce the contact or long-term exposure hazards from the 

fallout particles. The units and activities that are exposed to the initial radiation must first 

identify the intensity (dose rate) of the residual or induced radiation using radiac meters. 

They will then send the NBC 4 contamination and radiation dose status reports through 

the command channels. The commanders identify the units that exceed the OEG. They

decide whether to withdraw these units and conduct decontamination operations or to 

continue with the mission. The personnel contaminated by the radioactive dust or debris 

perform an immediate decontamination by brushing or wiping their bodies and gear. As 

the mission permits, they can further reduce the radiation exposure by occupying armored 

vehicles, bunkers, shelters, or buildings. Highly contaminated vehicles and major weapon 

systems that pose a hazard undergo operational decontamination. This procedure limits

the spread of the contamination to other areas and reduces radiation hazards. Early

decontamination is necessary to cut down on the cumulative effects of radiation. 

3. Biological Warfare Agents 

There are many factors that determine how to decontaminate BW agents. 

a. BW agents are pathogens or toxins. Some kill, while others incapacitate; some 

act quickly, while others incubate for several weeks; and some are contagious, while others 

are not. The pathogens include spore-forming agents (anthrax) that can persist for days in 

the environment. See Table B-2, page B-4, for information on the properties of selected 

biological agents. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 B-3 
Table B-2. Survival of Selected Bacterial and Rickettsial Agents in Some Environments 

Agent Glass Paper Soil Seawater Water Vegetation 

Anthrax 

(Bacillus anthracis 

spores) 

Sprayed on: 56– 

70 days 

Direct sun: 

December: 6.5 but 

not 8.5 hours; 

April: 2.3 but not 3 

hours; May: 1.5 but 

not 2.5 hours 

Months to 

years 

Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

Brucellosis 

(Brucella abortus) 

Data not 

available 

Data not available 5–180 days 46 days Lake water: 

10 but not 

36 days 

0–6 days 

Brucellosis 

(Brucella melitensis) 

Dark: 16 days; 

Direct sun: 5–90 

min 

Diffused light: 7 

days 

6–69 days 11–46 

days 

Tap water: 

20–72 days 6–22 days 

Diphtheria 

(Corynebacterium 

diphtheriae) 

Dark: 104–159 

days; Direct sun: 

2–5 min but not 

more than 10 min 

91–159 days 10-208 days Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

E. Coli 

(Escherichia coli) 

Dried: Direct sun: 

1 min but not 

more than 5 min 

Data not available 21 - >80 days 

99.998% 

loss in 5 

days Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

Tularemia 

(Francisella 

tularensis) 

Data not 

available 

Data not available Data not 

available 

Data not 

available May grow in 

water 

Data not 

available 

Listeriosis 

(Listeria 

monocytogenes) 

Less than 24 

hours 

Diffused light: 24 

but not 48 hours 

In sun; soil 

surface: 

12 days (2-3 

cm); 

Buried: 180 

days 

Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

Tuberculosis 

(Mycobacterium 

tuberculosis) 

Dark: 4 days but 

not more than 8 

days 

Direct Sun: 15 

min not more 

than 20 min 

Data not available 

Drop saline on 

sand: Shade: 

>4 hours; 

Sun: 2.5 but 

not 3.6 hours 

Data not 

available 

7–17 but not 

25 days 

Data not 

available 

Glanders 

(Pseudomonas 

mallei) 

10–15 days 14–16 days Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 28 but not 

35 days 

Data not 

available 

Melioidosis Data not 

(Pseudomonas 

pseudomallei) 

Data not 

available 

9 days Greater than 

27 days 

available Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

Salmonellosis 

(Salmonella 

paratyphi) 

Data not 

available 

39 days 

Shade: 56 but 

not 70 days; 

Sun: 14 but 

not 29 days 

18 days Half life: 16 

hours 

Data not 

available 

Salmonellosis 

(Salmonella typhi) 

Dark: 15–33 hrs 

Sun: 5–15 min 

Data not available 

29 – 58 days 9 days 8 days Data not 

available 

B-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
B-2. Survival of Selected Bacterial and Rickettsial Agents in Some Environments1 

(Continued) 

Agent Glass Paper Soil Seawater Water Vegetation 

Salmonellosis 

(Salmonella 

typhimurium) 

Data not 

available 

39 days 

Shade: 56 but not 

70 days 

Sun: 14 but not 28 

days 

7–21 days Data not 

available 

Data not 

available 

Shigellosis 

(Shigella 

dysenteriae) 

Direct sun: 20 

but not 30 

minutes 

Data not available 13–30 days 

12 hours 

Data not 

available 

Several 

tropical fruits: 

1 hour 

Cholera 

(Vibrio 

cholerae) 

Dark: 24 but not 

30 hrs Direct 

sun: 2 but not 8 

minutes 

1–3 days Data not available 

3–7 days 

1 hr–3 days Data not 

available 

Plague 

(Yersinia 

pestis) 

Dark: 2 to 4.5 

days Direct sun: 

less than 1 to 

3.5 hours 

Dry: 4 but not 8 days 

Moist: more than 60 

days 

Dry: Less than 1 to 

3 days Moist: 

More than 60 days 

Data not 

available 16 days Data not 

available 

Leptospirosis 

(Leptospira 

interrogans 

var. Pomona) 

Data not 

available 

Data not available Dry: 2 hours 

Moist: 5 days 

18–24 

hours 

-20°C: 58 

min 15 to 

17°C: 12–42 

days 

34°C: 2 

days 

Data not 

available 

Psittacosis 

(Chlamydia 

psittaci) 

15 but not 20 

days (4 but not 

6 days when 

mixed with E. 

coli) 

Data not available Data not available 18–24 

hours 

Data not 

available 

Yock sac 

culture on 

straw, 22°C: 

20 but not 25 

days 

When mixed 

with E. coli: 6 

but not 8 days 

Q Fever 

(Coxiella 

burnetii) 

Data not 

available 

Data not available 

Sandy soil: 

Shaded Summer: 

102 days Winter: 

120 days 

In Sun: 

Summer: 56 days 

Winter: 70 days 

Nonsandy soil: 

99.5% loss in 9 

minutes 

Sun dry sterile soil 

(105

–106 conc), 4­

6°C: 

210 but not 270 

days; 

34-36°C: <60 days 

Data not 

available 

Tap water: 

20–22°C: 

160 days 

Data not 

available 

b. Knowing how an agent can be disseminated is important to shaping an effective 

response. The size, shape, intensity, and overall effectiveness of the agent deposition 

pattern are influenced by the delivery method. 

(1) Theater ballistic missiles are a viable means of delivery for many agents 

and may cause some contamination depending on the type of agent. 

(2) The size of the submunition pattern allows the area targets to be more 

effectively targeted. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 B-5 
(3) Stationary or vehicle-mounted ground sprayers can be used to deliver 

agents. However, the resulting line source can cover a very large area and may cause some 

contamination at the point of release for a point source depending on the type of agent. 

(4) As an airborne line source, aircraft sprayers may also yield some 

contamination depending on the type of agent. 

(5) In addition to weapons-associated delivery of BW, BW agents can be 

disseminated through other means such as fomite spread and food or water contamination. 

(a) Using inanimate objects (fomites) to spread an agent is another 

potential way to disseminate a biological agent, such as smallpox. 

(b) Food or other products for human consumption are also a group that is 

vulnerable to BW agent contamination. 

(c) Water supplies are a potential means for a biological attack. Some 

pathogens can grow and survive in water for a considerable length of time. However, the 

amount of agent required to have an operational impact make this a less likely means of 

delivery. 

c. Environmental Factors. 

(1) Environmental factors will dictate the size and shape, dosage at inhalation, 

height of the agent deposition, and the concentration of the agent deposition patterns on 

the ground. 

(2) The conditions necessary to cause an operationally significant 

reaerosolization hazard are not completely understood. The form of the agent at the time of

delivery is significant. Dry anthrax may be deposited over large areas with relatively small 

deposition levels on the ground. It is unlikely that reaerosolization of the anthrax from 

these depositions will generate an operationally significant hazard. 

d. Most biological agents are not persistent and will decay within hours or days 

with exposure to the environment. However, anthrax spores can survive in a nonvegetative 

state for years if embedded just beneath the surface where they would be shielded from UV 

radiation, temperature, and humidity effects. 

e. The DOD biological sampling kit provides a simple presumptive identification 

capability for a limited number of biological agents (pathogens and toxins). However, the 

user will most likely not know what areas are contaminated. BW agents are generally not

recognizable in the air or on a surface by the human senses. 

(1) Since BW agents are released as small particles and aerosols, they tend to 

move with the wind. Stronger winds move the clouds faster, resulting in a lower exposure. 

In calm conditions, the agent cloud stays close to the release site. 

(2) A successful attack requires the agent to mix with the air. Stable layers

restrict the vertical movement of the agent particles so that the agent released below an 

inversion remains available for inhalation and causes a higher likelihood of exposure. 

(3) Landforms, buildings, and surface coverings (e.g., trees, brush, sand, and 

asphalt) influence the channeling of the wind and affect the spatial agent distribution. 

(4) BW agents decay in the atmosphere at different rates based on heat, 

humidity, and exposure to UV light. Most BW agents will survive for relatively short 

B-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
periods of time (minutes to hours) in the open atmosphere. The relatively low rate of 

biological decay of anthrax spores makes anthrax an attractive BW agent. Anthrax can 

survive between one and two days in the air. 

(5) In a weaponized release, the level of deposition onto ground surfaces is very 

low. Agent survival on the surfaces is an important characteristic for considering the risk 

from a reaerosolization and the need for decontamination. Anthrax spores and smallpox 

virons have been found to be quite stable in soil (for many years). 

(6) The time of day affects the operational impacts of an attack because each 

agent biologically decays at a different rate depending on temperature, humidity, and UV 

light intensity. In general, night or early morning, with their lower temperatures and UV 

light, provides the best conditions for a successful BW agent attack because of the lower 

biological decay. During this period, neutral and inversion conditions (especially with low 

wind speeds) result in the agent clouds, which maintain lower physical decay (i.e., 

spreading of the biological agent over time). 

4. Chemical Agents 

There are many considerations when determining chemical-agent decontamination. 

a. Factors such as hazard duration, climactic conditions, the amount and type of 

contaminated resources, the number of personnel who physically come in contact with 

contamination, and the type of chemical agent affect, postattack recovery, and medical 

support activities are all considerations for determining chemical-agent decontamination. 

The primary CW agents of concern for decontamination are nerve and blister agents. 

Adversaries may seek to increase their effectiveness of chemical agents by employing them, 

where possible, under favorable weather conditions. Weather factors that affect 

chemical-agent employment include wind speed, air stability, temperature, humidity, and 

precipitation. 

b. Chemical agents can adversely affect personnel through three principle routes of 

entry: inhalation, absorption of liquid or solid agent through the skin, and absorption of 

vapor through the skin. 

c. The following are methods an enemy could use to enhance dissemination. 

(1) Chemical agents, such as blister and nerve, have historically been released 

in neat liquid form, but can be disseminated in thickened or solid particulate (dusty) form. 

Agents disseminated in neat liquid form initiate a hazard cycle wherein the droplets settle 

to the ground after detonation, posing a direct contact hazard to people and equipment 

while the droplets are airborne. The agent is also beginning to evaporate during the 

droplet fall phase, so a vapor hazard starts to emerge. The largest vapor concentrations

and probabilities of cross contamination remain highest while the droplets remain on the 

surface. In varying degrees of time, the agent will absorb into all but the most nonporous 

surfaces (e.g., glass, unpainted metal). Once this occurs, the agent may still present a

hazard because of the toxic vapors off-gassing from the contaminated surface. 

(2) Thickened agents are created by adding small amounts of selected 

compounds to the agent and thoroughly mixing the substances. Agent thickening may 

increase the time required for the agent to sorb into major terrain surfaces. During the 

decontamination process, thickened agents generally require considerably more effort. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 B-7 
(3) Chemical-agent penetration of materials presents challenges that personnel 

must recognize. Toxic vapors from absorbed liquid agents can penetrate nonporous 

materials and create a residual vapor hazard, even though physical contact with the liquid 

agent never occurred. Further, personnel must be aware that chemical agents can 

penetrate barrier materials, such as plastic sheeting, and release toxic vapors on the 

underside of the material. Table B-3 provides examples of agent penetration times for 

common materials. Agent penetration over time is one of the reasons that contaminated 

barrier materials should be replaced as soon as possible after an attack. 

Table B-3. Protective Capability of Common Barrier Material (in Minutes) 

Barrier Material GD TGD HD VX 

Wool Blanket 2 84 84 600 

Helicopter Cover 29 Data not available Data not available 600 

Heavy Tarp 120 120 120 600 

Plastic Pallet Cover 180 180 180 600 

NOTE: The criteria for these examples are the penetration of toxic vapor through the 

material. 

d. Characteristics. 

(1) Chemical agents, like all other substances, may exist as solids, liquids, or 

gases depending on temperature and pressure. Most wartime chemical agents used in 

munitions are liquids, although some may be in a solid or dusty form. Following a

detonation of the munitions container, the agent is primarily dispersed as liquid or aerosol. 

(2) Certain chemical agents, such as selected nerve or blister agents, when 

encountered during the warm months of the year at sea level are liquids, but they are 

volatile to a certain extent. That is, they volatize or evaporate, just as water or gasoline 

does, to form an often invisible vapor. A vapor is the gaseous form of a substance at a 

temperature lower than the substance boiling point (BP) at a given pressure. 

(3) The tendency of a chemical agent to evaporate depends not only on its 

chemical composition, vapor pressure, air temperature, and air pressure, but also on 

variables such as wind velocity and the nature of the underlying surface with which the 

agent is in contact. All external factors being equal, because of the respective agents vapor 

pressures, pure mustard is less volatile than the nerve agent GB, but is more volatile than 

the nerve agent VX. However, all of these agents evaporate more readily when the 

temperature rises, a strong wind is blowing, or when they are resting on a nonporous 

surface rather than on a porous surface. 

(4) When a chemical agent is disseminated as a vapor from a bursting 

munition, the cloud initially expands, grows cooler and heavier, and tends to retain its 

form. If the vapor density of the released agent is less than the vapor density of the air, the 

cloud rises, mixes with the surrounding air, and dilutes rapidly. If the agent forms a dense

gas (the vapor density of the released agent is greater than the vapor density of air), the 

cloud flattens, sinks, and flows over the earth’s surface. 

(5) Aerosols are finely divided liquid or solid substances suspended in the 

atmosphere. Airborne aerosols behave in the same manner as vaporized agents, but are 

heavier and tend to retain their forms and settle back to the earth. 

B-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(6) When a chemical agent is used for its liquid effect, evaporation also causes 

the agent to release chemical vapor. The liquid continues to evaporate while the liquid 

droplets are airborne and for some period of time after reaching the surface. Agent vapor 

pressure will govern the rate at which the liquid will evaporate. Once the liquid is no 

longer present on the surface, the desorption (chemical agent vapor returning back into the 

air) process begins. 

(7) Some agents may be in a powder or dusty form. Dusty agents are created 

by soaking very small particles of inert substances in liquid chemical agents. These solid 

particles retain about half of the agent that is found in a liquid droplet of the same size. 

e. See Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and 

Chemical Reconnaissance for detailed information on detector capabilities and employment 

techniques. 

f. Chemical-Agent Response to Decontamination Practices. 

(1) When the decontamination process includes scrubbing, decontamination

effectiveness is greatly improved. This appears to be true whether the mode of action of the 

decontaminant is principally chemical or physical because the mechanical action of 

scrubbing allows a greater amount of agent to react at any given time. For example, testing

has shown that scrubbing is indispensable while using soapy water in the decontamination 

of HD. In general, dissolving the agent in the decontaminant facilitates the rapid 

destruction of an agent. Additionally, with a longer weathering time before 

decontamination there is an increase in the decontamination effectiveness because of the 

evaporation of the CW agent resulting in less CW agent requiring decontamination. 

(2) The overall subjective rating of the decontamination effectiveness of hot, 

cold, or hot soapy water and steam for all surfaces and agents is: steam > hot water > hot 

soapy water > cold soapy water > cold water. However, G and V agents are more soluble in 

cold water than in hot and HD is more soluble in higher water temperatures. 

(3) Bleach is effective in removing agents from surfaces; however, it is not able 

to remove agents that have already penetrated into the paint. Thus, while a bleach wash 

will remove all the contamination from a painted surface, none is destroyed inside the paint 

layer. To remove agent H from the paint, an organic solvent in the decontaminant is 

usually required. Nonsorptive paints, such as CARC, inhibit the penetration of agent into 

the paint layer, thus allowing the bleach to react with the agent. 

5. Toxic Industrial Material 

TIM can be found during all types of operations in peacetime or war. 

a. A TIM hazard, whether manufactured, stored, distributed, or transported can 

present hazards to US forces. TIM should be recognized for the hazard they pose and the 

risks that may result from an explosion or fire. Most present a vapor (inhalation) hazard.

This vapor concentration may be very high at or near the point of release. It may also

reduce the oxygen concentration below what is required to support life. TIM are generally 

categorized as shown in Table B-4. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 B-9 
Table B-4. Categories of TIM 

Category Type of Material Primary Uses 

Agriculture Insecticides, herbicides, and 

fertilizers 

Agriculture and vector control 

Industrial Chemical and radiological material Manufacturing processes, cleaning, and water 

treatment 

Production and research Chemical and biological material Laboratories and storage facilities 

Radiological Nuclear fuel and medical sources Nuclear power plants, medical facilities, industrial 

plants, and laboratories 

b. Forces will generally operate in environments where there are TIM. If an 

uncontrolled or deliberate release occurs, there may be an impact on the full range of 

military operations. Most TIM are released as vapors. These vapors exhibit the same

dissemination characteristics as CW agents. The vapors tend to remain concentrated

downwind from the release point (RP) and in natural, low-lying areas such as valleys, 

ravines, or man-made underground structures. High concentrations may remain in 

buildings, woods, or any area with low air circulation. Explosions may create and spread 

liquid hazards, and vapors may condense to liquids in cold air. 

c. The most important action if TIM is released is the immediate evacuation of 

personnel outside the hazard area. Use the Emergency Response Guidebook to identify

specific hazards and decontamination implications. 

6. Technical Reach-Back 

Technical reach-back is the capability to contact a technical SME when an issue 

exceeds the on-scene subject matter expert’s (SMEs) capability. Reach-back should be 

conducted using established unit protocols. Many of the reach-back resources listed in 

Table B-5 have other primary missions and are not specifically resourced for reach-back. 

Issues may include nonstandard agent decontamination of CBRN and TIM. This 

information could include persistency, medical effects, and decontamination or protection 

requirements. 

Table B-5. Technical Reach-Back POCs 

Organization Telephone 

National Response Center, Chemical 

Terrorism/Chemical Biological Hot Line 

1-800-424-8802 

Technical Chemical and Biological 

Assistance Hot Line 

1-877-269-4496 

DTRA 1-877-244-1187, 1-703-325-2102 

AFRRI 1-301-295-0316/0530 

USAMRIID 1-888-872-7443 

USAMRICD 1-800-424-8802 

a. The National Response Center (NRC) mans the hotline service and serves as an 

emergency resource for technical assistance. The USCG operates the NRC, and trained 

operators staff the hotline 7 days a week, 24 hours a day. The CB hotline is a joint effort of 

the USCG, Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI), FEMA, Environmental Protection 

Agency (EPA), Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS), and DOD. Specialty

areas include the following: 

• Detection equipment. 

B-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• PPE. 

• Decontamination systems and methods. 

• Physical properties of CB agents. 

• Toxicology information. 

• Medical symptoms from exposure to CB agents. 

• Treatment of exposure to CB agents. 

• Hazard prediction models. 

• Federal response assets. 

• Applicable laws and regulations. 

b. The USA Edgewood Chemical and Biological Center (ECBC) hotline provides 

technical assistance to emergency responders. The hotline is manned and operated 7 days 

a week, 24 hours a day. Technical CB assistance from ECBC can be obtained by calling 

1-877-269-4496. 

c. The Defense Threat Reduction Agency (DTRA) can provide technical reach-back 

information and services for on-scene personnel. The focal/coordination point for support is 

through the DTRA Emergency Operations Center (EOC). DTRA can be contacted by calling 

1-877-244-1187. 

d. The Armed Forces Radiobiology Research Institute (AFRRI) can provide DOD 

technical support capability for nuclear/radiological incidents or accidents. AFRRI can be 

contacted by calling 1-301-295-0316/0530. 

e. The United States Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases

(USAMRIID) provides medical and scientific SMEs and technical guidance to commanders 

and senior leaders on the prevention and treatment of diseases and the medical 

management of biological casualties. USAMRIID can be contacted by calling 

1-888-872-7443. 

f. The United States Army Medical Research Institute of Chemical Defense 

(USAMRICD) provides medical and scientific SMEs and technical guidance to commanders 

and senior leaders on the prevention and treatment of chemical casualties. USAMRICD 

can be contacted by calling 1-800-424-8802. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 B-11 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix C 

DECONTAMINANTS 

1. Background 

A decontamination procedure is characterized by the use of specific decontaminants, 

equipment, or actions to decontaminate an object; one or more modes of decontamination 

may be involved. Each particular mode of decontamination is determined by the process 

that best effects decontamination (i.e., chemical, physical, or natural processes). In most 

decontamination procedures, all three modes of decontamination occur, supplementing each 

other. 

2. Types of Decontaminants 

There are three general types of decontaminants—natural, standard, and 

miscellaneous. There are also developmental decontaminants that are being tested and 

evaluated. 

a. Natural Decontaminants. 

(1) Weathering. Weathering gradually decomposes CB agents by aeration, 

hydrolysis, and evaporation. The time necessary for decontamination by weathering 

depends on the persistency of the agent, its composition, climatic conditions, and the type of 

surface. Although weathering is the easiest method of decontamination, persistency of an 

agent is difficult to predict. Therefore, mission deadlines, unfavorable weather conditions, 

or hazards to unprotected personnel may require the use of a faster method of 

decontamination. Contaminated surfaces will be posted with standard contamination 

markers and may be left to the natural decontamination process. Natural weathering of a

chemical agent is the simplest method of decontamination and, in some cases, may be the 

preferred method. If environmental conditions are suitable, weathering is an effective way 

to decontaminate military materiel, including heavy equipment and vehicles. Increases in 

the temperature and relative wind speed are the two key facts that accelerate the 

evaporation of an agent from a contaminated surface. In areas where warm, sunny, windy, 

and dry weather conditions exist, a substantial amount of agent would evaporate under 

weathering conditions. On the other hand, evaporation may not be practical for 

cold-weather or nighttime decontamination if there is a time constraint. Although

weathering is recommended for chemical agents with high volatilities, such as GD or GB, 

their evaporation time frame would change when applied with a thickening agent. If time 

constraints are of little consequence, evaporative decontamination by weathering is an 

option for many materials in warm weather. The rate of weathering from surface types 

examined (bare metal, painted metal surfaces) at approximately 25°C shows the following 

order of decrease as a function of time: This order for the neat agents parallels what might 

be expected from examining their vapor pressure (GD > TGD > HD > THD > VX). 

(a) Air. Winds rapidly disperse the vapors of the chemical agents. 

(b) Temperature and Wind. High temperatures speed up the change of 

state for liquid vapor (evaporation) and hasten the dispersion of chemical agents in the air. 

The persistency of the liquid chemical agents decreases as the temperature increases. 

Because the CW agent evaporation rate approximately doubles with each 10°C increase in 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-1 
temperature and because evaporation increases an average of approximately 25 percent 

with each 1 meter per second wind speed, the blowing of hot winds over CW 

agent-contaminated areas should hasten the weathering process. 

(c) Humidity and Precipitation. Moisture tends to hydrolyze the chemical 

agents. However, most agents hydrolyze very slowly. Heavy rain aids the decontamination

by mechanically removing the agents. However, it may cause a concentration of agents in 

drainage areas, thus creating another contamination hazard. 

(d) Sunlight. Sunlight serves as a decontaminant. Even in cold weather, 

the direct sun may warm surfaces above air temperature and hasten evaporation and 

decomposition of the agents. Additionally, the sun’s UV radiation will destroy most BW 

agents. 

(2) Earth (Covering). Earth can be used to seal in the contamination or as an 

absorbent for the contamination. Covering an area with approximately 4 inches of earth 

gives protection as long as the earth is not disturbed and the chemical agent exposed. 

Additional protection may be obtained by mixing bleach with the earth. An area treated in 

this manner may be subjected to light use; however, periodic monitoring will be required. 

(3) Fire. The ideal conditions for the use of fire are during periods of lapse 

temperature gradient with a moderate wind speed away from friendly forces. Burning

operations could cause a downwind hazard and should be carried out with caution. 

(4) Water. 

(a) Flowing water will flush agents from surfaces and will hydrolyze some 

agents, such as mustard and lewisite. Hydrolysis is a very slow process and should not be 

used as a primary means for decontamination. Hot water is a much more effective 

decontaminant than cold water, and the addition of soap produces a more effective 

decontaminant. 

(b) Although water alone will hydrolyze mustards and lewisites, a toxic 

and blistering residue is formed. Scrubbing with hot, soapy water will physically remove 

the residue; an alkaline solution will destroy the chemical-agent properties. Therefore, 

water alone should not be used to decontaminate objects when it is practical to use 

standard decontaminants. 

(c) High-pressure application produces a better cleaning action than low 

pressure. Flushing will remove the surface contamination but will not affect the agent that 

is sorbed. 

(d) Water used in decontamination operations is contaminated and must 

not be disposed of in areas where it might flow or be washed into streams or other bodies of 

water or where it might contaminate groundwater used as a water supply. 

(e) Soaking contaminated items in boiling water is an excellent method of 

decontamination. Soaking them in cold water is less effective. If hot water is not available 

or if it might cause damage to the item, warm water may be used. 

(5) Soil. Soil should be considered a field-expedient decontaminating medium 

whether or not other decontaminants are available for use. However, the effectiveness of 

soil as a field-expedient decontaminant remains to be quantified. In all tests using soils or 

clays as the decontaminating medium, it was concluded that as much material as possible 

must be used for decontamination and that decontamination must begin as soon as 

C-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
possible. The use of ample soil will help ensure the absorption of chemical agents and will 

also reduce the amount of vapor that is released. Soil can be used to remove chemical 

agents from surfaces by scouring and by sorption. Sorption occurs primarily in the clay and 

organic soil fractions. In the absence of better absorbents, soil may be used in removing 

liquid contamination from material; however, the used soil becomes contaminated and must 

be treated as contaminated waste. 

(a) Under various conditions, chemical agents that have been sorbed by 

clay minerals can desorb, presenting a secondary hazard. Water has a tendency to hinder 

the sorption process in soil. Water also contributes to the movement and redistribution of 

chemicals entrapped in soils. The role in sorption and the inactivation of chemical agents 

by the organic matter in soils is not fully known. Nerve agents are decomposed by 

naturally occurring processes in the soil. The degradation of mustard also occurs; however, 

the rates and data on the conditions are very sparse. Studies indicate that mustard is very

difficult to degrade by natural processes occurring in soil. 

(b) The way agent is held within various soil components is not 

completely understood. Tests have shown that, following sorption, some agents can be 

released from the soil; thus, they can contaminate individuals who come in contact with 

contaminated soil. Work done with organophosphate insecticides indicates that clays will 

probably not permanently adsorb nerve agents. Certain insecticides, and presumably

chemical agents, can remain in soil for long periods. Soil used in decontamination should 

be marked, dated, and isolated. 

(c) Testing has shown that soil can be effective when used simply as a 

scouring material. However, coarse materials have the least effective surface area for 

sorption and are, thus, less effective in this role. Clay is the most absorptive portion of the 

soil. Table C-1 (page C-4) provides guidelines for the use of soil as a decontaminant. 

b. Standard Chemical Decontaminants. 

(1) STB. 

(a) Description and Use. STB is a decontaminating agent for most CW 

agents. STB is a mixture of chlorinated lime and calcium oxide in a white powder form. 

STB, in a diluted solution, can be substituted for household bleach. When manufactured, it 

contains 30 percent available chlorine. Because of this chlorine content, a protective mask 

and gloves should be worn when handling STB. STB decomposes slowly in storage; this 

decomposition is easily recognized by the chlorine odor. STB can be expected to cause

serious degradation of electronic equipment, it is corrosive to most metals, and it is 

injurious to most fabrics. It has a slight effect on nonmetals and a moderate effect on 

sealants. 

(b) Chemical Action. STB decontaminates mustard, lewisite, and nerve 

agents. The vapor given off during the reaction with chemical agents is likely to be toxic. 

Bleach will produce a strong exothermic reaction with liquid mustard. This reaction may be 

severe enough to produce a flame. STB may be applied directly to surfaces contaminated 

with liquid mustard when there is no objection to potentially toxic vapors or if extreme heat 

would not damage the surface. Mixing STB with water or earth facilitates its distribution 

and diminishes the temperature resulting from its reaction with liquid mustard. Dry

surface and deposits of STB do not react with liquid chemical agents that have been 

absorbed into the ground or other porous materials, because they do not come into direct 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-3 
contact with the agent. However, as long as STB retains its chlorine content, it serves to 

neutralize the vapors as they rise from the contaminated surface. Due to the decomposition 

of STB, the covering should be renewed at least every 24 hours. If the seal is broken by 

abrasion or traffic, the vapors will again become a hazard and the STB covering must be 

renewed. 

Table C-1. Guidelines for the Use of Soil as a Decontaminant 

• Use any relatively dry soil as a decontaminant. Under adverse conditions, wet soil is better than nothing. 

• Begin the decontamination procedure as soon as possible so that a high percentage of agents will be removed. 

• Smear soil or mud on equipment prior to a chemical attack as a precautionary measure. This will provide 

preemptive sorption of liquid chemical agent. A soil or mud coating will also help protect against agent aerosols 

or vapor. A soil or mud patch could serve as a temporary barrier to seal small breaks or tears in protective 

coverings. 

• Establish an order of priority when decontaminating unprotected surfaces so that items with porous surfaces are 

decontaminated first. For porous materials, the elapsed time between contamination and decontamination 

should be less than 15 minutes; for less porous materials, the elapsed time between contamination and 

decontamination should not exceed 1 hour. If these times are exceeded, decontamination with soil can still be 

performed; however, the effectiveness of the decontamination will be diminished. 

• Rub soil over contaminated surfaces to hasten the agent absorption and facilitate the abrasive removal of the 

agent from equipment. Use caution when removing the agent from porous surfaces to avoid forcing the agent 

into the pores. 

• Discard spent soil, and replace it with fresh soil between 30 seconds and 1 minute if additional decontamination 

is required. The absorptive capacity of soil used for decontamination will be exhausted. 

• Use at least four times the minimum amount of soil required to remove the visible agent to complete 

decontamination. 

• Identify or mark the used soil following decontamination so that it can be properly treated and avoided for as long 

as possible. 

• Vacate any area where the soil was used as a decontaminant following decontamination because agent can 

slowly desorb as vapor from contaminated soil. 

NOTE: If no better alternative exists, soil previously used for decontamination can be guardedly used again. 

Processes in the soil slowly deactivate agents, thus the longer the time lapse since the use of a soil, the 

safer it will be. Additionally, the agent will slowly desorb from the soil, which will further reduce soil 

contamination. 

(c) STB Mixtures. STB may be mixed with water to form a wet mixture 

called “slurry”, or it may be mixed with dry earth to form “dry mix.” 

• Slurry. There are two types of slurry: one for manual application and 

the other for application by a PDDA. For manual application with swabs, brushes, or 

brooms, the most effective slurry consists of approximately equal parts (by weight) of STB 

and water, prepared by mixing 50 pounds of STB with 6 gallons of water. The 

recommended load for a 500-gallon PDDA is 1,300 pounds (or approximately 26 fifty-pound 

cans) of STB and 225 gallons of water. Detailed information about the preparation of slurry 

for use in the M12A1 PDDA is in applicable equipment TOs and TMs. To prepare the

slurry, mix 100 pounds of STB with 20 gallons of hot water. 

• Dry Mix. This mixture consists of STB thoroughly mixed with dry 

earth. The proportion by weight is two parts (two shovelfuls) of STB to three parts (three 

shovels full) of earth or other dry material. Personnel may shuffle their boots in dry mix 

before and after completing decontamination operations in which their boots are likely 

exposed to agents. Dry mix may be placed under equipment to decontaminate any agent 

flushed from it. For small-area decontamination, use approximately 1 pound of STB per 

square yard for short, grassy areas and 3 to 5 pounds per square yard for bushy or wooded 

areas for the decontamination of liquid chemical agents. 

C-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(d) Use in Cold Weather. STB mixtures (dry mix and slurry) do not 

effectively decontaminate agents that have become solidified as a result of low 

temperatures. 

(e) Procedures after Decontamination. STB can be left on many surfaces 

after use. However, it must be rinsed thoroughly from metal surfaces immediately 

following the 30 minute contact time. Metal surfaces must then be oiled or greased to 

prevent corrosion. On wood or other porous surfaces, several applications of STB may be 

necessary. When decontamination is complete, surfaces must be flushed with water to 

remove slurry. 

(2) High-Test Bleach (HTB) or HTH. HTH is a bleach material in granular or 

tablet form, containing a minimum of 70 percent calcium hypochlorite. The compound

contains a higher percentage of chlorine than STB and is, therefore, more corrosive. HTH 

can be used for the decontamination of individuals and personal protective material. HTH 

will not blister paint during a decontamination operation that includes a prerinse and 

postrinse; however, it can severely corrode metals. See Tables C-2 through C-4 for 

information on preparing HTH solutions. 

Table C-2. Preparation of Decontamination Solution Using HTH (6-Ounce Bottles) 

% HTH Solution Amount of Bottles per 

4 Gallons Water1 Amount of Bottles per 10 Gallons Water2 Amount of Bottles per 20 Gallons Water3 

1% 1 2 4.5 

2% 2 5 9.5 

3% 3 7 14.0 

5% 5 12 24.0 

10% 9 22 44.0 

1

Add 3 ounces of detergent. 2

Add 9 ounces of detergent. 3

Add 13 ounces of detergent. 

Table C-3. Preparation of Decontamination Solution Using HTH (Granular) 

Water Amount of HTH (Granular) to Give 

5% Available Chlorine 

(50,000 ppm) 

Amount of HTH (Granular) to Give 

0.2% Available Chlorine 

(2,000 ppm) 

40 gal 25 lb 1 lb 

5 gal 3 lb 2 oz (5 tbls) 

1 gal 10 oz (1 to 1⁄2 cups) 1⁄2 oz (1 tbls) 

1 qt 2 1⁄2 oz (6 tbls) 1/10 oz (1 tsp) 

Table C-4. Preparation of 0.5 Percent Available Chlorine Solutions 

Decontaminant Directions 

HTH (6-oz bottle) Mix one bottle HTH with 5 gallons of water. 

Household bleach Add one part bleach to ten parts water. 

(3) Reactive Sorbent Powder. This sorbent is a free-flowing, reactive, highly 

absorptive powder manufactured from aluminum oxide. The M100 SDS replaces the M11 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-5 
and M13 decontamination apparatuses, portable (DAPs) that were employed in spray-down 

operations associated with immediate decontamination. Each M100 SDS consists of two 

0.7-pound packs of reactive sorbent powder, two wash mitt type sorbent applicators, a case, 

straps, and detailed instructions. An optional chemical agent-resistant mounting bracket is 

also available. The M100 SDS uses a reactive sorbent powder to remove chemical agents 

from surfaces. The use of the M100 SDS decreases decontamination time and eliminates 

the need for water. 

c. Miscellaneous Decontaminants. 

(1) Soap provides a good cleansing medium for removing surface 

contamination, dirt, or grease. By this action, mustard is emulsified and carried off; it is 

not neutralized. Hot, soapy water is effective for decontaminating (neutralizing) G agents. 

V agents will be destroyed slowly by hot, soapy water. Although soapy water will remain 

effective as long as suds are maintained, a solution of 10 pounds of soap in 11 gallons of 

water is recommended for the decontamination of G agents. An important use of soap is in

personnel decontamination and the removal of contamination from aircraft. Soap solution

may be used in PDDAs, and in bucket-and-broom procedures for the decontamination of 

materials and surfaces. Soap is used in the decontamination of clothing by laundering. 

(2) Caustic Soda (Sodium Hydroxide or Lye). Caustic soda is a white solid that 

dissolves easily in water or alcohol. The chemical name for caustic soda is sodium 

hydroxide; it is commonly known as lye. Considerable amounts of heat are generated when 

caustic soda is dissolved; therefore, containers must not be handled with bare hands. A 

water solution of caustic soda will destroy G agents on contact. Caustic soda hastens the 

hydrolysis of lewisite. However, mustard is destroyed only after prolonged contact with 

caustic soda. An alcoholic solution of caustic soda will decontaminate BZ and VX agents. 

(a) Preparation and Use. Water solutions of caustic soda are effective in 

most concentrations, but normally the more concentrated the solution, the faster the 

decontamination. Hot solutions decontaminate faster than cold solutions. A 5 percent

solution prepared by dissolving 5 pounds of caustic soda in 12 gallons of water is 

recommended. Alcoholic solutions of caustic soda may be prepared by dissolving 5 pounds 

of caustic soda in a mixture consisting of 6 gallons of water and 6 gallons of alcohol. 

However, both woolen and cotton clothing are greatly deteriorated by even a 5 percent 

solution. Solutions should not be prepared in aluminum, magnesium, tin, or zinc 

containers. Contact with these metals causes the formation of flammable hydrogen gas. 

Iron or steel containers are suitable. Glass or earthenware containers can be used in an 

emergency if the solution is stirred constantly to keep the temperature down. 

(b) Safety Precautions. Skin areas that come in contact with either the 

solid or solution form of caustic soda should be washed immediately with a copious amount 

of water. Affected clothing should be removed immediately. If the eyes are involved, they 

should be flushed at once with a copious amount of warm water and the individual should 

seek medical treatment. Personnel handling caustic solutions should wear rubber gloves 

and protective masks or other respiratory and eye protective devices. Caustic soda burns 

human tissue and eats away clothing on contact. Ingestion causes damage to the digestive 

tract. Inhalation or ingestion of its dust or concentrated mist causes damage to the 

respiratory system and digestive tract. Seek medical attention immediately. The use of a 

mask and gloves is mandatory when handling caustic soda. 

C-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(3) Washing Soda (Sodium Carbonate). Washing soda is a white powder 

having alkaline properties. Commercial grades may contain large amounts of sodium 

carbonate. Common names include soda ash and laundry soda. It does not destroy blister

agents as readily as caustic soda or sodium hypochlorite. In addition, it does not destroy V 

agents as readily as sodium hypochlorite. A hot solution of washing soda is an effective 

means of decontaminating CN. The solution, hot or cold, is very effective for the 

decontamination of G agents and is recommended. 

(4) Ammonia (NH3) or Ammonium Hydroxide (NH4OH). Ammonium hydroxide 

is a water solution of ammonia. Ammonia or its water solution is an effective 

decontaminant (as a weak hydroxide) for several chemical agents. Ammonia may be used

to decontaminate the G agents; however, it is slower acting than caustic soda or caustic 

potash. 

(5) Common Solvents. Common organic liquids such as deicing fluids, 

kerosene, and alcohol may be used as solvents for many chemical agents. Most organic 

solvents are fire hazards, and some are toxic. Use suitable safety precautions. Solvents 

decontaminate by removing agents from contaminated surface; they do not destroy the 

agent. The solvent action of the liquid varies with the nature of the contaminated surface 

and the contaminant. 

(a) Use. Solvents must be used carefully to avoid spreading the 

contamination. Swabs saturated with solvent are used on small areas. A contaminated 

area is swabbed several times; swabs are changed as necessary. The number of times an 

area is swabbed is determined by the amount of contamination, the amount of grease on the 

surface, and whether the area will be treated with another decontaminant. 

(b) Safety Precautions. After being used on a contaminated surface, the

cloth end of the swab must not touch bare skin or clothing. The solvent used to wash off the 

agent becomes contaminated and must be disposed of as contaminated waste. If ground

contaminated with waste solvent is to be utilized, it must be decontaminated. 

(6) Degreasing Solvent. Degreasing solvents are noncorrosive,

water-dispersible liquids that are commonly used to clean aircraft and automotive engines 

by absorbing grease and oily dirt. The solvent may be used in decontaminating procedures. 

It may be diluted with water or kerosene and is effective in removing chemical agents by 

solvent action through the removal of grease and oil holding the agent. After being applied

to contaminated equipment, the solvent is allowed to remain 15 minutes or more, 

depending on the degree of contamination. Water, preferably under pressure, is used to 

remove the solvent and to flush the dirt, grease, oil, and chemical agents from the 

equipment. Contaminated waste must be disposed of properly. 

(7) Absorbents. Absorbents are various materials used to remove, but not 

destroy, agents. Earth, charcoal, coal dust, clay, and sawdust may be used as absorbents. 

The absorbents are contaminated after use and must be handled as contaminated waste. 

(8) Adsorbents. Adsorbent is a material used to adhere or become attached 

mechanically or chemically to a chemical agent, but which does not destroy the agent. The 

adsorbent is contaminated after use and must be handled as contaminated waste. 

(9) Household Bleach. Household bleach is 2 to 6 percent sodium hypochlorite 

in water. For vehicle wash down, household bleach will corrode the metal parts of vehicles. 

When the lack of water is a concern and a 5 percent available chlorine solution is needed, 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-7 
household bleach could be used for vehicle wash down. Bleach is useful to decontaminate 

all types of microorganisms and most chemical agents. 

d. Developmental Decontaminants. 

(1) DF 200. The DF 200 is an aqueous solution containing a peroxide activator 

and hydrogen peroxide. DF 200 can be used for the decontamination of material and for the 

following contamination on porous surfaces: G agents on concrete, asphalt, sand, and soil; H 

agents on concrete; and V agents on asphalt and concrete. However, the operational 

constraints in Table C-5 apply for the use of DF 200. At all times, operators working with 

DF 200 will be in MOPP gear and all runoff will be collected and treated as potential 

hazardous waste. Standard decontaminants should continue to be used for all other 

chemical contamination and all biological decontamination. 

Table C-5. Operational Limitations of DF 200 

• Use mops and brushes as DF 200 applicators. 

• Do not use degraded DF 200 for chemical and biological decontamination operations if STB or HTH is available. 

Degraded DF 200 is defined as DF 200 with compromised packaging, DF 200 without a lot number, DF 200 with 

an unknown storage temperature history, and/or DF 200 with a storage temperature history known to exceed 

85°F. 

NOTE: Surface corrosion (rust) may degrade the ability of DF 200 to decontaminate chemical agents. DF 200 

will produce surface corrosion of many unpainted/uncoated metallic and alloy surfaces. 

• Use a hot, soapy water prewash and two applications (15-minute contact time) of DF 200 during thorough 

decontamination for VX and HD. Use a hot, soapy water prewash and one application (15-minute contact time) 

of DF 200 GD. Apply the DF 200 as a scrub. 

• Do not use DF 200 on aircraft or optics. Limit DF 200 use on synthetic rubber or plastic materials (plastic 

windshields and seals) as much as possible under field conditions. Inspect nonmetallic material components for 

degradation after exposure to DF 200. 

• Do not use DF 200 for any biological contamination, including porous surfaces. 

• Maintain surface wetness with DF 200 for 30 minutes as DF 200 is active only when wet. Reapply and restart 

the 30-minute wet contact time if the DF 200 dries. 

• Use DF 200 within 6 hours after mixing. 

• Rinse nonpermeable clothing with water following exposure to DF 200. Do not expose semipermeable protective 

garments to liquid DF 200. 

• Replace mask filters after each DF 200 decontamination mission. Replace mask filters after every 12 hours of 

DF 200 decontamination operations if decontamination operations are continuous. 

• Use butyl gloves for up to 6 hours following exposure to DF 200. Use only 14- and 25-mil gloves for 24 hours 

after exposure to DF 200. 

• Do not treat sumps containing DF 200 with STB or HTH. Use additional DF 200 for sump treatment. 

• Rinse DF 200 from vehicles. 

• Do not mix DF 200 and STB/HTH, and do not store them together. 

• Use the M256A1 to verify decontamination following decontamination by DF 200. 

NOTE: Detector responses to DF 200 are similar to other field decontaminants. DF 200 can interfere with the 

accurate functioning of the USMC version of the CAM as well as all ICAMs, ACADAs, M8 paper, and M9 

paper. 

(2) Decon Green. This decontaminant provides the decontamination of CW 

agents even at low temperatures (-31°C). The solution is noncorrosive to common surfaces 

of military interest and leaves no toxic residue. Besides chemical agents, this

decontaminant also affords the destruction of anthrax spores to undetectable levels. Decon 

green consists of three components that are mixed together to provide the active 

decontaminant. Once mixed, the solution must be used within 2 hours. When the solution 

C-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
is applied, it should be rinsed off 15 minutes after application. The decontaminant can be 

applied using a spray applicator. Personnel must use MOPP4 when mixing or applying this 

decontaminant. 

(3) Reactive Skin Decontamination Lotion (RSDL). The FDA has approved 

RSDL for use by the US military. The lotion removes chemical agents or the T-2 toxin and 

also reacts with the chemical agents, rapidly neutralizing them so they are non-toxic. RSDL 

must be applied to exposed skin (intact) as soon as possible after exposure to a chemical 

agent. The lotion is impregnated in a sponge pad packaged as a single unit in a heat-sealed 

foil pouch. 

3. Decontamination Solution Preparation 

Several precautions must be followed when mixing STB or HTH. Use Tables C-2 

through C-4 (page C-5) to mix the appropriate decontamination solutions. 

a. Mixing STB Slurry. Add the STB to the water. Do not add detergent. 

WARNING 

DO NOT mix STB with anything except water. 

b. Mixing HTH Solutions. HTH is most effective in a solution with detergent. The 

detergent brings the agent into solution and, thus, in contact with the hypochlorite, where 

the chemical reaction can take place. In preparing the HTH decontamination solution, 

always add HTH to the water, mix to dissolve, and then add the detergent and stir 

thoroughly. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-9 
WARNING 

Never add water to HTH or add HTH to water with 

which detergent has already been mixed. A 

dangerous reaction may result in either case. 

4. Storage and Shelf Life 

The shelf life of HTH is 2 years. An expiration date is printed on each bottle. HTH is 

an oxidizer and should be kept isolated from fuels, oils, greases, paints, organic solvents, 

cellulose products, and any other material that is easily oxidized. These materials are 

incompatible and may cause a violent reaction or fire. HTH will react with rags, fabrics,

detergent, antifreeze, and ammonia in addition to the materials listed previously. When 

heated, HTH decomposes to chlorine gas, phosgene, and other toxic and corrosive fumes. 

Do not use HTH near heat sources or open flames because toxic gases may be produced. Do 

not stow oxidizers near heat sources, in areas adjacent to ammunition storage, or in areas 

where the maximum temperature exceeds 100°F (37.8°C) under normal operating 

conditions. Contact with moisture causes formation of toxic chlorine gas. Accidental 

mixture with small amounts of water spray from firefighting may cause toxic-gas 

formation. Drenching with excess water can control this reaction. Stowage areas shall be

kept cool, dry, and well-ventilated. Containers used for holding oxidizers should have a 

warning label indicating their reactivity and associated hazards. 

5. Decontaminants 

See Tables C-6 through C-8 (pages C-11 to C-21) for a representative listing of 

standard, miscellaneous, and natural decontaminants. 

C-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table C-6. Standard Decontaminants Available in the Supply System 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

STB 

(NSN 6850-00­

297-6653) 

Chemical 

G agents 

V agents 

Lewisite 

Biological 

Allow 30-minute contact 

time, and rinse with 

clear water. 

Not effective against 

mustard if it has 

solidified at low 

temperatures. 

Apply to porous 

surfaces several 

times. 

Will produce a very strong 

exothermic reaction on contact 

with a liquid blister agent or 

DS2. 

Will give off toxic vapors on 

contact with G agents. 

Is not recommended for ship 

use. Store it on the top deck 

only. 

Do not inhale or allow it to touch 

the skin. Wear a protective 

mask or respiratory protective 

device when preparing slurry. 

Store in an unheated warehouse 

away from combustibles and 

metals subject to corrosion. 

Has the following corrosive 

effects: 

Very corrosive to metals. Slight 

effect on nonmetals. Moderate 

effect on sealants. 

Is corrosive to most metals and 

damaging to most fabrics 

(rinse thoroughly and oil metal 

surfaces). 

Slurry paste: mix one 50-pound 

drum of STB with 6 gallons of 

water. Slurry paste consists 

of equal parts (by weight) of 

STB and water. 

Dry mix: mix two shovelfuls of 

STB to three shovelfuls of 

earth or inert material 

(ashes). 

Slurry mix, chemical: mix 40 

parts of STB to 60 parts of 

water (by weight). 

For M12A1 PDDA: use 1,300 

pounds of STB, 225 gallons 

of water, 121⁄2 pounds of 

antiset, and 24 ounces of 

antifoam. 

Slurry mix, biological: mix 7 

parts of STB to 93 parts of 

water (by weight). 

For M12A1 PDDA: use 150 

pounds of STB, 225 gallons 

of water, 121⁄2 pounds of 

antiset, and 24 ounces of 

antifoam. 

Camouflage: lampblack or dye 

mixes may be added for 

camouflage. 

Calcium 

hypochlorite 

(HTH or HTB) 

(NSN 6810-00­

255-0471 [6 

ounces]) 

(NSN 6810-01­

225-2682 [25 

pounds]) 

(NSN 6810-00­

225-0472 [100 

pounds]) 

Chemical 

G agents 

V agents 

Lewisite 

Mustards 

Biological 

including 

bacterial 

spores 

Reacts rapidly (within 5 

minutes) with 

mustards and 

lewisite. 

Acts faster than STB. 

Allow 15-minute contact 

time for biological 

agents. 

Use as a dry mix or 

slurry. 

Precautions are the same as for 

STB. 

Pure HTH will burn on contact 

with VX and HD. 

Toxic vapor and will burn skin. 

Protective mask and rubber 

gloves are the minimum 

protective equipment needed 

when handling. 

HTH should only be used if STB 

is not available. 

Has the following corrosive 

effects: 

More corrosive than STB. 

Will destroy clothing. 

Chemical: mix 5 pounds of 

decontaminant to 6 gallons of 

water (10% solution). 

Biological: mix 1 pound of 

decontaminant to 6 gallons of 

water (2% solution). 

PDDE: mix slurry of 1 part 

decontaminant to 2 parts 

water (any heavier slurry will 

clog the decontamination 

apparatus). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-11 
Table C-6. Standard Decontaminants Available in the Supply System (Continued) 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

Mask sanitizing 

solution 

Chemical 

Biological 

Use on a previously 

cleaned mask with 

filter elements and 

canisters removed. 

Place the mask face up; 

attach the canteen to 

the mask at the 

drinking tube. Drain 

one canteen full of 

sanitizing solution 

through the mask. 

Rinse the mask with 

two canteens of clear 

water. Immerse the 

mask and outserts in 

the sanitizing 

solution. Agitate the 

mask for 5 minutes. 

Rinse it twice in clear 

water, agitating 2 to 3 

minutes each time. 

Dry all parts of the 

mask and 

reassemble it. 

Use 1 gallon of solution 

for every ten masks. 

None Fill a standard plastic canteen to 

the shoulder with water. Add 

a 0.5-gram tube of calcium 

hypochlorite from the water 

purification kit (NSN 6810-00­

266-6976). Cover the 

canteen, and shake it 

vigorously for 30 seconds. 

Mix bulk quantities as follows: 

add 2 grams of calcium 

hypochlorite from a 6-ounce 

jar (NSN 6810-00-255-0471) 

to 1 gallon of water. 

Use a ratio of about 1 pound of 

soap per gallon of water for 

smaller amounts of solution. 

Mix 2 pints of detergent to 450 

gallons of water in the M12A1 

PDDA. 

Soap and 

detergents: 

detergent, GP, 

liquid (NSN 

7930-00-282­

9699) 

All agents 

(physical 

removal 

only) 

Scrub or wipe the 

contaminated surface 

with hot, soapy water, 

or immerse the item 

in the solution. 

Casualty-producing levels of 

contamination may remain in 

the runoff water and must be 

considered contaminated. 

Mix 75 pounds of powdered 

soap in 350 gallons of water. 

If powdered soap is not 

available, use bar laundry 

soap (75 pounds of soap cut 

into 1-inch pieces and 

dissolved in 350 gallons of 

hot water). 

Use a ratio of about 1 pound of 

soap per gallon of water for 

smaller amounts of soap 

solution. 

Mix 2 pints of detergent to 450 

gallons of water in the M12A1 

PDDA. 

C-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table C-7. Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

Sodium 

hypochlorite 

(household 

bleach) 

Chemical 

V agents 

Blister 

agents G 

Agents* 

Biological 

Radiological 

Will react rapidly (within 5 minutes) 

with blister and V agents. 

Allow a 10- to 15-minute contact 

time for biological agents. 

Should be applied undiluted with 

brooms, brushes, or swabs. 

Is the preferred decontaminant for 

ship use. A 5:1 concentration is 

recommended. 

Is harmful to the skin and 

clothing if undiluted. 

Remove from the skin and 

clothing by flushing with 

water. 

Has a limited storage 

problem. 

Should be stored in a cool 

place. 

Has the following corrosive 

effects: 

Is corrosive to metals 

unless rinsed, dried, 

and lubricated after 

decontamination. 

For chemical 

decontamination: no 

mixing is required. 

For biological 

decontamination: dilute 

by adding two parts 

bleach to ten parts 

water. 

For decontamination of 

cotton clothing and 

utensils: mix 2 cups of 

bleach with 1 gallon of 

water. 

For application: mix 

bleach half and half with 

water, and spray it from 

the PDDE. 

Ethylene glycol Chemical 

(physical 

removal 

only) 

Scrub on contaminated surfaces, 

and rinse thoroughly. 

Mix equal amounts of solution and 

water. 

Removes contamination 

only; does not 

neutralize it. Runoff 

residue must be 

considered 

contaminated. 

Mix equal amounts of 

solution and water. 

Solvents 

(gasoline, DP8, 

diesel fuel, 

kerosene, and 

similar solvents) 

Chemical 

(physical 

removal 

only) 

Scrub on contaminated surfaces, 

and rinse thoroughly. 

Removes contamination 

only; does not 

neutralize it. Runoff 

residue must be 

considered 

contaminated. 

None 

Sodium carbonate 

(washing soda, 

soda ash, or 

laundry soda) 

Chemical 

G agents 

CN 

Reacts rapidly with G agents, 

normally within 5 minutes. 

Is the preferred decontaminant for 

ship use. 

Should be used with a hot solution 

to decontaminate CN 

effectively. 

5% by weight is the recommended 

concentration. 

Mix 10 pounds of washing soda to 

12 gallons of water (10% 

solution). 

Not to be used against VX. 

It cannot detoxify VX 

and creates extremely 

toxic by-products. 

Does not dissolve or 

detoxify mustard 

agents. 

There are no storage 

limitations. 

Mix 10 pounds of washing 

soda with 12 gallons of 

water (10% solution). 

Ammonia or 

ammonium 

hydroxide 

(household 

ammonia) 

Chemical 

G agents 

Slower acting than sodium 

hydroxide or potassium 

hydroxide. 

Ammonium hydroxide is a water 

solution of ammonia. 

May require the use of a 

SCBA or specialpurpose mask. 

None 

Diethyl ether Chemical Good decontaminant for use in 

arctic regions. The freezing 

point is -241°F; the boiling point 

is 93°F. 

Is extremely flammable. 

Does not neutralize 

agents. 

None 

* The reaction time between sodium hypochlorite and G agents will be slower than that for V or H agents. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-13 
Table C-7. Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants (Continued) 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

2-propanone 

(acetone) 

Chemical 

(physical 

removal 

only) 

Effective for dissolving and 

flushing agents. 

Good decontaminant for use in 

arctic regions. The freezing 

point is -203°F; the boiling point 

is 133°F (evaporates rapidly). 

Is extremely flammable. 

Does not neutralize 

agents. 

None 

Hexachloramelamine Chemical 

Mustard 

Is not soluble in water, but is 

soluble in organic solvents such 

as gasoline, kerosene, and 

paint thinner. 

May require the use of a 

protective mask and 

rubber gloves when 

used. 

Is corrosive to metal. 

Is not soluble in water, but 

is soluble in organic 

solvents such as 

gasoline, kerosene, and 

paint thinner. 

Dichlorimine B and 

Dichoramine T 

Chemical 

Mustard 

None May require the use of a 

protective mask and 

rubber gloves when 

used. 

Is corrosive to metal. 

Is not soluble in water, but 

is soluble in certain 

organic solvents (e.g., 

dichlorethane). 

Is normally mixed as a 

10% solution in 

dichloroethane. 

Perchloroethylene 

(tetrachloroethylene) 

Chemical 

(physical 

removal 

only) 

Is good for use in arctic climates. 

The freezing point is -8°F; the 

boiling point is 250°F. 

Dissolves H and V agents, but not 

G agents. 

Requires no mixing (practically 

insoluble in water). 

Removes contamination 

only; does not 

neutralize it. Runoff 

residue must be 

considered 

contaminated. 

Nonflammable. 

Low toxicity. 

None 

C-14 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table C-7. Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants (Continued) 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

NaOH, sodium 

hydroxide 

(NSN 6810-00­

174-6581 [100 

pounds]) 

Chemical 

G agents 

Lewisite 

Biological, 

including 

bacterial 

spores 

Will neutralize G agents on contact. 

Allow 15-minute contact time. 

Must flush with large amounts of 

clear water. 

For small amounts, mix 10 pounds 

of lye with 12 gallons of water 

(10% solution). Mix it in an iron or 

steel container. Add lye to the 

water to prevent boiling and 

splattering due to heat being 

emitted. 

Use while hot. 

Will cause a red color change upon 

contact with M8 detector paper. 

Effectiveness is directly proportional 

to the strength of the solution. 

Will damage the skin, 

eyes, and clothes; 

and can cause 

upper respiratory or 

lung damage if 

inhaled. The 

affected area must 

be washed 

immediately with 

large amounts of 

water and flushed 

with diluted acetic 

acid or vinegar. 

Remove affected 

clothing. If eyes are 

involved, flush them 

at once with large 

amounts of warm 

water and seek 

medical attention. 

Full rubber protective 

clothing, gloves, 

boots, and a mask 

are required when 

using. 

Runoff is highly 

corrosive and toxic. 

Drain runoff into a 

sump, and bury it. 

Is not recommended 

for ship use. Store it 

on the top deck 

only. 

Is not recommended if 

less toxic caustic 

decontaminants are 

available. 

Can substitute with 

calcium hydroxide, 

potassium 

hydroxide, or 

trisodium 

phosphate. 

Is corrosive to most 

metals. 

Small amount: Mix 10 

pounds of lye with 12 

gallons of water (10% 

solution). Mix it in an iron 

or steel container (never 

aluminum, zinc, or tin). 

Add lye to the water to 

prevent boiling and 

splattering due to heat 

being emitted. Do not 

handle the mixing 

container with bare hands. 

Large amount (PDDE use): 

Mix 227 grams (1⁄2 pound) 

of lye with each gallon of 

water. Pump 350 gallons 

of water into the tank unit. 

Connect the tank unit, 

pump unit, and heater 

together. Heat the water 

to 122°F. Disconnect the 

heater unit, and add 175 

pounds of lye to the 

heated water. Circulate 

the solution with the pump 

unit until all the lye is 

dissolved. The 

temperature will increase 

noticeably. Use while hot. 

Simultaneous mixing and 

applying: Sprinkle dry lye 

on the contaminated area 

and then dissolve it with a 

spray of steam or hot 

water. Do not wash the 

lye off the surface while 

applying the steam or hot 

water. 

Paint removal: 1 pound of 

lye per 21⁄2 gallons of water 

is capable of removing an 

average coat of paint from 

about 11 square yards of 

surface. This solution is 

effective in removing paint 

on which chemical 

contamination has 

absorbed. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-15 
Table C-7. Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants (Continued) 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

Potassium 

hydroxide (caustic 

potash) 

Chemical 

G 

agents 

Lewisite 

Biological 

Will neutralize G agents on contact. 

Allow 15-minute contact time. 

Must flush with large amounts of 

clear water. 

For small amounts, mix 10 pounds 

of lye with 12 gallons of water 

(10% solution). Mix it in an iron or 

steel container. Add lye to the 

water to prevent boiling and 

splattering due to heat being 

emitted. 

Use while hot. 

Will cause a red color change upon 

contact with M8 detector paper. 

Effectiveness is directly proportional 

to the strength of the solution. 

Will damage the skin, 

eyes, and clothes; 

and can cause 

upper respiratory or 

lung damage if 

inhaled. The 

affected area must 

be washed 

immediately with 

large amounts of 

water and flushed 

with diluted acetic 

acid or vinegar. 

Remove affected 

clothing. If eyes are 

involved, flush them 

at once with large 

amounts of warm 

water and seek 

medical attention. 

Full rubber protective 

clothing, gloves, 

boots, and a mask 

are required when 

using. 

Runoff is highly 

corrosive and toxic. 

Drain runoff into a 

sump, and bury it. 

Is not recommended 

for ship use. Store it 

on the top deck 

only. 

Is not recommended if 

less toxic caustic 

decontaminants are 

available. 

Can substitute with 

calcium hydroxide, 

potassium 

hydroxide, or 

trisodium 

phosphate. 

Is corrosive to most 

metals. 

Small amount: Mix 10 

pounds of lye with 12 

gallons of water (10% 

solution). Mix it in an iron 

or steel container (never 

aluminum, zinc, or tin). 

Add lye to the water to 

prevent boiling and 

splattering due to heat 

being emitted. Do not 

handle the mixing 

container with bare hands. 

Large amount (PDDE use): 

Mix 227 grams (1⁄2 pound) 

of lye with each gallon of 

water. Pump 350 gallons 

of water into the tank unit. 

Connect the tank unit, 

pump unit, and heater 

together. Heat the water 

to 122°F. Disconnect the 

heater unit, and add 175 

pounds of lye to the 

heated water. Circulate 

the solution with the pump 

unit until all the lye is 

dissolved. The 

temperature will increase 

noticeably. Use while hot. 

Simultaneous mixing and 

applying: Sprinkle dry lye 

on the contaminated area 

and then dissolve it with a 

spray of steam or hot 

water. Do not wash the 

lye off the surface while 

applying the steam or hot 

water. 

Paint removal: 1 pound of 

lye per 21⁄2 gallons of water 

is capable of removing an 

average coat of paint from 

about 11 square yards of 

surface. This solution is 

effective in removing paint 

on which chemical 

contamination has 

absorbed. 

Detrochlorite Biological Thickened bleach useful on vertical 

surfaces. 

Allow 30-minute contact time, rinse 

with water. 

Apply by means of the PDDA. 

Coverage is 1 gallon per 8 square 

yards. 

Mixing the wetting 

agent and calcium 

hypochlorite in a dry 

and undiluted state 

may cause an 

explosion. 

Agent is very 

corrosive. 

Mix by weight 19.3% 

diatomaceous earth, 0.5% 

anionic wetting agent, 

2.9% calcium hypochlorite 

(70% available chlorine), 

and 77.3% water. 

Mix the wetting agent and 

diatomaceous earth with 

water before adding the 

calcium hypochlorite. 

C-16 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table C-7. Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants (Continued) 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

Iodine water 

purification tablets 

Biological Use when it is impractical to boil 

drinking water. 

Two iodine tablets per canteen are 

effective against most biological 

agents 

None None 

Ethylene oxide Biological, 

including 

bacterial 

spores 

Should be applied in the strength of 

30 pounds for every 1,000 cubic 

feet. 

Allow a 6-hour contact time (contact 

time must be doubled for each 

20°F drop in temperature below 

75°F). 

Should be used in an airtight 

enclosure. 

Flammable and 

explosive. 

Not recommended for 

interior use. 

None 

Disinfectant 

chlorine (NSN 

6840-00-270­

8172) 

Biological Use to decontaminate utensils, mess 

gear, exteriors of sealed 

containers, and food products that 

can withstand soaking. 

Allow a 30-minute contact time (stir 

occasionally). 

Rinse thoroughly in potable water. 

Make fresh solutions for rinsing and 

disinfecting utensils for each 100 

persons. 

Prepare an emergency solution by 

mixing one level MRE spoonful of 

calcium hypochlorite (water 

disinfecting powder) to each 10 

gallons of water. 

If liquid chlorine bleach is available, 

use about 1/3-canteen cup of 5% 

chlorine bleach to each 10 gallons 

of water. 

Dispose of any food or 

vegetables that are 

damaged and any 

outer leaves that 

are bruised or torn. 

Do not cut or peel 

fruits and 

vegetables before 

disinfecting. 

Use the solution only 

once. 

Dissolve one package of 

disinfectant in 20 gallons 

of warm, potable water 

(100°F). 

Hyamine 

(benzethonium 

chloride) 

Biological Allow a 5- to 30-minute contact time. 

Use a 0.1% to 1% solution (1 pound 

of hyamine for every 12 gallons of 

water yields a 1% solution). 

Very toxic; the 

estimated fatal dose 

to man is 1 to 3 

grams. 

Care should be taken 

when mixing to 

avoid the inhalation 

of powder. 

Agent is not to be 

used on aircraft or 

ships. 

Mix 1 pound of hyamine to 

every 12 gallons of water 

(yields a 1% solution). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-17 
Table C-7. Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants (Continued) 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

Formalin 

(formaldehyde) 

Biological, 

including 

bacterial 

spores 

Used for interior decontamination of 

relatively close areas. 

Allow vapors to remain 16 hours in a 

closed structure; aerate until the 

odor is no longer objectionable. 

Optimum conditions for spraying 

formalin are 70°F to 80°F with an 

85% relative humidity. 

The minimum effective relative 

humidity is 70%. 

Increase exposure time to 24 hours 

at 60°F. 

Agent is applied as a vapor from 

standard insecticide sprayers or is 

vaporized by heat or a bubbling 

steam from a pan. 

Personnel entering an 

area containing 

formalin vapors 

should— 

• Wear a protective 

mask. 

• Wear washable outer 

clothing, fastened to 

prevent vapors from 

entering at wrists, 

ankles, or neck. 

• Remove outer 

clothing after 

emerging from 

vapors. 

• Shower and put on 

clean clothing as 

soon as possible. 

Vapors are very toxic. 

Vapors are not 

flammable; open 

flame should not be 

used for vaporizing 

when methanol has 

been added to the 

agent. 

When steam is used, 

the source of the 

steam should be 

outside the area being 

decontaminated. 

Corrosive. 

Formalin will curl and 

discolor paper. 

Leaves a white 

residue. 

No mixing is required. 

However, less residue 

remains and less aeration 

is required if the mixture of 

five parts formalin and 

three parts methanol is 

used. 

Use this mixture at a rate of 

4 to 5 quarts per 1,000 

cubic feet of space. 

C-18 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table C-7. Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants (Continued) 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

Peracetic acid 

(PAA) 

Biological, 

including 

bacterial 

spores 

Allow a 10-minute contact time. 

Wipe with a rag or swab (immerse 

small items). Remove excess 

acid and aerate for 10 to 15 

minutes or until no objectionable 

odor remains. 

Available as a 40% solution. Mix 1 

quart of PAA to 31⁄2 gallons of 

water (add PAA to the water). 

Protective mask and 

clothing are 

required. 

Fumes are highly 

irritating. 

Burns and blisters on 

the skin will occur. 

A violent explosion 

may result if heavy 

metal ions come in 

contact with the 

agent. 

A 40% solution has a 

low flash point 

(105°F); a 3% 

solution is 

nonflammable. 

Store in original 

containers under 

refrigeration to 

prevent 

decomposition. 

Corrosive. 

Prolonged exposure 

will damage most 

material. 

Prolonged exposure 

will corrode iron and 

deteriorate rubber, 

plastic, and leather. 

Available as a 40% solution. 

Mix 1 quart of PAA to 31⁄2 

gallons of water (add PAA 

to the water). 

Carbon dioxide 

and ethylene 

oxide mixture 

(>87% ethylene 

oxide) 

Biological Recommended for interior use. Use 

in an airtight enclosure. 

Allow a 12-hour contact time 

(doubled for each 20°F drop in 

temperature below 75°F). 

Apply 30 pounds for every 1,000 

cubic feet. 

Aerate items next to the skin for 18 

to 24 hours. 

Nonflammable. 

Will blister the skin. 

None 

Oxidizing agents 

(nitric acid, aqua 

regia, sodium 

dichromate, and 

potassium 

permanganate) 

Radiological Effective in dissolving surfaces 

containing absorbed radioactive 

contamination. 

Apply to the surface, or dip the item. 

Rinse the surface thoroughly with 

water and detergent and then with 

clear water. 

Use only under the 

supervision of a 

trained individual. 

Will require the use of 

a neoprene or 

rubber protective 

apron, gloves, 

boots, and safety 

glasses when 

handling. (Rubber 

offers only limited 

protection.) 

Extremely corrosive. 

Exposure must be 

limited due to the 

corrosive nature of 

the solution. 

Aqua regia is prepared by 

mixing three parts of 

concentrated hydrochloric 

acid and one part of 

concentrated nitric acid. 

Other oxidizing agents do not 

require mixing. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-19 
Table C-7. Miscellaneous (Nonstandard) Decontaminants (Continued) 

Decontaminant Agent Use Cautions/Safety Preparation 

Complexing 

agents (versene, 

citric acid, 

sequesterene, 

sodium citrate, 

tartanic acid, 

sodium oxalate, 

sodium 

tartrategoxalic 

acid, 

othophosphoric 

acid, and similar 

agent) 

Radiological 

(physical 

removal 

only) 

Allow a 30-minute contact time, and 

then flush with water. 

Apply as a film over the surface 

using a PDDE, firefighting 

apparatus, or a tree or garden 

sprayer. 

Does not neutralize 

contamination. 

Runoff will be 

contaminated. 

Mix 3% to 5% of the agent 

(by weight) in water. 

Acids (sulfuric 

acid, hydrochloric 

acid, oxalic acid, 

and similar acids) 

Radiological Effective solvents for rust and 

mineral deposits holding 

radioactive material on metal 

surfaces. 

Allow a 1-hour contact time. 

Must be flushed with water, 

scrubbed with a water-detergent 

solution, and flushed again with 

water. 

Will require the use of 

respiratory 

protection when 

used in closed 

areas. May require 

the use of rubber 

boots, gloves, 

aprons, and goggles 

when used. 

Can produce boiling 

and splattering of 

the solution when 

mixed. 

Difficult to handle and 

is harmful to the 

body, especially the 

eyes. Flush the 

area immediately 

with water. Use a 

5% solution of water 

and baking soda 

(sodium 

bicarbonate). 

None 

C-20 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table C-8. Natural Decontaminants 

Decontaminant Agent Notes Cautions/Safety 

Water (Physical 

removal only) 

Chemical 

Biological 

Radiological 

Can be used to flush contamination from 

surfaces. 

Hot, soapy water is more effective in 

removing agents. 

Boiling for 15 minutes (30 minutes at high 

altitude) destroys biological agents. 

Is effective in physically removing 

contamination, but does not neutralize 

it. 

Do not use water on lewisite. 

Sea water (Physical 

removal only) 

None None 

Steam Chemical 

Biological 

Radiological 

None Is effective in physically removing 

contamination, but does not neutralize 

it. 

Absorbents (earth, 

sawdust, ashes, 

rags, and similar 

materials) 

(Physical 

removal only) 

Chemical 

Biological 

Radiological 

Used to physically remove gross 

contamination from surfaces. 

The contamination is transferred from the 

surface to the absorbent. 

The absorbent becomes contaminated 

and must be disposed of accordingly. 

Sufficient contamination to produce 

casualties may remain on surfaces. 

Sealants (concrete, 

asphalt, earth, paint, 

and similar 

materials 

(Physical seal 

only) 

Chemical 

Biological 

Radiological 

Sealants are used to physically seal in or 

shield contamination. 

Chemical - 4 inches of earth provides good 

protection. 

Biological - Burying items is an effective 

means of sealing off contamination. 

Radiological - 12 inches of earth provides 

good protection from fallout (3 inches will 

reduce the dose rate about one-half). 

Radiological - 1 inch of asphalt or concrete 

completely absorbs alpha and beta 

radiation. 

Radiological - 1⁄4 inch of grout shields alpha 

and beta radiation. 

A break in the surface of the sealant will 

expose the contamination. 

Contaminated areas covered with 

sealants must be marked with 

appropriate CBRN warning signs. 

Weather/time Chemical 

Biological 

Radiological 

UV light kills most bioorganism agents, 

organisms, and radiation decay over time. 

Should be used when time and the mission 

permit. 

None 

Burning Chemical 

Biological 

N/A Creates downwind hazards. 

Requires that sentries be posted to keep 

people out of the danger area. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 C-21 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix D 

DECONTAMINATION OF SPECIFIC SURFACES AND MATERIALS 

This appendix should be used to determine how to decontaminate various surfaces. 

Table D-1 lists specific surfaces or materials and briefly explains the representative 

methods of how to conduct a CBRN decontamination. In turn, detection and identification 

equipment must be used to check the completeness of decontamination. 

Table D-1. Decontamination Procedures for Specific Surfaces and Materials 

Surface or 

Material 

Types of Contamination and How to Decontaminate 

Chemical Biological Radiological 

Asphalt roads Weather. 

Flush with water. 

Spray with an STB slurry from 

the PDDE. 

Cover with STB (pure form). 

When liquid contamination is 

visible and personnel are 

nearby, use STB dry mix. 

Cover small areas or paths 

across roads with 4 inches of 

earth. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help prevent 

secondary aerosols, but does 

not decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on the 

surface (suppresses dust and 

associated reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry from 

the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household bleach 

solution. 

Brush or sweep. 

Flush with water (this may 

drive some of the 

contamination into the 

surface; waste must be 

controlled). 

Clean with a vacuum. 

Roofs Weather. 

Flush with water. 

Spray with an STB slurry from 

the PDDE. 

Cover with STB (pure form). 

When liquid contamination is 

visible and personnel are 

nearby, use STB dry mix. 

Cover small areas or paths 

across roads with 4 inches of 

earth. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help prevent 

secondary aerosols, but does 

not decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on the 

surface (suppresses dust and 

associated reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry from 

the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household bleach 

solution. 

• Apply detrochlorite. Leave it 

on at least 30 minutes, and 

then flush it with water. 

Brush or sweep. 

Flush with water (this may 

drive some of the 

contamination into the 

surface; waste must be 

controlled). 

Clean with a vacuum. 

Brick and 

stone roads 

Weather. 

Wash with soapy water, 

preferably hot. 

Spray with an STB slurry from 

the PDDE or apply with 

brushes and brooms. Leave 

the slurry on for 24 hours, and 

then flush it with water. 

Cover small areas or paths 

across roads with 4 inches of 

earth. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help prevent 

secondary aerosols, but does 

not decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on the 

surface (suppresses dust and 

associated reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry from 

the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household bleach 

solution. 

Brush or sweep. 

Flush with water (this may 

drive some of the 

contamination into the 

surface; waste must be 

controlled). 

Clean with a vacuum. 

Use abrasion (sand 

blasting). This provides 

direct and complete 

removal of contaminated 

dust; however, sand and 

equipment being used 

becomes contaminated. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 D-1 
Table D-1. Decontamination Procedures for Specific Surfaces and Materials (Continued) 

Surface or 

Material 

Types of Contamination and How to Decontaminate 

Chemical Biological Radiological 

Brick and stone 

buildings, 

bunkers, gun 

emplacements, 

and tank 

obstacles 

Weather. 

Wash with soapy water, preferably 

hot. 

Spray with an STB slurry from the 

PDDE or apply with brushes 

and brooms. Leave the slurry 

on for 24 hours, and then flush it 

with water. 

Use STB (pure form or dry mix) 

around buildings where 

wastewater runs. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help 

prevent secondary 

aerosols, but does not 

decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on 

the surface (suppresses 

dust and associated 

reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, 

areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry 

from the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household 

bleach solution. 

• Apply detrochlorite. 

Leave it on at least 30 

minutes, and then 

flush it with water. 

Brush or sweep. 

Flush with water (this may 

drive some of the 

contamination into the 

surface; waste must be 

controlled). 

Clean with a vacuum. 

Use abrasion (sand 

blasting). This provides 

direct and complete 

removal of contaminated 

dust; however, sand and 

equipment being used 

becomes contaminated. 

Concrete roads Weather. 

Spray with an STB slurry from the 

PDDE. 

Cover with an STB slurry or dry 

mix. 

Cover small areas or paths across 

roads with 4 inches of earth. 

Scrape the layer of contaminated 

earth to the side of the road. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help 

prevent secondary 

aerosols, but does not 

decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on 

the surface (suppresses 

dust and associated 

reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, 

areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry 

from the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household 

bleach solution. 

Brush or sweep. 

Flush with water (this may 

drive some of the 

contamination into the 

surface; waste must be 

controlled). 

Clean with a vacuum. 

Use abrasion (sand 

blasting). This provides 

direct and complete 

removal of contaminated 

dust; however, sand and 

equipment being used 

becomes contaminated. 

Earth: roads, 

gun 

emplacements, 

bivouac areas, 

pathways, and 

bomb craters 

Weather. 

Spray with an STB slurry from the 

PDDE. 

Cover with STB (pure form). 

When liquid contamination is 

visible and personnel are 

nearby, use STB dry mix. 

Cover small areas or paths across 

roads with 4 inches of earth. 

Scrape the layer of contaminated 

earth to the side of the road. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help 

prevent secondary 

aerosols, but does not 

decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on 

the surface (suppresses 

dust and associated 

reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, 

areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry 

from the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household 

bleach solution. 

• Burn. 

Earthmoving (removal): Try 

to control contaminated 

dust, as equipment may 

become contaminated. 

Consider waste disposal. 

Sealing (with earth): 

Equipment may become 

contaminated. 

D-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table D-1. Decontamination Procedures for Specific Surfaces and Materials (Continued) 

Surface or 

Material 

Types of Contamination and How to Decontaminate 

Chemical Biological Radiological 

Grass: fields, 

low 

vegetation, 

and open 

terrain 

Weather. 

Burn. 

Spray with an STB slurry from the 

PDDE. 

Cover with STB (pure form or dry 

mix). 

Explode drums of STB. 

Clear paths through the area using 

detonating cord or other 

detonating devices. 

Weather. 

Burn. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help 

prevent secondary 

aerosols, but does not 

decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on 

the surface (suppresses 

dust and associated 

reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, 

areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry 

from the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household 

bleach solution. 

Earthmoving (removal): Try 

to control contaminated 

dust, as equipment may 

become contaminated. 

Consider waste disposal. 

Sealing (with earth): 

Equipment may become 

contaminated. 

Undergrowth: 

tall grass, 

meadows, 

jungles, and 

forests 

Weather. 

Burn (may cause a downwind vapor 

hazard). 

Spray STB slurry with a PDDE. 

Explode drums of STB. 

Clear a path with detonating cord, 

bangalore torpedoes, or 

demolition snakes. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help 

prevent secondary 

aerosols, but does not 

decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on 

the surface (suppresses 

dust and associated 

reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, 

areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry 

from the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household 

bleach solution. 

Earthmoving (removal): Try 

to control contaminated 

dust, as equipment may 

become contaminated. 

Consider waste disposal. 

Sealing (with earth): 

Equipment may become 

contaminated. 

Sand: 

beaches and 

deserts 

Weather. 

Flush with water. 

Spread STB (pure form) or spray 

STB slurry over the surface. 

Cover paths with roofing paper. 

Scrape off 2 to 4 inches of the 

contaminated top layer. 

Weather (remain masked). 

Wet with water (will help 

prevent secondary 

aerosols, but does not 

decontaminate). 

Pour, spray, or spread oil on 

the surface (suppresses 

dust and associated 

reaerosolization). 

For critical, but limited, 

areas: 

• Spray with an STB slurry 

from the PDDE. 

• Apply 2% household 

bleach solution. 

Earthmoving (removal): Try 

to control contaminated 

dust, as equipment may 

become contaminated. 

Consider waste disposal. 

Sealing (with earth): 

Equipment may become 

contaminated. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 D-3 
Table D-1. Decontamination Procedures for Specific Surfaces and Materials (Continued) 

Surface or 

Material 

Types of Contamination and How to Decontaminate 

Chemical Biological Radiological 

Fabrics: 

canvas, 

covers, 

tarpaulins, 

tentage, mask 

carriers, web 

gear, and 

clothing 

Cotton: 

NOTE: Do not use for MOPP 

gear. 

Immerse in boiling, soapy water 

for 1 hour (1 pound of soap to 

10 gallons of water) and stir. 

Use a 5% sodium carbonate 

solution for G agents. 

Immerse in boiling water for 1 

hour. 

Launder by standard methods. 

Use STB slurry. 

Weather, except for V agents. 

Woolen: 

Immerse in warm, soapy water 

(100o

F) for 1 hour or longer with 

light agitation. 

Dry items slowly because the 

fabric may shrink. 

Cotton: 

Boil in water for 15 minutes. 

Immerse in a 2% household 

bleach solution for 30 

minutes and rinse 

immediately. 

Launder (destroys or 

inactivates all but highly 

resistant spores). 

Woolen: 

Launder (fabric may shrink). 

Brushing removes 

contamination dust, but it 

presents a dust hazard to 

personnel. 

Laundering is the most 

practical procedure; 

however, the fabric may 

shrink. Try to control 

waste. 

Leather: boots, 

gloves, belts, 

and other 

nonsensitive 

items 

Scrub with hot, soapy water and 

rinse. 

Immerse in warm, soapy water at 

120°F for 4 hours and rinse. 

Use a 5% sodium carbonate 

solution for G agents. 

Aerate. 

Immerse in a 2% household 

bleach solution for 30 

minutes, followed by a 

water rinse and aeration. 

Equipment that should not 

be immersed can be wiped 

with hypochlorite or 

peracetic acid. 

Brush. 

Flush with water or soapy 

water. 

Glass windows 

and other 

glass surfaces 

(except 

lenses) 

Use an IEDK. 

Wash with hot, soapy water. 

Rinse with clear water or an 

organic solvent. 

Blot off the surface. 

Air. 

Weather. 

Use an IEDK. 

Clean with chlorine or 

peracetic acid solutions. 

Use an IEDK. 

Wash with a detergent. 

Flush with water. 

Wipe with solvents. 

Glass lenses Wash with hot, soapy water. 

Rinse with clear water or an 

organic solvent. 

Blot off the surface. 

Air. 

Weather. 

Wipe with alcohol or 

hypochlorite, and remove 

it quickly with soap and 

water. 

Brush or wipe (be careful so 

as not to scratch the lens). 

Use compressed air to blow 

the contamination from 

the surface. 

Metal 

(unpainted) 

ammunition 

Wipe with soapy water. 

Wipe with organic solvent and dry. 

Aerate. 

Wipe with a 2% household 

bleach solution. 

Aerate. 

Brush or wipe. 

Metal 

(unpainted) 

machinery 

Wipe with soapy water. 

Wipe with organic solvent and dry. 

Aerate. 

Weather. 

Clean with soapy water. 

Brush or wipe. 

Wash with a detergent. 

Flush with water. 

D-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table D-1. Decontamination Procedures for Specific Surfaces and Materials (Continued) 

Surface or 

Material 

Types of Contamination and How to Decontaminate 

Chemical Biological Radiological 

Metal (painted) 

vehicles, 

weapons, and 

equipment 

Use IEDK to decontaminate 

individual gear. 

Weather. 

Wash with hot, soapy water and 

rinse. 

Spray with STB slurry from the 

PDDE, remove it in 1 hour, and 

oil the surface. 

Weather. 

Wash with a detergent. 

Steam-clean using a 

detergent. 

Apply STB slurry. 

Brush or wipe. 

Wash. 

Use organic solvents, 

caustic agents (not on 

aluminum or magnesium 

surfaces), complexing 

agents (of small value on 

weathered surfaces), or 

abrasives. 

Wood: buildings, 

vehicle bodies, 

boxes, crates, 

and similar 

items 

Apply STB slurry with the PDDE, 

brooms, or swabs. 

Let the slurry remain 12 to 24 

hours then flush the surface 

with water. Repeat the 

application, and flush it again. 

Scrub with hot, soapy water and 

rinse. 

Weather. 

Weather. 

Apply STB slurry. 

Apply detrochlorite to 

vertical surfaces; leave it 

on at least 30 minutes, 

and then flush it with 

water. 

Wash the interior with large 

amounts of water (some 

contamination may soak 

into surfaces of unpainted 

wood). 

Wipe the contamination from 

the surface. 

Plastics 

(opaque): 

insulation, 

telephones, 

and panel 

boards 

Aerate. 

Wash with hot, soapy water and 

rinse. 

Weather. 

Wipe with hypochlorite or 

peracetic acid. 

Wipe or brush. 

Wash with a detergent. 

Flush with water. 

Plastics 

(transparent): 

eyepieces and 

airplane 

canopies 

Aerate. 

Wash with hot, soapy water and 

rinse. 

Weather. 

Wipe with alcohol or 

hypochlorite, and remove 

it quickly with soap and 

water. 

Wipe or brush. 

Wash with a detergent. 

Flush with water. 

Unsealed 

electronic 

equipment 

Use a mild, evaporative solvent 

such as alcohol. 

Use a mild detergent and water. 

Rinse with distilled water. 

Keep the solution out of 

adjustable switches, 

connectors, and relays. 

Use hot-air blowers. 

Use a mild, evaporative 

solvent such as alcohol. 

Use a mild detergent and 

water. 

Rinse with distilled water. 

Keep the solution out of 

adjustable switches, 

connectors, and relays. 

Use hot-air blowers. 

Wipe or brush. 

Use hot-air blowers. 

Rubber 

(impermeable): 

aprons, suits, 

and other 

items 

Immerse in soapy water (just 

below the boiling point) for 1 

hour. Do not agitate. Rinse 

with clear water, and hang to 

dry. 

Use a 10% sodium carbonate 

solution for G agents, rinse, 

and air. 

Apply hot, soapy water with 

brushes and rinse. 

Spray with an STB slurry from the 

PDDE. 

Wash off with clear water after a 

few minutes. 

Immerse in a 2% household 

bleach solution for 30 

minutes, followed by a 

water rinse and aeration. 

Equipment that should not 

be immersed can be 

wiped with hypochlorite or 

peracetic acid. 

Brush. 

Scrub or flush with water or 

soapy water. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 D-5 
Table D-1. Decontamination Procedures for Specific Surfaces and Materials (Continued) 

Surface or 

Material 

Types of Contamination and How to Decontaminate 

Chemical Biological Radiological 

Rubber (natural 

and synthetic): 

gloves and 

boots 

Aerate. 

Spray with a 10% mixture of HTH 

and rinse. 

Immerse in STB slurry for 4 

hours, rinse, and dry. 

Use an IEDK in emergencies. 

Immerse in a 2% household 

bleach solution for 30 

minutes, followed by a 

water rinse and aeration. 

Equipment that should not 

be immersed can be 

wiped with hypochlorite or 

peracetic acid. 

Brush. 

Scrub or flush with water or 

soapy water. 

Rubber: mask 

facepieces and 

other rubber 

articles coming 

in direct 

contact with 

the skin 

Use an IEDK in emergencies. 

Wash with warm, soapy water. 

Use an alcohol or peracetic 

acid wipe followed by 

aeration for 10 minutes. 

Brush. 

Scrub or flush with water or 

soapy water. 

Rubber: tires, 

hoses, mats, 

and insulation 

Aerate. 

Spray with a 10% mixture of HTH 

and rinse. 

Apply an STB slurry. Allow the 

slurry to remain on the surface 

at least 30 minutes, and then 

flush with clear water (may be 

left on tires). 

Apply hot, soapy water. 

Weather. 

Immerse in a 2% household 

bleach solution for 30 

minutes, followed by a 

water rinse and aeration. 

Equipment that should not 

be immersed can be 

wiped with hypochlorite or 

peracetic acid. 

Brush. 

Scrub or flush with water or 

soapy water. 

Water Use trained water purification 

personnel to decontaminate. 

Boil small amounts for 15 

minutes. (Boiling will not 

inactivate some toxins.) 

Treat with chlorine or iodine 

tablets. 

Pass water through a 

reverse osmosis system. 

Flocculation (requires 

special chemicals to 

remove suspended 

matter). 

Ion exchange (removes 

radians from solution). 

Mess gear, 

canned rations, 

and food 

(canned, 

bottled, or 

protected by 

impermeable 

container) 

Immerse in boiling, soapy water 

for 30 minutes and rinse. 

Immerse in boiling water for 30 

minutes. 

Wash in hot, soapy water; rinse; 

and air. 

Wash in hot, soapy water, 

and rinse in chlorine 

solution. 

Boil in water for 15 minutes 

(does not kill toxins or 

anthrax spores). 

Immerse in peracetic acid 

solution, rinse, and aerate. 

Wash with soap and water, 

and then rinse. 

Brush, and then wipe 

contamination from 

surfaces and containers. 

Food (not canned 

or protected by 

impermeable 

container) 

Do not consume food that is 

suspected of being 

contaminated with chemical 

agents until approved by 

veterinary personnel. 

Boil in water for 15 minutes. 

Cook food thoroughly. 

Immerse in or spray with a 

2% household bleach 

solution. (Packaged food 

or food that is peeled or 

pared can be immersed 

or sprayed with the 

solution.) 

Wash or trim contamination 

from unpackaged food. 

D-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table D-1. Decontamination Procedures for Specific Surfaces and Materials (Continued) 

Surface or 

Material 

Types of Contamination and How to Decontaminate 

Chemical Biological Radiological 

Paper currency Destroy by burning. Do not 

decontaminate. 

Destroy by burning. Do not 

decontaminate. 

Destroy by burning. Do not 

decontaminate. 

Coins Wipe with soapy water. 

Wipe with an organic solvent. 

Aerate. 

Expose to UV rays. 

Wash with soapy water. 

Wipe with a 2% household 

bleach solution. 

Brush or wipe. 

Wash with a detergent. 

Flush with water. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 D-7 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix E 

SPECIAL DECONTAMINATION CONSIDERATIONS 

1. Background 

This appendix addresses decontamination considerations for sensitive equipment, 

munitions, CBRN munitions disposal, sample transfer and processing, DU, radioactive 

isotopes, and contaminated remains. 

2. Vulnerable/Sensitive Equipment 

Most military equipment has not been critically assessed for its ability to withstand 

decontamination without adverse effects. As more materiel testing is done, specific 

decontamination instructions will be included in the applicable TMs/TOs for all types of 

equipment. We know that some equipment is extremely vulnerable to damage when 

subjected to decontamination. The decontamination of equipment containing vulnerable 

components presents certain challenges. Electronics and optics are especially vulnerable to 

damage if not carefully decontaminated. Some materials, such as canvas and rubber, tend 

to absorb chemical agents. As a result, decontaminating absorbent surfaces is extremely 

difficult, if not impossible. Many decontaminants are highly corrosive and cannot be used 

on certain materials. They may also corrode and render ammunition unserviceable. 

CAUTION 

Do not subject vulnerable equipment to 

unnecessary decontamination. 

a. Electronics. Moisture, dust, and corrosive decontamination materials can 

damage unsealed electronic equipment circuitry. Most field electronic equipment is 

watertight for environmental protection. This also provides good protection against CBRN 

contamination. Contamination will probably not penetrate gasket-equipped protective 

covers and sealed components on electronic equipment; but if exposed, the contaminants 

may be present on the outside of cases containing the electronic equipment. Wipe down the

outside portions of the equipment case with a designated decontaminant. After 

decontaminating the outside, wipe down the equipment with water or an approved solvent 

to remove traces of decontaminant solutions. If equipment seals appear damaged or the 

penetration of CBRN contamination into the inside of the equipment is suspected, then the 

unit should be treated as if it was unsealed. Under no circumstances should electronic 

equipment be immersed in a decontaminant solution or subjected to high-pressure 

application of decontaminant solutions. The following high-value electronic equipment 

presents examples of items that would be damaged by corrosives: 

• Joint, Helmet-Mounted Cueing System. 

• AN/PVS-4 night vision goggles. 

• AN/TVS-5A night vision goggles. 

• AN/PVS-7B night vision goggles. 

• M12 range finder. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 E-1 
• Tow sight. 

• M49 telescope. 

• AN/TAS-5 Thermal Imagery System. 

• AN/TAS-6 night vision sight, Thermal Imagery System. 

• AN/GRC-160 radio set. 

• AN/MRC-69 radio-telephone set. 

• AN/PRC-119 radio set. 

• AN/PRC-139 radio set. 

• AN/TRC-68 radio set. 

• AN/VRC-12 radio set. 

• AN/VRC-87 radio set. 

• AN/VRC-92 radio set. 

• AN/VRC-87 Single-Channel, Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS). 

• AN/VRC-92 SINGARS. 

(1) For chemical contamination, use M100 sorbent on metal electronic cases. 

For biological agents, wipe the equipment exterior with a cloth and hot, soapy water or use 

a miscellaneous decontaminant (see Appendix C). If contamination is not extensive, use the 

M295 decontamination kit. 

(2) Corrosive decontaminants should never be used on unsealed electronic 

equipment. This type of equipment is often found inside shelter assemblies and helicopters. 

Refer to the appropriate TMs or TOs for acceptable decontamination procedures for 

unsealed electronic equipment. 

(3) For radiological contamination, brush, wipe, or vacuum contamination from 

equipment. The contamination is not destroyed, just moved from one place to another. So, 

control the runoff and treat it as a hazardous substance. 

b. Optics. Optical systems are extremely vulnerable to decontamination materials 

that might scratch or adversely affect the lenses. Wipe optical systems with a soft, 

nonabrasive material such as a lens-cleaning tissue, cotton wadding, or a soft cloth dipped 

in hot, soapy water. Wipe the optical system with decontaminants. Do not immerse it. 

(1) Hot, soapy water is the preferred decontaminant for chemical and biological 

contamination. The M291 SDK may be used if hot, soapy water is not available. 

NOTE: Do not use the M295 IEDK. It contains an abrasive sorbent, which may 

damage the optics. 

(2) Radiological contamination should be blown off with a stream of air or 

wiped off with hot, soapy water. Rinse the surface by wiping with a sponge dipped in clean 

water. 

c. Ammunition. Decontaminate contaminated ammunition with cool, soapy water.

Apply with a PDDE, brushes, mops, rags, or brooms. Cool, soapy water is the preferred 

decontaminant for all types of contamination on ammunition. 

E-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
CAUTION 

Do not use STB on ammunition. It removes critical 

markings from ammunition. It may also corrode and render 

ammunition unserviceable. Do not use nonstandard 

decontaminants that are corrosive. They also may remove 

critical markings from the ammunition.

 d. Supplies. 

(1) Canvas Items. Some materials, such as canvas, tend to absorb chemical 

agents and may not be decontaminated and reused. These items include LBE and web 

gear. Decontamination is difficult. It may be necessary to burn or bury them if they are 

heavily contaminated with a chemical agent. Either STB dry mix or slurry may be used. 

Slurry is more effective. In many cases, weathering may be the preferred decontamination 

technique because scrubbing canvas frequently imbeds the contamination further and 

worsens the situation. If the item must be decontaminated, boiling for 1 hour in soapy 

water is the preferred decontaminant for chemical and biological contamination. 

Radioactive contamination can be removed by brushing and then washing. It may also be

vacuumed. Other options for disposing of contaminated canvas should be considered 

against METT-TC. CBRN protective covers protect vulnerable items, but these covers 

should be buried or destroyed after use. 

(2) Subsistence and Water. 

(a) Decontamination removes the contaminant and provides food that is 

safe for consumption. Food salvage operations require extensive efforts to assess, identify, 

and evaluate. These efforts are further compounded if food supplies are suspected of being 

comprised by CBRN contaminates. Decontamination efforts require even more elaborate 

procedures that impact labor, time, and supplies of operational forces. The use of 

appropriate decontamination must be emphasized to fit the situation and meet the mission. 

That is, decontaminate just enough to sustain operations and keep fighting, rather than 

creating a contamination-free environment. Normally, decontamination efforts will be

limited to the scope and nature of the packaging and packing materials. 

(b) The first critical step is to take appropriate personal precautions 

before starting decontamination procedures and dividing suspected exposed food items into 

groups. Based on the division of food items, the time of exposure and the possible exposure 

agent may be identified. Listed below are the food groups by priority, based on the ease of 

decontamination and the ability to monitor the items in question: 

• Group I. Canned or packaged items exposed only to a CW agent 

vapor. 

• Group II. Canned or packaged items that are contaminated on the 

outside with a liquid CW agent, a BW agent, or radioactive fallout. 

• Group III. Unpacked or poorly packaged items that have been 

exposed to any CBRN agent. 

• Group IV. Food contaminated through the food chain. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 E-3 
(c) There are three levels of decontamination for subsistence. These are 

individual, unit, and support levels. See FM 4-02.7 for definitive information on 

subsistence decontamination. 

• Individual decontamination of subsistence is performed by each 

service member on the subsistence items in his possession at the time of the attack. 

Decontamination procedures are conducted as outlined in the unit tactical standard 

operating procedure (TSOP) and in FM 4-02.7. 

• Unit personnel under the supervision of CBRN-trained personnel 

organic to the unit perform this level of decontamination as soon as possible after a CBRN 

attack and in conjunction with area decontamination procedures. Decontamination is 

attempted only on subsistence items that are in original, intact containers that do not 

permit or have not allowed CBRN penetration. Special decontamination requirements and

advisability of decontamination efforts are relayed to unit commanders through command 

or medical channels as required. 

• Specially trained and equipped decontamination units and teams 

accomplish support levels of decontamination. This is accomplished at major subsistence 

storage facilities and areas, such as the general support (GS) Class I activities in the 

theater. Medical personnel advise on technical matters pertaining to the decontamination 

operations involving subsistence items and also monitor the decontamination results and 

recovery operations. 

(d) Contaminated water must not be used until it has been treated by 

quartermaster water production and distribution units or other equally capable water 

purification units and approved for use by the medical authority. The treatment of 

contaminated water requires chemicals and equipment that are only available to 

specialized water purification units; individuals or units should not attempt to treat their 

water. The decontamination of water is only undertaken when uncontaminated sources are 

not available, and then only with the approval of the medical authority. See FM 10-52 for 

details. 

(3) Painted Surfaces. Chemical agents will penetrate alkyd-painted vehicles 

and will desorb small quantities of agent for hours to days (depending on certain factors, 

such as temperature). However, most systems are CARC-painted. CARC-painted surfaces 

significantly reduce agent penetration and are decontaminated more effectively than alkydpainted surfaces. 

(4) Vegetation. Vegetation also affects the persistency of chemical 

contamination. When dispersed over vegetation, some of the chemical agent droplets cling 

to the vegetation. This increases the surface area of agent exposed to the elements and the 

rate of evaporation, but the contamination may be more dangerous because personnel may 

be more likely to come into contact with the contaminated plants. In shaded woods, despite 

the greater surface area covered by the agent, the reduced ambient temperature and winds 

increase the persistency of the chemical agent. 

3. Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Munitions Disposal 

CBRN enemy munitions or other improvised devices may be encountered. Captured

enemy CBRN munitions or agents may have sustained damage or be leaking due to 

deterioration. Leaking munitions must be decontaminated, evacuated, and disposed of 

safely by specialized units, such as EOD, who have properly trained personnel to perform 

E-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
this task. All personnel must use the applicable IPE when there is a possibility of 

exposure. Notify an EOD unit for the disposal and decontamination of CBRN munitions. 

4. Sample Transfer, Evacuation, and Processing 

If the decontamination unit headquarters requires a sample of the agent for 

confirmation, it will be collected and packaged by the unit or activity obtaining the sample. 

The sample is properly labeled, bagged, and prepared for evacuation. The sample is

evacuated according to the procedures outline in Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Biological Surveillance. 

5. Depleted-Uranium Decontamination 

DU is an extremely dense metal used in munitions to penetrate heavy armor or as 

protective shielding (armor packages). DU is also used as equipment components. Unfired 

shells or intact DU armor does not exceed peacetime regulatory standards for personal 

exposure. Unfired or intact DU does not present a health risk. 

a. DU exposure and incidents may occur anytime there is damage to the DU armor 

package, a vehicle is hit with DU munitions, DU munitions are damaged, or equipment 

components containing DU are damaged. The DU armor can be damaged during vehicle 

maneuvers, onboard fires, maintenance activities, or ballistic impacts. DU munition 

problems may occur during storage, transportation, combat, testing, or manufacturing. DU 

contamination may be present on the ground in areas where equipment was destroyed or 

damaged. The USAF primarily uses DU in aircraft counterbalances and in 30-millimeter 

(mm) armor-piercing and incendiary munitions. 

(1) DU can present a number of hazards, depending on its physical (solid

versus particulate) and chemical forms. These hazards can be grouped into three 

categories: radiological, toxicological, and pyrophoric. 

(a) Radiological. 

• DU presents a radiological hazard from external and internal 

radiation dose standpoints. Externally, DU and its decay products emit beta and gamma 

radiations that can serve as sources of external radiation for personnel. Contact gamma

dose rates from bare DU can be 15 millirems per hour (mrem/hr), while skin contact dose 

rate due to beta radiation from bare DU is approximately 238 mrem/hr. 

• Internally, insoluble DU oxide can be inhaled and deposited into the 

lungs, where irradiation by alpha particles is the primary concern. In general, aircraft

counterbalances and DU penetrators used in munitions are typically covered to prevent 

corrosion (oxidation). The primary groups at risk for external exposure are munitions 

handlers and aircraft maintenance personnel. The primary groups at risk for internal 

exposure are personnel involved with DU contamination that can potentially become 

airborne and subsequently inhaled. 

(b) Toxicological. Soluble forms of DU can present a significant 

toxicological hazard. Like any heavy metal, DU can be ingested or inhaled into the body 

and, subsequently, enter the blood stream. It may be toxic to the kidneys and other organs. 

(c) Pyrophoric. The pyrophoric hazard presented by DU is normally 

associated with fine particulates of metallic DU generated during fabrication processes. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 E-5 
Particulate oxides of DU are generated as a result of normal corrosive processes on exposed 

DU, fires, and penetrator impact with armor, but are not pyrophoric. 

(2) Military and civilian vehicles may become contaminated with DU either as 

a result of direct penetrator strikes, by traveling through a DU-contaminated environment, 

or as a result of an accident or fire. Penetrators striking an armored target essentially burn 

their way through the armor. As a result, DU oxide particles are formed and can be 

deposited in or on the vehicle or short distances downwind (typically less than 100 yards). 

The metal surrounding the DU penetration hole is generally the area of highest 

contamination. The amount of DU contamination resulting from a crash of an aircraft 

having DU counterbalances is dependent on its physical integrity. 

(3) Environmental media (and water) can be a receptor of contamination from 

other sources (i.e., weathering of intact DU components, DU released from penetrator 

strikes or fire). The level of this contamination is minor in comparison to that encountered 

on vehicle surfaces, exposed counterbalance surfaces, etc. The one exception is hard-target 

range operations involving DU munitions that are left exposed to oxidize and further add to 

the soil contamination. 

(4) Ingestion or inhalation of DU from any form of contaminated media is the 

primary hazard of concern. Taking the necessary precautions to minimize these risks 

requires appropriate PPE (i.e., clothing and detection equipment) and procedures. 

Required procedures and equipment will vary depending on the type of work to be 

accomplished. Some common sense rules to apply when dealing with radioactive material 

are— 

(a) Evacuate or cordon off the area and avoid it when radioactive 

contamination is present. If you must work in a contaminated environment, wear 

protective equipment. Also, health monitoring or exposure control operations will be 

required. 

(b) Ensure that your protective equipment is operational and appropriate 

for the task to be accomplished. 

(c) Do not eat, drink, or smoke in a potentially contaminated area. 

(d) Roll down your sleeves, wear gloves, and cover any exposed skin areas. 

This provides protection from alpha and beta radiation in the form of particles. Pay

particular attention to protecting open cuts or wounds, and wear a protective mask. 

Depending on temperature, protective clothing availability, DU contamination levels, and 

tasks to be performed, wear your overgarment or coveralls or roll down your sleeves and 

blouse your trousers as directed by CBRN or medical personnel. Dust off your uniform 

after leaving a vehicle and before removing your protective mask. Always exercise 

standard field hygiene, including washing your hands and face. 

(e) Limit external hazards by wiping or washing exposed areas as soon as 

possible. 

(f) Minimize time, maximize distance, and maximize shielding to keep 

any doses received as low as possible. 

(g) Assume a DU contamination zone at 50 meters around actively 

burning fires involving any armored combat vehicles or ammunition supply vehicles. 

E-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
b. DU contamination may include DU oxides (dust), contaminated shrapnel, 

munitions components, or armor components. DU primarily emits alpha particles; 

however, beta, gamma, and X-ray ionizing radiation are also emitted. DU contamination 

can be inhaled, ingested, or injected. DU contamination does not pose an immediate health 

risk. Damaged or destroyed enemy or friendly armor vehicles may be DU-contaminated. 

Unless an individual has a valid reason to enter such vehicles, he should stay away from 

them. Consequently, contamination should be removed from personnel or vehicle surfaces 

when directed by the unit commander based on METT-TC considerations. 

c. Visual signs that DU contamination is present include heavy, dull, black dust or 

small, round holes. DU contamination can only be verified with a radiac meter. An 

AN/VDR-2 (beta shield open) or AN/PDR-77 with an alpha or beta probe (flat-pancake 

surface) is used to detect and measure DU contamination. These probes are included in the 

radiological protection officer kit. 

d. General decontamination procedures are as follows: 

• Use a radiac meter to determine if DU contamination is present. 

• Provide protection, including appropriate clothing, for workers as directed by the 

unit chemical or medical personnel. 

• Identify what is to be decontaminated. 

• Obtain necessary equipment and materials. 

• Brush, wash, or wipe off contamination with a damp cloth. Use a HEPA filter 

vacuum cleaner if available. 

• Work from the outside of the contaminated area to the inside. 

• Cover fixed contamination with tape, paint, paper, plastic, or other disposable 

material. 

• Use the standard double-bag-and-tag process for hazardous waste. The only

contaminated waste generated by DU will be the vacuum cleaner bags after use on multiple 

vehicles. 

6. Decontamination of Specific Radioisotopes 

Radiological contamination may occur in the form of one element. In this section, the 

decontamination of six specific, commonly found radioactive elements is discussed. The 

discussion is applicable not only to these elements but also to other elements having similar 

chemical properties. 

a. Cesium. The common radioisotope of cesium is cesium-137. It emits beta and 

gamma radiation, decaying to stable barium-137. Cesium-137 is widely used in gamma 

sources. It occurs in these sources as cesium chloride pellets. Cesium chloride is a soluble 

salt. The contamination from a sealed source leak absorbs water, becomes damp, and 

creeps. Contamination from a sealed cesium source is best decontaminated by wet 

procedures unless the contamination is on a porous surface, in which case, vacuuming 

should precede wet procedures. Cesium is known to adsorb from solution onto glass 

surfaces. The decontamination of a cesium liquid-contaminated surface is best 

accomplished by wetting the surface, absorbing the solution with a rag or other absorbent 

material, and rinsing the area several times with water. If the contamination persists, 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 E-7 
brushing and a detergent solution should be used. A cesium-contaminated solution which 

has been standing for some time is best decontaminated by absorbing any remaining liquid, 

treating the surface several times with water (allowing the water to stand on the surface 

about 1 minute each time), and then absorbing the liquid from the surface. If the 

contamination remains, further treatment depends on the surface. Metallic surfaces are 

treated with strong mineral or oxidizing acids. Waxed surfaces are removed. If 

contamination still persists, abrasion or other removal techniques are used. 

b. Cobalt. The common radioisotope of cobalt is cobalt-60, a beta gamma emitter. 

Metallic cobalt-60 is commonly used in sealed gamma sources. Particles of cobalt dust 

adhering to small articles are readily removed by ultrasonic cleaners or by dipping in a 

dilute solution of nitric, hydrochloric, or sulfuric acid. Cobalt dust contamination that 

exists over a large area is best removed by vacuuming. Sealed cobalt sources may leak as a

result of an electrolytic action between cobalt and the container. The result is often a 

soluble cobalt salt that creeps and spreads. This is best decontaminated with a detergent 

or ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) solution, followed by treatment with mineral 

acids. Contamination from solutions containing cobalt may be treated with water solutions. 

c. Plutonium. The most common isotope in which plutonium may be present as a 

contaminant is plutonium-239, an alpha emitter. This isotope is present in the AN/UDM-6

calibration source. Plutonium contamination may be a result of a nuclear-weapon accident, 

in which case the plutonium will be scattered as metal or oxide in a dust form. Both forms 

of plutonium are insoluble. The aging of plutonium-239 contamination is impractical since 

it has a 24,000-year half-life. Plutonium contamination that covers a small area is best 

decontaminated by vacuuming. If contamination remains, the area should be washed with 

a detergent solution. Any contamination that remains can be sealed in a protective coating 

of paint, varnish, or plastic. Plutonium oxide or metal dust spread over a large area (e.g., a 

field) is best decontaminated by removing the top layer of soil and disposing of it as 

radioactive waste. Personnel should wear respiratory protection when decontaminating or 

moving the soil. 

d. Strontium. The most common radioisotope of strontium is strontium-90, a beta 

emitter. The daughter particle of strontium-90 is yttrium-90, which is also a beta emitter. 

Strontium-90 and yttrium-90 are commonly used in sealed beta sources, such as the M6 

source. Generally it is present as chlorine or carbonate. The chlorine is hygroscopic; it

absorbs water and creeps out of the container. This contamination is best decontaminated 

by vacuuming, followed by treatment with water, complexing agent solution, and mineral 

acid in that order. Contamination resulting from a dilution containing strontium is best 

decontaminated by absorbing the solution and washing the area with a detergent solution. 

If strontium contamination persists, the top layer of the surface should be removed by 

abrasion or another removal procedure and a sealing coat should be placed over the surface. 

e. Tritium. Tritium is the radioisotope of hydrogen and is a weak beta emitter. If 

it is released to an area as a gas, the best method of decontamination is to flush the area 

with air. Since inhalation of tritium can present an internal hazard, personnel entering an 

area containing tritium gas should wear an appropriate SCBA. Objects in an area exposed

to tritium may absorb the gas and should be disposed of if possible. They may be degassed

under a vacuum by flushing with helium or hydrogen. A cleaned surface may be 

contaminated again in a matter of hours by percolation of absorbed tritium to the surface. 

There is no practical way of removing tritium oxide from water due to its similarity to 

natural water. 

E-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
f. Uranium. The most probable source of uranium contamination is a 

nuclear-weapon accident in which the fissionable uranium is spread as metal or oxide dust. 

The common isotopes of uranium contamination are uranium-235 and uranium-238. This 

metal or oxide is insoluble and is best removed from a contaminated surface by brushing or 

vacuuming, treating with mineral acids or oxidizing acids, and then sealing. Large-area

uranium contamination is best decontaminated by removing the top layer of the surface or 

by sealing. 

7. Contaminated-Remains Decontamination 

Mortuary affairs personnel are responsible for coordinating the disposition of 

contaminated remains. This includes the decontamination of remains when required. 

a. Introduction. Command responsibilities (i.e., service, combatant commander, 

subordinate unit) for mortuary affairs are outlined in Joint Publication (JP) 4-06. The TTP 

for processing contaminated remains are also outlined in JP 4-06. 

(1) Command mortuary affairs support plans are prepared based on 

supporting the operational requirements of the command. Mortuary affairs support plans 

may differ in scope, detail, objectives, and available resources between commands. 

(2) When planning the level of mortuary affairs support, consider multiple 

factors, to include the possibility of searching, recovering, evacuating, and decontaminating 

contaminated remains. 

(3) When a CBRN event has occurred on the battlefield, there is a possibility 

that deceased personnel were exposed to contaminating agents. If the situation does not 

lend itself to the determination of a hazard on an individual basis, all remains within the 

affected area will be treated as if contaminated. If the theater surgeon or staff determines

that biological agents have been employed, all remains will be treated as if contaminated. 

b. Concept of the Operation. A mortuary affairs decontamination collection point 

(MADCP) may become operational whenever the threat of CBRN warfare exists. The Joint 

Mortuary Affairs Office (JMAO) acts as the theater central point of contact for coordination 

for this operation. The handling of contaminated remains is a process consisting of the 

following: 

(1) The MADCP is deployed to the area concerned for the recovery of 

contaminated remains. The MADCP will set up operations just outside the contaminated 

area. 

(2) Upon verification that the remains have been decontaminated, they are 

evacuated to the theater mortuary evacuation point or designated holding area. 

(3) The final verification of decontamination completeness will be conducted 

within the theater. 

c. Responsibilities. 

(1) Geographic combatant commanders are responsible for searching, 

recovering, tentatively identifying, and evacuating remains from their areas of 

responsibility (AORs). They ensure that the proper planning, training, staffing, and 

equipment is furnished for mission requirements (e.g., ensuring proficiency of team 

personnel on CBRN protective measures and providing CBRN specialists for the MADCP). 

(2) Service component commanders are responsible for providing or arranging 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 E-9 
for mortuary affairs support for their personnel. 

(3) Subordinate commanders at all levels are responsible for the initial search, 

recovery, tentative identification, and evacuation of all deceased unit personnel within their 

area of operation (see FM 10-64 and JP 4-06). If the threat of CBRN is suspected or 

present, commanders will request MADCP support to perform recovery operations and the 

subsequent decontamination of remains. 

d. CBRN Search, Recovery, Tentative Identification, and Evacuation Operations. 

(1) CBRN search, recovery, tentative identification, and evacuation are the 

first steps in the care and handling of deceased personnel during MADCP operations. To 

ensure successful mission accomplishment, the leader of the MADCP conducting the search 

and recovery must gather all available information for the mission such as coordinating 

with intelligence, medical, and CBRN personnel on potential hazards. Personnel assigned 

to support MADCP must be thoroughly trained in CBRN defense and the use of personnel 

protective measures and personnel detection. During search operations, if a CBRN hazard 

is suspected or if an unknown hazard situation exists, the MADCP will assume the 

appropriate protective posture (e.g., MOPP4). 

(2) MADCP recovery personnel will be in CBRN IPE when conducting recovery 

missions. When remains are encountered, check them for unexploded ordnance, explosives, 

and booby traps. Ensure that all hazardous items are removed. Coordinate with a 

supporting CBRN or EOD specialist/team for assistance or guidance when CBR agents or 

hazardous items are suspected. Once contaminated remains are determined to be safe to 

handle, proceed with the recovery. 

(3) The remains are placed in a CB human remains pouch, if available, and 

care is taken to minimize the spread of contamination. When a CB pouch is not available, 

the Type II-A human remains pouch should be used. 

NOTE: The human remains pouch does not retain all fluids, and off-gassing of 

vapor can occur through pouch membranes. 

(4) Recovery site operations outlined in FM 10-64 are followed, to include 

indicating (if known) whether the remains are contaminated and marked (i.e., annotating 

applicable forms and markers to indicate CBR contamination). 

(5) Personnel evacuating contaminated remains to a MADCP remain in IPE. 

The transport means used to evacuate contaminated remains is monitored and 

decontaminated as required. 

e. Mortuary Affairs Decontamination Collection Point. 

(1) Mortuary affairs personnel establish and operate the MADCP. MADCP 

operations adhere to the procedures outlined in JP 4-06. 

(2) Personnel support is required after completing the evacuation mission to 

the MADCP, such as thorough DTD. The conduct of DTD takes about 1 hour. The MADCP 

site will also receive support from a supporting decontamination unit for a complete DTD. 

E-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
8. Animals 

Throughout history, animals have played an important part in military operations. 

Today, military working dogs (MWDs) continue to provide support to the warfighter. 

a. The decontamination of MWDs and other government-owned animals (GOAs) 

should be accomplished by MWD handlers and supporting veterinarian personnel in 

accordance with FM 4-02.18. Contaminated MWDs and other GOAs are decontaminated in 

a manner similar to that of service members. The initial decontamination of the animal 

should be completed with an M291 SDK. The initial decontamination of the handling 

equipment (leashes, collars, muzzles) should be completed with an M295 IEDK, a 5 percent 

hypochlorite solution, or a 5 percent sodium solution (G agents only). 

NOTE: Each MWD handler should carry several extra M291s and an extra M295. 

b. Definitive decontamination requires the removal and replacement of all 

contaminated handling equipment and the thorough washing of the animal with soap and 

water, followed by a thorough rinsing with water. If soap is not available, copious rinsing 

with water alone should provide adequate decontamination. Each handler should store 

extra handling equipment in a chemically protected container. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 E-11 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix F 

EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ON DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

US forces may find themselves anywhere in the world and subjected to the conditions 

in that region. Weather and terrain conditions will influence the decontamination process 

used. The conditions in cold weather and arctic areas, hot weather and desert areas, urban 

areas, mountains, and jungles impact how decontamination operations are performed. If 

METT-TC allows, permitting the contamination to weather is generally a preferred option. 

However, marking, reporting, and periodically rechecking the contamination is required. 

The effects of the environment will also impact decontamination manpower requirements. 

2. Cold Weather 

Cold can kill, maim, and disable without any help from a human foe. Cold weather 

regions are characterized by extreme cold weather and deep snow during winter months. 

Whiteout, gray out, and ice fog are weather phenomena that have an impact on northern 

operations. In whiteout, a person seems to be surrounded by an unbroken white glow. 

Gray out is similar to a whiteout except that the horizon is distinguishable. Depth

perception and orientation are lost in the absence of shadows, the horizon, and clouds. Ice 

fog forms when water vapor is produced by human activities and the air at low 

temperatures is unable to hold the moisture. Ice fog may appear over personnel, vehicles, 

bivouac areas, and permanent facilities, marking their location. Ice fog can obscure vision. 

a. Chemical Agents. Chemical agents also react differently at extremely low 

temperatures. For example, at 32°F (0°C), HD, CX and HT become solids. As the 

temperature drops to minus 15°F (minus 25°C), AC, CK, HN-3, and PD become solids. 

Munitions containing normally persistent agents become very persistent at low 

temperatures, and some normally nonpersistent chemicals become persistent. GB, a 

normally nonpersistent agent, could remain a transfer hazard for up to 30 days in arctic 

climates. Although frozen agents do not present a significant problem in solid state, they 

become hazards when they warm up. See Table F-1 (page F-2) for the freezing/melting

points of selected chemical agents. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 F-1 
Table F-1. Freezing Points and Melting Points of Selected Chemical Agents 

Agent Symbol FP MP Boiling Point 

Nerve Agents 

Tabun GA -50°C Data not available 248°C 

Sarin GB -56°C Data not available 150°C 

Soman GD Data not available -42°C 198°C 

Cyclosarin GF -30°C to –50°C -12°C 228°C 

O-Ethyl-S-Methyl 

Phosphonothiolate 

VX Below –51°C Data not available 292°C 

V sub x Vx Data not available Data not available 256°C 

Blister Agents 

Mustard HD 14.45°C Data not available 218°C 

Nitrogen Mustard HN-1 Data not available -34.2°C 192°C 

Nitrogen Mustard HN-2 -70°C 177°C 

Nitrogen Mustard HN-3 Data not available -3.74°C 257°C 

Distilled Mustard and T 

Mixture 

HT Data not available 1.3°C No constant 

temperature 

Lewisite L -44.7°C to –1.8°C Data not available 196°C 

Distilled Mustard and 

Lewisite Mixture HL 

Munitions: -42°C 

Pure: -25.4°C 

Data not available 

200°C 

Phenyldichloroarsine PD -22.5°C Data not available 233°C 

Ethyldichloroarsine ED Data not available Below –65°C 156°C 

Methyldichloroarsine MD -54.8°C Data not available 132.6°C 

Phosgene Oxime CX Data not available 39°C 129°C 

Blood Agents 

Hydrogen Cyanide AC Data not available -13.3°C 25.5°C 

Cyanogen Chloride CK -6.9°C Data not available 12.8°C 

Arsine SA Data not available -116°C -62.2°C 

Choking Agents 

Phosgene CG Data not available -128°C 7.8°C 

Diphosgene DP Data not available -57°C 127°C 

b. Decontaminants. Decontamination is a problem because low temperatures also 

reduce the effect of decontaminants. When temperatures reach 32°F, water can no longer 

be used. In such situations, use STB or HTH as a dry mix (two parts of STB to three parts 

of unfrozen earth). If unfrozen dirt is not available, use snow (same proportion). Apply the

dry mix by shoveling it on contaminated surfaces or by filling sandbags with the mix and 

dusting it on the surfaces. Remove the dry mix by brushing, scraping, or using 

uncontaminated earth or snow to “wash” it off. Other decontaminating methods using 

nonstandard solvents and fuels may be used, but observe fire safety, protect personnel from 

corrosives, and take precautions against supercooling effects. Because of their low freezing 

points, solvents such as aviation fuel (JP-8), diesel fuel, and kerosene may be used to 

physically remove contamination. These solvents only flush the agent from the surfaces. 

They generally do not neutralize agents nor do they eliminate agents that soak into 

surfaces. Nonstandard solvents generally are very flammable and must be handled with 

care. 

F-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
 c. Decontamination Operations. 

(1) Decontamination apparatuses and water trucks may have to be deployed 

with empty tanks instead of full ones as in temperate climates. To prevent freezing, it may

be necessary to preheat water when loading water trucks and the tanks of decontaminating 

apparatuses and keep it heated until it is used. These vehicles may have to be enclosed and 

warmed so that the engines will start. Decontaminate apparatuses and drain water trucks 

immediately after use to prevent damage from freezing. 

(2) Vehicles and personnel covered with contaminated snow should be 

decontaminated before the snow has a chance to melt and freeze. Such snow forms layers

of ice that make contamination difficult to remove. Radioactive fallout that is mixed with 

snowfall must be removed as soon as possible. Use tree branches (if available) to remove 

contaminated snow. 

(3) Snow can be used to cover contamination; however, the snow can blow 

away or the contamination can resurface when tracked vehicles, personnel movement, or 

digging disturbs it. Snow cover provides some protection if left undisturbed, but this 

protection is too uncertain to rely on. 

(4) Personnel supporting cold weather decontamination operations may use 

warming areas for rest and relief. However, if personnel get a frozen agent on their 

clothing, the agent will be hard to detect because low temperatures have slowed its 

evaporation. 

(5) Moving vehicles through the decontamination site will be a challenge.

Caution must be exercised. It will be hard for the vehicles to navigate and stop if there is 

ice present on the ground. 

3. Hot Weather (Desert and Jungle) 

Hot weather can considerably complicate decontamination operations. 

a. Desert Areas. Extreme temperatures characterize desert regions with ranges 

varying between 30°F to 130°F over a 24-hour period. These regions have long drought 

periods, which are interrupted by sudden rains that bring flash floods. There are shortages

of suitable groundwater. Large areas suitable for tracked-vehicle maneuvers may 

sometimes have impassable ravines; wet, spongy grounds; and sand areas. 

(1) Water. The principal problem for decontamination in the desert is the lack 

of water. The use of STB slurry will burden the logistical system because of the water 

required for mixing and rinsing. Non-water-based decontaminants (natural solvents) may 

be required. Contamination avoidance becomes increasingly important in desert operations 

because of limited water sources. 

(2) Heat Stress. Heat stress is a critical issue for personnel. Operating

decontamination stations in daytime temperatures may require short periods of work

followed by long periods of rest. See Chapter II for guidance on work/rest cycles. 

(3) Weathering. Weathering is a viable decontamination option. High daytime

temperatures can increase the evaporation of liquid contamination. For example, if a

vehicle were contaminated with THD in a hot, desert environment, at least 99 percent of 

the contamination would have evaporated within 2 hours. Therefore, vehicle wash down 

may not be necessary. As a result, vapor concentrations will be high but should not last 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 F-3 
long. If liquid contamination soaks into soft, porous soil (such as loose sand), evaporation is 

not as quick. Strong winds also increase the evaporation rate. Low temperatures during 

the night have a reverse effect and tend to increase the persistency of chemical and 

biological contamination. The sandblasting effect of sandstorms may remove contamination 

from surfaces facing the storm. Desert sunlight and high temperatures will destroy many 

CB agents without additional decontamination measures. 

(4) Bearings and Other Critical Moving Parts. Bearings and other critical 

moving parts need extra lubrication in the desert. This complicates decontamination

because lubricants tend to absorb chemical agents. After a sandstorm, maintenance must 

be conducted regardless of the last scheduled maintenance. Therefore, perform

decontamination first and, if time is critical, decontaminate only those surfaces that will be 

touched during maintenance. This will not eliminate vapor hazards. 

b. Jungle Areas. The characteristics of jungle climates vary with the location. 

Close to the equator, all seasons are nearly alike, with rains throughout the year. Farther 

from the equator, especially in India and Southeast Asia, jungles have distinct wet 

(monsoon) and dry seasons. Both zones have high temperatures averaging 78°F to 98°F, 

heavy rainfall (as much as 400 inches annually), and high humidity (90 percent) 

throughout the year. 

(1) Temperature/Humidity. Many tasks in the jungle take more time than in 

other environments. When temperatures rise to the 85°F to 100°F range, personnel can 

only continue medium or heavy workloads by reducing their MOPP level. Since 

decontamination crews will be more susceptible to heat stress, leaders should plan for 

frequent crew rotations and provide enough decontamination personnel to conduct 

decontamination operations. Biological agents can persist in the heat, humidity, and 

shade, which are characteristics of the jungle. Therefore, weathering is not a practical 

means of biological decontamination. See Chapter II for information on work/rest cycles. 

(2) Rain. Tropical rainstorms will flood decontamination sites unless the sites 

are adequately drained. Decontamination sites should be put on high ground during the 

rainy season. Ground that appears firm may become impassable. Rain can help the 

decontamination process by washing away contamination on exposed surfaces. Rain can 

also hydrolyze some agents. However, runoff may contaminate the soil. 

(3) Terrain. Contamination will be retained temporarily in the jungle canopy, 

reducing the immediate hazard. Later, rains will wash these particles to the ground and 

concentrate them in low areas. These areas are likely to become contamination “hot spots.” 

The thick vegetation can reduce sunlight and wind, increasing the persistency of some CB 

agents. 

(4) Decontaminants. Solid decontaminants, such as STB powder, tend to cake 

and decompose at a faster rate than in temperate climates. Caking is no problem, but the 

decomposition eventually makes STB powder ineffective. 

(5) Lubricants. Frequently oil exposed metal parts and grease wheel bearings 

to protect them from moisture. Since POL tends to absorb chemical agents, additional 

decontamination may be needed. Measures taken to protect electronic communications 

equipment from moisture may reduce the need for decontamination since these measures 

provide good CBRN protection. 

F-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
4. Urban Areas 

The need for decontamination operations in urban areas may also exist, and it may be 

easier to support. Water sources are generally available, and commercial chemicals may be 

used as decontaminants. Decontamination operations in urban areas will not differ 

significantly from similar operations in the field; however, keep the following 

considerations in mind: 

a. Structures. Wood and concrete tend to absorb liquid agents, and they may give 

off toxic vapors for days or weeks. Building decontamination is very difficult and requires 

large quantities of decontaminants. Covering the contamination with plastic sheets, STB 

slurry, sodium silicate, or other substances that cover or absorb the agent can reduce the 

hazard. Even though a particular part of a building is not intended for occupation, it may 

still need to be decontaminated to prevent the contamination from spreading. 

b. Streets and Sidewalks. Streets and sidewalks also absorb liquid agents and then 

give off toxic vapors when heated by the sun. These surfaces may need to be

decontaminated several times to reduce hazards. Streets, sidewalks, or other porous 

surfaces are best decontaminated by weathering if the time and the situation permit. 

c. Sanitation Systems and Runoff. Urban areas may have sophisticated sanitation 

systems. When those systems are destroyed, sanitary conditions become far worse than 

those in areas where sanitation systems have never existed. Sanitation systems must be 

maintained to avoid overloading decontamination capabilities. Contaminated water and 

residue must be controlled so that it will not create a hazard. Support may be necessary to 

construct controlled runoff areas. 

5. Mountains 

Excluding extremely high, Alpine type mountains, most mountain systems are 

characterized by heavy woods or jungle, compartments and ridge systems, limited routes, 

and highly variable weather conditions. All these factors will affect decontamination 

operations. 

a. Mobility. The terrain and the disruption of existing routes may dictate that 

decontamination operations be decentralized. Additional water-carrying vehicles may be 

needed to support decontamination. Forces must be organized to be self-sufficient and may 

have decontamination elements attached to them initially. Decontamination elements 

must be equipped with greater hauling capabilities, especially for water. 

b. Weather. Although there is a general climatic correspondence between high 

latitudes and high altitudes, there are factors that act as additional local variables that 

may impact decontamination. 

(1) Wind. Mountains have changing weather and constant winds that promote 

weathering at a faster rate. 

(2) Temperature. Cool or cold temperatures have an adverse effect on 

decontamination operations. Air temperature drops about 6.5°C for each kilometer of rise 

in altitude. The drier the air, the more pronounced the drop in temperatures. At high

altitudes, there may be differences of 40°F to 50°F between the temperature in the sun and 

that in the shade. Low temperatures that normally exist at extremely high altitudes may 

demand decontamination procedures and precautions similar to those used in cold-weather 

operations. Daytime operations can be scheduled to avoid some low-temperature problems. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 F-5 
(3) Sunlight. Increasing altitude results in increased sunlight because the air 

becomes clearer as altitude increases. At high altitudes, exposed surfaces are heated much

more than they would be in the lowlands. The clearer air also results in a greater loss of 

heat by radiation at night. Sunlight destroys most biological agents. 

c. Altitude. The body must adjust to the lower air pressure at high altitudes. 

These adjustments take time. As much as 70 percent of sea level work capacity may be 

attained after months in a high-altitude environment by acclimatized personnel. 

Practically all unacclimatized personnel can be expected to show some altitude effects 

above 2,100 meters. 

F-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Appendix G 

DECONTAMINATION UNITS AND ASSETS 

1. Background 

This appendix contains basic information on service decontamination capabilities. 

2. Army 

This paragraph describes the organizational structure, mission, capabilities, 

limitations, C2, and basis of allocation of Army CBRN units that have a decontamination 

capability. The basis of allocation is determined by the number and type of units being 

supported, and capabilities are available at brigade and battalion level to provide C2 of 

subordinate unit decontamination assets. 

a. Chemical Brigade. The chemical brigade commander, with the advice of his staff 

and in conjunction with the theater/corps/JTF chemical section, evaluates and determines 

the chemical unit support requirement for the supported commander. The brigade

commander advises his higher commander concerning the employment of CBRN 

decontamination units. 

(1) Mission. Provide C2 of two to six battalions and other assigned or attached 

separate companies. 

(2) Capabilities. 

• Provide C2, and supervise the operation of the brigade and two to six 

subordinate chemical battalions or separate companies. 

• Plan and coordinate for the combat, combat support, and CSS operations 

for all assigned and attached units. 

• Allocate units and resources to conduct CBRN decontamination. 

• Provide necessary logistical and administrative support to the brigade HQ. 

• Provide organizational level maintenance to the brigade HQ. 

(3) C2 HQ. Normally supports a theater, corps, or JTF. 

(4) Basis of Allocation. One per corps and one per theater support command 

(TSC). 

b. Chemical Battalion. There are many different organizations that a chemical 

battalion can support. The nonenhanced chemical battalion may support a corps or larger 

sided AO. Smaller scale operations may require the chemical battalion to work directly for 

a JTF. In all situations, the chemical battalion commander, in conjunction with the 

supported unit chemical staff, will develop the CBRN decontamination plan according to 

METT-TC considerations. The functions and responsibilities of the chemical battalion are 

usually constant but will depend on the command and support relationship given it by the 

higher HQ. 

(1) Mission. Provide C2 of two to five chemical companies. 

(2) Capabilities. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 G-1 
• Provide C2 and supervision for the operation of the battalion and two to 

five subordinate units. 

• Plan and coordinate the combat, combat support, and CSS operations for all

assigned and attached units. 

• Provide organizational maintenance and mess support, and establish and 

operate internal and external mobile subscriber equipment, radio, and wire 

communications nets. 

(3) C2 HQ: Chemical brigade, chemical division, or JTF. 

(4) Basis of Allocation. One per two to five chemical companies in a corps. One 

per two to seven chemical companies assigned to a theater Army and above. 

c. Chemical Companies. Chemical companies are the basic unit of employment for 

the Army Chemical Corps in support of military operations. Companies are task-organized

to support military elements operating within the AO based on capabilities and METT-TC 

considerations. The capabilities described below will only address unit decontamination 

capabilities. 

(1) Chemical Company (Combat Support) (Table of Organization and 

Equipment [TO&E] 03496F000). This company provides CBRN reconnaissance and 

surveillance (R&S) and decontamination support for elements operating within a division

AO. The unit has three decontamination platoons and is 100 percent mobile. 

(a) Mission. Provides CBRN R&S and decontamination to support an 

assured access strategy. 

(b) Capabilities. 

• A platoon can C2 and support a single DED operation for thorough 

decontamination. 

• A platoon can support up to three independent decontamination 

operations by operating as independent squads. 

• A platoon can conduct fixed-site, area, and route decontamination. 

(c) Limitations. 

• The company has no organic water resupply capability for 

decontamination operations. 

• The decontamination platoon cannot operate the DTD during 

thorough decontamination operations. 

(d) C2 HQ. Chemical battalion (TO&E 03496F000). 

(e) Basis of Allocation. Three per division or one per tactical brigade. 

(2) Chemical Company (Corps) (TO&E 03498F100). This company provides

CBRN R&S, biological surveillance, and decontamination support for elements operating 

within a corps forward AO. The company generally supports units in the corps forward AO, 

but may provide support to units in a corps rear AO, the communications zone (COMMZ), 

or forward within a division AO. The company may also provide specialized 

decontamination support, such as aircraft or terrain decontamination. The company has

four decontamination platoons and is 100 percent mobile. 

G-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(a) Mission. Provides CBRN R&S, and decontamination support. 

(b) Capabilities. 

• A platoon can C2 and support a single DED operation for thorough 

decontamination. 

• A platoon can support up to three independent decontamination 

operations by operating as independent squads. 

• A platoon can conduct fixed-site, area, and route decontamination. 

(c) Limitations. 

• The company has no organic water resupply capability for 

decontamination operations. 

• The decontamination platoon cannot operate the DTD during 

thorough decontamination operations. 

(d) C2 HQ. Chemical battalion (TO&E 03496F000). 

(e) Basis of Allocation: Three per corps. 

(3) Chemical Company (Heavy)-TO&E 03498F200. This company provides

CBRN R&S, biological surveillance, and decontamination support for elements operating 

within a corps rear AO and within the theater Army. The company generally supports 

units in the corps rear AO, but may provide support to the corps forward AO and the 

COMMZ. The company may also provide specialized decontamination support, such as 

aircraft or terrain decontamination. The company has four decontamination platoons and 

is 100 percent mobile. 

(a) Mission. Provides CBRN R&S and decontamination to support an 

assured access strategy. 

(b) Capabilities. 

• A platoon can C2 and support a single DED operation for thorough 

decontamination. 

• A platoon can support up to three independent decontamination 

operations by operating as independent squads. 

• A platoon can conduct fixed-site, area, and route decontamination. 

(c) Limitations. 

• The company has no organic water resupply capability for 

decontamination operations. 

• The decontamination platoon cannot operate the DTD during 

thorough decontamination operations. 

(d) C2 HQ. Chemical battalion (TO&E 03496F000). 

(e) Basis of Allocation: Two per corps and five per theater Army. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 G-3 
3. Marine Corps 

The USMC NBC defense teams consist of personnel trained in NBC decontamination 

and NBC reconnaissance in support of USMC MAGTF operations. NBC decontamination 

teams are formed primarily at the company level from assigned personnel with oversight 

and supervision provided by NBC specialists (MOS 5711/5702) at the battalion level and 

higher. NBC defense teams at the company level may be reinforced by the attachment of 

other company teams as directed by the senior commander. Positioning NBC defense 

teams at the company, squadron, and battalion levels allows the USMC to task-organize its 

NBC decontamination and reconnaissance elements/assets across the MAGTF, depending 

on the situation and mission. 

a. Decontamination Teams. Decontamination teams are the backbone of the 

MAGTF decontamination capability. Teams are trained and equipped in a manner that 

facilitates task organization and are tailored towards specific decontamination operations. 

These decontamination teams are capable of rapid employment through the use of organic 

vehicles that have been dedicated to the teams. Teams are force-multiplied to support

sustained operations. 

(1) Major Subordinate Command (MSC) Decontamination Teams. Each MSC 

has a decontamination team comprised of NBC defense specialists that is task-organized as 

required to support MAGTF operations. The team organization is based upon providing one 

decontamination section for each MSC civil engineer (CE), regiment, Marine aircraft group 

(MAG), and five for each force service support group (FSSG). Each section is staffed with 

one section leader and three section members. Teams are task-organized to perform their 

operational decontamination missions based on mission requirements and the commander’s 

priorities. The nuclear, biological, and chemical center (NBCC) operations coordinator will 

direct the task organization and employment and will coordinate the support for the team. 

The actual common operating environment (COE) will be based upon the vulnerability 

analysis and adjusted as required to respond to the enemy’s use of NBC agents. Each 

operational decontamination section is trained and equipped to support casualty 

decontamination, MOPP drop, MOPP gear exchange, and vehicle/aircraft wash down. 

(2) Subordinate Command Decontamination Teams. All battalions and 

squadrons that function as an integral unit during combat operations are trained and 

equipped to support casualty decontamination, MOPP drop, MOPP gear exchange, and 

vehicle/aircraft wash down. Team members come from the unit command element. Teams 

task-organize to perform their operational decontamination missions based on mission 

requirements and the commander’s priorities. Decontamination teams provide the

commander with the ability to— 

• Prepare contaminated casualties for transport to a casualty 

decontamination site by removing as much contamination from the casualty as possible. 

• Conduct MOPP drop. 

• Conduct MOPP exchange. 

• Conduct vehicle/aircraft wash down. 

• Provide site workers for thorough/clearance and casualty decontamination 

operations. 

G-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(3) USMC NBC Decontamination Teams. The USMC NBC decontamination 

teams may also be task-organized in support of the following decontamination operations: 

(a) Patient (Casualty) Decontamination. Casualty decontamination is 

conducted in accordance with the procedures outlined in this manual and MCRP 4-11.1F. 

Each MSC maintains a capability set with sufficient supplies and materials to set up one 

casualty decontamination site (CDS) that is capable of decontaminating 100 casualties. 

The decontamination team/section will require additional personnel augmentation to set up 

and sustain operations at the CDS. This augmentation will consist of any available USMC 

(CDS workers) and medical personnel who are familiar with triage and the treatment of 

casualties with conventional and CBRN agent injuries. Personnel working on the CDS will 

be rotated in accordance with the work rates and work/rest cycles contained in Multiservice 

Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Protection. 

Medical personnel required to support the CDS will be task-organized based on mission 

requirements and the commander’s priorities. The shock trauma platoons located in the 

medical battalion are ideally suited for supporting the CDS. The MAGTF NBCC will direct 

the establishment of at least one CDS whenever the vulnerability analysis indicates the 

likelihood of encountering CBRN contamination. MSCs will establish additional CDSs in 

those instances when the single MAGTF site does not adequately support their 

decontamination needs. The personnel used to man the CDS will conduct MOPP drop to 

remove their CBRN IPE prior to crossing the contamination control line (hot line) or 

entering any clean area. 

 b. Thorough Decontamination. The MAGTF is prepared to conduct 

thorough decontamination of its vehicles, equipment, DED, aircraft, and DAD. Personnel 

decontamination will be accomplished primarily by using the MOPP drop and/or the MOPP 

gear exchange procedures identified in this publication. 

(1) The MAGTF decontamination elements are structured and equipped in 

a manner that provides a flexible capability. Operational decontamination will be used to 

support the high OPTEMPO associated with FP. Thorough decontamination will be 

conducted in support of retrograde operations or as required to support unusual 

circumstances. 

(2) The MAGTF CE CBRN operations coordinator will organize and 

coordinate thorough decontamination operations. The MSC and subordinate command 

operational decontamination teams, medical personnel, engineers, and other augmentees 

are task-organized as required to support the MAGTF thorough decontamination 

operations. The divisions and FSSGs will each maintain a capability set with sufficient

supplies and materials to set up one DED that is capable of decontaminating 100 medium 

tactical vehicle replacements (MTVRs) (7-ton) each. The wings will maintain a capability

set with sufficient supplies and materials to set up one DAD capable of decontaminating 

100 aircraft (Marine attack squadron [VMA]/Marine light/attack helicopter squadron 

[HMLA]). 

(3) All vehicles, equipment, and aircraft must be checked for 

contamination during retrograde operations. Contaminated vehicles, equipment and 

aircraft must go through thorough (clearance) decontamination operations. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 G-5 
c. MAGTF NBCC. The MAGTF NBCC will task-organize decontamination teams 

as required to support the following operations: 

• Terrain decontamination. 

• Fixed-site decontamination. 

• Sensitive-equipment decontamination. 

• DU decontamination 

• Contaminated-remains decontamination. 

d. USMC Chemical/Biological Incident Response Force (CBIRF). The CBIRF was 

established by the direction of the Commandant of the USMC as a result of Presidential 

Decision Directive 39 (PDD-39), which states that the United States shall give the highest 

priority to developing the capability to manage the consequences of NBC materials or 

weapons use by terrorists. 

(1) Mission. When directed, the CBIRF forward-deploys domestically or 

overseas in order to provide FP and/or mitigation in the event of a WMD incident. CBIRF is 

prepared to respond to no-notice WMD incidents with a rapidly deployable initial-response 

force (IRF) and follow-on forces (FOF) if required. CBIRF also conducts FP training for 

Fleet Marine Force units. 

(2) Organizational Structure. The CBIRF is composed of 350 to 375 USMC and 

USN personnel and consists of three elements. In garrison, the CBIRF is under the 

operational control (OPCON) and administrative control (ADCON) of the 4th Marine 

Expeditionary Brigade Antiterrorism (4th MEB/AT) who falls under the II Marine

Expeditionary Force (II MEF) and USMC Forces, Atlantic (MARFORLANT). The CBIRF is 

an incident response force that executes CM operations in support of a combatant 

commander or lead federal agency. The CBIRF has limited organic equipment 

decontamination capability, but does not conduct DED or area decontamination operations. 

Further, the majority of CBIRF personnel are trained in Level A and B operations. TIC and 

TIM are potential threats to US forces, even OCONUS, since littoral areas include port and 

industrial complexes where the storage and manufacture of these materials are common. 

The CBIRF also has state-of-the-art monitoring and detection equipment used to identify, 

sample, and analyze NBC hazards, including TIC and TIM, as well as oxygen (O2) and 

lower-explosive levels (LEL). 

(3) Command Element. 

• Provides liaison teams to other agencies or commands. 

• Interfaces with local and military commanders. 

• Coordinates all on-site CBIRF operations. 

• Establishes data/voice reach-back to scientific and medical advisors. 

• Prepares CBR plume models. 

(4) Reaction Force Company Capabilities. 

• Agent detection and identification. 

• Sampling and collection. 

G-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• Monitoring of concentration and exposure levels. 

• Decontamination for unit personnel. 

• Decontamination for first responders. 

• Casualty decontamination on scene. 

• Victim search in the area and confined spaces. 

• Technical rescue and casualty extraction. 

• EOD (FP). 

(5) Medical Capabilities. 

• Emergency medical care in contaminated areas. 

• Casualty triage and stabilization. 

• Transfer into the local emergency medical system. 

(6) Helicopter-Born Package. 

• Eighty personnel on 1-hour alert status. 

• Decontamination of 35 to 50 ambulatory casualties per hour. 

• Decontamination of 20 to 35 nonambulatory casualties per hour. 

(7) Follow-On Force (Vehicle/Fixed-Wing Operations). 

• Decontamination of 200 to 225 ambulatory casualties per hour. 

• Decontamination of 65 to 75 nonambulatory casualties per hour. 

• Mobile laboratory. 

4. Air Force 

This paragraph provides an overview of the USAF CBRN structure and 

decontamination response capabilities. 

a. AB CBRN Defense Capabilities. USAF CBRN forces are structured to support 

AB survivability and operations. Each AB has one central focal point for CBRN defense, 

the CE readiness flight (office symbol CEX), which is contained in the CE squadron. 

Representative decontamination related functions include— 

• Conducting CBRN defense training for all USAF personnel and training unit 

CBRN teams (contamination control, shelter management). 

• Developing base CBRN defense plans and procedures. 

• Advising the commander on all nonmedical aspects of CBRN defense. 

• Establishing personnel CCAs. 

• Advising contamination control teams (CCTs). 

• Marking contaminated areas. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 G-7 
(1) CBRN defense actions require a force structure that includes both primary 

duty and base augmentation forces. Primary duty CBRN defense forces are located within 

the CE squadron readiness flight. 

(2) In-place and deployed units provide augmentation manpower for CCTs and 

CCA teams. Deliberate planning guidelines for identifying specialist and augmentation 

support for NBCC defense are found in AFI 10-204. The installation, theater, or USAF 

planning agent determines the actual requirements after considering the threat and 

missions for each in-place and deployed location. 

b. AB NBC Defense Structure. The AB NBC defense structure includes a defined 

C2 structure and CONOPS for wartime operations. The host wing commander sets alarm 

conditions, MOPP levels, and FP conditions for the entire base. The survival recovery 

center (SRC) is the (base) command post element that develops, recommends, implements 

(with wing approval), and tracks pre-, during-, and postattack passive-defense activities on 

the base. The SRC broadcasts alarm conditions and MOPP exchanges to all units on base, 

activates the base siren, tracks casualties and damage to installation resources, and directs 

recovery efforts. The SRC tracks the location of all known postattack hazards on the base. 

c. Unit Control Center (UCC). The next level down in the command structure, 

below the SRC, is the UCC. It monitors the status of unit activities and maintains a log of 

unit actions. The UCC passes information to and from the SRC, and it directs and monitors 

the implementation of unit pre-, during-, and postattack actions. UCCs maintain a base 

map with all unit structures, shelters, bunkers, and primary operating areas color-coded or 

marked to enable quick identification. UCC checklists outline tasks and responsible unit 

functions under each alarm condition. Following attacks, the UCC directs (in coordination 

with the SRC) and reports postattack hazards to the SRC and coordinates recovery actions. 

d. UCC Capabilities. UCCs track the location of all known postattack hazards that 

may affect their unit personnel or mission. This includes hazards such as contamination 

and unexploded ordnance (UXO). The UCC advises unit personnel of hazard locations and 

directs the movement of unit assets away from hazard areas. If the base uses the NBC 

sector or zone concept, the UCC tracks the alarm condition and MOPP for the sectors/zones 

and controls movement of unit resources into and out of the contaminated areas. 

e. Deployable Teams. Within the USAF, deployable teams with a decontamination 

capability (see Table G-1) are organized under unit type codes (UTCs). UTCs prescribe

specific team support for a given contingency. Within this concept, trained individuals are 

deployed for assignment to these teams when the need arises. The teams have multiple 

capabilities. 

Table G-1. USAF UTCs 

USAF UTCs 

4 

F 

9 

D 

A 

NBCC Threat 

Response Core Team 

Provides limited NBCC defense supporting activities ranging from small-scale 

contingency operations to MTWs and response to major accidents and natural disasters 

for an AB with up to 1,200 personnel. Capabilities include preliminary risk/VAs and 

threat analysis; planning, detection, identification, warning, and reporting; 

decontamination; CCA; disaster response equipment; technical data; roll-on/roll-off 

capability, and 463L pallets. Personnel will deploy with IPE, clothing, weapons, and 

ammunition. 

G-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table G-1. USAF UTCs (Continued) 

USAF UTCs 

4 

F 

9 

D 

B 

NBCC Threat 

Response Light Team 

Provides minimal NBCC defense supporting activities ranging from small-scale 

contingency operations to MTWs and response to major accidents and natural disasters 

for AB with up to 600 personnel. Capabilities include preliminary risk/VAs and threat 

analysis; planning, detection, identification, warning, and reporting; decontamination; 

CCA; disaster response equipment; technical data; roll-on/roll-off capability; and 4,63L 

pallets. Personnel will deploy with IPE, clothing, weapons, and ammunition. 

4 

F 

9 

D 

C 

NBCC Threat 

Response Light Team 

Provides additional technical expertise, support, and manpower to other UTCs in 

full-spectrum threat response to NBCC defense, major accidents, and disaster response 

operations. Personnel capabilities include detection, identification, warning, reporting, 

decontamination, and contamination control operations. Provides additional manpower 

supporting activities, ranging from smaller-scale contingency operations to MTWs. 

Personnel deploy with IPE, clothing, weapons, and ammunition. 

4 

F 

9 

D 

E 

NBCC Response 

CCT Equipment Set 

Provides limited full-spectrum threat response and contamination control capabilities for 

sustained operations in an NBCC environment. Provides contamination avoidance 

resources, such as decontamination apparatuses and supplies, M295 decontamination 

kits, protective covers, decontaminants, and application devices. Requires manpower 

augmentation (10 personnel) from the supported unit for the setup, maintenance, and 

operation of contamination control equipment. 

4 

F 

9 

D 

M 

NBCC Threat 

Response Core Team 

Provides NBCC defense capability to respond to attacks, major accidents, and natural 

disasters in support of small-scale contingency operations (without augmentation) or 

MTWs for an AB with up to 1,200 personnel (with augmentation by UTC 4F9DC). 

Capabilities include preliminary risk/VAs and threat analysis; planning, detection, 

identification, warning, and reporting; decontamination; CCA; disaster response 

equipment; technical data; roll-on/roll-off capability; and 463L pallets. Personnel will 

deploy with IPE, clothing, weapons, and ammunition. 

4 

F 

9 

D 

Q 

Wartime Medical 

Decontamination 

Team (UTC FFGLB) 

Provides the capability to remove or neutralize NBC agents on casualties immediately 

prior to being admitted to the MTF. Standardized WMDs and equipment assemblages 

can be deployed, assigned, or pre-positioned to support and enable USAF MTFs to 

safely and effectively treat contaminated casualties without contaminating medical 

personnel, equipment, or facilities. Decontamination sites/facilities are constructed in the 

vicinity of the MTF. Personnel decontamination is accomplished by clothing removal and 

skin washing using soap or hypochlorite. The WMDT conducts the contamination control 

of medical personnel and assets as needed. 

F 

F 

G 

L 

B 

Expeditionary 

Medical 

Decontamination 

Team 

Provides the capability to remove CBRN contamination from contaminated casualties 

prior to admission to an MTF. 

f. Casualty Decontamination. The decontamination of casualties protects them 

from the detrimental effects of contamination and protects those who move and treat them. 

Units and individuals have the responsibility for immediate decontamination during the 

self-aid buddy care (SABC) process (i.e., use of M291 and M295 decontamination kits). This 

should be done as soon as contamination is found and prior to moving casualties to the 

medical facility; quick action saves lives. Upon completion of SABC efforts, units should 

move contaminated casualties into the medical treatment system as soon as possible, even 

if decontamination is not complete. The MTF will plan for and provide patient 

decontamination depending on the local threat conditions. The wartime patient 

decontamination team provides this capability and may be deployed, depending on the NBC 

threat. Medical units without a patient decontamination team may need to establish a 

decontamination capability using personnel and material of opportunity. Commanders at 

the employment location may need to provide manpower augmentation to the medical unit 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 G-9 
in the event of insufficient medical resources. Ambulatory personnel with no significant 

symptoms should process through unit or area CCAs for decontamination whenever 

practical. Patient decontamination resources are limited and are best-suited for personnel 

in need of medical care. See Table G-2 for a synopsis of CE and CBRN decontamination 

capabilities. 

Table G-2. CE and Medical CBRN Decontamination Capabilities 

CE UTCs Medical UTCs 

Provide alarm conditions and MOPP level 

recommendations based upon the threat. 

Assist with NBC postattack risk assessments and 

management. 

Conduct NBC reconnaissance to determine 

contamination footprint(s) and related operational 

protective measures. 

Detect NBC agents at the MTF; report to the SRC and NBC 

cells. 

Collect and consolidate postattack reports from 

NBCC teams, UCCs, and the SRC. 

Dispatch to identified NBC footprints for the further 

identification and quantification of hazard concentrations and 

the collection of samples (surveillance for health protection). 

Advise the incident commander on TTP to conduct 

sustained operations in a contaminated 

environment. 

Sample food and water for NBC contamination. 

Provide additional technical expertise, support, and 

manpower to NBCC defense. 

Conduct surveillance activities in reduced MOPP level 

sectors. 

Manage CCA operations and advise on entry and 

exit control point procedures. 

Document individual exposure (PRD-5) requirements. 

Advise the SRC commander on NBC operational 

aspects (persistency, contamination isolation, and 

control). 

Identify groups of personnel in hazard areas (e.g., squadrons 

in contaminated sectors) and track exposure to NBC agents 

(PRD-5 requirements). 

Provide MOPP level recommendations (operational), 

to include split MOPP/reduced MOPP operations. 

Advise the SRC commander on the health effects and health 

risks of NBC agents 

Coordinate the collection, storage, and disposal of 

contaminated waste. 

Advise the SRC on the health/medical aspects in support of 

reduced MOPP levels. 

Perform patient decontamination. 

Perform the appropriate level of decontamination for medical 

vehicles, shelters, and equipment 

5. Navy 

This paragraph provides an overview of USN decontamination CBRD capabilities and 

organization. 

a. Afloat. CBRD is coordinated aboard each ship according to the specific CBRD 

bill for that ship. The responsibility for the CBRD normally rests with the damage control 

officer, who organizes the CBRD team. Personnel are assigned to operate decontamination 

stations as designated by the damage control officer. 

b. Ashore. Disaster preparedness teams are established by the naval shore activity 

commanding officer. CBRD decontamination teams consist of the following assets: 

(1) CBR Survey Team. Surveys the assigned areas to determine CBR 

contamination locations and levels and marks hazardous areas. 

(2) Personnel Decontamination Team. Conducts chemical and radiological

decontamination of personnel who are not seriously injured. 

G-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(3) Facilities and Area Decontamination Team. Is responsible for performing 

CBR decontamination of essential facilities and areas. 

(4) Radiation Monitor Team. Provides radiation monitoring capability and 

equipment to personnel performing rescue, first aid, and firefighting. 

(5) Dosimetry Team. Determines the radiation dosage of personnel by reading 

dosimeters and recording readings. 

(6) Clothing Decontamination Team. Retrieves contaminated clothing from

personnel decontamination stations and determines its reusability. Delivers clothing to

decontamination stations and returns it to the clothing supply team. 

(7) Nuclear Accident Team. Provides assistance to the on-scene commander 

and performs emergency actions that may be necessary to minimize the initial results of a 

nuclear accident/incident. 

(8) Shelter Management Team. Provides the orderly administration of all

activities related to the comfort and welfare of all inhabitants of an assigned shelter. 

6. Other Units 

Selected units, such as USA reserve component CBRN units, are equipped with 

additional resources to support casualty decontamination requirements. The mission of 

these units is to provide a domestic response capability for casualty decontamination in 

support of CM operations. 

a. These units are equipped with a platoon set of domestic response style 

equipment (see Table G-3, page G-12) to decontaminate both ambulatory and 

nonambulatory casualties. The set includes a quickly erectable tent with runoff 

containment included for the actual decontamination, two other tents for sun protection for 

the workers and victims, showers for washing and rinsing, and rollers for decontaminating 

nonambulatory victims. 

Table G-3. USA Reserve Component Platoon Equipment for Casualty Decontamination 

Line Description Remarks Identification Number 

1 Reeves Decontamination System 1 per platoon 

3 per company 

DCJ-10 

2 Western Shelter System 2 per platoon 

6 per company 

N/A 

3 DRCD kit accessories 1 per company N/A 

4 ICAM 3 per platoon 

9 per company 

6665-01-657-8502 

5 CAMSIM 1 per platoon 

3 per company 

6665-99-001-9985 

6 Radiac meter, AN/PDR-77 1 per platoon 

3 per company 

6665-01-347-6100 

7 Radiac meter, AN/UDR-13 5 per platoon 

15 per company 

6665-01-407-1237 

8 Radiac meter, AN/VDR-2 1 per platoon 

3 per company 

6665-01-222-1425 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 G-11 
Table G-3. USA Reserve Component Platoon Equipment for Casualty Decontamination 

(Continued) 

Line Description Remarks Identification Number 

9 ACADA, M22 2 per platoon 

5 per company 

6665-01-438-6963 

10 Carrier, litter, wheeled 2 per platoon 

6 per company 

6530-01-220-7186 

11 PA system, portable with rechargeable battery, remote 

operation 

2 per company 9925-01-450-0074 

12 Level B suit (TYCHEM 9400, hooded) 140 per company N/A 

13 Filter canister, C2A1 140 per company 4240-01-361-1319 

14 Gloves, CP, rubber, 15 mil 140 per company 8415-01-033-3519 

15 Skin, hood, M40 140 per company 4240-01-413-1543 

16 Hood, M40 140 per company 4240-01-376-3152 

17 EMT shears, red 50 per company N/A 

18 EMT shears, black 50 per company N/A 

19 Radio, handheld 15 per company 5820-01-Z68-0002 

20 Battery, rechargeable, ICAM 10 per company N/A 

21 Charger, battery, rechargeable, ICAM 2 per company N/A 

22 ACAA, simulator Request in sets; 1 

per DRCD kit 

N/A 

23 Chemical-agent patient decontamination, medical 

equipment set 

1 set per 60 

patients 

N/A 

24 Chemical-agent patient treatment, medical equipment 

supplies 

1 set per 30 

patients 

N/A 

25 STB (50 pounds) See CTA N/A 

26 Cover, chemical protective wrap See CTA N/A 

b. USA reserve units, while designed for overseas deployment, have the capability 

to provide domestic-response casualty decontamination (DRCD) in support of CM. These 

units are not designed or intended to replace functions carried out under the ICS or 

functions normally performed by the emergency first-responder community. Instead, these 

units provide additional capability as needed to support CM. They are not designed for a 

rapid response, but can be mobilized and deployed within days. The basic functions 

performed by these units include the following: 

• Receive the mission, activate the mobilization plan, and initiate unit movement. 

• Conduct mission assessment to develop a force packet. 

• Coordinate unit movement and deployment. 

• Conduct liaison operations. 

• Conduct staging operations. 

• Conduct incident integration operations. 

• Conduct decontamination site selection, parameters, and setup. 

G-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
• Receive and process casualties from a WMD event. 

• Establish a triage site, and triage casualties from a WMD event. 

• Provide critical medical intervention for casualties suffering from the effects of a 

CBRN event. 

• Provide FP for individuals working within the decontamination line. 

• Establish log-in site procedures. 

• Establish the domestic decontamination site. 

• Conduct ambulatory casualty gross decontamination. 

• Conduct ambulatory casualty clothing removal and contaminant neutralization. 

• Conduct ambulatory casualty rinse procedures. 

• Determine the level of decontamination effectiveness on an ambulatory casualty. 

• Conduct nonambulatory casualty gross decontamination. 

• Conduct nonambulatory casualty clothing removal and contaminant 

neutralization. 

• Conduct nonambulatory casualty rinse procedures. 

• Determine the level of decontamination effectiveness on a nonambulatory 

casualty. 

• Receive personal property and equipment for decontamination. 

• Establish a personal property and equipment line, and perform decontamination 

procedures. 

• Determine the level of decontamination effectiveness on personal items and 

equipment. 

• Establish and maintain a hazardous waste site in support of casualty

decontamination. 

• Establish and maintain a contaminated water collection site in support of 

casualty decontamination. 

• Conduct hazardous wastewater sampling to determine neutralization 

effectiveness. 

• Control runoff of contaminated water in support of casualty decontamination. 

• Conduct rehabilitation procedures. 

• Sustain operations during inclement weather or limited visibility. 

• Conduct the unit recovery mission. 

• Conduct the postincident debriefing. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 G-13 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix H 

DECONTAMINATION KITS, APPARATUSES, AND EQUIPMENT 

1. Background 

Table H-1 lists the decontamination equipment and materials, and Table H-2 (page 

H-2) lists detection equipment and materials. Various materials and equipment are used in 

decontamination operations. Some are simple to use and are readily available to personnel. 

Others are very complex to use and are available only to specially trained teams. 

Table H-1. Decontamination Equipment and Materials 

Item and Description Use Limitations 

Individual 

Decontaminating kit, skin, 

M291 SDK 

(20 kits per box) 

To decontaminate your skin completely, 

through physical removal, absorption, and 

neutralization of toxic agents without longterm effects. 

NOTE: Use this kit for both actual 

combat and training purposes. 

The M291 is for external use only. 

WARNING 

Keep decontamination powder 

out of eyes, cuts, or wounds. It 

could slightly irritate the skin 

or eyes. 

Decontaminating kit, 

individual equipment, 

M295, IEDK 

To decontaminate your chemical protective 

gloves, mask, hood, overboots, LCE, and 

weapon. WARNING 

Do not use for skin 

decontamination. Keep off the 

skin and out of wounds, eyes, 

and mouth. 

Battalion Decontamination Crew and Chemical Company 

SDS, M100. Each M100 

consists of two 0.7-lb 

packs of reactive sorbent 

powder, two applicators, a 

carrying case, and two 

straps 

To perform immediate decontamination of 

equipment, vehicles, and crew-served 

weapons. 

NOTE: Use this kit for both actual 

combat and training purposes. 

Do not use on sensitive items. 

The operating temperature is -25°F to 

120°F. 

WARNING 

Do not use for skin 

decontamination. Keep off the 

skin and out of wounds, eyes, 

and mouth. 

Decontaminating 

apparatus, power-driven, 

skid-mounted, 

multipurpose, integral, 

500-gallon, M12A1 PDDA. 

The apparatus includes a 

pump unit, tank unit, and 

M2 water heater (all 

mounted on skids). 

To spray decontaminating agents, STB 

slurries and solutions, and hot, soapy water 

rinses during field decontamination 

operations. 

To pump water or foam to fight fires, deice 

items, wash vehicles, and pump various 

fluids. 

Do not use with defoliants, herbicides, or 

insecticides. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-1 
Table H-1. Decontamination Equipment and Materials (Continued) 

Item and Description Use Limitations 

Battalion Decontamination Crew and Chemical Company (Continued) 

Decontaminating system, 

lightweight, M17 LDS, 

NSN 4230-01-251-8702. 

The M17 is a portable 

pump and water-heating 

unit for producing hot 

water and steam. The 

system incorporates a 

1,580- to 3,000-gallon 

collapsible water tank, two 

wand assemblies, and 

connecting hoses. 

To perform operational and thorough 

decontamination of vehicles and 

equipment. 

To provide troop showers, as necessary. 

None 

MPDS. The system 

includes one high-pressure 

hose, two hightemperature hoses, a 

lance-and-gun assembly, 

and a 3,000-gallon 

collapsible water tank. 

To perform operational and thorough 

decontamination of vehicles and 

equipment. 

None 

FSDS. This system 

includes a pump unit and a 

bulk decontaminant tank. 

The system includes a 

spray bar for terrain 

decontamination, a deck 

gun for fixed-site 

equipment, and a spray 

hose. 

To perform fixed-site and terrain 

decontamination. 

To perform operational and thorough 

decontamination of vehicles and 

equipment. 

None 

Table H-2. Detection Equipment and Materials 

Item and Description Use Limitations 

Paper, chemical agent, 

detector, M8. The paper is 

issued in a book of 25 

sheets, perforated for easy 

removal. A color 

comparison bar chart is 

printed on the inside front 

cover. 

To detect the presence of liquid V, G, and 

H chemical agents. 

It cannot be used to detect vapors or 

chemical agents in water or petroleum 

products. 

It may give false readings. 

Paper, chemical agent, 

detector, M9. The paper is 

issued in a 7-ounce 

dispenser box that contains 

one 30-foot roll of 2-inchwide detector paper and 

plastic storage bags. The 

paper has an adhesive 

back for attaching to 

equipment and clothing. 

To detect the presence of liquid V, G, and 

H chemical agents. 

It cannot be used to detect vapors or 

chemical agents in water. 

It will not stick to dirty, oily, or greasy 

surfaces. 

Contamination indications cannot be 

read under a red light or by a color-blind 

soldier. 

The following can cause false readings: 

• Temperatures above 125°F. 

• Brake fluid. 

• Aircraft cleaning compound. 

• DS2. 

• Petroleum products. 

• Insect repellent. 

H-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Table H-2. Detection Equipment and Materials (Continued) 

Item and Description Use Limitations 

ACAA, M22 To detect chemical nerve agents in the air. 

WARNING 

Radiation hazard—contains 

beta emitters. 

ACAA, M8A1. It can be 

vehicle-mounted, 

backpacked, or groundemplaced. 

To detect chemical nerve agents in the air. 

WARNING 

Radiation hazard—contains 

Americium (AM241). 

ICAM To detect nerve- and blister-agent vapors. 

To search out areas; to search and locate 

contamination on personnel, equipment, 

ship's structure, aircraft, land vehicles, 

buildings, and terrain; and to monitor for 

the effectiveness of decontamination. Can 

also be used for monitoring collective 

protection. 

It is a point monitor only. It cannot give 

an assessment of the vapor hazard over 

an area from one position. 

It can only report conditions at the front 

of the inlet probe. 

WARNING 

Beta radiation hazard. 

Detector kit, chemical 

agent, M256A1. It contains 

M8 detector paper for liquid 

agents and 

samplers/detectors for 

vapors. 

To detect liquid G, V, and H chemical 

agents using M8 detector paper and to 

detect and determine the type of vapor (G, 

V, H, and AC) using samplers and 

detectors. 

None 

Radiac set, AN/VDR-2. 

The instrument consists of 

a radiac meter with an 

internal sensor for 

obtaining dose rates during 

both mounted and 

dismounted operations. It 

has a second sensor 

housed in a probe and 

attached to the radiac 

meter with a cable and 

input connector. 

The radiac set uses a presettable, an audible, and a 

visual warning device 

integral to the radiac meter. 

The system is airtransportable and organic 

to all units. 

To measure gamma radiation dose rates 

from 0.01 μGy/hr to 100 Gy/hr. 

To detect and display the level of beta 

particle dose rates from 0.1 μGy/hr to 5 

cGy/hr. 

To measure, store, and display 

accumulated dose rates from 0.01 μGy to 

9.99 Gy. 

To monitor personnel, supplies, and 

equipment. 

None 

Computer indicator, radiac, 

CP696/PDR-75; detector, 

radiac/ DT236/PDR-75; 

radiac set, AN/PDR-75 

To measure the accumulated neutron and 

gamma radiation dose recorded by the 

DT236. A person who may become 

exposed to radiation from tactical nuclear 

weapons wears the DT236 on his wrist. 

None 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-3 
Table H-2. Detection Equipment and Materials (Continued) 

Item and Description Use Limitations 

Radiac set, AN/UDR-13 Measures gamma radiation only and 

provides total dose or dose rate. It will 

replace the IM-93/UD dosimeter. 

None 

DOD biological sampling 

kit 

Provides presumptive identification for a 

limited number of biological agents. 

Not to be used as single means of 

identification. The sampling kit should 

never be used for diagnostic purposes. 

ADM-300 Detects, measures, and digitally displays 

dose and dose rate levels of beta and 

gamma radiation. 

None 

Water testing kit, M272 Detects and identifies CW agents in raw or 

treated water sources. 

None 

2. Decontamination Devices for Personnel 

Decontamination devices for personnel are the warfighter’s first defense against 

contamination on the skin. They are an integral part of immediate decontamination. 

a. M291 SDK. 

(1) Users: All services and components. 

(2) Description. The M291 kit (Figure H-1) consists of six identical packets 

that contain a mixture of activated resins. This resin mixture adsorbs and neutralizes 

liquid chemical agents present on an individual’s skin and neutralizes agents. The mixture 

consists of an adsorbent resin, a resin containing sulfonic acid, and a hydroxylaminecontaining resin. The black powder residue will provide a visual confirmation of the 

thoroughness of application and will not cause any skin irritation even after prolonged 

contact with skin. However, normal precautions must be observed so that the powder does 

not enter open wounds, the mouth, or the eyes. This kit will also be used for training; no 

training aid will be produced. The issue is 20 M291 SDKs per box. 

(3) Mission. The M291 is used to decontaminate the skin, mask hood, and 

protective gloves. After masking, the individual opens a packet from the kit, removes the 

applicator pad, and applies an even coating of resin powder while scrubbing the entire skin 

area suspected to be contaminated. 

(4) Capabilities. One applicator pad will decontaminate both hands and the 

face if necessary. If the face must be decontaminated, the neck (including the throat area) 

and the ears must also be decontaminated using a second applicator pad. The black powder 

resin will provide a visual confirmation of the thoroughness of application and will not 

cause any skin irritation even after prolonged contact with skin. 

H-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure H-1. M291 Skin Decontamination Kit 

b. RSDL. 

(1) Users. All services and components. 

(2) Description. RSDL is a broad-spectrum liquid CW agent decontaminant 

that will remove and destroy military chemical agents on contact. After CW agent 

destruction, RSDL leaves a nontoxic residue that may be washed off with water. It does not 

need to be removed immediately. RSDL is safe for use on all intact skin surfaces and for 

limited duration use in the eyes. RSDL reacts rapidly, providing the full removal and 

destruction of CW agents within 2 minutes, enabling efficient decontamination of 

casualties. The RSDL kit is fielded with three kits per package. 

(3) Mission. The RSDL is used to decontaminate intact skin only. It is 

impregnated in a sponge pad and packaged as a single unit in a heat-sealed foil pouch. 

When exposed to CW agents, the user wipes the exposed skin with the lotion. 

(4) Capabilities. RSDL acts within seconds of being applied to the skin, 

neutralizing the toxicity of chemical agents by breaking down their molecules. Apply the 

lotion within 1 minute of contamination. The lotion is effective against cutaneous nerve 

and blister agents, such as mustard, GB, and VX. 

3. Decontamination Devices for Equipment 

Decontamination devices are used for all levels of equipment decontamination (e.g., 

immediate, operational, and thorough). 

a. M295 IEDK. 

(1) Users. All services and components. 

(2) Description. The M295 kit (see Figure H-2, page H-6) provides a means to 

decontaminate individual equipment through physical removal and absorption of chemical 

agents, with no long-term harmful side effects. The M295 consists of four individual 

wipe-down mitts—each enclosed in a protective packet. Each wipe-down mitt consists of a 

decontaminating powder contained within a pad material. When used, the sorbent powder 

from the mitt flows freely through the pad material. The M295 allows for the 

decontamination of individual equipment, such as gloves, footwear, weapon, helmet, and 

LBE through physical removal and sorption of chemical agents. The residue of the powder 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-5 
shows where the powder has been used or, more importantly, what areas have not been 

decontaminated. 

Figure H-2. M295 IEDK 

(3) Mission. The M295 kit is used to decontaminate the individual’s personal 

equipment (i.e. protective gloves, mask, hood, NBC overboots, helmet, LBE, and weapon). 

Each packet consists of a decontamination mitt filled with 22 grams of the decontaminant 

compound, 20 M295 kits are packed in a fiberboard-shipping container. 

b. M100 SDS. 

(1) Users: All services and components. 

(2) Description. The M100 SDS (Figure H-3) uses a reactive sorbent powder to 

remove and neutralize chemical agents from surfaces. The use of the M100 SDS decreases 

decontamination time and eliminates the need for water. Each M100 SDS consists of two 

0.7-pound packs of reactive sorbent powder, two wash mitt type sorbent applicators, a case, 

straps, and detailed instructions. An optional chemical-resistant mounting bracket is also 

available. The sorbent decontamination system provides a simple, rapid, and efficient 

system to decontaminate small and individual issue items. The sorbent is used during the 

operator’s wipe-down portion of immediate decontamination on surfaces that personnel 

must touch or contact to operate the equipment, such as door handles, crew-served

weapons, etc. The sorbent powder is applied to the mitt or flat surfaces prior to 

decontaminating. The M100 SDS is not classified as a hazardous material and, therefore, 

can be shipped through normal transport processes. 

(3) Mission. The M100 replaces the M11/M13 DAP and associated 

decontamination solution number 2 (DS2) used in operator wipe down (immediate 

decontamination) with a reactive, neutralizing sorbent powder. 

H-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure H-3. M100 SDS 

4. Power-Driven Decontamination Systems 

Power-driven decontamination systems provide a myriad of decontamination 

capabilities to the warfighter. The most significant capability of these systems is their 

ability to dispense high-pressure water for the physical removal of contamination. 

a. M17 LDS. 

(1) Users. USA, USMC, and USAF. 

(2) Description. The M17 is a portable decontamination system. It consists of 

a 7.3-horsepower engine (Figure H-4, page H-8), a self-priming pump for drawing and 

pressurizing water, a fan assembly to deliver combustion air to the heater, a water heater 

with a coil of tubing 90 feet (27.45 meters) long, a self-priming pump for the heater fuel 

system, and a small generator to supply electricity for ignition and safety control functions. 

The M17 LDS includes diesel and gas fuel-powered systems. 

(3) Mission. The M17 dispenses high-volume, low-pressure, hot or cold water 

for the removal of gross contamination. It is used to support operational decontamination 

missions. 

(4) Capabilities. The M17— 

(a) Is transportable by a 3/4-ton trailer, 5/4-ton cargo trucks, cargo 

aircraft, and helicopters (sling load). 

(b) Provides pressurized water at temperatures up to 248°F (119.88°C) at

a rate of up to 9 gallons (34.06 liters) per minute. 

(c) Draws water from a natural source up to 30 feet (9.15 meters) away 

and 9 feet (2.75 meters) below pump level. There is an additional 3,000-gallon (113.55 

hectoliter) water storage tank in the event a natural source of water is not available. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-7 
Figure H-4. M17 LDS 

b. Multipurpose Decontamination System. 

(1) Users. USA. 

(2) Description. The MPDS (Figure H-5) is a lightweight, modular 

decontamination system. 

(3) Mission. The MPDS decontaminates material with aqueous solutions in 

support of operational or thorough decontamination operations. 

(4) Capabilities. The MPDS provides— 

(a) Material decontamination with aqueous solutions or hot-foam 

treatment. 

(b) Equipment decontamination with dry steam. 

(c) Personnel decontamination by supplying warm water to shower 

systems. 

(d) Multiple operating modes: cold water, hot water, steam, and dry 

steam. 

(e) Engine winter start capability to -30°C (-22°F). 

(f) Self-priming, high-pressure pump for water intake from all water 

sources, including seawater. 

(g) Water flow and pressure that are infinitely adjustable. 

(h) Automatic protection against calcification. 

(i) Single fuel system. 

H-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure H-5. MPDS 

c. M12A1 Power-Driven Decontamination Apparatus. 

(1) Users. USA. 

(2) Description. The M12A1 consists of a 500-gallon tank, a pumper unit, and

an M2 water heater. Each unit is mounted on a skid base. Power for operating the

equipment is supplied by the pump unit, which uses a 20-horsepower military standard 

gasoline or diesel engine to drive a centrifugal pump and a 28-volt direct current generator. 

The M2 water heater is electrically connected through a main power cable to a generator in 

the pump unit. A personnel shower assembly stowed on the tank unit in disassembled form 

can be readily assembled in varying configurations to shower up to 24 personnel at one 

time. 

(3) Mission. The M12A1 is used to support thorough, operational, and terrain 

decontamination missions. 

(4) Capabilities. The M12A1— 

(a) Is used to spray water, STB slurry, and other decontaminants. 

(b) May be used for firefighting and spraying water. 

d. Fixed-Site Decontamination System (FSDS). 

(1) Users. USA. 

(2) Description. 

(a) The FSDS (Figure H-6, page H-10) is a compressed-air, 

foam-generating system, consisting of a pump and bulk decontaminant tank that can be 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-9 
mounted on a commercial vehicle or trailer. The system may be used in three different 

modes: a spray bar is mounted at the rear of the trailer for terrain decontamination, a deck 

gun is mounted in the truck bed for fixed-site equipment and facility decontamination, and 

a foam dispensing nozzle with a 100-foot spray hose is mounted on the trailer for direct 

decontaminant application and to supplement deck gun operations. 

NOTE: Decontaminant in “foam” form is not authorized for use at this time. DF 

200 is currently approved for CENTCOM use only. 

Figure H-6. FSDS Placed in a Civilian Vehicle 

(b) The systems primary decontaminant is DF 200. 

(3) Mission. The primary function of the FSDS is to provide a decontamination 

capability for APODs and SPODs. The system also provides the capability to perform 

decontamination on main supply routes (MSRs), vehicles, equipment, and aircraft. 

Inherent in the mission to decontaminate APODs and SPODs is the requirement to 

decontaminate staging areas, runways, roads, buildings, and container expresses 

(CONEXs). Each of these areas requires different approaches, configurations, and planning 

factors. (See paragraph 5 for the TTP to support FSDS operations.) 

(4) Capabilities. The FSDS provides— 

• Mobile terrain decontamination. 

• Fixed-site and facility decontamination. 

• Equipment decontamination. 

5. Fixed-Site Decontamination System Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures 

Three individuals (supervisor, driver, and spray cannon/wand operator) man the 

system. The system has three modes of operation: spray bar at the rear of the trailer, deck 

gun on the truck bed, and 100-foot spray hose on the trailer. Only one mode of operation is 

possible at one time. To decontaminate horizontal surfaces (staging areas, docks, and 

roads) the rear spray bar is the primary mode of operation. To decontaminate buildings,

structures, and containers, the deck gun is the primary mode. The spray hose will be used 

H-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
to augment the deck gun and also will be available for smaller areas, vehicles, and aircraft 

and to perform self-decontamination of the system. 

The primary decontaminant is DF 200. DF 200 is supplied as a three-part solution:

Part A, Part B and Part C activator. The system is configured with a trailer that contains 

three separate storage tanks for the solution. There are two 500-gallon tanks, one each for 

Parts A and B, and a 30-gallon tank for Part C. Tank C pours directly into Tank B so

activation occurs prior to mixing of Parts A and B. Tank C should be released prior to 

movement in order for Parts B and C to get mixed well. The system mixes the solutions as 

it operates and, therefore, premixing of the solutions is not required. The system can be

filled and standing ready without the need to perform the loading after the mission is 

received. This allows for a quick response when a mission must be performed. 

a. Mission Receipt. 

(1) The planner determines the surface composition of the contaminated area 

in order to determine the effects on the mission (i.e., absorption and desorption rate, 

reaction of surface with decontaminant, concerns of contaminant transfer due to 

uncontrolled runoff). 

(2) The planner determines the extent of the contamination in order to identify 

the quantity of required decontamination applicators. Table H-3 identifies the capability of 

one system with a 1,000-gallon load of DF 200. The planner also determines the extent of 

the contamination, which will determine the resupply quantities required. 

Table H-3. Typical Mission Parameters (1,000 gallons of DF 200) 

Contaminated Areas Time Speed Coverage 

Roads, runways, and staging areas 18 minutes 2–3 mph 25,000 square feet 

(3) The planner identifies any additional requirements (i.e., additional pumps, 

detectors, and nonstandard equipment). 

(4) The planner assesses the weather conditions (temperature, precipitation, 

and winds) and determines how they may affect the mission. The assessment will also 

evaluate whether the mission must be adjusted based on the conditions. For example, 

extreme heat may cause the contaminant to dissipate faster than a thorough 

decontamination operation can be completed, so a limited area may be decontaminated to 

maintain operations until weathering effects are complete. 

(5) The planner determines the entry and exit routes. The locations of the 

routes depend on factors such as the locations of the contamination and the threat. 

Additionally, multiple start points may be used because two FSDSs can be used at the same 

time. 

(6) The planner determines support requirements (e.g., engineer, logistical, 

security, and other assets) needed to safely complete the mission. 

b. Mission Preparation. 

(1) Dispatch resupply vehicles, and coordinate the supply linkup location. 

(2) Determine IPE requirements, and request resupply quantities of all IPE 

and other expendable items and equipment. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-11 
 c. Precombat Checks. 

(1) Individual Equipment. Inspect IPE, to include M40 protective mask and 

filter, BDO or JSLIST, overboots, gloves, wet-weather gear, and TAP aprons. 

(2) FSDS. Conduct preventive-maintenance checks and services (PMCS), and 

fill fuel and decontaminant tanks. Load Tank A with Solution A, or load Tank B with 

Solution B, and fill Tank C with the fortifier. Ensure that the washer fluid reservoir is 

topped off, and load extra wiper fluid and wiper blades. Also ensure that wet wipes are on 

board for the gunner to use to wipe DF 200 residue off his protective mask eye lenses. 

(3) Weapons. Ensure that all individual and crew-served weapons are 

serviceable and that ammunition has been issued to all personnel. 

(4) Communications System of the FSDS. Ensure that PMCS has been 

performed on all communications systems. Obtain call signs and frequencies, and load 

communications security into all systems. If nonsecure communication devices are used 

(handheld, etc.), make communications checks with all personnel. Radios must have 

earpieces and microphones that can operate under the mask hood. The primary

communications contact in a vehicle must be the driver; the vehicle commander, once 

dismounted, will not have access to interior communications systems. 

(5) Convoy Route. Brief all personnel on the convoy route and the type of road 

march to be conducted. 

(6) Support Requirements. Ensure that any external support elements are 

integrated into the mission (e.g., security). 

(7) Coordination. Although the FSDS has the ability to decontaminate itself, 

decontamination support may have to be coordinated to ensure that the FSDSs are 

decontaminated thoroughly upon completion of the assigned mission in preparation for 

subsequent missions. 

d. Mission Execution. 

(1) As the systems depart the starting point, the fortifier in Tank C will be 

released into Tank B. During the convoy, the fortifier will be thoroughly mixed with 

Solution B. When the squad reaches the RP, the DF 200 will be ready for decontamination 

operations. 

(2) Upon arrival at the identified site, the FSDS supervisor will direct the 

driver to stop prior to entering the contaminated area and will start the FSDS in the 

trailer. Once the supervisor and the spray operator exit the vehicle and the mission starts, 

they will not reenter the vehicle until the unit has been decontaminated. They should don

either TAP aprons or wet-weather gear prior to entering the contaminated area. 

(3) The FSDS will proceed down the road/MSR at approximately 2 to 3 miles 

per hour while the spray bar dispenses DF 200. The driver will place the vehicle in fourwheel drive, low and allow the vehicle to move while idling. 

(4) Any obstacles encountered while conducting spray operations (vehicles, 

debris, etc.) will also be sprayed with decontamination solution so that they may be safely 

removed after the contamination has been neutralized. The operator at the system controls

may have to stop the vehicle, turn off the spray bar, and spray this equipment with the 

H-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006
hose or deck gun. If two systems are available, one may be used to spray the equipment 

and obstacles while the second is used to spray surfaces. 

(5) The contamination will be approached from the upwind direction, and the 

area will be decontaminated in 10-feet-wide slices. Multiple systems may work in tandem, 

each covering a 10-foot swath, ensuring that the swaths overlap and result in full coverage. 

Since the system operates at a slow speed (2 to 3 mph), the driver must maintain close 

attention to the trailer. If the spray pattern does not overlap, the contamination will 

remain. The slow speed increases the time it takes to return to the correct pattern. For 

example, Figure H-7 indicates two systems conducting terrain decontamination. 

Wind Direction 

Area of Contamination 

Road 

Resupply 

Vehicle 

#2 

Vehicle 

#1 

Hot Line 

Figure H-7. Two FSDSs Conducting Terrain Decontamination 

(a) When operating in tandem, the drivers must ensure that spray 

patterns overlap. Driving the low speed required can cause the vehicle to drift, and if full 

overlap is not obtained, the area not covered must be resprayed. The vehicle supervisor or

gunner should walk alongside the vehicle as it proceeds and ensure that overlap occurs by 

communicating the progress to the driver. Figure H-8 (page H-14) shows FSDS operations 

conducting terrain decontamination operations that overlap. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-13 
Ensure that 

spray patterns 

overlap. 

Wind Direction 

Figure H-8. FSDS Overlap Operation 

(b) The CBRN decontamination unit must establish an overwatch 

position and control decontamination operations. The decontamination control point (DCP)

(Figure H-9) is the primary location to observe progress and control resupply operations. 

Since all contaminated situations are different, the leadership can determine if planned 

resupply operations will be sufficient to complete the mission. 

Wind Direction Wind Direction 

Area of Contamination 

Vehicle 

#1 

Vehicle 

#2 

DCP 

Figure H-9. Decontamination Control Point 

(c) Obstacles or objects (such as vehicles, equipment, debris, or buildings) 

will be sprayed with the deck gun or spray hose as they are reached. If several systems are 

used, one can be identified as a deck gun/spray hose applicator while the other concentrates 

on horizontal surfaces. 

(d) If multiple systems are used, they can work in relays; as one is 

spraying, the second can be conducting resupply. Application will progress through the 

contamination as vehicles resupply and continue where the last application finished. In 

H-14 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
this case, multiple vehicles will reduce the time it takes to complete decontamination. 

Resupply vehicles should remain upwind of the contaminated area. Figure H-10 

demonstrates how resupply vehicles will approach the hazard area and not cross into that 

area. 

Option 1 Option 2 

Totes 

Trucks 

Contamination 

Trucks 

running 

resupply 

Contamination 

Stationary trucks 

with loaded totes 

Figure H-10. Resupply COAs (Options 1 and 2) 

e. Resupply COAs. 

(1) Option 1. Five-ton or larger trucks drop totes (i.e., supplies) at a hot line 

near the contaminated area. This method should be used primarily if a good estimate of 

the amount of decontaminant needed can be determined. 

(2) Option 2. A 5-ton truck with a forklift conducts a tank exchange at a hot

line. Another forklift would be needed at the supply issue point. This method can be used 

if unit leadership feels that there may be a need for resupply during the mission. Resupply

for the system should be conducted in such a manner that the supply vehicles remain clean.

The supply vehicles move to the resupply point located upwind of the contaminated area. A 

hot line will be established, and supply vehicles will not move downwind from that line. 

Totes will be dropped based on the estimated requirements determined during a recon of 

the contaminated area. Once the mission is completed, resupply trucks, hoses, and totes 

will be contaminated and will need to be decontaminated. If accurate estimates of DF 200 

requirements can be made, the DF 200 can be pre-positioned and the resupply trucks 

should not need decontamination. 

f. Large-Area Missions. Large-area missions (such as airfields, staging areas, 

assembly areas, APODs, and SPODs) will be treated in a similar manner as MSR and 

runways. Decontamination personnel will recon the area and develop a plan to cover the 

contaminated surfaces with decontamination solution as depicted in Figure H-11 (page H16). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-15 
Wind Direction 

Deck 

Gun 

Spray 

Bar 

DCP 

Resupply 

Point 

CONEX/Equipment 

Figure H-11. Large-Area Missions 

g. Building and Vertical Surfaces. Ascertain the wind direction to determine the 

start point for decontamination operations (start upwind). Determine areas where runoff 

from decontamination will occur, and apply additional decontamination solution in these 

areas to reduce agent concentrations. The order of application will be from the top down 

and from left to right. Attention must be made to entry or exit points and any areas where 

contamination could collect, such as around ventilation equipment and heating and cooling 

equipment. When operating the hose reel, ensure that two personnel are available to reel 

in the hose (see Figure H-12). 

h. Safety and Coordination. 

(1) When operating the spray cannon or spray wand, the operator must keep a 

supply of wipes available to continuously clear the mask eye lenses. The vehicle 

commander should also keep wipes available to assist the driver by cleaning the vehicle 

windows if necessary. 

(2) When operating the spray wand, careful coordination must be made 

between the tank commander (TC), system controls operator, and the spray operator. 

When pressure is introduced to the hose, the operator must be aware that the pressure can 

be very powerful and could cause injury. 

H-16 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Figure H-12. Decontamination of a Building 

The spray hose will 

be used on doors 

and other locations 

where contact is 

likely. 

Spray start 

points 

Figure H-12. Hose Reel Operation (Two-Person) 

i. Postmission Actions. 

(1) Interior decontamination of the vehicle should begin immediately upon 

completion of the mission. Interior seat covers and other interior covers must be removed 

and bagged as contaminated waste. If a crew member exits the vehicle, he should not 

reenter the interior until the mission is complete. This prevents the spread of

contamination. If the crew member must reenter the vehicle, the SDS kit should be used to 

decontaminate gloves, boots, and contact areas. 

(2) When all contaminated areas have been decontaminated, the FSDS will 

move toward the hot line at the upwind location of the contamination and commence

standard equipment and troop decontamination operations. A thorough equipment

decontamination and DTD site will be established, and all equipment and soldiers will 

process through the site. 

NOTE: It has not been determined if a complete decontamination of the truck is 

possible. 

(3) Security personnel must ensure that all access to the contaminated area is 

denied until sufficient contact time between the decontaminant and contaminant is 

achieved to guarantee the neutralization of the agent. Security personnel will remain 

upwind of the contamination and restrict entry until the area is determined to be

uncontaminated. Following a mission, the FSDS hoses should be purged and all tanks 

drained. 

(4) The unit should prepare an NBC4 report and send it to higher HQ and 

adjacent units. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 H-17 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix I 

TERRAIN DECONTAMINATION 

1. Background 

a. Most terrain surfaces (excluding unpainted metal and glass) absorb agents. 

Thus, an agent may be transferred to clothing or skin by physical contact. The agent may

also be transferred through vaporization and subsequent inhalation or diffusion into eyes 

and clothing. The decontamination of terrain allows personnel to increase stay time in an 

area and provides passage through an area. Large-scale terrain decontamination requires

extensive amounts of equipment, material, and time. Thus, terrain decontamination is 

limited to areas of critical importance. Contaminated areas that can be avoided need no 

decontamination other than weathering. If they must be used, decontamination may be 

necessary. Wear PPE or IPE when decontamination is not practical. 

b. Terrain decontamination may be accomplished using several methods. The most 

effective techniques for terrain decontamination are the natural methods (weathering or 

aging). Using standard decontaminants should be a last resort. It will quickly exhaust 

your resources. Usually, the most practical method is to scrape contaminated surfaces. 

Fire is an acceptable method; however, consideration must be given to the potential 

downwind vapor hazard. If possible, a contaminated area should be evacuated until time 

and weather remove the contaminant. STB slurry can be used for vital areas. 

c. Terrain decontamination provides more long-term than short-term benefit. 

Generally, terrain cannot be decontaminated well enough to allow a reduction of MOPP 

level right away. At best, the decontamination process may help speed the weathering 

process. Terrain decontamination can be so expensive and so ineffective that the 

commander may consider not doing it. 

d. If the commander decides to conduct terrain decontamination, a limited amount 

will probably be conducted. Planning may result in building a causeway or breaching a 

path through the contamination for entry or exit into a major facility. Movement 

restriction will apply to those personnel who must work. Remain in MOPP. If possible, the 

contaminated area should be evacuated. 

2. Terrain Decontamination Methods 

There are various methods for terrain decontamination. The type of contamination 

present will determine the decontamination method used. These methods are listed in the 

order of decreasing effectiveness. Although terrain decontamination can reduce the contact 

hazard, terrain decontamination will probably not prevent hazardous vapors desorbing 

from chemically contaminated surfaces. Therefore, appropriate protective measures must 

still be taken. 

a. Weathering. Weathering is the simplest and easiest form of decontamination. 

(1) CB Contamination. Warm, windy weather can significantly reduce terrain 

contamination. In some cases, this occurs in a few hours, but it may take a few days. Many

variables affect the persistency of CB hazards, so it is impossible to accurately predict how 

long it takes CB contamination to weather. Sunlight is especially effective against most 

biological agents. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 I-1 
(2) Radiological Contamination. Although the term “weathering” is used to 

describe the decontamination process, weather has little effect on radiological hazards. 

Heavy rain and wind may remove some contamination, but only time will reduce the 

radiation emanating from the contamination. 

b. Removing or Covering. Removing or covering contamination does not destroy it, 

but it does keep the hazards away temporarily. 

(1) CB Contamination. Contamination can be removed from paths and

unpaved roadways by scraping off a layer of earth with heavy earthmoving equipment 

(bulldozers and road graders). Contaminated paths and paved surfaces can be covered with 

a 4-inch layer of earth, roofing paper, plastic sheets, or wood mats. This is a temporary

measure because the agents may penetrate the covering. When the contamination 

penetrates the covering or when the covering is removed, the hazards will reappear. The 

coverings may also extend the life of the contamination hazard by reducing its exposure to 

air and sunlight. 

(2) Radiological Contamination. Radiological contamination must be covered 

by thick layers of dense material (e.g., earth). Three inches of earth will decrease radiation 

dose rates by half because of the shielding provided by the soil; however, 12 inches is more 

effective. The job will be easier with earthmoving equipment, but the equipment and 

operators must undergo decontamination. 

c. Neutralizing. The STB dry mix or STB slurry may be used effectively against 

CB contamination, but not against radiological contamination. Trained personnel and

equipment are required when using the STB slurry, which is costly in time and material. 

(1) CB Contamination. The STB dry mix is spread on solid surfaces and raked 

into soft surfaces like sand or earth. The STB slurry is applied to terrain by using a spray 

hose that is attached to an M12A1 PDDA. Operators wear TAP aprons over their MOPP

gear and sit on the front fenders of a vehicle to spray the STB slurry. The speed of the 

vehicle should be adjusted according to the terrain; this is normally 2 to 4 miles per hour. 

The operators spray a fan pattern 3 to 5 feet ahead of the vehicle. The pattern overlaps on

the center and extends past both sides of the vehicle. The STB slurry forms a seal over the 

surface and must be renewed periodically due to deterioration from traffic or weathering. 

One load of STB slurry will decontaminate a concrete surface about 328 by 33 feet. Other 

surfaces may require more decontaminants. It takes about an hour to load and mix one 

load of STB slurry. 

(2) Radiological Contamination. The STB dry mix and STB slurry have no 

effect on radiological contamination or its hazards. 

d. Burning. Burning works well against CB-contaminated vegetation, but it is of no 

value against radiological contamination. 

(1) CB Contamination. Fuel may be used to burn grass or short undergrowth. 

Burning also works on dirt surfaces. Soak the area with diesel fuel, kerosene, or fuel oil 

and ignite remotely. Do not use gasoline; it burns too quickly. Burning will cause vapor 

hazards downwind, and protective measures will have to be used by downwind units. Area 

commanders must warn these units of the vapor hazards. 

(2) Radiological Contamination. Radiological-contaminated surfaces should 

not be burned. Burning will not destroy radiological contamination or its hazards. It may 

I-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
spread contamination if radioactive particles become suspended in smoke spread by the 

wind. 

e. Exploding. Explosives can be used to blow up areas that have CB contamination; 

however, they are of no value against radiological contamination. 

(1) CB Contamination. Detonating cord, bangalore torpedoes, or mine-clearing 

charges may be used with the STB dry mix to clear small paths through a contaminated 

area. The two methods are used as follows: 

(a) First Method. Remove the holding band, and loosen the lid of the 

bleach drum. Set the drum with the lid in place upside down over about 3 feet of looped 

detonation cord. Remove the drum, and leave the bleach piled on the lid as shown in 

Figure I-1, A. Lids may be fired in a series with a single strand of detonation cord 

connecting the loops. 

(b) Second Method. Remove the holding band, and loosen the lid of the

bleach drum. Set the drum in a shallow hole as shown in Figure I-1, B. Make sure the lid 

is loose. Use 5 feet of looped detonating cord (7 feet in soft ground) for each drum. The 

drums may be fired individually or in a series. For gross contamination, additional firings

may be necessary. 

(c) For either emplacement method, the suggested spacing for charges is

33 feet apart for a 100-foot front contaminated area. The charges should be placed along

the upwind edge of the contaminated area (see Figure I-1, C). Drums may be fired 

individually or in a series. 

Figure I-1. Decontamination by Exploding 

(2) Radiological Contamination. Explosives will not destroy radiological 

contamination or its hazards. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 I-3 
f. Flushing. Flushing with large quantities of water removes contamination. A 

pressurized stream of hot, soapy water delivered by the M12A1 PDDA, M17 LDS, or fire 

trucks can remove significant amounts of an agent. Scrubbing removes even more agent. 

(1) CB Contamination. Flushing is not very effective against some kinds of 

agents, especially thickened agents. However, flushing may speed up the weathering 

process. 

(2) Radiological Contamination. Flushing is very effective for removing loose 

radioactive contamination such as fallout. Rainout, however, can coat surfaces with a film 

that resists flushing. Such films must not be scrubbed. Any contamination removed by

flushing and scrubbing will remain radioactive, so control the runoff. 

NOTE: Use the lid of an STB drum as a plunger to push STB into the air. Use a 

1-meter length of detonation cord and form a loop smaller than the drum lid. 

Place the loop on the ground. Loosen the lid of an STB drum. Hold the lid in 

place while turning the drum upside down, and set it over the loop. Remove the 

drum (the decontaminant will be piled on top of the lid). Use the decontaminant 

drum as a makeshift mortar. The top end of the drum must be pointed in the 

direction you wish to propel the decontaminant. Position the drum by digging a 

shallow hole to hold and point the drum. Place a 11⁄2-meter loop of detonation 

cord in the bottom of the hole (2 meters in soft soil). Loosen the holding band on 

the drum, loosen the lid, and set the drum upside down in the shallow hole. 

g. Clearing. To clear passageways, remove the contaminated layers covering the 

terrain. 

(1) CB Contamination. Most liquid chemical agents will not penetrate the soil 

more than 2 inches, and biological agents penetrate even less. Earthmoving equipment or

hand tools can be used to scrap aside contamination. By scraping off 2 to 4 inches of earth,

a passageway can be created that is free of transfer hazards. However, contamination on 

either side of the passageway will continue to present a vapor hazard. 

(2) Radiological Contamination. Fallout does not penetrate the top layer of soil 

unless it is followed by rain. It can be scraped aside. Move contaminated soil as far away 

as possible; the piles tend to concentrate radiation. Immediately below a nuclear blast 

area, the soil may be radioactive to a depth of 5 feet. In most cases, the decontamination of 

this much earth is not practical. 

3. Types of Surfaces 

The type of surface will influence the type of decontamination method selected. 

Sample decontamination methods are described for the following representative surfaces: 

a. Beaches.

(1) Removing. Use earthmoving equipment or hand tools to scrape off a 5- to 

10-centimeter (2- to 4-inch) layer of earth. Most liquid chemical agents will not penetrate 

more than 5 centimeters (2 inches) beneath the surface. Immediately below a nuclear blast

area, the soil may be radioactive to a depth of 11⁄2 meters. In such cases, decontamination is 

not practical. 

(2) Covering. Use roofing paper, wood mats, or other covering material to 

furnish a protective mat for the passage of personnel. 

I-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
(3) Flushing. A pump and hose may be used. The agent exposed to the surf is 

decontaminated by wave action. The extent of decontamination depends on the number of 

washings by the tide, the type of beach, the type of contamination, and the weather. 

(3) Neutralizing. Spread STB over the surface, using caution on liquid agents. 

b. Hard Surfaces.

(1) Flushing. If the surface is well-drained and sufficient water is available, 

flush the surface thoroughly with water. 

(2) Neutralizing. Spray the surface with slurry from a PDDA. 

c. Dirt Roads.

(1) Removing. Scrape the contamination to the side with road graders. 

(2) Covering. Cover paths across the road with at least 10 centimeters (4 

inches) of earth. 

(3) Neutralizing. Spray the surface with STB slurry. 

d. Grass and Low Vegetation.

(1) Burning. Burning is the quickest and most efficient method of 

decontaminating CB agents when the area is covered with grass or short undergrowth. Dry 

grass and dry wood burn readily; gasoline, kerosene, fuel oil, or fire bombs may be used to 

burn green or wet vegetation. Normally, burning a contaminated area does not completely 

destroy the agent and protective equipment (protective clothing and mask) must still be 

worn. Spreading dry mix after the vegetation has been removed by burning will reduce the 

hazard further. If the contamination is radiological, do not burn it. Burning will spread 

contamination if radioactive particles become suspended in the smoke. 

(2) Exploding. Clear paths through low vegetation with detonating cord,

bangalore torpedoes, or mine-clearing line charges. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 I-5 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix J 

THOROUGH DECONTAMINATION STATION CHARTS FOR 

SUPERVISORS AND ATTENDANTS 

This appendix provides sample charts for the support of the thorough 

decontamination process (Figures J-1 to J-10, pages J-2 to J-11). They can be laminated

and posted at each station. The charts provide the station number and instructions for the 

station supervisor and attendant. They are not meant to be all-inclusive and do not include 

setup procedures or equipment requirements, just an informative guide for station 

supervisors and attendants. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 J-1 
STATION 1 

Individual Gear Decontamination 

Task: Remove contamination to a negligible risk from individual gear (LCE, mask carrier, helmet, 

and weapon). 

NOTE: Individuals wearing the JSLIST chemical protective overgarment will execute 

Station 1 procedures in the same manner as prescribed for the BDO. 

• Individual 

__ Decontaminates his own gear by washing or scrubbing it for 6 minutes with hot, soapy water 

or an STB slurry. 

__ Decontaminates his hose and canister (M42 mask) with either hot, soapy water and a 

sponge or an STB slurry mix. 

__ Dips his gear into the clean water, rinses it for 4 minutes, hands it to the attendant, and 

proceeds to the next station. 

• Attendant 

__ Takes the gear to the equipment checkpoint and places it on the "dirty" side of the 

contamination control line (engineer tape). 

__ Checks the gear using the appropriate detection device and procedures associated with that 

device. 

__ Recycles the gear for decontamination if residual contamination exceeds negligible risks. 

__ Places the gear on the clean side of the contamination control line if it passes the check. 

__ Carries the gear to the reissue point. 

NOTE: Change the slurry mix after 20 personnel have decontaminated their gear, and 

change the rinse water after 10 personnel or when it appears dirty (place the waste in the 

sump). 

Figure J-1. Sample Station 1 Checklist 

J-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
STATION 2 (BDO) 

Overboot and Hood Decontamination 

Task: Neutralize gross contamination on overboots, lower trouser legs, the protective mask, and 

the hood. 

• Individual 

__ The individual walks into the shuffle pit and spreads his legs apart (double-shoulder width), 

bends at the waist, and uses his hands to thoroughly rub the STB dry mix or the STB slurry 

on his overboots and lower trouser legs. 

__ Buddy 1 cuts the shoulder straps and draw cord on Buddy 2’s hood if a replacement hood is 

available. He pulls Buddy 2’s hood inside out over the front of the mask, being careful not to 

touch the exposed neck or head. Buddy 1 gathers Buddy 2’s hood in one hand and uses a 

cutting tool to cut away the hood as close as possible to the eye lens outsert, voicemitter, and 

inlet valve cover. Make sure that nothing is left dangling below the bottom of the mask. 

__ Buddy 1 decontaminates and rolls Buddy 2’s hood in the same manner as for a MOPP gear 

exchange if a replacement hood is not available. 

__ Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 reverse roles. 

• Attendant 

__ Instructs Buddy 1 on how to roll Buddy 2’s hood to ensure that it is accomplished to standard. 

__ Monitors the shuffle pit and adds more STB after 10 personnel have processed through it. 

Figure J-2. Sample Station 2 (BDO) Checklist 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 J-3 
STATION 2 (JSLIST) 

Overboot and Hood Decontamination 

Task: Neutralize gross contamination on overboots, lower trouser legs, the protective mask, and the 

hood. 

• Individual 

__ The individual walks into the shuffle pit and spreads his legs apart (double-shoulder width), 

bends at the waist, and uses his hands to thoroughly rub the STB dry mix or the STB slurry on 

his overboots and lower trouser legs. 

__ Buddy 1 decontaminates his own gloves. He loosens Buddy 2’s overgarment hood by 

unfastening the barrel lock. He then loosens the draw cord around the edge of the hood and 

unfastens the hook-and-pile fastener tape at the chin. Buddy 1 takes care to avoid touching 

Buddy 2’s skin and throat area. 

__ Buddy 1 removes Buddy 2’s overgarment hood by opening the front closure flap and pulling 

the slide fastener from the chin down to the chest. Buddy 1 instructs Buddy 2 to turn around. 

Buddy 1 grasps the back of Buddy 2’s hood, folds the hood inside out (being careful not to 

contaminate the inner garment), and pulls the hood off. 

__ Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 reverse roles. 

• Attendant 

__ Instructs Buddy 1 on how to roll Buddy 2’s hood to ensure that it is accomplished to standard. 

__ Monitors the shuffle pit and adds more STB after 10 personnel have processed through it. 

Figure J-3. Sample Station 2 (JSLIST) Checklist 

J-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
STATION 3 (BDO) 

Overgarment Removal 

Task: Remove the contaminated overgarment before the agent penetrates the material and 

touches the undergarments or the skin. 

NOTE: Avoid touching the individual’s skin or inner clothing. If contact is made, 

decontaminate immediately and then proceed with the overgarment removal. 

Attendant 

__ Assists the individual in removing his overgarment jacket. 

__ Cuts and removes the M9 detector paper from around the individual’s wrist. 

__ Unfastens the hook-and-pile fastener over the jacket zipper, waist cord, and wrist. 

__ Unfastens the back snaps and instructs the individual to make a fist. 

__ Pulls the individual’s jacket down and away from him. 

__ Assists the individual in removing his overgarment trousers. 

__ Cuts and removes the M9 detector paper from the individual’s trousers. 

__ Unfastens the hook-and-pile fastener straps and unzips the zipper on the cuffs of the 

individual’s trousers. 

__ Unfastens the front waist snaps and unzips the front zipper. 

__ Has the individual lift one leg, point that foot down, and bend slightly at the knees for 

stability. 

__ Grasps the cuff of the elevated boot, with a hand on each side, and pulls the cuff in an 

alternating, jerking motion until the individual can step out of the trouser leg. 

__ Repeats the last two steps on the other leg. 

NOTE: Ensure that the individual steps wide enough so that he does not rub his clean 

leg against the contaminated boot or overgarment. 

Figure J-4. Sample Station 3 (BDO) Checklist 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 J-5 
STATION 3 (JSLIST) 

Overgarment Removal 

Task: Remove the contaminated overgarment before the agent penetrates material and touches the 

undergarments or the skin. 

NOTE: Avoid touching the individual’s skin or inner clothing. If contact is made, 

decontaminate immediately and then proceed with the overgarment removal. 

Attendant 

__ Assists the individual in removing his overgarment. 

__ Cuts and removes the M9 detector paper from around the individual’s wrist. 

__ Releases the hook-and-pile fastener tapes at the wrists and at the bottom of the trousers. Unties 

the bow in the coat retention cord if necessary. Unfastens the webbing-strip snaps at the bottom 

of the jacket and releases the coat retention cord. 

__ Touching only the outside surfaces of the jacket, the attendant loosens the bottom of the jacket 

by pulling the material at the bottom away from the individual’s body. The individual locates his 

trouser suspender snap couplers by feeling for them on the outside of his jacket and releases 

them. Unfastens the front closure flap on the front of the jacket and pulls the slide fastener from 

the top of the chest down to the bottom of the jacket. 

__ Instructs the individual to turn around, extend his arms in front of him, and make a fist to prevent 

the removal of his chemical protective gloves. The attendant grasps the jacket near the 

shoulders and removes it by pulling it down and away from the individual’s body. 

NOTE: If there is difficulty removing the jacket in this manner, pull one arm out at a time. 

__ Instructs the individual to turn back around. Cuts and removes the M9 paper from the individual’s 

trousers. 

__ Unfastens the hook-and-pile fastener tapes at the waistband of the trousers, unfastens the front 

closure snaps, and opens the fly slide fastener. Grasps the individual’s trousers at the hips and 

pulls the trousers down to the individual’s knees. 

__ Has the individual lift one leg, point that foot down, and bend slightly at the knee for stability. 

__ Grasps the trouser leg of the elevated foot, with a hand on each side, and pulls the trouser leg in 

an alternating motion until the individual can step out of it. Repeat the last two steps on the other 

leg. 

NOTE: Ensure that the individual steps wide enough so that he does not rub his clean leg 

against the contaminated boot or overgarment. 

Figure J-5. Sample Station 3 (JSLIST) Checklist 

J-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
STATION 4 

Overboot and Glove Removal 

Task: Remove the contaminated overboots and gloves to limit the spread of contamination (the 

overboots and gloves may also be decontaminated for reissue, if serviceable). 

NOTE: Individuals wearing the JSLIST chemical protective overgarment will execute Station 

1 procedures in the same manner as prescribed for the BDO Station 2. 

Attendant 

• Use engineer tape to mark the liquid contamination control line. 

• Unfastens or cut the elastic closures on the individual’s overboots. 

• Have the individual stand next to and face the liquid contamination control line and then step 

back about 12 inches from the control line. 

• Step on the back of the individual’s overboot and instruct him to lift his heel, work his foot out 

of the overboot, and step across the liquid contamination control line. Repeat the process on 

the other foot. 

• Cut off the overboot and discard it into the designated container if it cannot be removed by this 

process. 

• Have the attendant from Station 6 carry the individual’s filter canister until the mask is 

removed if the individual is wearing an M42 protective mask. 

• Have the individual hold the fingertips of his gloves and partially slide his hands out. 

• Remove the individual’s gloves. 

NOTE: Check all items for holes, tears, and punctures; and discard any defective items. Do 

not decontaminate items that are unserviceable. 

NOTE: The attendant performs his duty from the “dirty” side of the liquid contamination 

control line. 

__ Submerge the gloves and overboots in the container of hot, soapy water, ensuring that no 

water remains inside when removed from the container. 

__ Submerge the gloves and overboots in the STB/HTH solution and thoroughly scrub them. , 

Submerge each item once more after scrubbing. 

__ Rinses the scrubbed items thoroughly, making sure that they are rinsed inside and out. 

__ Place the usable items on a poncho or a plastic tarp to air dry. 

__ Place the air-dried usable items into plastic trash bags along with an M256A1 detector kit. If 

the kit shows contamination remaining, recycle the items or discard them. However, if the kit 

shows no contamination, reuse them. 

Figure J-6. Sample Station 4 Checklist 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 J-7 
STATION 5 

Monitor

Task: Identify contamination on personnel (spot decontamination capability and medical aid are 

provided, as required). 

• Monitor 

__ Checks the individuals for contamination using an ICAM. Liquid contamination can be 

detected with M8 detector paper. 

__ Remonitors individuals if decontaminated. 

• Medic 

__ Checks the individuals for any chemical-agent symptoms and treats them as necessary. 

• Individual 

__ Reports any damage to their MOPP gear that was identified at Stations 2, 3, and 4. 

• Attendant 

__ Uses an SDK to decontaminate any areas identified as contaminated. 

NOTE: If all the liquid contamination is absorbed into the clothing, the M8 detector paper 

will be negative even though there is a hazard. 

NOTE: If time is not available, the NBC NCO will have replacement chemical suits, 

overboots, and gloves at this station for reissue. If time is available, personnel will receive 

this equipment at the postdecontamination AA. 

Figure J-7. Sample Station 5 Checklist 

J-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
STATION 6 

Mask Removal 

Task: Remove the mask without contaminating the individual. 

• Pull the hood over the front of the mask, grab the mask by the voicemitter cover, and pull the 

mask off the individual while he holds his breath. 

• Hold the mask open so that the individual can remove the inserts without touching the outside 

of the mask. 

• Have the individual walk upwind approximately 5 meters, cross the vapor contamination 

control line, and then resume breathing. 

• Bring the mask to Station 7. 

NOTE: If the wind direction remains constant, no vapor hazard is expected beyond the 

vapor contamination control line. 

• The CBRN defense unit positions the M8A1 or M22 ACAA upwind of the site. 

• The individual moves straight ahead while his mask, which may still be emitting vapors, is 

held on the “dirty” side of the vapor contamination control line and taken to the next station. 

Figure J-8. Sample Station 6 Checklist 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 J-9 
STATION 7 

Mask Decontamination Point

Task: Remove all contamination from the protective mask. 

• Attendant 

__ Removes the eye lens outserts and the hoods if the hoods were not cut off at Station 2. 

__ Removes the filters or canisters and disposes of them in the properly marked containers. 

__ Washes the masks, hoods, eye lens outserts, and hoses on the M42 and M43 masks in hot, 

soapy water. 

__ Rinses these items in clean water. 

__ Dips them in the sanitizing solution and agitates them for 5 minutes. 

__ Rinses them in clean water again. 

__ Adds one tube of mask-sanitizing solution (calcium hypochlorite) to each quart of water. 

__ Wipes the masks with rags dipped in solution until the masks are almost dry. 

__ Discards each gallon of mask-sanitizing solution into a sump after every 10 masks. 

__ Checks the masks for contamination with an ICAM. 

__ Recycles the masks if they are still contaminated 

__ Decontaminates the gloves. 

__ Takes the unassembled masks to the reissue point if they are not contaminated. 

Figure J-9. Sample Station 7 Checklist 

J-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
STATION 8 

Reissue Point 

Task: The mask with its components is provided to the individual for reassembly. 

__ The unit CBRN NCO reissues the masks with their components to the individuals. 

__ The individuals reassemble the masks in the AA. 

__ The unit CBRN NCO affixes canisters to the cleaned M42 and M43 hoses. 

__ The individuals pick up individual gear and move to the postdecontamination AA.

Figure J-10. Sample Station 8 Checklist 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 J-11 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
Appendix K 

CONTAMINATED-WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL 

1. Background 

This appendix provides planners, commanders, and unit personnel with operational 

guidance and procedures on the collection and disposal of contaminated waste. The use of 

contamination avoidance material may increase the amount of contaminated waste that 

must be properly collected and disposed of after an attack. Contaminated items may

include IPE, field gear, M8/M9 paper, components of M291 and M295 kits, pallet covers, 

bulk plastic, tarps, and other contamination avoidance covers and decontamination 

solutions. Waste must be collected and disposed of properly to limit hazards. Depending on

the type and quantity of contaminated material, waste accumulation areas could increase 

local hazards and require increased protective measures. Advance planning is the key to 

the successful handling and disposal of contaminated waste. 

2. Responsibility 

It is the responsibility of all personnel to ensure safe operations. 

a. Unit commanders ensure that waste collection sites are established, properly 

marked, reported, and maintained. 

b. All personnel apply contamination avoidance techniques and procedures, 

establish and maintain waste collection points, and segregate wastes for localized 

collection. Deployed personnel are responsible for limiting, to the greatest extent possible, 

cross contamination, postconflict cleanup, and restoration actions. 

c. The CBRN control center (CC) provides technical guidance and oversight for 

establishing unit contaminated waste disposal areas and marks and plots accumulation 

points and disposal areas on local area and grid maps. 

d. Medical authorities provide technical oversight and guidance for personal safety 

and health-related issues. 

3. Contaminated-Waste Holding Areas 

It is probable that multiple sites may be required with one large centralized 

accumulation point. 

4. Unit Waste Accumulation Points 

Units must effectively plan for the disposition of waste during decontamination 

operations. 

a. Planners should consider site selection based on a number of factors, such as 

terrain and prevailing seasonal winds. The area must be located downwind of work areas 

and rest and relief locations. 

b. Accumulation points should be downwind from the rear or entrance to areas such 

as bunkers, fighting positions, or CCAs. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 K-1 
c. All unit accumulation points should be identified and reported to the CBRN CC. 

The CBRN CC has the responsibility to mark and plot each accumulation point on local, 

grid, or area maps. 

d. When feasible, waste accumulation points should be located on concrete, asphalt, 

or other paved surfaces. Avoid positioning the accumulation point on grass or vegetated 

areas. Position waste accumulation points so that personnel can transverse a straight line 

from their shelter, bunker, or facility to the area without having to cross wet, muddy, or 

vegetated areas. 

e. Waste should be separated by type (solid versus liquid and combustible versus 

noncombustible). No sharp objects that could puncture the plastic liner are to be placed 

directly into the waste container. Sharp objects should be packaged in a rigid waste 

container. Collecting sharp objects or material in a cardboard box overwrapped with a 6-mil 

plastic bag should prevent objects from penetrating or perforating the protective cover. 

f. Proper marking prevents unintentional contact and alerts personnel of the 

hazard. 

g. Containers holding contaminated waste must be in good condition and 

compatible with the waste being stored. 

(1) The container must always be closed during storage, except when it is 

necessary to add or remove waste. 

(2) Large trash receptacles, 55-gallon barrels, or similar containers are ideal 

vessels for collecting contaminated solid waste. These should be lined with a double layer 

of 6-mil plastic bags. 

(3) Liquid waste can be stored in 5-gallon or larger containers. A small 

containment berm should be placed around any liquid-holding area to control potential 

runoff or spills. The use of sandbags or other suitable material should be used to construct 

a small containment berm. 

h. If sufficient equipment exists, place automatic vapor alarms around or just 

upwind of the area. 

(1) CBRN reconnaissance personnel should also periodically monitor just 

outside the area with handheld vapor detection devices such as the CAM or the M256. 

(2) To indicate contamination from an attack or cross contamination, M8 or M9 

paper should be positioned around the accumulation point. 

5. Equipment and Material 

The following items or a suitable substitute should be available for establishing and 

maintaining the waste accumulation point. Quantities of this material will vary based on 

the number of individuals and area supported. 

a. Containers for solid-waste and liquid-waste streams (e.g., waste receptacle 

[44-gallon] National Stock Number [NSN]: 7240-00-151-6630; 5-gallon Jerri can, water, 

NSN: 7240-00-089-3827). 

b. Marking material: NBC marking kit (sign kit, contamination, M274, NSN: 9905-

01-346-4716; chemiluminescent lights, white, 8-hour, NSN: 6260-01-247-0367; surveyor’s 

tape, red, NSN: 9905-01-458-1192; paper and grease pencils or permanent markers). 

K-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
c. Plastic sheeting, 0.006 thick, clear, NSN: 8135-00-579-6489. 

d. Plastic bags, 60 by 30 inches, 0.006 thick, NSN: 8150-01-221-3239. 

e. Pressure-sensitive tape (multiple NSNs available). 

f. Personal decontamination materials: M291 kit, NSN: 6850-01-276-1905; M295 

kit, NSN: 6850-01-357-8456; 5 percent bleach; water; and bucket or catch basin. 

g. CBRN detection equipment. 

h. Funnel for pouring liquid waste into collection containers. 

i. Sandbags, NSN: 8105-00-285-4744. 

6. Procedures for the Collection of Contaminated Waste 

The potential for personnel to be cross-contaminated is at its highest during the 

collection of contaminated material for disposal. The following activities are examples to 

minimize the time and effort to perform them: 

a. The collection of contaminated waste should be accomplished in the least amount

of time by at least two trained personnel. 

b. Supervisors assign personnel trained to perform the duties to detect 

contamination and remove contaminated coverings in and around their area. 

(1) A systematic search of the area for contamination should be planned and 

communicated to unit personnel. 

(2) The priority for removing protective covers from unit assets must be 

established. Priority should be given to immediate-use items and high-value and/or 

limited-quantity items that directly effect mission accomplishment. 

c. Prior to starting the operation, personnel must check to ensure that IPE is 

properly worn, using the buddy system. 

d. Unit personnel must check for contamination in assigned areas. 

(1) Starting with the priority items, remove and replace contaminated M8 and 

M9 paper and contamination avoidance material. 

(2) Contaminated material collected should be placed in a 6-mil plastic bag 

(preferably clear plastic). When collection bags are approximately three-quarters full, 

personnel must seal the top of the bag closed. 

(3) Place the first bag into a clean 6-mil bag. To reduce the potential of

contaminating the outside of the clean bag, the assistance of a second person may be

required. 

(4) Perform immediate glove decontamination, utilizing M291 or M295 kits or 

5 percent bleach solution (see Figure K-1, page K-4). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 K-3 
Figure K-1. Glove Decontamination 

(5) Repeat the bag-sealing process for the outer (clean) bag. 

(6) Perform immediate glove decontamination utilizing M291/M295 kits or 5 

percent bleach solution. 

(7) Prepare the material for transport to the waste accumulation point. 

(8) Place contaminated markings on the outer bag. The bags must be clearly

marked with the contents, type of contaminant or agent, date, time, and location (see 

Figure K-2). 

Figure K-2. Markings 

NOTE: Supervisors will contact the controlling unit for waste pickup. Waste that 

is not properly labeled and packaged will not be picked up until the problem is 

corrected. 

e. Material (such as pallet covers and bulk plastic) that will not fit into standard 

6-mil trash bags require a different procedure or process as follows: 

(1) Starting from the long end of the material, with arms extended, grasp the 

bottom and roll the material onto itself. Properly done, this will contain any contamination 

K-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
inside the cover or plastic, away from the individual, while reducing air pockets and the 

bulkiness of the material. 

(2) After the material is rolled, fold the two outer ends toward the center and 

secure the material with tape or string so that it will not unfold or unroll. 

(3) Secure and seal the material in an outer wrapping. 

• If ground contamination is/was suspected, place a drop cloth on the ground 

to reduce the potential for cross contamination of the outer wrapper. 

• Avoid kneeling on the ground. 

• Place the material on a section of clean 6-mil plastic sheet, large enough to 

fully wrap the material. 

• Perform immediate glove decontamination utilizing M291 or M295 kits or 5 

percent bleach solution. 

• Fold the ends of the outer wrapper toward the center, overlap the material, 

and secure the seams with pressure-sensitive tape. 

(4) Perform immediate glove decontamination utilizing M291 or M295 kits or 5 

percent bleach solution. 

(5) Prepare the material for transport to the unit waste accumulation point. 

(6) Place contaminated markings on the outer wrapping. The outer wrapping

must be clearly marked with the contents, type of contaminant or agent, date, and time. 

NOTE: Leaders will contact the unit operation center for waste pickup and 

transportation to the contaminated-waste site. 

7. Transportation Procedures 

The transportation of contaminated waste should be coordinated and controlled 

through the CBRN CC. This is accomplished to effectively control and account for the 

contaminated waste, reduce the contamination of multiple vehicles, and eliminate 

unnecessary risk to personnel. 

a. Transporters will wear appropriate protective clothing and have personal 

decontamination kits immediately available. 

b. Prior to starting the transportation and collection process from unit 

accumulation sites to a centralized disposal site, the vehicle driver will— 

• Ensure that the vehicle is properly marked as contaminated. 

• Position contamination marking signs on the vehicle. 

• Allow no one to ride in the open back of a vehicle or trailer. 

(1) A layer of 6-mil plastic may be positioned in the bed of the vehicle to 

minimize the spread of contamination. 

(2) As waste material is collected, checks are conducted to verify that 

contaminated bags or containers are properly marked. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 K-5 
8. Waste Collection Point 

Establishing waste collection points must be a well-thought-out process to ensure the 

safety of all personnel in the area. 

a. Planners must coordinate with joint and HN forces for proper siting of the CBRN 

waste accumulation site. To avoid multiple large accumulation points, consideration must 

be given for the consolidation of contaminated waste from nearby friendly forces or sister 

services. Site selection should be based on prevailing seasonal winds and be away from any 

living, working, and rest or relief areas, terrain, and security. The location and size will 

vary based on the amount of waste generated. Preferred locations are downwind of the 

friendly forces, on flat, unvegetated terrain, in a secure but remote area, and away from 

areas that are populated by friendly forces or civilians. 

b. Any contaminated waste must be disposed of in accordance with applicable local 

guidance. 

c. Waste should be separated by type (solid versus liquid and combustible versus 

noncombustible). 

d. The disposal site and waste are clearly identified. Contaminated marking signs 

are also prepared in advance to mark containers after use. Proper marking prevents 

unintentional contact and alerts personnel of the hazard. The collection containers must be 

marked with their contents, along with the type of contamination or agent, date, and time. 

Additionally, personnel should establish a cordon around the immediate area and put up 

signs to control unauthorized access. 

e. If sufficient equipment exists, automatic vapor alarms are placed around or just 

upwind of the area. CBRN reconnaissance personnel should also periodically monitor just 

outside the area with handheld vapor detection devices, such as the ICAM or the M256. 

f. When contaminated material or waste material require disposal, different 

methods can be used to dispose of the material. 

(1) For example, burning produces a vapor hazard and the CBRN CC must 

submit an NBC5 report if material is burned in order to warn downwind units. 

(2) Burial is another method that is effective for all types of contamination. 

The area must also be marked to help ensure that the area is avoided. The unit that closes 

the decontamination site must also notify the CBRN CC. The CBRN CC must submit an 

NBC5 report outlining the contaminated-waste burial site. 

9. Disposal Procedures 

The proper disposal of contaminated waste is paramount to safely conducting 

decontamination operations. 

a. The three primary ways of handling the problem of waste disposal are open 

storage, burying, and burning. 

b. All personnel directly or indirectly engaged in disposal operations must be 

properly trained in the operational procedures, hazards, and safety precautions. 

c. Disposal procedures must be coordinated with the CBRN CC. 

K-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
10. Open Storage 

The HN or command guidance may prohibit the burning or burial of waste. Garbage,

rubbish, and other such material may have to be stored pending transportation to a waste 

disposal facility. Wastewater poses significant challenges. 

a. The laundering of potentially contaminated items (i.e., suits) will generate a 

considerable amount of wastewater that must be controlled and analyzed for 

contamination. 

b. The use of water or 5 percent hypochlorite solution for decontamination will 

generate a considerable amount of liquid that requires disposal. To reduce volume, 

planners should consider the use of evaporation tanks/lagoons. 

c. Planners should consider the use of large containers, such as sea and land 

shipping containers, during open storage for storing or consolidating the waste. 

(1) For open storage of contaminated waste, the use of large containers offers 

advantages, such as ample storage space, protection from the environment, limited access 

to the contaminated material, the ease of loading, availability at most deployed locations, 

and low cost. 

(2) The primary disadvantage and hazard is that the size of the containers 

makes them difficult to move, and sealed containers will contain off-gassing vapors. 

11. Burying 

Burying contaminated items should be well-thought-out, planned and recorded. 

a. When closed, the burial pit should have a mound of dirt placed over the top. 

Marking signs must be placed to indicate the type of pit, pits contents, date closed, and unit 

designation. Maintaining accurate records on the type and quantity of material buried is 

critical for postconflict cleanup actions 

b. Other guidance includes— 

• Marking contaminated material that is placed in the burial pit. 

• Recording all items placed in the burial pit. 

• Using containers for placement in the burial pit. 

12. Open Burning 

Open burning is the burning of any material wherein air contaminants resulting from 

combustion are emitted directly into the air, without passing through a stack or chimney 

from an enclosed chamber. 

a. Site selection. Planners must consider prevailing winds along with the potential

for release of toxic vapors and hazardous ash during the selection of the site. 

(1) Contaminated waste should be disposed of in an open space where there 

are no woods or heavy brush that might trap fumes close to the operation, especially in the 

downwind direction. 

(2) The area should be cleared of all combustible material, out to a 250-foot 

radius if possible. No burning shall occur within 250 feet of a power line or within 500 feet 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 K-7 
of a frequently traveled road, fuel storage area, or pipeline. The disposal site should be 

constructed on a flat, compacted surface that is free of vegetation and combustible material. 

b. The emission of toxic fumes released during burning may result in the release of 

heavy metals and toxic chemicals such as dioxin. 

c. Disposal shall not be undertaken without prior approval of the CBRN CC. Local 

procedures will dictate how far in advance disposal operations must be coordinated, but for 

most operations, a minimum 24-hour notice is required. This will allow the CBRN CC to 

up-channel required reports to notify friendly forces of a potential toxic cloud in the 

downwind area. 

d. Prior to conducting burning operations, the following agencies should be notified: 

• CBRN CC. 

• Medical facility. 

• Security forces. 

• Higher HQ. 

• Bioenvironmental engineering (BEE). 

• Sister services and HN personnel, as appropriate. 

e. Weather precautions. No burning shall be conducted during unfavorable 

meteorological conditions (see Table K-1) such as: 

• During an electrical storm or when such a storm is approaching. 

• During high winds (wind velocity exceeding 20 mph). 

• During an unsatisfactory temperature gradient. 

Table K-1. Weather Conditions 

Condition 

Factor Excellent Fair Fair (Winter) Unsatisfactory 

Temperature 

75°F (24°C) and 

above 55°F–75°F Under 55°F Under 55°F 

Sky Clear Partly cloudy Clear Cloudy 

Wind 

4–15 mph (6.5– 

24 kph) 

5–20 mph (8–32 

kph) 

7–15 mph (11–24 

kph 

Under 3 mph (4.8 

kph) or over 20 mph 

(32 kph) 

Time of Day 1000–1600 1000–1600 1000–1600 1600–0959 

f. Burning should be conducted during daylight hours only. 

g. Fire prevention is an integral part of any disposal operation. Firefighting

equipment must be available on site or immediately available for response. 

• No open flames are allowed in or near the disposal site. 

• Fires must be attended at all times. Attendants must remain upwind and

outside the area until all smoke and fumes dissipate. 

K-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
h. Records will be kept of all burning operations. These records shall include, at a 

minimum, the type and quantity of all material destroyed and the disposition of any 

residue. 

i. The burn pit should be a minimum of 1.22 meters (4 feet) deep with sides sloping 

enough to prevent cave in. The length and width of the trench will be determined by the 

quantity of material anticipated for disposal. 

(1) Place combustible material, such as scrap wooden pallets or dunnage, in 

the bottom of the pit at least 0.31 meter (1 foot deep). 

(2) Place contaminated waste on the combustible material, ensuring that the 

combustible material extends beyond the layer of waste. Continue adding waste to the pit

until the top of the waste is within 0.31 meter (1 foot) from the top of the pit or trench. To 

ensure a through burn, do not compact layers of waste material into the pit. 

(3) Ensure that the area is clear of all unnecessary personnel and vehicles. 

(4) Pour a refined petroleum product (diesel fuel or kerosene) over the entire 

pile. Contaminated fuel can be used. Do not use gasoline or any volatile, flammable liquid. 

(5) Remotely ignite the pit or trench. The fire department or EOD can provide 

detailed training or assistance on how to accomplish this. 

(6) Do not reuse the pit for 24 hours after all burning has ceased. 

j. The burn furnace method includes the following: 

(1) Fire box burners provide more control, and they are safer to operate. 

(2) An air curtain incinerator is a portable or stationary combustion device 

that directs a plane of high-velocity, forced-draft air through a manifold head into a pit with 

vertical walls in such a manner as to maintain a curtain of air over the surface of the pit 

and a recirculating motion of air under the curtain. 

(3) Personnel must follow the manufacturers’ recommended procedures for the 

operation of the incinerator and blower unit. 

(a) Material should be added to the incinerator remotely (i.e., with a 

front-end loader). 

(b) Operators must remain upwind and away from any smoke and fumes 

when adding material to the incinerator. 

13. Marking Requirements 

The marking of unit waste accumulation points is essential for ensuring the safe 

return to operations and for future remediation efforts of potentially contaminated areas. 

a. A critical component of the unit waste accumulation point is the proper marking 

and isolation of the contaminated waste. The waste accumulation point is clearly 

identified, and all containers containing contaminated waste are labeled. Proper marking

prevents unintentional contact and alerts personnel of the hazard. The collection 

containers must be marked with the type of contamination or agent, date, time, and 

location of origin. Additionally, the immediate area should be cordoned off and signs posted 

to control unauthorized access. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 K-9 
b. Signs and markers should be placed so that they are visible from all potential 

approach directions. Include dual language, if required, to warn HN personnel of the 

hazard. Area signs and markers should be placed around— 

• All disposal areas. 

• Boundary of zones and TFAs. 

• Entry control points and holding areas. 

• Contaminated waste. 

• Aeration areas. 

• Monitoring stations and equipment. 

• Transportation routes. 

K-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
REFERENCES 

Department of Defense 

DOD 4000.25-1-M, Military Standard Requisitioning and Issue Procedure (MILSTRIP) Desk 

Guide, 28 April 2004. 

DODD 3025.1, Military Support to Civil Authorities (MSCA), 15 January 1993. 

Joint 

Joint Publication 1-02, Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms, 

12 April 2001 as amended through 31 August 2005. 

Joint Publication 3-11, Joint Doctrine for Operations in Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical 

(NBC) Environments, 11 July 2000. 

Joint Publication 4-06, JTTP for Mortuary Affairs in Joint Operations, 28 August 1996. 

Multiservice 

FM 3-3-1/FMFM 11-18, Nuclear Contamination Avoidance, 9 September 1994. 

FM 3-11 (FM 3-100)/MCWP 3-37.1/NWP 3-11/AFTTP (I) 3-2.42, Multiservice Tactics, 

Techniques, and Procedures or Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Defense Operations, 

10 March 2003. 

FM 3-11.4/MCWP 3-37.2/NTTP 3-11.27/AFTTP(I) 3-2.46, Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) Protection, 2 June 2003. 

FM 3-11.9/MCRP 3-37.1B/NTRP 3-11.32/AFTTP (I) 3-2.55, Potential Military 

Chemical/Biological Agents and Compounds, 10 January 2005. 

FM 3-11.14/MCRP 3-37.1A/NTTP 3-11.28 AFTTP 3-2.54, Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Vulnerability Assessment, 28 January 2004 

FM 3-11.19/MCWP 3-37.4/NTTP 3-11.29/AFTTP(I) 3-2.44, Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and 

Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Reconnaissance, 30 July 2004. 

FM 3-11.21/MCRP 3-37.2C/NTTP 3-11.24/AFTTP (I) 3-2.37, Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, 

and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Aspects Of Consequence Management, 

12 December 2001. 

FM 3-11.34/MCWP 3-37.5/NTTP 3-11.23/AFTTP (I) 3-2.33, Multiservice Procedures for Nuclear, 

Biological, and Chemical (NBC) Defense of Theater Fixed Sites, Ports, and Airfields, 29 

September 2000. 

FM 3-11.86/MCWP 3-37.1C/NTTP 3-11.31/AFTTP (I) 3-2.52, Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, 

and Procedures for Biological Surveillance, 4 October 2004. 

MCWP 3-37.6/NTTP 3-02.1.1 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Recovery Operations in a 

Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Environment, to be published within 

6 months. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 References-1 
NAVAIR-01-1A-509/TO 1-1-691/TM 1-1500-344-23, Aircraft Weapons Systems Cleaning and 

Corrosion Control, 1 May 1996. 

NAVAIR-16-1-540/TO 1-1-689/TM-1-1500-343-23), Organizational/Unit and Intermediate 

Maintenance for Avionic Cleaning and Corrosion Prevention/Control, 1 September 2000. 

NWP 3-02.1/MCWP 3-31.5, Ship-To-Shore Movement, August 1993. 

Army 

BG Russ Zajtchuk, et al. (eds), Textbook of Military Medicine: Medical Aspects of Chemical and 

Biological Warfare, Office of the Surgeon General, 1997. 

DA, Deputy Undersecretary of the Army for Operations Research (SAUS-OR), Memorandum, 

Subject: Decontamination Formula 200 (DF 200) Military Utility Assessment in (MUA) in 

Support of CENTCOM Urgent Operational Need Statement, 20 February 2003. 

FM 3-7, NBC Field Handbook, 29 September 1994. 

FM 3-11.22, Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Response in Support of Incident 

Management, to be published within 6 months. 

FM 4-02.7, Health Service Support in a Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Environment Tactics, 

Techniques, and Procedures, 1 October 2002. 

FM 4-02.18, Veterinary Services, Tactics, Techniques and Procedures, 30 December 2004. 

FM 4-02.33, Control of Communicable Diseases Manual, 1 June 2005. 

FM 8-10-6, Medical Evacuation in a Theater of Operations, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures, 

14 April 2000. 

FM 10-64, Mortuary Affairs Operations, 16 February 1999. 

FM 10-52, Water Supply in Theaters of Operations, 11 July 1990. 

Air Force 

AFI 10-404, Base Support and Expeditionary Site Planning, 9 March 2004. 

AFI 10-2501, Full Spectrum Threat Response (FSTR) Planning and Operations, 3 August 2005. 

AFMAN 10-2602, Nuclear, Biological, Chemical, and Conventional (NBCC) Defense Operations 

and Standards, 29 May 2003. 

AF 1800, Operator’s Inspection Guide and Trouble Report (General Purpose Vehicles), 

1 April 1987. 

AFMAN 32-4005, Personnel Protection and Attack Actions, 30 October 2001. 

AFMAN 32-4017, Civil Engineer Readiness Technician’s Manual for Nuclear, Biological, and 

Chemical Defense, 29 May 2003. 

AF TO 11C15-1-3 Chemical Warfare Decontamination, Detection, and Disposal of 

Decontaminating Agents June 1997 

HQ AMC CB CONOPS, Air Mobility Operations in a Chemical and Biological Environment 

References-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Navy 

COMNAVSURFORINST 3541.1, Condition II Damage Control, 13 August 2003; Change Transmittal 

1, 27 January 2004. 

NAVAIR 00-80T-121, Chemical and Biological Defense, NATOPS Manual, 1 October 2004. 

NSTM 070, Nuclear Defense at Sea and Radiological Recovery of Ships After Nuclear Weapons 

Explosion, 30 July 1998. 

NSTM 470, Shipboard BW/CW Defense and Countermeasures, 6 August 1998. 

NSTM 670, Stowage Handling and Disposal of Hazardous Use Consumables, 30 May 2002. 

NTTP 3-20.31, Surface Ship Survivability, January 2000. 

NWP 3-20.31 (REV. A), Surface Ship Survivability, January 2002 

Marine Corps 

MCRP 4-11.1F, MTTP for Health Service Support in a Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical 

Environment, 23 April 2003. 

Other Sources 

North American Emergency Response Guide, 2000. 

AMEDD, Information Paper, “SUBJECT: Information on Skin Exposure Reduction Paste 

Against Chemical Warfare Agents (SERPACWA),” 13 February 2003. 

Andrew C. Parker, et. al., Counter Proliferation-Biological Decontamination, DPG/JCP-098-002, 

June 1998 (554561). 

STANAG 2103, Reporting Nuclear Detonations, Biological and Chemical Attacks, and 

Predicting the Warning of Associated Hazards and Hazard Areas (Allied Tactical Publication 

(ATP)45(B), 1 July 2001. 

Cecil O. Eckard, C.K. Ramachandran, Technical Report: Effects of Weathering on Reduction of 

Chemical Agent Contamination From Deposition Surfaces, DPG/TA-89/017, March 1989, 

(547480). 

C.K. Ramachandran and Lloyd D. Larsen, Decontamination of Bio-Agents Using the M17 

SANATOR: Field Test with Bacillus subtilis var. nlaer (BG) on Vehicles, DPG/JCPD-93/005,

March 1993 (548555). 

C.K. Ramachandran, Weathering After Hasty Decontamination: Field Tests Using Methyl 

Salicylate on Vehicles and Aircraft Wings, DPG/JOD-92/031, September 1992 (549067). 

Daniel J. Peddicord, Technical Report: Decontamination of Electronic Equipment, DPG/JOD92/016, June 1992 (548938). 

DASG-HCF, Information Paper, “SUBJECT: Skin Exposure Reduction Paste Against Chemical 

Warfare Agents (SERPACWA),” 20 February 2003. 

David C. Stark, et. al., Chemical/Biological (CB) Technical Data Source Book: 

Decontamination of Chemical Warfare Agent, DPG/JCP-098-004, June 1998 (554570). 

EAI Corporation, Technical Report: Commercial and Field Expedient Chemical Warfare Agent 

Decontaminants, DPG/TA-88/23, February 1988 (546913). 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 References-3 
EPA, Office of Pesticide Programs, Chlorine Dioxide, 27 December 2001, 19 November 2003. 

EPA, Pesticides: Topical & Chemical Fact Sheets, Ethylene Oxide, 19 May 2003,

http://www.epa.gov/pesticides/factsheets/chemicals/etofactsheet.htm, 19 November 2003. 

EPA, Radionuclide Table: Radionuclide Carcinogenicity – Slope Factors (Federal Guidance 

Report No. 13 Morbidity Risk Coefficients, in Units of Picocuries), 

http://www.epa.gov/radiation/heast/, 3 December 2002. 

Eugene J. Mezey, et. al., Technical Report: Effects of Water Temperature and Soap on 

Decontamination, DPG/TA-89/011, March 1989 (547379). 

FDA News, FDA Clears Skin Lotion for Military to Protect Against Chemical Burns, 28 March 

2003. 

G.W. Wagner, et. al., DECON Green, ECBC poster presented at 23rd Army Science Conference 

2–5 December 2002. 

Jerry R. Montgomery, Technical Report: Decontaminative Effects of Soil, DPG/TA-89/024, 

December 1989 (547725). 

Joint C/B Technical Data Source Book, Volume V: Blister, Blood, and Choking Agents, Part 4, 

Agents HN, Q, T, L, and HL, October 1993 (549944). 

John F. Weimaster, SBCCOM, “Interim DS2 Replacement Risk Analysis”John Kerch, 

SBCCOM/CMSL Quarterly Decon Review: Decontaminating Solution 2, 18 March 2002 

(FOUO). 

Joseph Kohlbeck, Technical Report: Effects of Chemical Warfare Agents and Decontaminants on 

Selected Weapons Systems and Metal Alloys, DPG/JOD-92/002, February 1992 (548550). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, Battledress Overgarment Decontamination with Resin-Based 

Decontamination Kits, DPG/JCP-94/006, April 1994 (550296). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, Decontamination of Individual Protective Clothing and Equipment, 

DPG/JCP-95/021, September 1995 (551738). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, Dusty Agents and Simulants: Desorption at Various Environmental 

Conditions and Effects of Sweat on Dusty Agent, DPG/JCP-94/003, December 1993 (549890). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, Effectiveness of Water, Soapy Water, and Steam for Hasty 

Decontamination, DPG/JOD-92/038, November 1992 (549048). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, Effectiveness of Swimming for Clothing Decontamination, DPG/JCP95/005, January 1995 (551164). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, et. al., Decontamination Effectiveness of Seawater on Naval Landing Craft 

Materials, DPG/JCP-95/015, March 1995 (551168). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, Technical Report: Reduction of Water Requirement for Decontamination, 

DPG/JCP-96/005, April 1996 (552449). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, Technical Report: Theoretical Consideration and Practical Approach to 

Chemical Decontamination, DPG/TA-87-02, October 1986 (551078). 

Kenneth S.K. Chinn, Wound Decontamination, DPG/TA-KG/87-01, July 1987 (551073). 

Lloyd D. Larsen and C.K. Ramachandran, Use of M291 Kit for Decontamination of Skin After 

Exposure to Bacterial or Viral Aerosol, DPG/JCP-094/011, November 1994 (550836). 

McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms, 6th ed., 2003. 

References-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
Patrice L. Abercrombie, Physical Property Data Review of Selected Chemical Agents and Related 

Compounds: Updating Field Manual 3-9 (FM 3-9), September 2003, ECBC-TR-294. 

Paula P. Nicholson, M17 Sanator Hasty Decontamination: Chemical Field Trials, DPG/JOD93/004, March 1993 (549306). 

PDD-39, Presidential Decision Directive on Terrorism, 21 June 1995. 

Robert L. Stearman, Technical Report: Problems of Chemical Defense Operations in Extreme 

Cold, DPG-S-TA-85-08, June 1995 (546024). 

Robert L. Stearman, Technical Report: Effect of Decontamination and Protective Coatings on 

Air Defense Radars, Communication Equipment, and Repair Parts, DPG-S-84-502, October 

1983 (545236). 

Sharon Reutter, et. al., Review and Recommendations for Human Toxicity Estimates for FM 3-

11.9, September 2003, ECBC-TR-349. 

The Merck Index, An Encyclopedia of Chemicals, Drugs, and Biologicals, 12th ed., Merck 

Research Laboratories, Whitehouse Station, NJ, 1996. 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 References-5 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
GLOSSARY 

PART I—ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 

A 

AA assembly area 

AAV amphibious assault vehicle 

AB airbase 

AC hydrogen cyanide 

ACAA automatic chemical-agent alarm 

ACCA aircrew contamination control area 

ACDE aircrew chemical defense equipment 

ACE air combat element 

AD air defense 

ADCON administrative control 

AF Air Force 

AFB Air Force base 

AFFF aqueous film-forming foam 

AFI Air Force instruction 

AFMAN Air Force Manual 

AFRRI Armed Forces Radiobiology Research Institute 

AFSC United States Air Force specialty code 

AFTTP (I) Air Force tactics, techniques, and procedures (interservice) 

AL Alabama 

ALSS advanced logistics support site 

AO area of operation 

AOR area of responsibility 

APC armored personnel carrier 

APOD aerial port of debarkation 

APOE aerial port of embarkation 

ATP Allied Tactical Publication 

ATTN attention 

B 

BB bare base 

BDO battle dress overgarment 

BDU battle dress uniform 

BEE bioenvironmental engineering 

BFV Bradley fighting vehicle 

bio biological 

BN battalion 

BP boiling point 

BW biological warfare 

BZ 3-Quinuclidinyl benzilate (an incapacitating agent) 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Glossary-1 
C 

C Celsius 

C2 command and control 

CAM chemical-agent monitor 

CAMSIM chemical-agent monitor simulator 

CARC chemical agent-resistant coating 

CAW carrier air wings 

CB chemical-biological 

CBIRF chemical/biological incident response force 

CBR chemical, biological, and radiological 

CBRD chemical, biological, and radiological defense 

CBRN chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear 

CBRN CC chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear control center 

CC control center 

CCA contamination control area 

CCS contamination control station 

CCT contamination control team 

CDS casualty decontamination site 

CE civil engineering 

CENTCOM Central Command 

CFR Code of Federal Regulations 

CG commanding general; phosgene 

cGy centigray 

cGy/hr centigray per hour 

CHA contact hazard area 

chem chemical 

CK cyanogen chloride 

CM consequence management 

CMO chief medical officer 

CMWDS countermeasure wash down system 

CN chloroacetophenone (tear gas or mace) 

COA course of action 

COB colocated operating base 

COE common operating environment 

COMMZ communications zone 

CONEX container express 

CONOPS concept of operations 

CONUS continental United States 

CP collection point 

CPDEMED chemically protected, deployable medical system 

CPO chemical protective overgarment 

CPS collective protective shelter 

CPU chemical protective undergarment 

CR dibenz (b,f)-1:4-oxazepine 

CRAF Civil Reserve Air Fleet 

CRRC combat rubber raiding craft 

Glossary-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
CX 

CS civil support, o-chlorobenzylidene malononitrile (a tear agent) 

CSG carrier strike group 

CSS combat service support 

CTA common table of allowance 

CVCUS combat vehicle crewman uniform system 

CW chemical warfare 

phosgene oxime 

D 

DA diphenylchloroarsine (a vomiting agent); Department of the 

Army 

DAD detailed aircraft decontamination 

DAP decontaminating apparatus, portable 

DC diphenylcyanoarsine (a vomiting agent); District of Columbia 

DCA damage control assistant 

DCC damage control center 

DCO defense coordinating officer 

DCP decontamination control point 

decon decontamination 

DED detailed equipment decontamination 

DF methylphosphonic difluoride 

DHHS Department of Health and Human Services 

DISCOM division support command (Army) 

DM diphenylaminochloroarsine (Adamsite) (a vomiting agent) 

DOD Department of Defense 

DODD Department of Defense directive 

DOL Department of Labor 

DP diphosgene 

DRCD domestic-response casualty decontamination 

DS2 decontamination solution 2 

DTG date-time group 

DTD detailed troop decontamination 

DTRA Defense Threat Reduction Agency 

DU depleted uranium 

E 

ECBC Edgewood Chemical and Biological Center 

ECS environmental control system 

EDTA ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid 

EMDT expeditionary medical decontamination team 

EMT emergency medical treatment 

ENCU environmental control unit 

EOC emergency operations center 

EOD explosive ordnance disposal 

EPA Environmental Protection Agency 

ERG Emergency Response Guidebook 

ESF emergency support functions 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Glossary-3 
ESG expeditionary strike group 

F 

F Fahrenheit 

FARP forward arming and refueling point 

FBI Federal Bureau of Investigation 

FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency 

FHP force health protection 

FL Florida 

FLOT forward line of own troops 

FM field manual (Army) 

FOD foreign object damage 

FOF follow-on forces 

Force RECON force reconnaissance 

FP force protection 

FRAGORD fragmentary order 

FRP Federal Response Plan 

FSB fire support battery 

FSDS Fixed-Site Decontamination System 

FSSG force service support group 

FSTR full-spectrum threat response 

G 

G-4 Army or Marine Corps component logistics staff officer 

GA tabun (a nerve agent) 

G agent a nerve agent 

GB sarin (a nerve agent) 

GCE ground chemical ensemble 

GD soman (a nerve agent) 

GI government issue 

GOA government-owned animals 

GP general purpose 

GPM gallon(s) per minute 

GPU ground power unit 

GS general support 

GZ ground zero 

H 

H agent a blister agent 

HAS hardened aircraft shelter 

HAZMAT hazardous materials 

HD distilled mustard (a blister agent) 

HEMTT heavy, expanded-mobility, tactical truck 

HEPA high-efficiency particulate air 

HHA handheld assay 

Glossary-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
HHD headquarters and headquarters detachment 

HL mustard-lewisite mixture 

HLD homeland defense 

HLS homeland security 

HMLA Marine light/attack helicopter squadron 

HMMWV high-mobility, multipurpose, wheeled vehicle 

HN host nation; nitrogen mustard (HN-1, HN-2, HN-3) 

HNS host nation support 

HQ headquarters 

hr hour(s) 

HSS health service support 

HT distilled mustard and T mixture 

HTB high-test bleach 

HTH high-test hypochlorite 

I 

ICAM improved chemical-agent monitor 

ICS incident command system 

IEDK individual equipment decontamination kit 

IPB intelligence preparation of the battlespace 

IPE individual protective equipment 

IPPDC in-place patient decontamination capability 

IRF initial-response force 

J 

JFC joint force commander 

JMAO Joint Mortuary Affairs Office 

JP joint publication 

JRA joint rear area 

JSLIST joint-service, lightweight, integrated suit technology 

JTF joint task force 

JTTP joint tactics, techniques, and procedures 

K 

km kilometer(s) 

L 

lewisite 

lb pound(s) 

LBE load-bearing equipment 

LCAC landing craft air cushion 

LCE load-carrying equipment 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Glossary-5 

L
LCM 

LCU 

LDS

LEL 

LLR 

LOC 

LPD-4 

LSD 

m 

MADCP 

MAG 

MAGTF 

MARCORSYSCOM 

MARFORLANT 

max 

MCCDC 

MCE

MCRP 

MCWP 

MD 

MEB/AT 

MEDEVAC

MEDSURV 

MEF 

METT-T 

METT-TC 

MGX 

MILSTRIP 

min 

MLG 

MO 

MOA 

MOB 

MOPP 

MOS 

MOU 

MP

MPDS 

mph

mrem/hr

MSC 

MSCA 

MSR 

landing craft, mechanized

landing craft, utility

 lightweight decontaminating system

lower-explosive level

low-level radiation 

line of communication

amphibious transport dock 

landing ship dock 

M 

meter(s)

mortuary affairs decontamination collection point 

Marine aircraft group

Marine air-ground task force

Marine Corps Systems Command 

Marine Corps Forces, Atlantic

maximum 

Marine Corps Combat Development Command

 mission-critical equipment 

Marine Corps reference publication

Marine Corps warfighting publication

Maryland

Marine Expeditionary Brigade Antiterrorism 

 medical evacuation 

medical surveillance 

Marine Expeditionary Force 

mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time available 

mission, enemy, terrain and weather, time available, troops and 

civilian 

MOPP gear exchange 

military standard requisitioning and issue procedure 

minimum 

main landing gear

Missouri 

memorandum of agreement

main operating base

mission-oriented protective posture 

military occupational specialty 

memorandum of understanding

 military police 

multipurpose decontamination system

 mile(s) per hour 

 millirem(s) per hour 

major subordinate command

military support to civil authorities 

main supply route 

Glossary-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
MTF medical treatment facility 

MTP mission tasking plan 

MTTP multiservice tactics, techniques, and procedures 

MTVR medium tactical vehicle replacement 

MTW major theater war 

MWD military working dog 

N 

N/A not applicable 

NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization 

NATOPS Naval air training and operating procedures standardization 

NAVAIR Naval air 

NBC nuclear, biological, and chemical 

NBCC nuclear, biological, and chemical center 

NBCWRS Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Warning and Reporting System 

NBG Naval beach group 

NCO noncommissioned officer 

NCOIC noncommissioned officer in charge 

NEC Navy enlisted classification 

NGO nongovernmental organization 

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health 

NLG nose landing gear 

No. number 

NRC National Response Center 

NRP National Response Plan 

NSN national stock number 

NSTM Naval ships technical manual 

NTRP Naval technical reference publication 

NTTP Navy tactics, techniques, and procedures 

NWDC Navy Warfare Development Command 

NWP Naval warfare publication 

O 

O2 oxygen 

OCONUS outside the continental United States 

OEG operational exposure guide 

OPCON operational control 

OPLAN operation plan 

OPORD operation order 

OPR office of primary responsibility 

OPTEMPO operating tempo 

OS operator’s spray down 

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

OW operator’s wipe down 

oz ounce(s) 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Glossary-7 
P 

PA public address 

PASGT personnel armor system, ground troops 

PD phenyl-dichlorarsine 

PDD Presidential decision directive 

PDDA power-driven decontamination apparatus 

PDDE power-driven decontamination equipment 

PDS patient decontamination station 

PL platoon 

PLL prescribed load list 

PMCS preventive-maintenance checks and services 

POC point of contact 

POL petroleum, oils, and lubricants 

POMCUS pre-positioning of materiel configured to unit sets 

PPE personal protective equipment 

PPW patient protective wrap 

PRD personal radiation device 

PSG platoon sergeant 

psi pound(s) per square inch 

PT point 

PVNTMED preventive medicine 

PW personal wipe down 

Q 

qt quart(s) 

R 

R&S reconnaissance and surveillance 

RD round 

RDD radiological dispersal device 

RDIC resuscitation device, individual, chemical 

RFA request for assistance 

RFI request for information 

RI Rhode Island 

RM risk management 

RP release point 

RSDL reactive skin decontamination lotion 

S 

SA situational awareness; arsine 

SABC self-aid buddy care 

SCALP suit, contamination avoidance, liquid protection 

SCBA self-contained breathing apparatus 

SD skin decontamination 

Glossary-8 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
SDK skin decontamination kit 

SDS Sorbent Decontamination System 

SecDef Secretary of Defense 

SINCGARS Single-Channel, Ground and Airborne Radio System 

SITREP situation report 

SME subject matter expert 

SMT shelter management team 

SOI signal operating instructions 

SOP standard operating procedure 

SPOD seaport of debarkation 

S/RTF search and recovery task force 

SRC survival recovery center 

SSPDS Small Shelter, Personnel Decontamination System 

STB super tropical bleach 

T 

TADS Tactical Air Defense System 

TAP toxicological agent-protective 

TC Transportation Corps (Army) 

tech technical 

TFA toxic-free area 

TGD thickened soman 

THD thickened distilled mustard (a blister agent) 

TIC toxic industrial chemicals 

TIM toxic industrial material 

TL team leader 

TM technical manual 

TO technical order 

TO&E table of organization and equipment 

TPU tank pump unit 

TRADOC United States Army Training and Doctrine Command 

TSC theater support command 

TSOP tactical standard operating procedure 

TSP training support package 

TTP tactics, techniques, and procedures 

TX Texas 

U 

UCC unit control center 

US United States 

USA United States Army 

USAF United States Air Force 

USACMLS United States Army Chemical School 

USAMRICD United States Army Medical Research Institute of Chemical 

Defense 

USAMRIID United States Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious 

Diseases 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Glossary-9 
USCG United States Coast Guard 

USG United States Government 

USMC United States Marine Corps 

USN United States Navy 

UTC unit type code 

UV ultraviolet 

UXO unexploded ordnance 

V 

VA vulnerability assessment; Virginia 

VHA vapor hazard area 

VMA Marine attack squadron 

VW vehicle wash down 

VX nerve agent (O-ethyl-diisopropylaminomethyl

methylphosphonothiolate) 

W 

WARNORD warning order 

WBGT wet bulb globe temperature 

WMD weapons of mass destruction 

WMDT weapons of mass destruction team 

Glossary-10 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
PART II – TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 

absorption. A process in which one substance becomes incorporated within another 

substance; also used to describe interactions between electromagnetic radiation and matter. 

(Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry) 

adsorption. A process in which a substance becomes attached to the surface of another 

substance. (Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry) 

activity. 1. A unit, organization, or installation performing a function or mission, e.g., 

reception center, redistribution center, naval station, naval shipyard. 2. A function, 

mission, action, or collection of actions. (JP 1-02) 

aerosol. A liquid or solid composed of finely divided particles suspended in a 

gaseous medium. Examples of common aerosols are mist, fog, and smoke. (JP 1-02) 

airburst. An explosion of a bomb or projectile above the surface as distinguished from an 

explosion on contact with the surface or after penetration. (JP 1-02) 

air defense. All defensive measures designed to destroy attacking enemy aircraft or 

missiles in the Earth’s envelope of atmosphere, or to nullify or reduce the effectiveness of 

such attack. (JP 1-02) 

area of operations. An operational area defined by the joint force commander for land 

and naval forces. Areas of operation do not typically encompass the entire operational area 

of the joint force commander, but should be large enough for component commanders to 

accomplish their missions and protect their forces. Also called AO. (JP 1-02) 

area of responsibility. The geographical area associated with a combatant command 

within which a combatant commander has authority to plan and conduct operations. Also 

called AOR. (JP 1-02) 

assessment. 1. Analysis of the security, effectiveness, and potential of an existing or 

planned intelligence activity. 2. Judgment of the motives, qualifications, and characteristics 

of present or prospective employees or “agents.” (JP 1-02) 

avoidance. Individual and/or unit measures taken to avoid or minimize nuclear, biological, 

and chemical (NBC) attacks and reduce the effects of NBC hazards. (JP 1-02) 

battlespace. The environment, factors, and conditions that must be understood to 

successfully apply combat power, protect the force, or complete the mission. This includes 

the air, land, sea, space, and the included enemy and friendly forces; facilities; weather; 

terrain; the electromagnetic spectrum; and the information environment within the 

operational areas and areas of interest. (JP 1-02) 

biological agent. A microorganism that causes disease in personnel, plants, or animals or 

causes the deterioration of materiel. (JP 1-02) 

biological defense. The methods, plans, and procedures involved in establishing and 

executing defensive measures against attacks using biological agents. (JP 1-02) 

biological environment. Conditions found in an area resulting from direct or persisting 

effects of biological weapons. (JP 1-02) 

biological threat. A threat that consists of biological material planned to be deployed to 

produce casualties in personnel or animals or damage plants. (JP 1-02) 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Glossary-11 
biological weapon. An item of materiel which projects, disperses, or disseminates a 

biological agent including arthropod vectors. (JP 1-02) 

blister agent. A chemical agent which injures the eyes and lungs and burns or blisters the 

skin. Also called vesicant agent. (JP 1-02) 

blood agent. A chemical compound, including the cyanide group, that affects the bodily 

function by preventing the normal utilization of oxygen by body tissues. (JP 1-02) 

casualty. Any person who is lost to the organization by having been declared dead, duty 

status – whereabouts unknown, missing, ill, or injured. (JP 1-02) 

chemical agent. Any toxic chemical intended for use in military operations. (JP 1-02) 

chemical ammunition. A type of ammunition, the filler of which is primarily a chemical 

agent. (JP 1-02) 

chemical defense. The methods, plans, and procedures involved in establishing and 

executing defensive measures against attack utilizing chemical agents. (JP 1-02) 

chemical dose. The amount of chemical agent, expressed in milligrams, that is taken or 

absorbed by the body. (JP 1-02) 

chemical environment. Conditions found in an area resulting from direct or persisting 

effects of chemical weapons. (JP 1-02) 

chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear hazards. Those toxic chemical, 

biological, radiological or nuclear (CBRN) hazards that are released in the presence of US 

forces or civilians, not necessarily in quantities that could cause mass casualties. CBRN 

hazards include those created from a release other than attack, toxic industrial chemicals 

(specifically toxic inhalation hazards), biological agents of operational significance and 

radioactive matter. Also included are any hazards resulting from the deliberate

employment of nuclear, biological, and chemical weapons during military operations. (JRO

draft Terms of Reference) 

chemical weapon. Together or separately, (a) a toxic chemical and its precursors, except 

when intended for a purpose not prohibited under the Chemical Weapons Convention; (b) a 

munition or device, specifically designed to cause death or other harm through toxic 

properties of those chemicals specified in (a), above, which would be released as a result of 

the employment of such munition or device; (c) any equipment specifically designed for use 

directly in connection with the employment of munitions or devices specified in (b), above. 

Also called CW. (JP 1-02) 

civil affairs. Designated Active and Reserve component forces and units organized, 

trained, and equipped specifically to conduct civil affairs activities and to support civilmilitary operations. Also called CA. (JP 1-02) 

collective nuclear, biological, and chemical protection. Protection provided to a

group of individuals in a nuclear, biological, and chemical environment which permits 

relaxation of individual nuclear, biological, and chemical protection. (JP 1-02) 

combatant command. A unified or specified command with a broad continuing mission 

under a single commander established and so designated by the President, through the 

Secretary of Defense and with the advice and assistance of the Chairman of the Joint 

Chiefs of Staff. Combatant commands typically have geographic or functional 

responsibilities. (JP 1-02) 

Glossary-12 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
contamination. (1) The deposit, absorption, or adsorption of radioactive material, or of 

biological or chemical agents on or by structures, areas, personnel, or objects. (2) Food 

and/or water made unfit for consumption by humans or animals because of the presence of 

environmental chemicals, radioactive elements, bacteria or organisms, the byproduct of the 

growth of bacteria or organisms, the decomposing material (to include food substance 

itself), or waste in the food or water. (JP 1-02) 

contamination control. Procedures to avoid, reduce, remove, or render harmless, 

(temporarily or permanently) nuclear, biological, and chemical contamination for the 

purpose of maintaining or enhancing the efficient conduct of military operations. (JP 1-02) 

decontamination. The process of making any person, object, or area safe by absorbing, 

destroying, neutralizing, making harmless, or removing chemical or biological agents, or by 

removing radioactive material clinging to or around it. (JP 1-02) 

desorption. The process of removing a sorbed substance by the reverse of adsorption or 

absorption. (McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms) 

detection. In nuclear, biological, and chemical (NBC) environments, the act of locating 

NBC hazards by use of NBC detectors or monitoring and/or survey teams. (JP 1-02) 

host nation support. Civil and/or military assistance rendered by a nation to foreign 

forces within its territory during peacetime, crises, or emergencies, or war based on 

agreements mutually concluded between nations. Also called HNS. (JP 1-02) 

hydrolysis. 1. Decompostion or alteration of a chemical substance by water. 2. In aqueous

solution of electrolytes, the reactions of cations with water to produce a weak base or of 

anions to produce a weak acid. (McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms) 

identification. 1. The process of determining the friendly or hostile character of an 

unknown detected contact. 2. In arms control, the process of determining which nation is 

responsible for the detected violations of any arms control measure. 3. In ground combat 

operations, discrimination between recognizable objects as being friendly or enemy, or the 

name that belongs to the object as a member of a class. Also called ID. (JP 1-02) 

individual protection. Actions taken by individuals to survive and continue the mission

under nuclear, biological, and chemical conditions. (JP 1-02) 

individual protective equipment. In nuclear, biological, and chemical warfare, the 

personal clothing and equipment required to protect an individual from biological and 

chemical hazards and some nuclear effects. (JP 1-02) 

immediate decontamination. Decontamination carried out by individuals immediately

upon becoming contaminated. It is performed in an effort to minimize casualties, save lives, 

and limit the spread of contamination. Also called emergency decontamination (JP 1-02). 

mission-oriented protective posture. A flexible system of protection against nuclear, 

biological, and chemical contamination. This posture requires personnel to wear only that 

protective clothing and equipment (mission-oriented protective posture gear) appropriate to 

the threat level, work rate imposed by the mission, temperature, and humidity. Also called 

MOPP. (JP 1-02) 

mission-oriented protective posture gear. Military term for individual protective

equipment including suit, boots, gloves, mask with hood, first aid treatments, and 

decontamination kits issued to soldiers. Also called MOPP gear. (JP 1-02) 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Glossary-13 
nerve agent. A potentially lethal and chemical agent which interferes with the 

transmission of nerve impulse. (JP 1-02) 

nonpersistent agent. A chemical agent that when released dissipates and/or loses its 

ability to cause casualties after a passage of 10 to 15 minutes. (JP 1-02) 

nuclear, biological, and chemical-capable nation. A nation that has the capability to 

produce and employ one or more types of nuclear, biological, and chemical weapons across 

the full range of military operations and at any level of war in order to achieve political and 

military objectives. (JP 1-02) 

nuclear, biological, and chemical defense. Defensive measures that enable friendly 

forces to survive, fight, and win against enemy use of nuclear, biological, or chemical (NBC) 

weapons and agents. US forces apply NBC defensive measures before and during 

integrated warfare. In integrated warfare, opposing forces employ nonconventional 

weapons along with conventional weapons (NBC weapons are nonconventional). (JP 1-02) 

nuclear, biological, and chemical environment. Environments in which there is 

deliberate or accidental employment, or threat of employment, of nuclear, biological, or 

chemical weapons; deliberate or accidental attacks or contamination with toxic industrial 

materials, including toxic industrial chemicals; or deliberate or accidental attacks or 

contamination with radiological (radioactive) materials. (JP 1-02) 

nuclear defense. The methods, plans, and procedures involved in establishing and 

exercising defensive measures against the effects of an attack by nuclear weapons or 

radiological warfare agents. It encompasses both the training for, and the implementation 

of, these methods, plans, and procedures. (JP 1-02) 

operational decontamination. Decontamination carried out by an individual and/or a

unit, restricted to specific parts of operationally essential equipment, materiel and/or 

working areas, in order to minimize contact and transfer hazards and to sustain operations. 

This may include decontamination of the individual beyond the scope of immediate 

decontamination, as well as decontamination of mission-essential spares and limited 

terrain decontamination. (JP 1-02) 

persistency. In biological or chemical warfare, the characteristic of an agent which 

pertains to the duration of its effectiveness under determined conditions after its dispersal. 

(JP 1-02) 

protection. Measures that are taken to keep nuclear, biological, and chemical hazards 

from having an adverse effect on personnel, equipment, or critical assets and facilities. 

Protection consists of five groups of activities: hardening of positions, protecting personnel, 

assuming mission-oriented protective posture, using physical defense measures, and 

reacting to attack. (JP 1-02) 

protective mask. A protective ensemble designed protect the wearer’s face and eyes and 

prevent the breathing of air contaminated with chemical and/or biological agents. (JP 1-02) 

residual contamination. Contamination which remains after steps have been taken to 

remove it. These steps may consist of nothing more than allowing the contamination to 

decay normally. (JP 1-02) 

survey. The directed effort to determine the location and the nature of a chemical, 

biological and radiological hazard in an area. (JP 1-02) 

Glossary-14 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
thorough decontamination. Decontamination carried out by a unit, with or without 

external support, to reduce contamination on personnel, equipment, materiel, and/or 

working areas equal to natural background or to the lowest possible levels, to permit the 

partial or total removal of individual protective equipment and to maintain operations with 

minimum degradation. This may include terrain decontamination beyond the scope of 

operational decontamination. (JP 1-02) 

toxic chemical. Any chemical which, through its chemical action on life processes, can 

cause death, temporary incapacitation, or permanent harm to humans or animals. This 

includes all such chemicals, regardless of their origin or of their method of production, and 

regardless of whether they are produced in facilities, in munitions or elsewhere. (JP 1-02) 

toxic industrial biological. Biological material found in medical research or 

pharmaceutical manufacturing that are toxic to humans and animals or damages plants. 

(FM 4-02.7) 

toxic industrial chemical. Chemical materials or compounds that are used for multiple 

purposes such as fuels or solvents, or in manufacturing that are toxic to humans and 

animals or damages plants. (FM 4-02.7) 

toxic industrial materials. Toxic industrial biological, toxic industrial chemical and toxic 

industrial radiological materials. (FM 4-02.7) 

toxic industrial radiological. Radiation materials used in research, power generation, 

and medical treatment that are harmful to humans and animals if released outside their 

controlled environments. (FM 4-02.7) 

weapons of mass destruction. Weapons that are capable of a high order of destruction 

and/or of being used in such a manner as to destroy large numbers of people. Weapons of 

mass destruction can be high explosives or nuclear, chemical, biological, and radiological 

weapons, but exclude the means of transporting or propelling the weapon where such 

means is a separable and divisible part of the weapon. Also called WMD. (JP 1-02) 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Glossary-15 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
INDEX 

A 

air cargo decontamination 8-1 

Air Force I-7, IV-4, X-7, G-7 

aircraft decontamination I-6, VIII-1, 

VIII-3, VIII-9, VIII-10, VIII-11, 

VIII-13, VIII-14, IX-13, XII-7 

aircraft munitions, VIII-1, VIII-21 

aircrew decontamination VIII-1, 

VIII-3 

airfield II-3, III-3, IV-1, V-1, V-3, 

VII-1, VIII-1, VIII-2, VIII-6, H-15 

animal E-11 

Army patient decontamination X-5, 

X-6 

Aviation IV-1, IV-28, IV-29, IV-30, IV31, V-1, V-2, VIII-5, IX-1, IX-11, 

IX-13, F-2 

B 

battledress overgarment See BDO 

BDO IV-14, IV-16, IV-17, IV-18, IV-36, 

IV-37, IV-38, V-9, V-14, VII-11, 

IX-10, IX-12, J-2, J-3, J-5, J-7 

biological decontamination B-5, C-8, 

C-13, F-4 

biological warfare See BW 

biological weapons 

building decontamination 

burning 

BW I-3, III-1, IV-1, V-1, VI-4, IX-1, 

IX-4, B-3, B-6, B-7, C-2, E-3 

C 

CARC I-4, I-6, V-21, V-23, VIII-20,

B-9, E-4 

cargo decontamination VIII-1, VIII-24, 

VIII-25, VIII-26 

cargo movement VIII-3, VIII-23, 

VIII-24, VIII-26, VIII-27 

CBIRF G-6,

CBRD IX-1, G-19, 

CCA VII-3 VIII-4, VIII-5, VIII-6, 

VIII-7, VIII-8, VIII-9, VIII-10, 

VIII-11, VIII-12, VIII-13, IX-3, IX-8, 

IX-9, IX-10, IX-12, IX-14, IX-16, G-7, 

G-9, G-10, K-1 

CCS VII-13, VII-14, VII-15, 

chemical agent resistant coating See 

CARC 

chemical decontamination V-30, V-13 

chemical protective overgarment See 

CPO 

chemical, biological, and radiological 

defense See CBRD 

chemical/biological incident response 

force See CBIRF 

civil reserve aircraft decontamination 

See CRAF 

civil support See CS 

clearance decontamination I-2, I-4, I-6, 

I-7, I-9, V-21, VI-1, VI-2, VI-3, VI-4, 

VI-5, VIII-9, IX-2, G-5 

CM II-3, II-6, XI-1, XI-2, G-6, G-11, 

G-12, G-13, 

CMWDS IX-1, IX-2, IX-3, IX-15, IX-16, 

cold weather C-1, C-2, C-5, F-1, F-3, 

F-6 

combat effectiveness I-7 

combat operations I-3, I-6, I-8, I-10, 

II-4, V-1, VI-3, VI-4, VIII-13, G-4, 

combat service support See CSS 

concept of operations See CONOPS 

CONOPS II-1, VII-11, G-8 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Index-1 
consequence management See CM 

consumption rates II-11, XII-1 

contact time III-1, III-2, V-21, V-24, 

V-26, V-27, V-28, V-29, VIII-15, 

VIII-19, XI-6, C-5, C-8, C-11, C-13, 

C-15, C-16, C-18, C-19, H-17 

containment VI-1, VI-3, VI-5, VII-8,

VIII-11, VIII-14, IX-8, IX-9, IX-13, 

G-11, K-2 

contaminated remains E-1, E-9, E-10, 

E-11, G-6 

contaminated waste collection VIII-3, 

K-1 

contaminated waste disposal V-7,

VII-4, VII-5, VII-11, VIII-28, K-1 

contaminated waste holding area K-1 

contamination control area See CCA 

contamination control station VII-13 

contamination level I-4, I-5, V-2, V-11, 

V-22, VIII-1, VIII-3, VIII-15, VIII-23, 

IX-2, XI-2, E-6 

contract I-9, VIII-1, VIII-21, IX-6, 

IX-18 

conversion A-1, A-2 

countermeasure washdown system

See CMWDS 

CPO IV-16, IV-27, IV-38, V-9, V-14, 

J-2, J-7, 

CRAF VIII-21, 

CS I-1, I-9, II-6, 

CSS V-1, V-20, XII-2, 

D 

DAD I-4, I-6, V-1, VIII-13, VIII-14,

VIII-15, VIII-16, VIII-17, G-5, 

damage control assistant See DCA 

damage control center See DCC 

DCA IX-1, IX-4, IX-5, IX-14, 

DCC IX-1, IX-5, IX-4, IX-14, XI-6, 

decontaminants I-4, II-7, III-2, V-30, 

VIII-4, VIII-5, VIII-6, VIII-7, 

VIII-22, XII-1, XII-2, C-1, C-2, C-4, 

C-6, C-7, C-8, C-10, C-11, C-12, C-13, 

C-14, C-15, C-16, C-17, C-19, C-20, 

E-1, E-2, E-3, F-2, F-3, F-4, F-5, G-9, 

H-4, H-9, I-1, I-2 

decontamination apparatus IV-4,

V-20, VIII-19, XII-3, C-5, C-11, F-3, 

G-9, H-9, I-2 

decontamination area IV-4, V-4, V-7, 

V-30, VII-7, VIII-9, VIII-10, VIII-11, 

VIII-20, IX-3, IX-10, X-5, X-6 

decontamination assets II-2, II-3, II-4, 

II-6, IV-4, V-2, VIII-3, X-8, G-1 

decontamination equipment II-5, II-7, 

II-9, II-10, IV-4, VII-2, X-5, X-6, X-7, 

X-8, XII-3, H-1, H-2, K-5, 

decontamination kits I-6, I-9, III-1,

VII-5, VII-12, VIII-3, VIII-21, 

VIII-22, G-9, H-1, H-5, 

decontamination procedures I-2, II-7,

IV-1, V-1, VI-3, VI-4, VII-3, VIII-2, 

VIII-3, VIII-13, IX-3, IX-4, IX-5, 

IX-6, IX-7, IX-8, IX-9, IX-11, IX-14, 

IX-16, IX-17, IX-18, X-3, X-4, X-5, 

X-6, X-7, X-8, XI-12, XI-4, XI-8, C-1, 

D-1, D-2, D-3, D-4, D-5, D-6, E-2, 

E-3, E-4, E-7, F-5, G-13

decontamination techniques III-1,

IV-2, V-3, VII-2, VIII-1, IX-1, XII-4,

XII-5, XII-6

decontamination training I-10, II-2

decontamination units II-12, V-1, 

V-19, V-20, V-24, V-26, VI-2, X-6, 

XII-8, E-4, G-1 

DED I-4, I-6, I-8, II-10, II-11, II-12, 

V-1, V-2, V-3, V-5, V-7, V-7, V-19, 

V-20, V-24, V-25, V-26, V-27, V-28, 

V-29, V-30, V-31, VIII-13, XII-2, 

XII-3, XII-4, XII-5, XII-6, G-2, G-3, 

G-5, G-6 

depleted uranium See DU 

Index-2 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
desert I-2, D-3, F-1, F-3, F-4 

detailed aviation decontamination See 

DAD 

detailed equipment decontamination 

See DED 

detailed troop decontamination See

DTD 

detection equipment I-8, III-2, V-10, 

V-29, V-30, B-11, E-6, G-8, H-1, H-2, 

H-3, H-4, K-3 

DF 200 C-7, C-8, H-10, H-12 

domestic XI-1, G-6, G-11, G-12, G-13, 

DTD I-4, I-8, II-10, II-11, II-12, V-1, 

V-5, V-7, V-8, V-9, V-19, V-22, V-28, 

V-30, V-31, XII-2, XII-3, XII-4, XII-5, 

XII-6, E-11, G-2, G-3, H-17 

DU I-8, E-1, E-5, E-6, E-7, G-6 

E 

EOD VII-12, IX-1, E-5, E-1O, G-7, K-9 

equipment decontamination I-5, III-1,

V-1, V-7, VIII-13, IX-2, IX-3, IX-17,

X-3, XII-2, XII-6, XII-8, G-6, H-8, 

H-10 

evacuation X-1, X-2, X-3, X-4, B-10, 

E-5, E-9, E-10, E-11, 

exercises I-8, I-10, II-4

exploding I-3, I-6 

explosive ordnance disposal See EOD 

F 

FARP VIII-1, VIII-4, 

FHP I-6, I-7, I-8, VI-1, VI-5, 

field expedient IV-32, IV-36, IV-39,

VIII-10, IX-14, X-3, XI-3, C-2, 

fixed site decontamination VII-1, 

VII-2, G-6, H-9, H-10, 

flash point C-18, F-2 

force health protection See FHP 

force protection See FP 

forward arming and refueling point 

See FARP 

FP II-4, VI-1, VI-3, VII-5, G-6, G-7, 

G-8, G-13, 

freezing point C-13, C-14, F-2 

FSDS H-2, H-9, H-10, H-12, H-13,

H-14, H-17 

G 

GCE VII-4, VII-5, 

ground crew ensemble See GCE 

H 

half-life B-4, E-8 

health service support See HSS 

helicopter VII-2, VIII-3, VIII-9, 

VIII-10, IX-10, IX-12, IX-13, X-2, 

B-8, E-2, G-7, H-7 

high test hypochlorite See HTH 

HLD I-8, I-9, II-6, VI-1, X-8, XII-7,

HLS I-8, I-9, I-10, II-6, VI-1, XI-1, 

XI-2, XII-7 

homeland defense See HLD 

homeland security See HLS 

hot weather F-1, F-3 

HSS II-3, II-4, II-9, V-31, VI-4, IX-10, 

X-1, X-2, X-3, X-6, X-7, X-8, E-4 

HTH III-3, V-9, V-14, V-15, V-16, 

V-19, V-22, VIII-19, IX-9, IX-17, X-6, 

C-5, C-8, C-9, C-10, C-11, D-5, D-6, 

F-2, J-7, 

I 

IEDK III-1, IV-7, IV-8, IV-11, IV-13, 

IV-17, IV-19, IV-20, IV-23, IV-25, 

IV-27, IV-28, IV-29, IV-31, IV-32, 

IV-34, IV-36, IV-36, IV-38, IV-39, 

IV-41, V-8, V-III, VIII-5, VIII-20, 

VIII-24, VIII-25, XII-1, XII-3, XII-4, 

D-4, D-5, E-2, E-11, H-1, H-5, H-6 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Index-3 
immediate decontamination I-2, I-5, 

I-7, I-9, II-3, III-1, V-3, VIII-2, 

VIII-3, VIII-21, VIII-22, VIII-26, 

VIII-27, X-1, X-2, X-3, XI-3, B-3, C-5, 

G-9, H-1, H-6 

individual equipment decontamination

kit See IEDK 

individual protective equipment See

IPE 

intelligence preparation of the 

battlespace See IPB 

IPB VI-1, VI-5, 

IPE I-6, II-6, IV-1, VIII-1, VIII-2, 

VIII-9, VIII-12, VIII-13, VIII-26, 

VIII-27, IX-3, IX-6, IX-9, IX-11, 

IX-12, IX-14, XI-5, B-3, E-5, E-10, 

E-11, G-5, G-9, H-12, K-1, K-3, 

L 

Layout V-1, V-8, V-15, V-22, V-24, 

V-25, V-26, V-27, V-28, VII-7, VII-8, 

VII-9, VII-10, VIII-10, VIII-17, X-8

LDS V-3, V-20, V-22, V-26, V-27, V-28, 

VIII-19, XII-2, XII-3, H-2, H-7, H-8, 

I-4 

lightweight decontamination system 

See LDS 

line source B-6, 

LLR G-12, 

Logistics II-2, II-3, II-4, II-5, II-6, II-7, 

II-11, IV-1, V-20, VI-3, VI-4, VII-12, 

VIII-14, XI-4, XII-1, XII-3 

low level radiation See LLR 

M 

M100 SDS I-5, III-2, XII-1, C-5, H-6, 

H-7 

M11 C-5, H-6 

M12 IV-5, V-21, VIII-10, E-2 

M13 C-5, H-6 

M17 LDS V-3, V-22, V-26, V-27, V-28, 

VIII-19, XII-2, XII-3, H-2, H-7, H-8, 

I-4 

M291 SDK III-1, X-3, XII-4, E-2, E-11, 

H-1, H-4 

M291 skin decontamination kit See 

M291 SDK 

M295 IEDK III-1, XII-4, E-2, E-11, H1, H-5, H-6

M295 individual equipment 

decontamination kit See M295 IEDK 

maintenance considerations XII-7 

Marine Corps patient

decontamination X-6 

maritime decontamination IX-1 

mass casualty II-4, IX-10, XII-7 

mass decontamination II-6, XI-2, XI-3, 

MCE VII-12 

Measurements A-1, 

medical treatment facility See MTF 

METT-TC I-4, I-7, I-8, II-2, II-5, IV-1, IV-2, 

IV-5, IV-7, V-1, V-25, E-3, E-7, F-1, G-1, G-2 

mission critical equipment See MCE 

mission, enemy, terrain and 

weather, troops available and 

civilian Considerations See METTTC 

mission-essential operating areas 

VII-2 

mission-oriented protective posture See MOPP 

MOPP gear exchange I-4, I-6, II-10, 

II-12, III-1, IV-1, IV-2, IV-3, IV-4, 

IV-5, IV-6, IV-7, IV-8, IV-9, IV-10, 

IV-11, IV-12, IV-13, IV-14, IV-16 to 

IV-41, V-12, V-13, V-15, V-30, XII-1, 

XII-6, G-4, G-5, J-3 

Mountain F-1, F-5, 

MPDS IV-5, V-20, V-22, V-26, V-27, 

V-28, XII-2, XII-3, H-2, H-9, 

Index-4 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
MTF I-5, II-9, V-31, VII-2, VII-6, 

VII-7, VII-13, VII-15, X-2, X-3, X-4, 

X-5, X-6, X-7, X-8, G-9, G-10 

multinational forces II-6, VI-1, VI-4, 

multipurpose decontamination system

See MPDS 

munitions decontamination VIII-1, 

VIII-21 

munitions disposal E-1, E-5 

N 

natural decontaminant C-1, C-10, 

C-20 

Navy patient decontamination X-7 

neutralization I-2, I-3, V-21, VIII-19, 

IX-3, IX-7, XI-3, XI-9, G-13, G-14, 

H-1, H-17, I-5 

neutralizing C-6, C-9, H-5, H-6, I-2, 

night V-30, B-7, C-1, E-1, E-2, F-4, F-6 

nonstandard III-2, VIII-6, VIII-13, 

B-10, C-13, C-14, C-15, C-16, C-17, 

C-18, C-19, E-3, F-2, F-3, H-11 

nuclear weapon decontamination 

O 

operational decontamination I-2, I-4, 

I-5, I-7, II-8, II-10, IV-1 to IV-42, 

V-3, V-9, VIII-4, VIII-6, VIII-9, 

VIII-10, VIII-11, VIII-13, VIII-14, 

VIII-21, IX-11, IX-13, IX-17, X-3, 

X-4, XII-1, XII-2, XII-3, B-3, G-2, 

G-3, G-4, G-5, H-7, 

operator wipedown I-4, I-5, III-2, 

XII-1, H-6 

P 

patient decontamination I-9, II-4, II-9, 

V-4, V-31, VII-6, VII-7, VII-13, 

IX-10, X-2, X-3, X-4, X-5, X-6, X-7, 

X-8, XII-3, XII-7, G-9, G-10, G-12

patient evacuation X-1, 

PDDE II-9, V-24, V-25, V-26, VIII-16, 

VIII-19, XII-1, XII-3, C-11, C-13, 

C-15, C-19, D-1, D-2, D-3, D-4, D-5, 

personal wipedown I-4, I-5, III-1,

VIII-3, XII-1 

personnel processing VII-1, VII-3, 

VII-6, VII-13, VII-14 

petroleum, oils, and lubricants See 

POL 

physical removal I-1, IX-3, IX-7, C-12,

C-13, C-14, C-19, C-20, H-1, H-5 

planning considerations II-3, II-6, V-1, 

V-25, VIII-1, XI-1, XI-3

planning decontamination II-1, II-4

point source B-6 

POL VII-1, VIII-4, VIII-5, VIII-14, F-4 

post decontamination II-10, II-11, V-7, 

J-8, J-11 

power driven decontamination 

apparatus See PDDA 

power driven decontamination 

equipment See PDDE 

power driven decontamination system 

See PDDS 

pre-decontamination II-10, IV-4, V-4, 

V-5, V-6, V-7, VI-5, VIII-2, XII-3 

R 

radioisotope E-7, E-8, 

radiological decontamination IX-1,

G-10 

radiological dispersal device See RDD 

radiological weapons B-1 

rain III-2, VII-6, VII-13, C-2, F-4, I-2, 

I-5 

RDD I-3, B-1, 

Reach back B-10, B-11, G-6 

record keeping VI-5 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Index-5 
recovery I-8, I-9, II-1, II-3, II-8, II-11, 

IV-1, V-1, V-4, VI-1, VI-3, VIII-6, 

IX-1, IX-3, IX-4, IX-5, IX-6, IX-11, 

IX-13, IX-14, IX-15, IX-16, XII-2, 

B-1, B-7, E-4, E-9, E-10, G-8, G-14 

recycle criteria V-23, VIII-20 

replenishment XII-1 

residual hazards VI-1, VI-3, VI-5 

restoration I-8, I-9, II-11, VI-3, IX-3, 

K-1 

retrograde VI-1, VI-4, VI-5, VIII-1, 

IX-10, G-5, 

RSDL C-9, H-5, 

S 

SA II-3, II-7, II-9, 

sample VII-2, VIII-17, VIII-24, E-1, 

E-5, G-6, G-10, H-3, I-5, J-1, 

SCBA XI-4, XI-8 

SDS I-5, III-2, XII-2, C-5, H-1, H-6,

H-7, H-17, 

self-contained breathing apparatus 

See SCBA 

sensitive equipment IX-2, E-1, G-6 

service decontamination XI-1, G-1 

shelf life C-10, 

shipboard I-9, IV-1, V-1, IX-1 to IX-18,

X-6, X-7, XII-7 

site clearance IV-2, IV-3, IV-7, V-5 

situational awareness See SA 

skin decontamination I-4, I-5, III-1, 

VIII-3, X-5, XII-1, XII-6, C-9, H-1, 

H-5, 

sorbent decontamination system See

SDS 

special decontamination VII-3, IX-10, 

E-1, E-4, G-6 

staging area II-10, V-5, V-6, V-7, 

VII-3, IX-10, X-3, H-10, H-11, H-15

standard decontaminant III-2, C-2, 

C-8, C-11, C-12, I-1 

STB dry III-2, IV-7, IV-11, IV-19, IV23, IV-28, V-11, V-21, V-29, D-1, D-2, 

E-3, I-2, I-3, J-3, J-4 

STB slurry V-8, V-9, V-10, V-11, C-9, 

D-1, D-2, D-3, D-4, D-5, D-6, F-3, 

F-5, H-9, I-1, I-2, J-2, J-3, J-4 

storage VII-5, VII-12, VIII-11, VIII-21, 

VIII-22, VIII-23, IX-14, IX-15, X-5, 

X-6, B-10, C-4, C-8, C-10, C-13, E-4, 

E-5, G-6, G-10, H-2, H-7, H-11, K-2, 

K-6, K-7, 

surface types C-1 

T 

technical reachback B-10, B-11 

terrain decontamination I-5, VII-3,

G-3, G-6, H-2, H-9, H-10, H-13, I-1 

TO I-6 

TFA VII-3, VII-4, VII-5, VII-6, VII-7, 

VII-11, VII-12, VII-13 

thorough decontamination I-2, I-4, I-6, 

I-8, II-2, II-8, II-10, II-12, IV-1, V-1 

to V-32, VI-4, VI-5, VIII-1, VIII-2, 

VIII-3, VIII-6, VIII-13, VII-14, 

VIII-15, VIII-20, IX-2, IX-11, IX-14, 

IX-15, IX-16, IX-17, X-3, X-4, X-6, 

X-7, X-8, XII-3, C-8, G-2, G-3, G-5, 

H-2, H-8, H-11 

thorough decontamination station

charts J-1 to J-12 

TIM I-1 to I-4, II-1, II-2, II-4, II-6, 

VI-2, VI-4, VI-5, X-3, XI-5, B-1, B-9, 

B-10, G-6 

toxic free area See TFA 

toxic industrial material See TIM 

training I-8, I-10, II-1 to II-4, II-6, 

VI-4, VIII-21, IX-11, XI-2, XI-6, 

E-10, G-6, G-7, H-1, H-4, K-9 

two lane washdown IV-4 

Index-6 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 4 April 2006 
U 

UCC G-8, 

unit control centers See UCC 

unit waste K-1, K-5, K-9 

unusual conditions V-30 

urban area F-1, F-5, 

V 

VA II-1, II-7, VII-3, 

vapor hazard area See VHA 

vapor pressure B-8, B-9, C-1 

vehicle washdown I-4, I-6, II-10, II-12, 

IV-1, IV-3, IV-4, IV-5, XII-1, XII-6, 

C-7, F-3 

VHA VII-5, VII-11, VII-12 

vulnerable equipment E-1 

vulnerability assessment See VA 

W 

waste accumulation points K-1, K-2 

water consumption XII-2, XII-3, 

weathering I-2 to I-4, I-6, I-8, IV1, V-7, 

V-22, V-23, VI-3 to VI-5, VII-2, 

VII-11, VIII-2, VIII-6, VIII-9, 

VIII-15, VIII-25, IX-2, IX-3, IX-4, 

IX-6, IX-8, IX-11, IX-18, B-9, C-1, 

C-2, E-3, E-6, F-3, F-4, F-5, H-11, 

I-1, I-2, I-4 

work/rest II-5, V-7, V-25, V-27, V-29, 

X-6, F-3, F-4 

Y 

4 April 2006 FM 3-11.5/MCWP 3-37.3/NTTP 3-11.26/AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 Index-7 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 
FM 3-11.5 

MCWP 3-37.3 

NTTP 3-11.26 

AFTTP(I) 3-2.60 

4 April 2006 

By Order of the Secretary of the Army: 

PETER J. SCHOOMAKER 

General, United States Army 

Chief of Staff 

Official: 

JOYCE E. MORROW 

Administrative Assistant to the 

Secretary of the Army 

0607401 

DISTRIBUTION: 

Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in 

accordance with the initial distribution number 110737, requirements for 

FM 3-11.5. 

By Order of the Secretary of the Air Force: 

BENTLEY B. RAYBURN 

Major General, USAF 

Commander 

Headquarters Air Force Doctrine Center 

Air Force Distribution: F 

Marine Corps PCN: 14300000600 
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 

PIN: 083131-000